15. Graphic User Interface

  Module GTK

    Description

      GTK wrapper module.

      This is a convenience module that is identical to either either the GTK2 or the GTK1 module depending on which (if any) of them is available.

    See also

      GTK1, GTK2

    Inherit GTK1

      inherit GTK1 : GTK1

    Inherit GTK2

      inherit GTK2 : GTK2

  Module GTK1

    Constant ACCEL_LOCKED

      `constant GTK1.ACCEL_LOCKED`

    Constant ACCEL_SIGNAL_VISIBLE

      `constant GTK1.ACCEL_SIGNAL_VISIBLE`

    Constant ACCEL_VISIBLE

      `constant GTK1.ACCEL_VISIBLE`

    Constant ANCHOR_CENTER

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_CENTER`

    Constant ANCHOR_E

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_E`

    Constant ANCHOR_EAST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_N

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_N`

    Constant ANCHOR_NE

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_NE`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_NORTH`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST`

    Constant ANCHOR_NW

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_NW`

    Constant ANCHOR_S

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_S`

    Constant ANCHOR_SE

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_SE`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_SOUTH`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST`

    Constant ANCHOR_SW

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_SW`

    Constant ANCHOR_W

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_W`

    Constant ANCHOR_WEST

      `constant GTK1.ANCHOR_WEST`

    Constant APP_PAINTABLE

      `constant GTK1.APP_PAINTABLE`

    Constant ARROW_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.ARROW_DOWN`

    Constant ARROW_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.ARROW_LEFT`

    Constant ARROW_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.ARROW_RIGHT`

    Constant ARROW_UP

      `constant GTK1.ARROW_UP`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE

      `constant GTK1.BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_EDGE

      `constant GTK1.BUTTONBOX_EDGE`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_END

      `constant GTK1.BUTTONBOX_END`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_SPREAD

      `constant GTK1.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_START

      `constant GTK1.BUTTONBOX_START`

    Constant BUTTON_DRAGS

      `constant GTK1.BUTTON_DRAGS`

    Constant BUTTON_EXPANDS

      `constant GTK1.BUTTON_EXPANDS`

    Constant BUTTON_IGNORED

      `constant GTK1.BUTTON_IGNORED`

    Constant BUTTON_SELECTS

      `constant GTK1.BUTTON_SELECTS`

    Constant CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE

      `constant GTK1.CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES

      `constant GTK1.CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING

      `constant GTK1.CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS

      `constant GTK1.CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS`

    Constant CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY

      `constant GTK1.CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY`

    Constant CAN_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK1.CAN_DEFAULT`

    Constant CAN_FOCUS

      `constant GTK1.CAN_FOCUS`

    Constant CELL_EMPTY

      `constant GTK1.CELL_EMPTY`

    Constant CELL_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK1.CELL_PIXMAP`

    Constant CELL_PIXTEXT

      `constant GTK1.CELL_PIXTEXT`

    Constant CELL_TEXT

      `constant GTK1.CELL_TEXT`

    Constant CELL_WIDGET

      `constant GTK1.CELL_WIDGET`

    Constant CENTIMETERS

      `constant GTK1.CENTIMETERS`

    Constant CLIST_ADD_MODE

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_ADD_MODE`

    Constant CLIST_AUTO_RESIZE_BLOCKED

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_AUTO_RESIZE_BLOCKED`

    Constant CLIST_AUTO_SORT

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_AUTO_SORT`

    Constant CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_LINE

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_LINE`

    Constant CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_RECT

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_RECT`

    Constant CLIST_IN_DRAG

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_IN_DRAG`

    Constant CLIST_REORDERABLE

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_REORDERABLE`

    Constant CLIST_ROW_HEIGHT_SET

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_ROW_HEIGHT_SET`

    Constant CLIST_SHOW_TITLES

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_SHOW_TITLES`

    Constant CLIST_USE_DRAG_ICONS

      `constant GTK1.CLIST_USE_DRAG_ICONS`

    Constant CLOCK_DECREASING

      `constant GTK1.CLOCK_DECREASING`

    Constant CLOCK_INCREASING

      `constant GTK1.CLOCK_INCREASING`

    Constant CLOCK_REALTIME

      `constant GTK1.CLOCK_REALTIME`

    Constant COMPOSITE_CHILD

      `constant GTK1.COMPOSITE_CHILD`

    Constant CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT`

    Constant CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT`

    Constant CORNER_TOP_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.CORNER_TOP_LEFT`

    Constant CORNER_TOP_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.CORNER_TOP_RIGHT`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANDER_CIRCULAR

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANDER_CIRCULAR`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANDER_NONE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANDER_NONE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANDER_SQUARE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANDER_SQUARE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANDER_TRIANGLE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANDER_TRIANGLE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE_RECURSIVE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE_RECURSIVE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND_RECURSIVE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND_RECURSIVE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE`

    Constant CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE_RECURSIVE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE_RECURSIVE`

    Constant CTREE_LINES_DOTTED

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_LINES_DOTTED`

    Constant CTREE_LINES_NONE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_LINES_NONE`

    Constant CTREE_LINES_SOLID

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_LINES_SOLID`

    Constant CTREE_LINES_TABBED

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_LINES_TABBED`

    Constant CTREE_POS_AFTER

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_POS_AFTER`

    Constant CTREE_POS_AS_CHILD

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_POS_AS_CHILD`

    Constant CTREE_POS_BEFORE

      `constant GTK1.CTREE_POS_BEFORE`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_FREE

      `constant GTK1.CURVE_TYPE_FREE`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR

      `constant GTK1.CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE

      `constant GTK1.CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE`

    Constant DATABOX_BARS

      `constant GTK1.DATABOX_BARS`

    Constant DATABOX_LINES

      `constant GTK1.DATABOX_LINES`

    Constant DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED

      `constant GTK1.DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED`

    Constant DATABOX_POINTS

      `constant GTK1.DATABOX_POINTS`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_ALL

      `constant GTK1.DEST_DEFAULT_ALL`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_DROP

      `constant GTK1.DEST_DEFAULT_DROP`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT

      `constant GTK1.DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION

      `constant GTK1.DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION`

    Constant DIRECTION_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.DIRECTION_LEFT`

    Constant DIRECTION_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.DIRECTION_RIGHT`

    Constant DIR_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.DIR_DOWN`

    Constant DIR_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.DIR_LEFT`

    Constant DIR_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.DIR_RIGHT`

    Constant DIR_TAB_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK1.DIR_TAB_BACKWARD`

    Constant DIR_TAB_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.DIR_TAB_FORWARD`

    Constant DIR_UP

      `constant GTK1.DIR_UP`

    Constant EXPAND

      `constant GTK1.EXPAND`

    Constant FALSE

      `constant GTK1.FALSE`

    Constant FILL

      `constant GTK1.FILL`

    Constant FILL_X

      `constant GTK1.FILL_X`

    Constant FILL_Y

      `constant GTK1.FILL_Y`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_ASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_ASK`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_COPY

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_COPY`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_LINK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_LINK`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_MOVE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_MOVE`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE`

    Constant GDK_ALL_EVENTS_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ALL_EVENTS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_AND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_AND`

    Constant GDK_AND_INVERT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_AND_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_AND_REVERSE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_AND_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_BASED_ARROW_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BASED_ARROW_DOWN`

    Constant GDK_BASED_ARROW_UP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BASED_ARROW_UP`

    Constant GDK_BOAT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOAT`

    Constant GDK_BOGOSITY

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOGOSITY`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_TEE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOTTOM_TEE`

    Constant GDK_BOX_SPIRAL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BOX_SPIRAL`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON1_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON1_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON2_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON2_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON3_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON3_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_CAP_BUTT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CAP_BUTT`

    Constant GDK_CAP_NOT_LAST

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CAP_NOT_LAST`

    Constant GDK_CAP_PROJECTING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CAP_PROJECTING`

    Constant GDK_CAP_ROUND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CAP_ROUND`

    Constant GDK_CENTER_PTR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CENTER_PTR`

    Constant GDK_CIRCLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CIRCLE`

    Constant GDK_CLEAR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CLEAR`

    Constant GDK_CLOCK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CLOCK`

    Constant GDK_COFFEE_MUG

      `constant GTK1.GDK_COFFEE_MUG`

    Constant GDK_CONTROL_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CONTROL_MASK`

    Constant GDK_COPY

      `constant GTK1.GDK_COPY`

    Constant GDK_COPY_INVERT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_COPY_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_CROSS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_CROSSHAIR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CROSSHAIR`

    Constant GDK_CROSS_REVERSE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_CROSS_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_ALL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_ALL`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_BORDER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_BORDER`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MAXIMIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_MAXIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MENU

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_MENU`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MINIMIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_MINIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_RESIZEH

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_RESIZEH`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_TITLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DECOR_TITLE`

    Constant GDK_DIAMOND_CROSS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DIAMOND_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_DOT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DOT`

    Constant GDK_DOTBOX

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DOTBOX`

    Constant GDK_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_DRAFT_LARGE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAFT_LARGE`

    Constant GDK_DRAFT_SMALL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAFT_SMALL`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_MOTIF

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_MOTIF`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_ROOTWIN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_ROOTWIN`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_XDND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_XDND`

    Constant GDK_DRAPED_BOX

      `constant GTK1.GDK_DRAPED_BOX`

    Constant GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_EQUIV

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EQUIV`

    Constant GDK_EVEN_ODD_RULE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EVEN_ODD_RULE`

    Constant GDK_EXCHANGE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EXCHANGE`

    Constant GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE`

    Constant GDK_FLEUR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FLEUR`

    Constant GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_ALL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_ALL`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_CLOSE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_CLOSE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MAXIMIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_MAXIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MINIMIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_MINIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MOVE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_MOVE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_RESIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_FUNC_RESIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_ACCUM_ALPHA_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_ACCUM_ALPHA_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_ACCUM_BLUE_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_ACCUM_BLUE_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_ACCUM_GREEN_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_ACCUM_GREEN_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_ACCUM_RED_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_ACCUM_RED_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_ALPHA_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_ALPHA_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_AUX_BUFFERS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_AUX_BUFFERS`

    Constant GDK_GL_BLUE_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_BLUE_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_BUFFER_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_BUFFER_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_DEPTH_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_DEPTH_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_DOUBLEBUFFER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_DOUBLEBUFFER`

    Constant GDK_GL_GREEN_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_GREEN_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_LEVEL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_LEVEL`

    Constant GDK_GL_NONE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_NONE`

    Constant GDK_GL_RED_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_RED_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_RGBA

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_RGBA`

    Constant GDK_GL_STENCIL_SIZE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_STENCIL_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_GL_STEREO

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_STEREO`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_ALPHA_VALUE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_ALPHA_VALUE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_BLUE_VALUE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_BLUE_VALUE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_GREEN_VALUE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_GREEN_VALUE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_INDEX_VALUE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_INDEX_VALUE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_RED_VALUE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_RED_VALUE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_TYPE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_TRANSPARENT_TYPE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GL_USE_GL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_USE_GL`

    Constant GDK_GL_X_VISUAL_TYPE_EXT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GL_X_VISUAL_TYPE_EXT`

    Constant GDK_GOBBLER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GOBBLER`

    Constant GDK_GUMBY

      `constant GTK1.GDK_GUMBY`

    Constant GDK_HAND1

      `constant GTK1.GDK_HAND1`

    Constant GDK_HAND2

      `constant GTK1.GDK_HAND2`

    Constant GDK_HEART

      `constant GTK1.GDK_HEART`

    Constant GDK_ICON

      `constant GTK1.GDK_ICON`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_AREA

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_AREA`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_CALLBACKS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_CALLBACKS`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_NONE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_NONE`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_NOTHING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_NOTHING`

    Constant GDK_IM_PREEDIT_POSITION

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_PREEDIT_POSITION`

    Constant GDK_IM_STATUS_AREA

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_STATUS_AREA`

    Constant GDK_IM_STATUS_CALLBACKS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_STATUS_CALLBACKS`

    Constant GDK_IM_STATUS_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_STATUS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_IM_STATUS_NONE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_STATUS_NONE`

    Constant GDK_IM_STATUS_NOTHING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IM_STATUS_NOTHING`

    Constant GDK_INVERT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_IRON_CROSS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_IRON_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_BEVEL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_JOIN_BEVEL`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_MITER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_JOIN_MITER`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_ROUND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_JOIN_ROUND`

    Constant GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LEFTBUTTON

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LEFTBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_PTR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LEFT_PTR`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_SIDE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LEFT_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_TEE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LEFT_TEE`

    Constant GDK_LINE_DOUBLE_DASH

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LINE_DOUBLE_DASH`

    Constant GDK_LINE_ON_OFF_DASH

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LINE_ON_OFF_DASH`

    Constant GDK_LINE_SOLID

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LINE_SOLID`

    Constant GDK_LL_ANGLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LL_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_LOCK_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LOCK_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LR_ANGLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_LR_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_MAN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MAN`

    Constant GDK_MIDDLEBUTTON

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MIDDLEBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_MOD1_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOD1_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD2_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOD2_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD3_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOD3_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD4_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOD4_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD5_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOD5_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOUSE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_MOUSE`

    Constant GDK_NAND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_NAND`

    Constant GDK_NOOP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_NOOP`

    Constant GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED`

    Constant GDK_OR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OR`

    Constant GDK_OR_INVERT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OR_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_OR_REVERSE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OR_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_IN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_IN`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_OUT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_OUT`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_PART

      `constant GTK1.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_PART`

    Constant GDK_PENCIL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PENCIL`

    Constant GDK_PIRATE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PIRATE`

    Constant GDK_PLUS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PLUS`

    Constant GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_APPEND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROP_MODE_APPEND`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_PREPEND

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROP_MODE_PREPEND`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_REPLACE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROP_MODE_REPLACE`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_QUESTION_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_QUESTION_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_RIGHTBUTTON

      `constant GTK1.GDK_RIGHTBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_PTR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_RIGHT_PTR`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_SIDE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_RIGHT_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_TEE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_RIGHT_TEE`

    Constant GDK_RTL_LOGO

      `constant GTK1.GDK_RTL_LOGO`

    Constant GDK_SAILBOAT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SAILBOAT`

    Constant GDK_SB_DOWN_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_DOWN_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_LEFT_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_LEFT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_RIGHT_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_RIGHT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_UP_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_UP_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_ATOM

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_ATOM`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_BITMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_BITMAP`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_COLORMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_COLORMAP`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_DRAWABLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_DRAWABLE`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_INTEGER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_INTEGER`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_PIXMAP`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_WINDOW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_WINDOW`

    Constant GDK_SET

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SET`

    Constant GDK_SHIFT_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SHIFT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_SHUTTLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SHUTTLE`

    Constant GDK_SIZING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SIZING`

    Constant GDK_SOLID

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SOLID`

    Constant GDK_SPIDER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SPIDER`

    Constant GDK_SPRAYCAN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_SPRAYCAN`

    Constant GDK_STAR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_STAR`

    Constant GDK_STIPPLED

      `constant GTK1.GDK_STIPPLED`

    Constant GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_TARGET

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET`

    Constant GDK_TARGET_BITMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET_BITMAP`

    Constant GDK_TARGET_COLORMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET_COLORMAP`

    Constant GDK_TARGET_DRAWABLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET_DRAWABLE`

    Constant GDK_TARGET_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET_PIXMAP`

    Constant GDK_TARGET_STRING

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TARGET_STRING`

    Constant GDK_TCROSS

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TCROSS`

    Constant GDK_TILED

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TILED`

    Constant GDK_TOP_LEFT_ARROW

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TOP_LEFT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_TOP_SIDE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TOP_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_TOP_TEE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TOP_TEE`

    Constant GDK_TREK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_TREK`

    Constant GDK_UL_ANGLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_UL_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_UMBRELLA

      `constant GTK1.GDK_UMBRELLA`

    Constant GDK_UR_ANGLE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_UR_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK1.GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_WATCH

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WATCH`

    Constant GDK_WINDING_RULE

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDING_RULE`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_CHILD

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_CHILD`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_DIALOG

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_DIALOG`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_FOREIGN

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_FOREIGN`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_ROOT

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_ROOT`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TEMP

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_TEMP`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK1.GDK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL`

    Constant GDK_XOR

      `constant GTK1.GDK_XOR`

    Constant GDK_XTERM

      `constant GTK1.GDK_XTERM`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_TOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_DOCK_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_FONT_INFO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_FONT_INFO`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_PIXMAP`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_UNKNOWN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_UNKNOWN`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_USER_WIDGET

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_USER_WIDGET`

    Constant GNOME_ICON_LIST_ICONS

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_ICON_LIST_ICONS`

    Constant GNOME_ICON_LIST_IS_EDITABLE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_ICON_LIST_IS_EDITABLE`

    Constant GNOME_ICON_LIST_STATIC_TEXT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_ICON_LIST_STATIC_TEXT`

    Constant GNOME_ICON_LIST_TEXT_BELOW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_ICON_LIST_TEXT_BELOW`

    Constant GNOME_ICON_LIST_TEXT_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_ICON_LIST_TEXT_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_ERROR

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_ERROR`

    Constant GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_GENERIC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_GENERIC`

    Constant GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_INFO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_INFO`

    Constant GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_QUESTION

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_QUESTION`

    Constant GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_WARNING

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_MESSAGE_BOX_WARNING`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_PREFERENCES_ALWAYS`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_NEVER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_PREFERENCES_NEVER`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_USER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_PREFERENCES_USER`

    Constant GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_UP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_Panel_ORIENT_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_APPLY

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_APPLY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CANCEL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CANCEL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CLOSE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_FONT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_HELP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_HELP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NEXT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NEXT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_OK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_OK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_PREV

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_PREV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_UP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_YES

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_YES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ABOUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ABOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_CENTER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_CENTER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_JUSTIFY

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_JUSTIFY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ATTACH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ATTACH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BACK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BACK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BLANK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BLANK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_BLUE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_BLUE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_GREEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_GREEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_OPEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_RED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_RED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_YELLOW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_YELLOW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CDROM

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CDROM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CLOSE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CONVERT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CONVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_COPY

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_COPY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXEC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXEC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXIT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FIRST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FIRST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FONT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FORWARD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_HOME

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_HOME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_INDEX

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_INDEX`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_JUMP_TO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_JUMP_TO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LAST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LAST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LINE_IN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LINE_IN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_FWD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_FWD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_NEW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RCV

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RCV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RPL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_SND

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_SND`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIDI

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIDI`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_NEW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_OPEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PASTE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PASTE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PREF

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PREF`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PRINT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PRINT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PROP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PROP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_QUIT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_QUIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REDO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REFRESH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REFRESH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REVERT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE_AS

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE_AS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SCORES

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SCORES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SEARCH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SEARCH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SPELLCHECK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SPELLCHECK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SRCHRPL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SRCHRPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_STOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_BOLD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_BOLD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_ITALIC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_ITALIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_STRIKEOUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_STRIKEOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_UNDERLINE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER_STOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH_FULL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH_FULL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDELETE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDELETE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_VOLUME

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_VOLUME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ABOUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ABOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ADD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ADD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_CENTER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_CENTER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_JUSTIFY

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_JUSTIFY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ATTACH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ATTACH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BACK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BACK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_BLUE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_BLUE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_GREEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_GREEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_OPEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_RED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_RED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_YELLOW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_YELLOW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CDROM

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CDROM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLEAR

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLEAR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLOSE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COLORSELECTOR

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COLORSELECTOR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CONVERT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CONVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COPY

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COPY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DISABLED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DISABLED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DOWN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXEC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXEC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXIT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FIRST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FIRST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FOCUSED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FOCUSED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FONT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FORWARD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HELP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HELP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HOME

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HOME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_INDEX

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_INDEX`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_JUMP_TO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_JUMP_TO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LAST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LAST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LINE_IN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LINE_IN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_FWD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_FWD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_NEW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RCV

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RCV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RPL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_SND

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_SND`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIDI

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIDI`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MULTIPLE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MULTIPLE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NEW

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NOT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NOT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_OPEN

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PASTE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PASTE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PREFERENCES

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PREFERENCES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PRINT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PRINT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PROPERTIES

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PROPERTIES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_QUIT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_QUIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REDO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REFRESH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REFRESH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REGULAR

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REGULAR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REMOVE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REMOVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REVERT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE_AS

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE_AS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SCORES

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SCORES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SEARCH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SEARCH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SPELLCHECK

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SPELLCHECK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SRCHRPL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SRCHRPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_STOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_BORDERS

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_BORDERS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_FILL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_FILL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BOLD

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BOLD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BULLETED_LIST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BULLETED_LIST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_INDENT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_INDENT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_ITALIC

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_ITALIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_NUMBERED_LIST

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_NUMBERED_LIST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_STRIKEOUT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_STRIKEOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNDERLINE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNINDENT

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNINDENT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER_STOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TOP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH_FULL

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH_FULL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_DATA

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_DATA`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_FILE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_FILE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_GPIXMAP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_GPIXMAP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB_SCALED

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB_SCALED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_NONE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_NONE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_PATH

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_PATH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_WIDGET

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_WIDGET`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDELETE

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDELETE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDO

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UP

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_VOLUME

      `constant GTK1.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_VOLUME`

    Constant HAS_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK1.HAS_DEFAULT`

    Constant HAS_FOCUS

      `constant GTK1.HAS_FOCUS`

    Constant HAS_GRAB

      `constant GTK1.HAS_GRAB`

    Constant INCHES

      `constant GTK1.INCHES`

    Constant JUSTIFY_CENTER

      `constant GTK1.JUSTIFY_CENTER`

    Constant JUSTIFY_FILL

      `constant GTK1.JUSTIFY_FILL`

    Constant JUSTIFY_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.JUSTIFY_LEFT`

    Constant JUSTIFY_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.JUSTIFY_RIGHT`

    Constant LEFT_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.LEFT_RIGHT`

    Constant MAPPED

      `constant GTK1.MAPPED`

    Constant NO_REPARENT

      `constant GTK1.NO_REPARENT`

    Constant NO_WINDOW

      `constant GTK1.NO_WINDOW`

    Constant ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK1.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant ORIENTATION_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK1.ORIENTATION_VERTICAL`

    Constant PACK_END

      `constant GTK1.PACK_END`

    Constant PACK_EXPAND

      `constant GTK1.PACK_EXPAND`

    Constant PACK_START

      `constant GTK1.PACK_START`

    Constant PARENT_SENSITIVE

      `constant GTK1.PARENT_SENSITIVE`

    Constant PIXELS

      `constant GTK1.PIXELS`

    Constant POLICY_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK1.POLICY_ALWAYS`

    Constant POLICY_AUTOMATIC

      `constant GTK1.POLICY_AUTOMATIC`

    Constant POLICY_NEVER

      `constant GTK1.POLICY_NEVER`

    Constant POS_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.POS_BOTTOM`

    Constant POS_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.POS_LEFT`

    Constant POS_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.POS_RIGHT`

    Constant POS_TOP

      `constant GTK1.POS_TOP`

    Constant PREVIEW_COLOR

      `constant GTK1.PREVIEW_COLOR`

    Constant PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE

      `constant GTK1.PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE`

    Constant PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP`

    Constant PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS`

    Constant PROGRESS_DISCRETE

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_DISCRETE`

    Constant PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT`

    Constant PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT`

    Constant PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM`

    Constant RC_STYLE

      `constant GTK1.RC_STYLE`

    Constant REALIZED

      `constant GTK1.REALIZED`

    Constant RELIEF_HALF

      `constant GTK1.RELIEF_HALF`

    Constant RELIEF_NONE

      `constant GTK1.RELIEF_NONE`

    Constant RELIEF_NORMAL

      `constant GTK1.RELIEF_NORMAL`

    Constant RESIZE_IMMEDIATE

      `constant GTK1.RESIZE_IMMEDIATE`

    Constant RESIZE_PARENT

      `constant GTK1.RESIZE_PARENT`

    Constant RESIZE_QUEUE

      `constant GTK1.RESIZE_QUEUE`

    Constant RUN_BOTH

      `constant GTK1.RUN_BOTH`

    Constant RUN_FIRST

      `constant GTK1.RUN_FIRST`

    Constant RUN_LAST

      `constant GTK1.RUN_LAST`

    Constant RUN_NO_RECURSE

      `constant GTK1.RUN_NO_RECURSE`

    Constant SCROLL_JUMP

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_JUMP`

    Constant SCROLL_NONE

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_NONE`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_PAGE_BACKWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_PAGE_FORWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_STEP_BACKWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.SCROLL_STEP_FORWARD`

    Constant SELECTION_BROWSE

      `constant GTK1.SELECTION_BROWSE`

    Constant SELECTION_EXTENDED

      `constant GTK1.SELECTION_EXTENDED`

    Constant SELECTION_MULTIPLE

      `constant GTK1.SELECTION_MULTIPLE`

    Constant SELECTION_SINGLE

      `constant GTK1.SELECTION_SINGLE`

    Constant SENSITIVE

      `constant GTK1.SENSITIVE`

    Constant SHADOW_ETCHED_IN

      `constant GTK1.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN`

    Constant SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT

      `constant GTK1.SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT`

    Constant SHADOW_IN

      `constant GTK1.SHADOW_IN`

    Constant SHADOW_NONE

      `constant GTK1.SHADOW_NONE`

    Constant SHADOW_OUT

      `constant GTK1.SHADOW_OUT`

    Constant SHRINK

      `constant GTK1.SHRINK`

    Constant SIDE_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.SIDE_BOTTOM`

    Constant SIDE_LEFT

      `constant GTK1.SIDE_LEFT`

    Constant SIDE_RIGHT

      `constant GTK1.SIDE_RIGHT`

    Constant SIDE_TOP

      `constant GTK1.SIDE_TOP`

    Constant SORT_ASCENDING

      `constant GTK1.SORT_ASCENDING`

    Constant SORT_DESCENDING

      `constant GTK1.SORT_DESCENDING`

    Constant SPIN_END

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_END`

    Constant SPIN_HOME

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_HOME`

    Constant SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD`

    Constant SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD`

    Constant SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD`

    Constant SPIN_STEP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_STEP_FORWARD`

    Constant SPIN_USER_DEFINED

      `constant GTK1.SPIN_USER_DEFINED`

    Constant STATE_ACTIVE

      `constant GTK1.STATE_ACTIVE`

    Constant STATE_INSENSITIVE

      `constant GTK1.STATE_INSENSITIVE`

    Constant STATE_NORMAL

      `constant GTK1.STATE_NORMAL`

    Constant STATE_PRELIGHT

      `constant GTK1.STATE_PRELIGHT`

    Constant STATE_SELECTED

      `constant GTK1.STATE_SELECTED`

    Constant TOOLBAR_BOTH

      `constant GTK1.TOOLBAR_BOTH`

    Constant TOOLBAR_ICONS

      `constant GTK1.TOOLBAR_ICONS`

    Constant TOOLBAR_TEXT

      `constant GTK1.TOOLBAR_TEXT`

    Constant TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK1.TOPLEVEL`

    Constant TOP_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK1.TOP_BOTTOM`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_ITEM

      `constant GTK1.TREE_VIEW_ITEM`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_LINE

      `constant GTK1.TREE_VIEW_LINE`

    Constant TROUGH_END

      `constant GTK1.TROUGH_END`

    Constant TROUGH_JUMP

      `constant GTK1.TROUGH_JUMP`

    Constant TROUGH_NONE

      `constant GTK1.TROUGH_NONE`

    Constant TROUGH_START

      `constant GTK1.TROUGH_START`

    Constant TRUE

      `constant GTK1.TRUE`

    Constant UPDATE_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK1.UPDATE_ALWAYS`

    Constant UPDATE_CONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK1.UPDATE_CONTINUOUS`

    Constant UPDATE_DELAYED

      `constant GTK1.UPDATE_DELAYED`

    Constant UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK1.UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS`

    Constant UPDATE_IF_VALID

      `constant GTK1.UPDATE_IF_VALID`

    Constant VISIBILITY_FULL

      `constant GTK1.VISIBILITY_FULL`

    Constant VISIBILITY_NONE

      `constant GTK1.VISIBILITY_NONE`

    Constant VISIBILITY_PARTIAL

      `constant GTK1.VISIBILITY_PARTIAL`

    Constant VISIBLE

      `constant GTK1.VISIBLE`

    Constant WINDOW_DIALOG

      `constant GTK1.WINDOW_DIALOG`

    Constant WINDOW_POPUP

      `constant GTK1.WINDOW_POPUP`

    Constant WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK1.WINDOW_TOPLEVEL`

    Constant WIN_POS_CENTER

      `constant GTK1.WIN_POS_CENTER`

    Constant WIN_POS_MOUSE

      `constant GTK1.WIN_POS_MOUSE`

    Constant WIN_POS_NONE

      `constant GTK1.WIN_POS_NONE`

    Method applet_widget_gtk_main

      `void applet_widget_gtk_main()`

    Description

      Special corba main loop for gnome panel applets

    Method applet_widget_gtk_main_quit

      `void applet_widget_gtk_main_quit()`

    Description

      Exit from the applet_widget_gtk_main function on the next iteration.

    Method false

      `int false()`

    Description

      Always returns false.

    Method flush

      `void flush()`

    Description

      Flush GDK1. Not normally needed, can be useful while doing calculations.

    Method gnome_init

      `array gnome_init(string app_id, string app_version, array argv, int|void corba_init_flags)`

    Description

      Initializes the application. This sets up all of the GNOME internals and prepares them (imlib, gdk/gtk, session-management, triggers, sound, user preferences). If corba init flags are specified, corba initialization is done as well as gnome initialization. corba_init_flags is 0 or more of GNORBA_INIT_SERVER_FUNC (1), GNORBA_INIT_DISABLE_COOKIES (2) and GNORBA_INIT_CORBA_PRIO_HIGH (4)

    Method grab_add

      `void grab_add(GTK1.Widget widget)`

    Method grab_remove

      `void grab_remove(GTK1.Widget widget)`

    Method gtk_init

      `array gtk_init(array|void argc, int|void no_pgtkrc)`

    Description

      Low level GTK init function (used by setup_gtk). This function is more or less equivalent to the C-GTK+ function gtk_init. setup_gtk does some extra things (such as parsing ~/.pgtkrc).

    Inherit GTKSupport

      inherit GTKSupport : GTKSupport

    Method low_flush

      `void low_flush()`

    Description

      Flush, but do not process events. Not normally needed.

    Method main

      `void main()`

    Description

      Start GTK in blocking mode. Doing this disables asynchronous I/O in pike. You can return -1 from main in pike to run GTK (and the rest of pike) in asynchrounous mode.

    Method main_iteration_do

      `int main_iteration_do(int block)`

    Description

      Run one iteration in the mainloop. If block is true, wait for an event before returning.

    Method main_level

      `int main_level()`

    Description

      Return the current recursion depth.

    Method main_quit

      `void main_quit()`

    Description

      Exit from the gtk_main function on the next iteration.

    Method parse_rc

      `void parse_rc(string rc)`

    Description

      Takes a string and reads it as a gtkrc file.

    Method root_window

      `GDK1.Window root_window()`

    Description

      Returns the root window of the current display

    Method set_new_signal_convention

      `int set_new_signal_convention(int n)`

    Method setup_gtk

      `array setup_gtk(array|void argv, int|void do_not_parse_rc)`

    Description

      Initialize GTK, and all that comes with it. Also parses $HOME/.pgtkrc and $HOME/.gtkrc if they exists. The single argument, if supplied, is the argument array passed to the program. This is used to set default window titles etc. The second argument, if supplied, indicates that pike specific *rc files should not be parsed.

      The most common usage is GTK1.setup_gtk(argv);

    Method true

      `int true()`

    Description

      Always returns true.

    CLASS GTK1.AccelGroup

      Description

        An AccelGroup stores keybindings. A group is automatically created by W(MenuFactory)

        NOIMG

      Method add_accel

        `GTK1.AccelGroup add_accel(GTK1.Widget widget, string signal, int key, int modifiers, int flags)`

      Description

        the widget is the one in which the signal specified by 'signal' recides.

        The key is the character code (such as 'a' for the a key and '@' for the @ key), and modifiers is a bitmap of one or more bits, the bits are . Flags is one or more of ACCEL_LOCKED, ACCEL_SIGNAL_VISIBLE and ACCEL_VISIBLE

      Method create

        `GTK1.AccelGroup GTK1.AccelGroup()`

      Description

        Create a new accelerator group

      Method destroy

        `GTK1.AccelGroup destroy()`

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK1.Data : Data

      Method remove

        `GTK1.AccelGroup remove(GTK1.Widget widget, int key, int modifiers)`

      Description

        Remove all bindings for the specified key/mask in the specified object.

    CLASS GTK1.AccelLabel

      Description

        A label for accelerators.

      Method create

        `GTK1.AccelLabel GTK1.AccelLabel(string text)`

      Method get_accel_width

        `int get_accel_width()`

      Inherit Label

        inherit GTK1.Label : Label

      Method refetch

        `int refetch()`

      Method set_accel_widget

        `GTK1.AccelLabel set_accel_widget(GTK1.Widget accel_widget)`

    CLASS GTK1.Adjustment

      Description

        The GTK1.Adjustment object represents a value which has an associated lower and upper bound, together with step and page increments, and a page size. It is used within several GTK+ widgets, including GtkSpinButton, GtkViewport, and GtkRange (which is a base class for GtkHScrollbar, GtkVScrollbar, GtkHScale, and GtkVScale).

        The GtkAdjustment object does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of the GtkAdjustment to control the value.

        The owner of the GtkAdjustment typically calls the value_changed() and changed() functions after changing the value or its bounds. This results in the emission of the "value_changed" or "changed" signal respectively.

        Signals: changed The adjustment changed in some way

        value_changed The value changed

      Method changed

        `GTK1.Adjustment changed()`

      Description

        Call this when you have modified anything except the value member of the adjustment.

      Method clamp_page

        `GTK1.Adjustment clamp_page(float lower, float upper)`

      Description

        Updates the GTK1.Adjustment value to ensure that the range between lower and upper is in the current page (i.e. between value and value + page_size). If the range is larger than the page size, then only the start of it will be in the current page. A "value_changed" signal will be emitted if the value is changed.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Adjustment GTK1.Adjustment(float|void value, float|void lower, float|void upper, float|void step_increment, float|void page_increment, float|void page_size)`

      Description

        The value argument is the initial value you want to give to the adjustment, usually corresponding to the topmost or leftmost position of an adjustable widget. The lower argument specifies the lowest value which the adjustment can hold. The step_increment argument specifies the "smaller" of the two increments by which the user can change the value, while the page_increment is the "larger" one. The page_size argument usually corresponds somehow to the visible area of a panning widget. The upper argument is used to represent the bottom most or right most coordinate in a panning widget's child. Therefore it is not always the largest number that value can take, since the page_size of such widgets is usually non-zero.

        All values are optional, they default to 0.0. For most widgets the unit is pixels.

      Method get_lower

        `float get_lower()`

      Description

        Get the lower limit

      Method get_page_increment

        `float get_page_increment()`

      Description

        Get the page increment (page down or through click)

      Method get_page_size

        `float get_page_size()`

      Description

        Get the page size (the actual size of a page)

      Method get_step_increment

        `float get_step_increment()`

      Description

        Get the step increment (arrow click)

      Method get_upper

        `float get_upper()`

      Description

        get the upper limit.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Get the value component.

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK1.Data : Data

      Method set_set_lower

        `float set_set_lower()`

      Description

        Set the lower limit.

      Method set_set_page_increment

        `float set_set_page_increment()`

      Description

        Set the page increment (page down or through click)

      Method set_set_page_size

        `float set_set_page_size()`

      Description

        Set the page size (the actual size of a page)

      Method set_set_step_increment

        `float set_set_step_increment()`

      Description

        Set the step increment (arrow click)

      Method set_set_upper

        `float set_set_upper()`

      Description

        Set the upper limit.

      Method set_value

        `GTK1.Adjustment set_value(float to)`

      Description

        Set the value component.

    CLASS GTK1.Alignment

      Description

        The W(Alignment) widget controls the alignment and size of its child widget. It has four settings: xscale, yscale, xalign, and yalign.

        The scale settings are used to specify how much the child widget should expand to fill the space allocated to the W(Alignment). The values can range from 0 (meaning the child doesn't expand at all) to 1 (meaning the child expands to fill all of the available space).

        The align settings are used to place the child widget within the available area. The values range from 0 (top or left) to 1 (bottom or right). Of course, if the scale settings are both set to 1, the alignment settings have no effect.

        NOIMG

      Method create

        `GTK1.Alignment GTK1.Alignment(float xalign, float yalign, float xscale, float yscale)`

      Description

        xalign : | the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
        yalign : | the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
        xscale : | the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the GTK1.Alignment.
        yscale : | the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xscale.

      Method get_xalign

        `float get_xalign()`

      Description

        the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).

      Method get_xscale

        `float get_xscale()`

      Description

        the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the GTK1.Alignment.

      Method get_yalign

        `float get_yalign()`

      Description

        the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).

      Method get_yscale

        `float get_yscale()`

      Description

        the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xscale.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

      Method set

        `GTK1.Alignment set(float xalign, float yalign, float xscale, float yscale)`

      Description

        xalign : | the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
        yalign : | the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
        xscale : | the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the GTK1.Alignment.
        yscale : | the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xscale.

    CLASS GTK1.Arrow

      Description

        An arrow pointing in one of four directions. The 'etched' shadow types does not work. `GTK1.Arrow(GTK1.ARROW_UP, GTK1.SHADOW_OUT)`

        `GTK1.Arrow(GTK1.ARROW_LEFT, GTK1.SHADOW_IN)`

        `GTK1.Arrow(GTK1.ARROW_RIGHT, GTK1.SHADOW_IN)`

        `GTK1.Arrow(GTK1.ARROW_DOWN, GTK1.SHADOW_OUT)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Arrow GTK1.Arrow(int arrow_type, int shadow_type)`

      Description

        First argument is one of ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP, second one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT.

      Method get_arrow_type

        `int get_arrow_type()`

      Description

        Return the arrow type. One of ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP.

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Return the shadow type. One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT.

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK1.Misc : Misc

      Method set

        `GTK1.Arrow set(int arrow_type, int shadow_type)`

      Description

        First argument is one of ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP, second one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT.

    CLASS GTK1.AspectFrame

      Description

        A W(Frame) widget that always maintain a specified ratio between width and height. width/height == ratio

        `GTK1.AspectFrame("Title",0.5,0.5,0.4,0)->add( GTK1.Label("Wrong aspect"))->set_usize(200,200)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.AspectFrame GTK1.AspectFrame(string label, float xalign, float yalign, float ratio, int obey_child)`

      Description

        Create a new frame. Arguments are label, xalign, yalign, ratio, obey_child xalign is floats between 0 and 1, 0.0 is upper (or leftmost), 1.0 is lower (or rightmost). If 'obey_child' is true, the frame will use the aspect ratio of it's (one and only) child widget instead of 'ratio'.

      Inherit Frame

        inherit GTK1.Frame : Frame

      Method set

        `GTK1.AspectFrame set(float xalign, float yalign, float ratio, int obey_child)`

      Description

        Set the aspec values. Arguments are xalign, yalign, ratio, obey_child xalign is floats between 0 and 1, 0.0 is upper (or leftmost), 1.0 is lower (or rightmost). If 'obey_child' is true, the frame will use the aspect ratio of it's (one and only) child widget instead of 'ratio'.

    CLASS GTK1.Bin

      Description

        A container that can only contain one child.

      Method get_child

        `GTK1.Widget get_child()`

      Description

        Returns the (one and only) child of this container.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

    CLASS GTK1.Box

      Description

        A box is a container that can contain more than one child. The basic 'Box' class cannot be instantiated, it is a virtual class that only defines some common 'Box' functions shared with all other Box widgets.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method pack_end

        `GTK1.Box pack_end(GTK1.Widget widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding)`

      Description

        Pack from the right (or bottom) of the box. Arguments are widget, expand, fill, paddingb widget, expand, fill, padding

      Method pack_end_defaults

        `GTK1.Box pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        The argument is the widget to add.

      Method pack_start

        `GTK1.Box pack_start(GTK1.Widget widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding)`

      Description

        Pack from the left (or top) of the box. Argument are widget, expand, fill, padding pack(widget,1,1,0) is equivalent to 'add' or 'pack_start_defaults'

      Method pack_start_defaults

        `GTK1.Box pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        The argument is the widget to add. This function is equivalent to 'add'

      Method query_child_packing

        `mapping query_child_packing(GTK1.Widget child)`

      Description

        Return a mapping: ([ "expand":expandp, "fill":fillp, "padding":paddingp, "type":type ])

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK1.Box reorder_child(GTK1.Widget child, int new_position)`

      Description

        Move widget to pos, pos is an integer, between 0 and sizeof(box->children())-1

      Method set_child_packing

        `GTK1.Box set_child_packing(GTK1.Widget child_widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding, int pack_type)`

      Description

        widget, expand, fill, padding, pack_type. If exand is true, the widget will be expanded when the box is resized. If 'fill' is true, the widget will be resized to fill up all available space. Padding is the amount of padding to use, and pack_type is one of PACK_END, PACK_EXPAND and PACK_START.

        You can emulate pack_start and pack_end with add and set_child_packing.

      Method set_homogeneous

        `GTK1.Box set_homogeneous(int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        If true, all widgets in the box will get exactly the same amount of space

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK1.Box set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        This is the amount of spacing (in pixels) inserted beween all widgets

    CLASS GTK1.Button

      Description

        A container that can only contain one child, and accepts events. draws a bevelbox around itself. `GTK1.Button("A button")`

        `GTK1.Button("A button\nwith multiple lines\nof text")`

        `GTK1.Button()->add(GTK1.Image(GDK1.Image(0)->set(Image.Image(100,40)->test())))`

        Signals: clicked Called when the button is pressed, and then released

        enter Called when the mouse enters the button

        leave Called when the mouse leaves the button

        pressed Called when the button is pressed

        released Called when the button is released

      Method clicked

        `GTK1.Button clicked()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'clicked' event (press followed by release).

      Method create

        `GTK1.Button GTK1.Button(string|void label_text)`

      Description

        If a string is supplied, a W(Label) is created and added to the button.

      Method enter

        `GTK1.Button enter()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'enter' event.

      Method get_child

        `GTK1.Widget get_child()`

      Description

        The (one and only) child of this container.

      Method get_relief

        `int get_relief()`

      Description

        One of RELIEF_HALF, RELIEF_NONE and RELIEF_NORMAL, set with set_relief()

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method leave

        `GTK1.Button leave()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'leave' event.

      Method pressed

        `GTK1.Button pressed()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'press' event.

      Method released

        `GTK1.Button released()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'release' event.

      Method set_relief

        `GTK1.Button set_relief(int newstyle)`

      Description

        One of RELIEF_HALF, RELIEF_NONE and RELIEF_NORMAL

    CLASS GTK1.ButtonBox

      Description

        More or less equivalent to a normal box, but you can set a few layout schemes that are not available for normal boxes. See the hbox and vbox documentation for examples.

      Method get_child_ipadding

        `mapping get_child_ipadding()`

      Description

        Return the default inter-child padding ([ "x":xpadding, "y":ypadding ])

      Method get_child_size

        `mapping get_child_size()`

      Description

        Return the child size as ([ "x":xsize, "y":ysize ])

      Method get_layout

        `int get_layout()`

      Description

        Returns the currently configured layout. One of BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE, BUTTONBOX_EDGE, BUTTONBOX_END, BUTTONBOX_SPREAD and BUTTONBOX_START

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Description

        Return the spacing that is added between the buttons

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK1.Box : Box

      Method set_child_ipadding

        `GTK1.ButtonBox set_child_ipadding(int child_number, int child_padding)`

      Description

        Set the padding for a specific child.

      Method set_child_size

        `GTK1.ButtonBox set_child_size(int child_number, int child_size)`

      Description

        Set the size of a specified child

      Method set_layout

        `GTK1.ButtonBox set_layout(int layout)`

      Description

        layout is one of BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE, BUTTONBOX_EDGE, BUTTONBOX_END, BUTTONBOX_SPREAD and BUTTONBOX_START

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK1.ButtonBox set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        in pixels

    CLASS GTK1.CTreeNode

      Description

        This is one of the nodes (branch or leaf) of the CTree. They are the equivalent of row numbers in a normal CList.

      Method child

        `CTreeNode child()`

      Description

        Returns the first child node

      Method get_expanded

        `int get_expanded()`

      Description

        Returns the previous sibling (the next on the same level)

      Method get_is_leaf

        `int get_is_leaf()`

      Description

        Returns the previous sibling (the next on the same level)

      Method get_level

        `int get_level()`

      Description

        Returns the previous sibling (the next on the same level)

      Method next

        `CTreeNode next()`

      Description

        Returns the next sibling (the next on the same level)

      Method parent

        `GTK1.CTreeNode parent()`

      Description

        Returns the parent node

      Method prev

        `CTreeNode prev()`

      Description

        Returns the previous sibling (the next on the same level)

      Method row

        `GTK1.CTreeRow row()`

      Description

        Returns the CTreeRow associated with this CTreeNode. DEPRECATED, all CTreeRow functions are also available directly in this object.

    CLASS GTK1.CTreeRow

      Description

        This class is deprecated.

      Method get_children

        `GTK1.CTreeNode get_children()`

      Description

        Return the first child

      Method get_expanded

        `int get_expanded()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the node is expanded

      Method get_is_leaf

        `int get_is_leaf()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the node is a leaf node

      Method get_level

        `int get_level()`

      Description

        Return the level of this node (0 for root, 1 for a child of the root, etc)

      Method get_parent

        `GTK1.CTreeNode get_parent()`

      Description

        Return the parent node of this node

    CLASS GTK1.Calendar

      Description

        A calendar widget. `GTK1.Calendar();`

        `GTK1.Calendar()->select_day( 16 );`

        Signals: day_selected

        day_selected_double_click

        month_changed

        next_month

        next_year

        prev_month

        prev_year

      Method clear_marks

        `GTK1.Calendar clear_marks()`

      Description

        Remove all day markers

      Method create

        `GTK1.Calendar GTK1.Calendar()`

      Description

        Create a new calendar widget

      Method display_options

        `GTK1.Calendar display_options(int options)`

      Description

        Bitwise or of one or more of CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE, CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES, CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING, CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS and CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY.

      Method freeze

        `GTK1.Calendar freeze()`

      Description

        Suspend all dynamic updating of the widget

      Method get_date

        `mapping get_date()`

      Description

        returns a mapping: ([ "year":year, "month":month, "day":day ])

      Method get_day

        `array get_day()`

      Description

        Return an array of 6x7 days, representing the cells in the currently viewed calendar month.

      Method get_day_month

        `array get_day_month()`

      Description

        Return an array of 6x7 days, representing the cells in the currently viewed calendar month. The value is the day of month.

      Method get_focus_col

        `int get_focus_col()`

      Description

        The currently focused column

      Method get_focus_row

        `int get_focus_row()`

      Description

        The currently focused row

      Method get_highlight_col

        `int get_highlight_col()`

      Description

        The currently highlighted column

      Method get_highlight_row

        `int get_highlight_row()`

      Description

        The currently highlighted row

      Method get_marked_dates

        `array get_marked_dates()`

      Description

        Returns an array (with 31 elements) with 1es and 0es.

      Method get_month

        `int get_month()`

      Description

        The current month

      Method get_num_marked_dates

        `int get_num_marked_dates()`

      Description

        The number of days that are marked

      Method get_selected_day

        `int get_selected_day()`

      Description

        The currently selected day

      Method get_year

        `int get_year()`

      Description

        The current year

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method mark_day

        `GTK1.Calendar mark_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Mark a day

      Method select_day

        `GTK1.Calendar select_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Select a certain day of the currently selected month

      Method select_month

        `int select_month(int month, int year)`

      Description

        Select the month to be viewed.

      Method set_marked_date_color

        `GTK1.Calendar set_marked_date_color(int index, GDK1.Color color)`

      Description

        Set the color to use to mark dates

      Method thaw

        `GTK1.Calendar thaw()`

      Description

        Resume dynamic updating of the widget

      Method unmark_day

        `GTK1.Calendar unmark_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Unmark a day

    CLASS GTK1.CheckButton

      Description

        Check buttons inherent many properties and functions from the the toggle buttons, but look a little different. Rather than being buttons with text inside them, they are small squares with the text to the right of them. These are often used for toggling options on and off in applications. `GTK1.CheckButton( "title" )`

      Method create

        `GTK1.CheckButton GTK1.CheckButton(string|void label)`

      Description

        The argument, if specified, is the label of the item. If no label is specified, use object->add() to add some other widget (such as an pixmap or image widget)

      Inherit ToggleButton

        inherit GTK1.ToggleButton : ToggleButton

    CLASS GTK1.CheckMenuItem

      Description

        A check menu item is more or less identical to a check button, but it should be used in menus. `GTK1.CheckMenuItem("Hi there")`

        `GTK1.CheckMenuItem("Hi there")->set_active(1)`

        Signals: toggled Called when the state of the menu item is changed

      Method create

        `GTK1.CheckMenuItem GTK1.CheckMenuItem(string|void label)`

      Description

        The argument, if specified, is the label of the item. If no label is specified, use object->add() to add some other widget (such as an pixmap or image widget)

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK1.MenuItem : MenuItem

      Method set_active

        `GTK1.CheckMenuItem set_active(int new_state)`

      Description

        State is either 1 or 0. If 1, the button will be 'pressed'.

      Method set_show_toggle

        `GTK1.CheckMenuItem set_show_toggle(int togglep)`

      Description

        If true, the toggle indicator will be shown

      Method toggled

        `GTK1.CheckMenuItem toggled()`

      Description

        Emulate a toggled event

    CLASS GTK1.Clist

      Description

        The GtkCList widget is a multi-column list widget that is capable of handling literally thousands of rows of information. Each column can optionally have a title, which itself is optionally active, allowing us to bind a function to it's selection. `GTK1.Clist(2)->set_column_title(0,"Col 1")->set_column_title(1,"Col 2")->column_titles_show()->set_column_width(0,50)->set_usize(150,70)`

        Signals: abort_column_resize

        click_column Called when a column is clicked

        end_selection

        extend_selection

        resize_column Called when a column is resized

        scroll_horizontal

        scroll_vertical

        select_all

        select_row Called when a row is selected

        start_selection

        toggle_add_mode

        toggle_focus_row

        undo_selection

        unselect_all

        unselect_row Called when a row is deselected

      Method append

        `int append(array columns)`

      Description

        The return value of indicates the index of the row that was just added.

        'columns' are the texts we want to put in the columns. The size of the array should equal the number of columns in the list.

      Method clear

        `GTK1.Clist clear()`

      Description

        remove all rows

      Method column_title_active

        `GTK1.Clist column_title_active(int column)`

      Description

        Make a specific column title active

      Method column_title_passive

        `GTK1.Clist column_title_passive(int column)`

      Description

        Make a specific column title passive

      Method column_titles_active

        `GTK1.Clist column_titles_active()`

      Description

        The column titles can be pressed

      Method column_titles_hide

        `GTK1.Clist column_titles_hide()`

      Description

        Hide the column titles

      Method column_titles_passive

        `GTK1.Clist column_titles_passive()`

      Description

        The column titles can't be pressed

      Method column_titles_show

        `GTK1.Clist column_titles_show()`

      Description

        Show the column titles.

      Method columns_autosize

        `int columns_autosize()`

      Description

        Resize all columns according to their contents

      Method create

        `GTK1.Clist GTK1.Clist(int columns)`

      Description

        Create a new empty clist, columns columns wide.

        Not all columns have to be visible, some can be used to store data that is related to a certain cell in the list.

      Method find_row_from_data

        `int find_row_from_data(object data)`

      Description

        Find a row in the list that has the given user data. If no node is found, -1 is returned.

      Method freeze

        `GTK1.Clist freeze()`

      Description

        freeze all visual updates of the list, and then thaw the list after you have made a number of changes and the updates wil occure in a more efficent mannor than if you made them on a unfrozen list

      Method get_background

        `GDK1.Color get_background(int row)`

      Description

        Return the background color of a specified row

      Method get_cell_style

        `GTK1.Style get_cell_style(int row, int col)`

      Description

        return the W(Style) associated with a specific cell

      Method get_cell_type

        `int get_cell_type(int row, int column)`

      Description

        Return value is one of CELL_EMPTY, CELL_PIXMAP, CELL_PIXTEXT, CELL_TEXT and CELL_WIDGET

      Method get_column_title

        `string get_column_title(int column)`

      Description

        Returns the title of a specified column.

      Method get_column_widget

        `GTK1.Widget get_column_widget(int column)`

      Description

        Return the widget for the specified column title

      Method get_columns

        `int get_columns()`

      Description

        Return the number of columns in this clist

      Method get_drag_button

        `int get_drag_button()`

      Description

        Return the button used to drag items (by default 1)

      Method get_flags

        `int get_flags()`

      Description

        Return the flags. A bitwise or of CLIST_ADD_MODE, CLIST_AUTO_RESIZE_BLOCKED, CLIST_AUTO_SORT, CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_LINE, CLIST_DRAW_DRAG_RECT, CLIST_IN_DRAG, CLIST_REORDERABLE, CLIST_ROW_HEIGHT_SET, CLIST_SHOW_TITLES and CLIST_USE_DRAG_ICONS

      Method get_focus_row

        `int get_focus_row()`

      Description

        The currently focused row

      Method get_foreground

        `GDK1.Color get_foreground(int row)`

      Description

        Return the foregroun color for the specified row

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the W(Adjustment) object used for horizontal scrolling

      Method get_pixmap

        `GTK1.Clist get_pixmap(int row, int column)`

      Description

        Return the pixmap for the specified cell

      Method get_pixtext

        `mapping get_pixtext(int row, int col)`

      Description

        Return the pixmap and text for the specified cell as a mapping: ([ "spacing":spacing, "text":text, "pixmap":pixmap ])

      Method get_row_data

        `object get_row_data(int row)`

      Description

        Return the data associated with a row, or 0.

      Method get_row_height

        `int get_row_height()`

      Description

        Return the height of the row

      Method get_row_style

        `GTK1.Style get_row_style(int row)`

      Description

        Return the W(style) object associated with the specified row

      Method get_rows

        `int get_rows()`

      Description

        Return the number of rows

      Method get_selectable

        `int get_selectable(int row)`

      Description

        Return 1 if the specified row can be selected by the user.

      Method get_selection

        `array get_selection()`

      Description

        Return an array with all selected rows.

      Method get_selection_info

        `mapping get_selection_info(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Return the row column corresponding to the x and y coordinates, the returned values are only valid if the x and y coordinates are relative to the clist window coordinates

      Method get_selection_mode

        `int get_selection_mode()`

      Description

        Return the selection mode. One of SELECTION_BROWSE, SELECTION_EXTENDED, SELECTION_MULTIPLE and SELECTION_SINGLE

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Return the curreent shadow type. One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method get_sort_column

        `int get_sort_column()`

      Description

        The column that will be used to sort the rows

      Method get_sort_type

        `int get_sort_type()`

      Description

        The sort method, one of SORT_ASCENDING and SORT_DESCENDING

      Method get_text

        `GTK1.Clist get_text(int row, int col)`

      Description

        Return the text associated with a specific cell.

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the W(Adjustment) object used for vertical scrolling

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method insert

        `int insert(int row, array columns)`

      Description

        Insert a row after a specified row. The return value of indicates the index of the row that was just added, please note that this is not nessasarily the same row as the specified one, if autosort is activated, the row will be inserted so that the list is sill sorted.

        'columns' are the texts we want to put in the columns. The size of the array should equal the number of columns in the list.

      Method moveto

        `GTK1.Clist moveto(int row, int column, float xpos, float ypos)`

      Description

        Make the specified row and column visible, and place it relative to xpos and ypos in the area the Clist occupies. xpos and ypos are relative, 0.0 == top, 1.0 == bottom

      Method optimal_column_width

        `int optimal_column_width(int column)`

      Description

        Return the optimal width of the specified column

      Method prepend

        `int prepend(array columns)`

      Description

        The return value of indicates the index of the row that was just added.

        'columns' are the texts we want to put in the columns. The size of the array should equal the number of columns in the list.

      Method remove

        `GTK1.Clist remove(int row)`

      Description

        Delete a specified row. If you want to remove all rows in a Clist, use 'clear()' instead of calling remove multiple times.

      Method row_move

        `GTK1.Clist row_move(int from_row, int to_row)`

      Description

        Move the specified row to just before the specified destination row.

      Method select_all

        `GTK1.Clist select_all()`

      Description

        Select all rows

      Method select_row

        `GTK1.Clist select_row(int row, int column)`

      Description

        Select the given row. The column is sent to the signal handler, but ignored for all other purposes.

      Method set_auto_sort

        `GTK1.Clist set_auto_sort(int sortp)`

      Description

        If true, the clist will automatically be re-sorted when new rows are inserted. Please note that it will not be resorted if the text in cells are changed, use 'sort()' to force a reorder. The sort function is stable.

      Method set_background

        `GTK1.Clist set_background(int row, GDK1.Color color)`

      Description

        Set the background color of the specified row the the specified color

      Method set_button_actions

        `GTK1.Clist set_button_actions(int button, int action)`

      Description

        Action is a bitwise or of BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE, BUTTONBOX_EDGE, BUTTONBOX_END, BUTTONBOX_SPREAD, BUTTONBOX_START, BUTTON_DRAGS, BUTTON_EXPANDS, BUTTON_IGNORED and BUTTON_SELECTS Button is the mouse button (normally 1-3, 4 and 5 sometimes beeing scroll wheel up and scroll wheel down)

      Method set_cell_style

        `GTK1.Clist set_cell_style(int row, int column, GTK1.Style style)`

      Description

        Set a W(Style) for a specific cell

      Method set_column_auto_resize

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_auto_resize(int column, int autoresizep)`

      Description

        Automatically resize a column to the width of it's widest contents.

      Method set_column_justification

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_justification(int column, int justification)`

      Description

        justification is one of JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT

      Method set_column_max_width

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_max_width(int column, int width)`

      Description

        if width 6lt; 0 , there is no restriction

      Method set_column_min_width

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_min_width(int column, int width)`

      Description

        Width in pixels

      Method set_column_resizeable

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_resizeable(int column, int resizeablep)`

      Description

        Make a column resizable, or remove it's the resizability.

      Method set_column_title

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_title(int column, string title)`

      Description

        Set the column title of a specified column. It is a good idea to set the titles before the column title buttons are shown.

      Method set_column_visibility

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_visibility(int column, int visiblep)`

      Description

        Hide or show a column

      Method set_column_widget

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_widget(int column, GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Put a widget as a column title. The widget will be added to a W(Button).

      Method set_column_width

        `GTK1.Clist set_column_width(int column, int width)`

      Description

        Width in pixels

      Method set_compare_func

        `GTK1.Clist set_compare_func(function(:void) cmpfun)`

      Description

        Set the compare function. The function will be called with a mapping as it's only argument, like this:

               ([
                  "clist":the clist widget,
                  "sort_column":the column to sort on,
                  "row1_data":The user data pointer for the first row,
                  "row2_data":The user data pointer for the second row,
                  "row1_text":The text in the sort cell in the first row
                  "row2_text":The text in the sort cell in the second row
               ])

        The return value is one of: 1: Row 1 is more than row 2 0: The rows are equal -1: Row 1 is lesser than row 2 To remove the comparefunction, use 0 as the argument.

      Method set_foreground

        `GTK1.Clist set_foreground(int row, GDK1.Color color)`

      Description

        Set the foreground color of the specified row to the specified color

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Clist set_hadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adjustment)`

      Description

        Set the W(Adjustment) object used for horizontal scrolling

      Method set_pixmap

        `GTK1.Clist set_pixmap(int row, int col, GDK1.Pixmap image, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap of the specified cell. The mask is optional

      Method set_pixtext

        `GTK1.Clist set_pixtext(int row, int column, string text, int spacing, GDK1.Pixmap image, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap and text of the specified cell. The mask is optional The spacing is the number of pixels between the pixmap and the text.

      Method set_reorderable

        `GTK1.Clist set_reorderable(int reorderablep)`

      Description

        If true, the user can drag around the rows in the list.

      Method set_row_data

        `GTK1.Clist set_row_data(int row, object data)`

      Description

        Set the user data associated with the specified row. This data can be used to find rows, and when a row is selected it can be easily retrieved using node_get_row_data.

        You can only use objects as row data right now

      Method set_row_height

        `GTK1.Clist set_row_height(int pixels)`

      Description

        in pixels

      Method set_row_style

        `GTK1.Clist set_row_style(int row, GTK1.Style style)`

      Method set_selectable

        `GTK1.Clist set_selectable(int row, int selectablep)`

      Description

        If true, the row can be selected by the user, otherwise it cannot be selected, only focused.

      Method set_selection_mode

        `GTK1.Clist set_selection_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        One of SELECTION_BROWSE, SELECTION_EXTENDED, SELECTION_MULTIPLE and SELECTION_SINGLE

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.Clist set_shadow_type(int shadowtype)`

      Description

        One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_shift

        `GTK1.Clist set_shift(int row, int column, int yshift, int xshift)`

      Description

        The contents of the specified cell will be drawn shifted (indented) the specifid number of pixels.

        This can be useful to generate a tree-like layout when you do not want to make a W(Ctree)

      Method set_sort_column

        `GTK1.Clist set_sort_column(int column)`

      Method set_sort_type

        `GTK1.Clist set_sort_type(int direction)`

      Description

        Ascending or descending (One of SORT_ASCENDING and SORT_DESCENDING)

      Method set_text

        `GTK1.Clist set_text(int row, int column, string text)`

      Description

        Set the text for the specified cell. Please note that even if auto sorting is enabled, the row will not be resorted. Use the 'sort()' function.

      Method set_use_drag_icons

        `GTK1.Clist set_use_drag_icons(int dragiconsp)`

      Description

        If true, hard coded drag icons will be used.

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Clist set_vadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adjustment)`

      Description

        Set the W(Adjustment) object used for vertical scrolling

      Method sort

        `GTK1.Clist sort()`

      Description

        Set the column on which all sorting will be performed

      Method thaw

        `GTK1.Clist thaw()`

      Description

        freeze all visual updates of the list, and then thaw the list after you have made a number of changes and the updates wil occure in a more efficent mannor than if you made them on a unfrozen list

      Method undo_selection

        `GTK1.Clist undo_selection()`

      Description

        Undo the previous selection

      Method unselect_all

        `GTK1.Clist unselect_all()`

      Description

        Unselect all rows

      Method unselect_row

        `GTK1.Clist unselect_row(int row, int column)`

      Description

        Unselect the given row. The column is sent to the signal handler, but ignored for all other purposes.

    CLASS GTK1.Clock

      Description

        The GtkClock widget provides an easy way of providing a textual clock in your application. It supports realtime display, as well as count up and count down modes. The clock widget could conceivably be used in such applications as an application's status bar, or as the basis for a panel applet, etc.

        Three modes of operation are supported. These are realtime - which displays the current time, count-up/increasing - which counts up from an initial value (like a stopwatch), and count-down/decreasing - which counts down from an initial value.

        Note, however, that the accuracy of the gtkclock widget is limited to 1 second. `GTK1.Clock( GTK1.ClockRealtime );`

        `GTK1.Clock( GTK1.ClockDecreasing )->set_seconds(10000)->start();`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Clock GTK1.Clock(int type)`

      Description

        type is one of CLOCK_DECREASING, CLOCK_INCREASING and CLOCK_REALTIME;

      Inherit Label

        inherit GTK1.Label : Label

      Method set_format

        `GTK1.Clock set_format(string fmt)`

      Description

        Set the format of a GtkClock widget. The syntax of the format string is identical to that of the function strftime(3). Further information about time format strings can be found on this man page. The widget defaults to a format string of "%H:%M" in realtime mode, or "%H:%M:%S" in count-up or count-down modes.

      Method set_seconds

        `GTK1.Clock set_seconds(int seconds)`

      Description

        Set the current time as displayed by the clock in count-up and count-down modes. This function has no effect in realtime mode, as the clock time is determined by the system clock in realtime mode.

      Method set_update_interval

        `GTK1.Clock set_update_interval(int seconds)`

      Description

        Set the interval at which the GtkClock widget is updated. The seconds parameter is used to determine how often the time shown on the widget is updated. The default value is to update every second, but you may wish to increase this value. If you set the update interval to 0, the clock is never updated.

      Method start

        `GTK1.Clock start()`

      Description

        Start the clock counting in count-up or count-down modes. The clock will begin counting up or down from the time when this function is called, until gtk_clock_stop is called. This function has no effect in the realtime mode (you can't start and stop real time! :-).

      Method stop

        `GTK1.Clock stop()`

      Description

        Stop the clock counting in count-up or count-down modes. The clock ceases counting up or down, and the last time reached remains on the display. This function has no effect in the realtime mode (you can't start and stop real time! :-).

    CLASS GTK1.ColorSelection

      Description

        The color selection widget is, not surprisingly, a widget for interactive selection of colors. This composite widget lets the user select a color by manipulating RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) triples. This is done either by adjusting single values with sliders or entries, or by picking the desired color from a hue-saturation wheel/value bar. Optionally, the opacity of the color can also be set.

        The color selection widget currently emits only one signal, "color_changed", which is emitted whenever the current color in the widget changes, either when the user changes it or if it's set explicitly through set_color().

        `GTK1.ColorSelection()`

      Method create

        `GTK1.ColorSelection GTK1.ColorSelection()`

      Description

        Create a new color selection.

      Method get_color

        `array get_color()`

      Description

        When you need to query the current color, typically when you've received a "color_changed" signal, you use this function. The return value is an array of floats, See the set_color() function for the description of this array.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK1.Vbox : Vbox

      Method set_color

        `GTK1.ColorSelection set_color(array color)`

      Description

        You can set the current color explicitly by calling this function with an array of colors (floats). The length of the array depends on whether opacity is enabled or not. Position 0 contains the red component, 1 is green, 2 is blue and opacity is at position 3 (only if opacity is enabled, see set_opacity()) All values are between 0.0 and 1.0

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK1.ColorSelection set_update_policy(int policy)`

      Description

        one of UPDATE_ALWAYS, UPDATE_CONTINUOUS, UPDATE_DELAYED, UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS and UPDATE_IF_VALID.

        The default policy is GTK1.UpdateContinuous which means that the current color is updated continuously when the user drags the sliders or presses the mouse and drags in the hue-saturation wheel or value bar. If you experience performance problems, you may want to set the policy to GTK1.UpdateDiscontinuous or GTK1.UpdateDelayed.

    CLASS GTK1.ColorSelectionDialog

      Description

        The color selection dialog widget is, not surprisingly, a color selection widget in a dialog window. Use the subwidget functions below to access the different subwidgets directly.

        `GTK1.ColorSelectionDialog("Select color")`

        Signals: color_changed Called when the color is changed

      Method create

        `GTK1.ColorSelectionDialog GTK1.ColorSelectionDialog(string title)`

      Description

        Create a new color selection dialog with the specified title.

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK1.Button get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        Return the cancel button widget.

      Method get_colorsel

        `GTK1.ColorSelection get_colorsel()`

      Description

        Return the color selection widget

      Method get_help_button

        `GTK1.Button get_help_button()`

      Description

        Return the help button

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK1.Button get_ok_button()`

      Description

        Return the ok button

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

    CLASS GTK1.Combo

      Description

        Thee combo box is another fairly simple widget that is really just a collection of other widgets. From the user's point of view, the widget consists of a text entry box and a pull down menu from which the user can select one of a set of predefined entries. Alternatively, the user can type a different option directly into the text box.

        The combo box has two principal parts that you as the programmer really care about: The W(entry) and the W(list).

        `GTK1.Combo()`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Combo GTK1.Combo()`

      Description

        Create a new combo box

      Method disable_activate

        `GTK1.Combo disable_activate()`

      Description

        This will disable the 'activate' signal for the entry widget in the combo box.

      Method get_entry

        `GTK1.Entry get_entry()`

      Description

        The entry widget

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK1.Hbox : Hbox

      Method set_case_sensitive

        `GTK1.Combo set_case_sensitive(int sensitivep)`

      Description

        set_case_sensitive() toggles whether or not GTK searches for entries in a case sensitive manner. This is used when the Combo widget is asked to find a value from the list using the current entry in the text box. This completion can be performed in either a case sensitive or insensitive manner, depending upon the use of this function. The Combo widget can also simply complete the current entry if the user presses the key combination MOD-1 and "Tab". MOD-1 is often mapped to the "Alt" key, by the xmodmap utility. Note, however that some window managers also use this key combination, which will override its use within GTK1.

      Method set_item_string

        `GTK1.Combo set_item_string(GTK1.Item item, string text)`

      Description

        The item is one of the ones in the list subwidget.

      Method set_popdown_strings

        `GTK1.Combo set_popdown_strings(array strings)`

      Description

        Set the values in the popdown list.

      Method set_use_arrows

        `GTK1.Combo set_use_arrows(int use_arrows)`

      Description

        set_use_arrows() lets the user change the value in the entry using the up/down arrow keys. This doesn't bring up the list, but rather replaces the current text in the entry with the next list entry (up or down, as your key choice indicates). It does this by searching in the list for the item corresponding to the current value in the entry and selecting the previous/next item accordingly. Usually in an entry the arrow keys are used to change focus (you can do that anyway using TAB). Note that when the current item is the last of the list and you press arrow-down it changes the focus (the same applies with the first item and arrow-up).

      Method set_use_arrows_always

        `GTK1.Combo set_use_arrows_always(int always_arrows)`

      Description

        set_use_arrows_always() allows the use the the up/down arrow keys to cycle through the choices in the dropdown list, just as with set_use_arrows, but it wraps around the values in the list, completely disabling the use of the up and down arrow keys for changing focus.

      Method set_value_in_list

        `GTK1.Combo set_value_in_list(int value_must_be_in_list, int ok_if_empty)`

      Description

        If value_must_be_in_list is true, the user will not be able to enter any value that is not in the list. If ok_if_empty is true, empty values are possible as well as the values in the list.

    CLASS GTK1.Container

      Description

        The basic container class.

        Signals: add Called when a new object is added to the container. (used internally)

        focus Called when the container gets focus (used internally)

        need_resize Called when the container needs resizing (used internally)

        remove Called when a object is removed from the container (used internally)

        set_focus_child

      Method add

        `GTK1.Container add(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Add a subwidget to the container. Don't forget to call show() in the subwidget. Some (even most) containers can only contain one child. Calling this function might result in a resize of the container.

      Method border_width

        `GTK1.Container border_width(int width)`

      Description

        Compatibility alias for set_border_width. Do not use this function in new code!

      Method children

        `array children()`

      Description

        This function returns all children of the container as an array.

      Method focus

        `GTK1.Container focus(int focus_direction)`

      Description

        Emulate a focus event. direction is one of DIR_DOWN, DIR_LEFT, DIR_RIGHT, DIR_TAB_BACKWARD, DIR_TAB_FORWARD and DIR_UP.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method remove

        `GTK1.Container remove(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Remove a child from the container. The argument is the child to remove. Calling this function might result in a resize of the container.

      Method set_border_width

        `GTK1.Container set_border_width(int external_border_width)`

      Description

        Set the border width. The border width is the size of the padding around the container. Calling this function might result in a resize of the container.

      Method set_focus_child

        `GTK1.Container set_focus_child(GTK1.Widget child)`

      Description

        Emulate a set_focus_child signal. Focus on the specified child.

      Method set_focus_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Container set_focus_hadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Set the hadjustment used to focus children.

      Method set_focus_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Container set_focus_vadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Set the vadjustment used to focus children.

      Method set_resize_mode

        `GTK1.Container set_resize_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        One of RESIZE_IMMEDIATE, RESIZE_PARENT and RESIZE_QUEUE

    CLASS GTK1.Ctree

      Description

        The GtkCTree widget is used for showing a hierarchical tree to the user, for example a directory tree.

        The tree is internally represented as a set of GtkCTreeNode structures.

        The interface has much in common with the GtkCList widget: rows (nodes) can be selected by the user etc.

        Positions in the tree are often indicated by two arguments, a parent and a sibling, both GtkCTreeNode pointers. If the parent is NULL, the position is at the root of the tree and if the sibling is NULL, it will be the last child of parent, otherwise it will be inserted just before the sibling.

        Signals: change_focus_row_expansion Changed when the focused row is either expanded or collapsed

        tree_collapse Called when a node is collapsed

        tree_expand Called when a node is expanded

        tree_move Called when a node is moved (using DND, as an example)

        tree_select_row Called when a node is selected.

        tree_unselect_row Called when a node is unselected.

      Method collapse

        `GTK1.Ctree collapse(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Collapse the node, hiding it's children. If no node is given, expand the toplevel of the tree

      Method collapse_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree collapse_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Collapse the node, showing it's children, it's childrens children, etc. If no node is given, collapse the whole tree

      Method collapse_to_depth

        `GTK1.Ctree collapse_to_depth(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int depth)`

      Description

        Collapse depth levels of the tree, starting with the specified node. If no node is given, start with the toplevel node.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Ctree GTK1.Ctree(int columns, int tree_column)`

      Description

        tree_column is the column that has the tree graphics (lines and expander buttons).

      Method expand

        `GTK1.Ctree expand(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Expand the node, showing it's children. If no node is given, expand the toplevel of the tree

      Method expand_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree expand_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Expand the node, showing it's children, it's childrens children, etc. If no node is given, expand the whole tree

      Method expand_to_depth

        `GTK1.Ctree expand_to_depth(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int depth)`

      Description

        Expand depth levels of the tree, starting with the specified node. If no node is given, start with the toplevel node.

      Method find

        `int find(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GTK1.CTreeNode start)`

      Description

        Returns true if the node is a child of the start node.

        If you omit the starting node, the tree will be searched from the root.

      Method find_by_row_data

        `GTK1.Ctree find_by_row_data(object data, CTreeNode|void root)`

      Description

        Find a node in the tree starting with root, that has the given user data. If no node is found, 0 is returned.

      Method find_node_ptr

        `GTK1.CTreeNode find_node_ptr(GTK1.CTreeRow node)`

      Description

        Given a W(CTreeRow) (deprectated structure in PiGTK), return the W(CTreeNode) associated with the row.

      Method get_expander_style

        `int get_expander_style()`

      Description

        The style of the expander buttons, one of CTREE_EXPANDER_CIRCULAR, CTREE_EXPANDER_NONE, CTREE_EXPANDER_SQUARE and CTREE_EXPANDER_TRIANGLE

      Method get_line_style

        `int get_line_style()`

      Description

        The style of the lines, one of CTREE_LINES_DOTTED, CTREE_LINES_NONE, CTREE_LINES_SOLID and CTREE_LINES_TABBED

      Method get_show_stub

        `int get_show_stub()`

      Description

        Will stubs be shows?

      Method get_tree_column

        `int get_tree_column()`

      Description

        The column that is the tree column (the one with the expand/collapse icons)

      Method get_tree_indent

        `int get_tree_indent()`

      Description

        The number of pixels to indent the tree levels.

      Method get_tree_spacing

        `int get_tree_spacing()`

      Description

        The number of pixels between the tree and the columns

      Inherit Clist

        inherit GTK1.Clist : Clist

      Method insert_node

        `GTK1.Ctree insert_node(GTK1.CTreeNode parent, GTK1.CTreeNode sibling, array text, int is_leaf, int expanded)`

      Description

        At least one of parent or sibling must be specified. If both are specified, sibling->parent() must be equal to parent.

        If the parent and sibling is 0, the position is at the root of the tree, if the sibling is NULL, it will be the last child of parent, otherwise it will be inserted just before the sibling.

      Method is_ancestor

        `int is_ancestor(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GTK1.CTreeNode child)`

      Description

        Returns true if node is an ancestor of child

      Method is_hot_spot

        `int is_hot_spot(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Returns true if the given coordinates lie on an expander button

      Method is_viewable

        `int is_viewable(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Returns 1 if a certain node can be viewed (with or without scrolling of the tree). Returns 0 if the node is in a folded part of the tree.

      Method last

        `GTK1.CTreeNode last(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Returns the last child of the last child of the last child... of the given node.

      Method move

        `GTK1.Ctree move(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GTK1.CTreeNode new_parent, GTK1.CTreeNode new_sibling)`

      Description

        Move a node. Coordinates work as for insert.

      Method node_get_cell_style

        `GTK1.Style node_get_cell_style(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int col)`

      Description

        Return the style of a cell

      Method node_get_cell_type

        `int node_get_cell_type(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column)`

      Description

        Return the celltype of this node.

      Method node_get_pixmap

        `mapping node_get_pixmap(CTreeNode node, int column)`

      Description

        Returns the pixmap and mask of this node in a mapping: ([ "pixmap":the_pixmap, "mask":the_bitmap ])

      Method node_get_pixtext

        `mapping node_get_pixtext(GTK1.CTreeNode n, int columne)`

      Description

        Returns the pixmap, mask and text of this node in a mapping: ([ "pixmap":the_pixmap, "mask":the_bitmap, "text":the_text ])

      Method node_get_row_data

        `object node_get_row_data(GTK1.CTreeNode n)`

      Description

        Return the data associated with a node, or 0.

      Method node_get_row_style

        `GTK1.Style node_get_row_style(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Return the style of a row

      Method node_get_selectable

        `int node_get_selectable(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Return whether or not this node can be selcted by the user

      Method node_get_text

        `string node_get_text(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column)`

      Description

        Returns the text of the specified node

      Method node_is_visible

        `int node_is_visible(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Return 1 if the node is currently visible

      Method node_moveto

        `GTK1.Ctree node_moveto(GTK1.CTreeNode row, int column, float row_align, float col_align)`

      Description

        Scroll the tree so a specified node (and column) is visible. If the node is folded, it's first visible parent will be shown.

      Method node_nth

        `GTK1.CTreeNode node_nth(int row)`

      Description

        Return the node that is currently visible on the specified row.

      Method node_set_background

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_background(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GDK1.Color color)`

      Description

        Set the background of a row

      Method node_set_cell_style

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_cell_style(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int col, GTK1.Style style)`

      Description

        Set the style of a cell

      Method node_set_foreground

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_foreground(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GDK1.Color col)`

      Description

        Set the foreground of a row

      Method node_set_pixmap

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_pixmap(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column, GDK1.Pixmap pixmap, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap in a cell

      Method node_set_pixtext

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_pixtext(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column, string text, int spacing, GDK1.Pixmap pixmap, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap and text in a cell

      Method node_set_row_data

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_row_data(GTK1.CTreeNode node, object data)`

      Description

        Set the user data associated with the specified node. This data can be used to find nodes, and when a node is selected it can be easily retrieved using node_get_row_data.

        You can only use objects as row data right now

      Method node_set_row_style

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_row_style(GTK1.CTreeNode node, GTK1.Style style)`

      Description

        Set the style of a row

      Method node_set_selectable

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_selectable(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int selectablep)`

      Description

        Whether this node can be selected by the user.

      Method node_set_shift

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_shift(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column, int vertical, int horizontal)`

      Description

        Shift the given cell the given amounts in pixels.

      Method node_set_text

        `GTK1.Ctree node_set_text(GTK1.CTreeNode node, int column, string text)`

      Description

        Set the text in a cell

      Method remove_node

        `GTK1.Ctree remove_node(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Remove a node and it's subnodes from the tree. The nodes will be destroyed, so you cannot add them again.

      Method select

        `GTK1.Ctree select(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Select a node.

      Method select_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree select_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Select a node and it's children.

      Method set_expander_style

        `GTK1.Ctree set_expander_style(int style)`

      Description

        Set the expander style, one of CTREE_EXPANDER_CIRCULAR, CTREE_EXPANDER_NONE, CTREE_EXPANDER_SQUARE and CTREE_EXPANDER_TRIANGLE

      Method set_indent

        `GTK1.Ctree set_indent(int npixels)`

      Description

        Set the indentation level

      Method set_line_style

        `GTK1.Ctree set_line_style(int style)`

      Description

        Set the line style, one of CTREE_LINES_DOTTED, CTREE_LINES_NONE, CTREE_LINES_SOLID and CTREE_LINES_TABBED

      Method set_node_info

        `GTK1.Ctree set_node_info(GTK1.CTreeNode node, string text, int spacing, GDK1.Pixmap pixmap_closed, GDK1.Bitmap mask_closed, GDK1.Pixmap pixmap_opened, GDK1.Bitmap mask_opened, int is_leaf, int expanded)`

      Description

        text : | The texts to be shown in each column.
        spacing : | The extra space between the pixmap and the text.
        pixmap_closed : | The pixmap to be used when the node is collapsed. Can be NULL.
        mask_closed : | The mask for the above pixmap. Can be NULL.
        pixmap_opened : | The pixmap to be used when the children are visible. Can be NULL.
        mask_opened : | The mask for the above pixmap. Can be NULL.
        is_leaf : | Whether this node is going to be a leaf.
        expanded : | Whether this node should start out expanded or not.

      Method set_show_stub

        `GTK1.Ctree set_show_stub(int stubp)`

      Description

        If true, the 'stub' will be shown. The stub is the small line that goes horizontally from the expand or collapse button to the actual contents of the tree

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK1.Ctree set_spacing(int npixels)`

      Description

        Set the spacing between the tree column and the other columns

      Method sort_node

        `GTK1.Ctree sort_node(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Sort the specified node.

      Method sort_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree sort_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Sort the specified node and it's children.

      Method toggle_expansion

        `GTK1.Ctree toggle_expansion(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        If the node is expanded, collapse it, and if it's collapsed, expand it.

      Method toggle_expansion_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree toggle_expansion_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Toggle the expansion of the whole subtree, starting with node.

      Method unselect

        `GTK1.Ctree unselect(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Unselect a node.

      Method unselect_recursive

        `GTK1.Ctree unselect_recursive(GTK1.CTreeNode node)`

      Description

        Unselect a node and it's children.

    CLASS GTK1.Curve

      Description

        `GTK1.Curve()`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Curve GTK1.Curve()`

      Method get_vector

        `array get_vector(int num_points)`

      Inherit DrawingArea

        inherit GTK1.DrawingArea : DrawingArea

      Method reset

        `GTK1.Curve reset()`

      Method set_curve_type

        `GTK1.Curve set_curve_type(int type)`

      Description

        One of CURVE_TYPE_FREE, CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR and CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE;

      Method set_gamma

        `GTK1.Curve set_gamma(float gamma)`

      Method set_range

        `GTK1.Curve set_range(float min_x, float max_x, float min_y, float max_y)`

      Method set_vector

        `GTK1.Curve set_vector(int nelems, array curve)`

    CLASS GTK1.Data

      Description

        A class inherited by all objects used to store data (they are not widgets)

        Signals: disconnect

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK1.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK1.Databox

      Description

        GtkDatabox is designed to display large amounts of numerical data fast and easy. Thousands of data points (X and Y coordinate) may be displayed without any problems, zooming and scrolling as well as optional rulers are already included.

        The widget may be used as display for oscilloscopes or other applications that need to display fast changes in their data.

        `GTK1.Databox x=GTK1.Databox(); x->data_add_x_y(3, ({ 1.0, 0.5, 0.0 }), ({1.0, -1.0, 0.0}),GDK1.Color(Image.Color.red), GTK1.DataboxLines,2); x->rescale(); x->set_usize(300,300); return x;`

        Signals: marked

        selection_canceled

        selection_changed

        selection_started

        selection_stopped

        zoomed

      Method create

        `GTK1.Databox GTK1.Databox()`

      Description

        Create a new databox widget

      Method data_add_x

        `int data_add_x(int nelems, array x, int shared_Y_index, GDK1.Color color, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method data_add_x_y

        `int data_add_x_y(int nelems, array x, array y, GDK1.Color color, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method data_add_y

        `int data_add_y(int nelems, array y, int shared_X_index, GDK1.Color color, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method data_destroy

        `int data_destroy(int index)`

      Method data_destroy_all

        `int data_destroy_all()`

      Method data_get_extrema

        `array data_get_extrema()`

      Method data_get_value

        `mapping data_get_value(int x, int y)`

      Method data_get_visible_extrema

        `array data_get_visible_extrema()`

      Method disable_zoom

        `GTK1.Databox disable_zoom()`

      Method enable_zoom

        `GTK1.Databox enable_zoom()`

      Method hide_cross

        `GTK1.Databox hide_cross()`

      Method hide_rulers

        `GTK1.Databox hide_rulers()`

      Method hide_scrollbars

        `GTK1.Databox hide_scrollbars()`

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK1.Vbox : Vbox

      Method rescale

        `GTK1.Databox rescale()`

      Method rescale_with_values

        `GTK1.Databox rescale_with_values(float minx, float miny, float maxx, float maxy)`

      Method set_color

        `int set_color(int index, GDK1.Color color)`

      Method set_data_type

        `int set_data_type(int index, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method show_cross

        `GTK1.Databox show_cross()`

      Method show_rulers

        `GTK1.Databox show_rulers()`

      Method show_scrollbars

        `GTK1.Databox show_scrollbars()`

    CLASS GTK1.Dial

      Description

        This widget provides an analog dial widget, similar to, for example, a physical volume control on a stereo. Dial values can be changable or read-only for value reporting. `GTK1.Dial( GTK1.Adjustment() );`

        `GTK1.Dial( GTK1.Adjustment(10.0) )->set_percentage(0.4);`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Dial GTK1.Dial(GTK1.Adjustment adjustment)`

      Method get_adjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_adjustment()`

      Method get_percentage

        `float get_percentage()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current percentage held in the dial widget.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current value helt in the dial widget.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK1.Dial set_adjustment(GTK1.Adjustment pos)`

      Description

        set_adjustment() does absolutely nothing if you pass it the adjustment that range is already using, regardless of whether you changed any of its fields or not. If you pass it a new Adjustment, it will unreference the old one if it exists (possibly destroying it), connect the appropriate signals to the new one, and call the private function gtk_range_adjustment_changed(), which will (or at least, is supposed to...) recalculate the size and/or position of the slider and redraw if necessary.

      Method set_percentage

        `GTK1.Dial set_percentage(float percent)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK1.Dial's value to percent of dial->adjustment->upper. The upper value is set when the GtkAdjustment is created.

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK1.Dial set_update_policy(int when)`

      Description

        The "update policy" of a range widget defines at what points during user interaction it will change the value field of its Adjustment and emit the "value_changed" signal on this Adjustment. The update policies are:

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyContinuous

          This is the default. The "value_changed" signal is emitted continuously, i.e., whenever the slider is moved by even the tiniest amount.

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyDiscontinuous

          The "value_changed" signal is only emitted once the slider has stopped moving and the user has released the mouse button.

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyDelayed

          The "value_changed" signal is emitted when the user releases the mouse button, or if the slider stops moving for a short period of time.

      Method set_value

        `float set_value(float to)`

      Description

        Sets the current value held in the GtkDial's adjustment object to value. Returns the new percentage of value to the adjustment's upper limit.

      Method set_view_only

        `GTK1.Dial set_view_only(int view_only)`

      Description

        Specifies whether or not the user is to be able to edit the value represented by the dial widget. If view_only is TRUE, the dial will be set to view-only mode, and the user will not be able to edit it. If view_only is FALSE, the user will be able to change the valuerepresented.

    CLASS GTK1.Dialog

      Description

        A dialog is a window with a few default widgets added. The 'vbox' is the main content area of the widget. The 'action_area' is allocated for buttons (ok, cancel etc)

      Method create

        `GTK1.Dialog GTK1.Dialog()`

      Description

        Create a new dialog widget.

      Method get_action_area

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox get_action_area()`

      Description

        The action area, this is where the buttons (ok, cancel etc) go

      Method get_vbox

        `GTK1.Vbox get_vbox()`

      Description

        The vertical box that should contain the contents of the dialog

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

    CLASS GTK1.DrawingArea

      Description

        The drawing area is a window you can draw in. Please note that you must handle refresh and resize events on your own. Use W(pDrawingArea) for a drawingarea with automatic refresh/resize handling. `GTK1.DrawingArea()->set_usize(100,100)`

      Method clear

        `GTK1.DrawingArea clear(int|void x, int|void y, int|void width, int|void height)`

      Description

        Either clears the rectangle defined by the arguments, of if no arguments are specified, the whole drawable.

      Method copy_area

        `GTK1.DrawingArea copy_area(GDK1.GC gc, int xdest, int ydest, GTK1.Widget source, int xsource, int ysource, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Copies the rectangle defined by xsource,ysource and width,height from the source drawable, and places the results at xdest,ydest in the drawable in which this function is called.

      Method create

        `GTK1.DrawingArea GTK1.DrawingArea()`

      Method draw_arc

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_arc(GDK1.GC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int angle1, int angle2)`

      Description

        Draws a single circular or elliptical arc. Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles. The center of the circle or ellipse is the center of the rectangle, and the major and minor axes are specified by the width and height. Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion, and negative angles indicate clockwise motion. If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees, it is truncated to 360 degrees.

      Method draw_bitmap

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_bitmap(GDK1.GC gc, GDK1.Bitmap bitmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw a GDK(Bitmap) in this drawable. NOTE: This drawable must be a bitmap as well. This will be fixed in GTK 1.3

      Method draw_image

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_image(GDK1.GC gc, GDK1.Image image, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK(Image) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_line

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_line(GDK1.GC gc, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK1.DrawingArea()->set_usize(100,100); delay: g = GDK1.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK1.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_line(g,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end

      Method draw_pixmap

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_pixmap(GDK1.GC gc, GDK1.Pixmap pixmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK(Pixmap) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_point

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_point(GDK1.GC gc, int x, int y)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK1.DrawingArea()->set_usize(10,10); delay: g = GDK1.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK1.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_point(g, x, x); img_end

      Method draw_rectangle

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_rectangle(GDK1.GC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK1.DrawingArea()->set_usize(100,100); delay: g = GDK1.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK1.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_rectangle(g,0,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end img_begin w = GTK1.DrawingArea()->set_usize(100,100); delay: g = GDK1.GC(w); delay: for(int x = 0; x<30; x++) { delay: g->set_foreground(GDK1.Color(random(255),random(255),random(255)) ); delay: w->draw_rectangle(g,1,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); delay: } img_end

      Method draw_text

        `GTK1.DrawingArea draw_text(GDK1.GC gc, GDK1.Font font, int x, int y, string text, int forcewide)`

      Description

        y is used as the baseline for the text. If forcewide is true, the string will be expanded to a wide string even if it is not already one. This is useful when writing text using either unicode or some other 16 bit font.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method size

        `GTK1.DrawingArea size(int width, int height)`

      Description

        This function is OBSOLETE

    CLASS GTK1.Editable

      Description

        The GTK1.Editable class is a base class for widgets for editing text, such as W(Entry) and W(Text). It cannot be instantiated by itself. The editable class contains functions for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can connect to to modify the behavior of a widget.

        Signals: activate Indicates that the user has activated the widget in some fashion. Generally, this will be done with a keystroke. (The default binding for this action is Return for GTK1.Entry and Control-Return for GTK1.Text.

        changed Called when the text in the edit area is changed

        copy_clipboard An action signal. Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard.

        cut_clipboard An action signal. Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard and then deleted from the widget.

        delete_text This signal is emitted when text is deleted from the widget by the user. The default handler for this signal will normally be responsible for inserting the text, so by connecting to this signal and then stopping the signal with signal_emit_stop(), it is possible to modify the inserted text, or prevent it from being inserted entirely. The start_pos and end_pos parameters are interpreted as for delete_text()

        insert_text This signal is emitted when text is inserted into the widget by the user. The default handler for this signal will normally be responsible for inserting the text, so by connecting to this signal and then stopping the signal with signal_emit_stop(), it is possible to modify the inserted text, or prevent it from being inserted entirely.

        kill_char An action signal. Delete a single character.

        kill_line An action signal. Delete a single line.

        kill_word n action signal. Delete a single word.

        move_cursor An action signal. Move the cursor position.

        move_page An action signal. Move the cursor by pages.

        move_to_column An action signal. Move the cursor to the given column.

        move_to_row An action signal. Move the cursor to the given row.

        move_word An action signal. Move the cursor by words.

        paste_clipboard An action signal. Causes the contents of the clipboard to be pasted into the editable widget at the current cursor position.

        set_editable Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable widget or not. This is meant to be overriden by child classes and should not generally be useful to applications.

      Method copy_clipboard

        `GTK1.Editable copy_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard.

      Method cut_clipboard

        `GTK1.Editable cut_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard and then deleted from the widget.

      Method delete_selection

        `GTK1.Editable delete_selection()`

      Description

        Deletes the current contents of the widgets selection and disclaims the selection.

      Method delete_text

        `GTK1.Editable delete_text(int start_pos, int end_pos)`

      Description

        Delete a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted will be those characters from start_pos to the end of the text.

      Method get_chars

        `string get_chars(int start_pos, int end_pos)`

      Description

        Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the the characters retrieved will be those characters from start_pos to the end of the text.

      Method get_position

        `int get_position()`

      Description

        Returns the cursor position

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method insert_text

        `GTK1.Editable insert_text(string text, int num_chars, int where)`

      Description

        Insert 'num_chars' characters from the text at the position 'where'.

      Method paste_clipboard

        `GTK1.Editable paste_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the contents of the clipboard to be pasted into the given widget at the current cursor position.

      Method select_region

        `GTK1.Editable select_region(int start_pos, int end_pos)`

      Description

        Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are those characters at positions from start_pos up to, but not including end_pos. If end_pos is negative, then the the characters selected will be those characters from start_pos to the end of the text. are

      Method set_editable

        `GTK1.Editable set_editable(int editablep)`

      Description

        Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable widget or not.

      Method set_position

        `GTK1.Editable set_position(int pos)`

      Description

        Sets the cursor position.

    CLASS GTK1.Entry

      Description

        Use this widget when you want the user to input a single line of text. `GTK1.Entry()->set_text("Hello world")->set_editable(1)`

      Method append_text

        `GTK1.Entry append_text(string text)`

      Description

        Append the specified string at the end of the entry

      Method create

        `GTK1.Entry GTK1.Entry()`

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Returns the contents of the entry widget.

      Inherit Editable

        inherit GTK1.Editable : Editable

      Method prepend_text

        `GTK1.Entry prepend_text(string text)`

      Description

        Prepend the specified string to the start of the entry

      Method set_max_length

        `GTK1.Entry set_max_length(int maxlen)`

      Description

        text is truncated if needed

      Method set_text

        `GTK1.Entry set_text(string text)`

      Description

        Set the text to the specified string. The old text is dropped.

      Method set_visibility

        `GTK1.Entry set_visibility(int visiblep)`

      Description

        0 indicates invisible text (password boxes, as an example)

    CLASS GTK1.EventBox

      Description

        Some gtk widgets don't have associated X windows, so they just draw on their parents. Because of this, they cannot receive events and if they are incorrectly sized, they don't clip so you can get messy overwritting etc. If you require more from these widgets, the EventBox is for you.

        At first glance, the EventBox widget might appear to be totally useless. It draws nothing on the screen and responds to no events. However, it does serve a function - it provides an X window for its child widget. This is important as many GTK widgets do not have an associated X window. Not having an X window saves memory and improves performance, but also has some drawbacks. A widget without an X window cannot receive events, and does not perform any clipping on it's contents. Although the name EventBox emphasizes the event-handling function, the widget can also be used for clipping.

        The primary use for this widget is when you want to receive events for a widget without a window. Examples of such widgets are labels and images.

        `GTK1.EventBox()->set_usize(100,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.EventBox GTK1.EventBox()`

      Description

        Create a new event box widget

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

    CLASS GTK1.FileSelection

      Description

        GtkFileSelection should be used to retrieve file or directory names from the user. It will create a new dialog window containing a directory list, and a file list corresponding to the current working directory. The filesystem can be navigated using the directory list, the drop-down history menu, or the TAB key can be used to navigate using filename completion common in text based editors such as emacs and jed.

        The default filename can be set using set_filename() and the selected filename retrieved using get_filename().

        Use complete() to display files that match a given pattern. This can be used for example, to show only *.txt files, or only files beginning with gtk*.

        Simple file operations; create directory, delete file, and rename file, are available from buttons at the top of the dialog. These can be hidden using hide_fileop_buttons() and shown again using show_fileop_buttons().

        `GTK1.FileSelection("File selector")`

      Method complete

        `GTK1.FileSelection complete(string pattern)`

      Description

        Will attempt to match pattern to a valid filename in the current directory. If a match can be made, the matched filename will appear in the text entry field of the file selection dialog. If a partial match can be made, the "Files" list will contain those file names which have been partially matched.

      Method create

        `GTK1.FileSelection GTK1.FileSelection(string window_title)`

      Description

        Creates a new file selection dialog box. By default it will list the files in the current working directory. Operation buttons allowing the user to create a directory, delete files, and rename files will also be present by default.

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK1.Button get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        The cancel button

      Method get_dir_list

        `GTK1.Clist get_dir_list()`

      Description

        The list of directories

      Method get_file_list

        `GTK1.Clist get_file_list()`

      Description

        The list of files

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Returns the currently entered filename as a string

      Method get_fileop_c_dir

        `GTK1.Button get_fileop_c_dir()`

      Description

        The create directory button in the file operation button group

      Method get_fileop_del_file

        `GTK1.Button get_fileop_del_file()`

      Description

        The delete file button in the file operation button group

      Method get_fileop_ren_file

        `GTK1.Button get_fileop_ren_file()`

      Description

        The rename file button in the file operation button group

      Method get_help_button

        `GTK1.Button get_help_button()`

      Description

        The help button

      Method get_history_pulldown

        `GTK1.OptionMenu get_history_pulldown()`

      Description

        Used to create the drop-down directory histor

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK1.Button get_ok_button()`

      Description

        The ok button

      Method hide_fileop_buttons

        `GTK1.FileSelection hide_fileop_buttons()`

      Description

        Hides the file operation buttons that normally appear at the top of the dialog. Useful if you wish to create a custom file selector, based on GTK1.FileSelection.

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

      Method set_filename

        `GTK1.FileSelection set_filename(string fname)`

      Description

        Sets a default path for the file requestor. If filename includes a directory path, then the requestor will open with that path as its current working directory.

      Method show_fileop_buttons

        `GTK1.FileSelection show_fileop_buttons()`

      Description

        Shows the file operation buttons, if they have previously been hidden. The rest of the widgets in the dialog will be resized accordingly.

    CLASS GTK1.Fixed

      Description

        A fixed container is a container that keeps it's children at fixed locations and give them fixed sizes, both given in pixels.

        Example: `GTK1.Fixed()->put(GTK1.Label("100,100"), 100, 100)->put(GTK1.Label("0,0"), 0, 0)->set_usize(150,115)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Fixed GTK1.Fixed()`

      Description

        Create a new fixed widget

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method move

        `GTK1.Fixed move(GTK1.Widget widget, int new_xpos, int new_ypos)`

      Description

        Move the widget to new_xpos,new_ypos from it's old location.

      Method put

        `GTK1.Fixed put(GTK1.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Place the widget at xpos,ypos.

    CLASS GTK1.FontSelection

      Description

        `GTK1.FontSelection()`

      Method create

        `GTK1.FontSelection GTK1.FontSelection()`

      Method get_font

        `GDK1.Font get_font()`

      Method get_font_name

        `string get_font_name()`

      Method get_preview_text

        `string get_preview_text()`

      Inherit Notebook

        inherit GTK1.Notebook : Notebook

      Method set_font_name

        `GTK1.FontSelection set_font_name(string xlfd)`

      Description

        This sets the currently displayed font. It should be a valid X Logical Font Description font name (anything else will be ignored), e.g. "-adobe-courier-bold-o-normal--25-*-*-*-*-*-*-*"

      Method set_preview_text

        `GTK1.FontSelection set_preview_text(string text)`

    CLASS GTK1.FontSelectionDialog

      Description

        The GtkFontSelectionDialog widget is a dialog box for selecting a font.

        To set the font which is initially selected, use set_font_name().

        To get the selected font use get_font() or get_font_name().

        To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use set_preview_text().

        The base filter is not yet implemented in Pike GTK1. Filters can be used to limit the fonts shown. There are 2 filters in the GtkFontSelectionDialog - a base filter and a user filter. The base filter can not be changed by the user, so this can be used when the user must choose from the restricted set of fonts (e.g. for a terminal-type application you may want to force the user to select a fixed-width font). The user filter can be changed or reset by the user, by using the 'Reset Filter' button or changing the options on the 'Filter' page of the dialog. `GTK1.FontSelectionDialog("Select a font")`

      Method create

        `GTK1.FontSelectionDialog GTK1.FontSelectionDialog(string title)`

      Description

        Create a new font selection dialog with the specified window title

      Method get_apply_button

        `GTK1.Button get_apply_button()`

      Description

        The apply button

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK1.Button get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        The cancel button

      Method get_fontsel

        `GTK1.FontSelection get_fontsel()`

      Description

        The W(FontSelection) widget

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK1.Button get_ok_button()`

      Description

        The ok button

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

    CLASS GTK1.Frame

      Description

        The frame widget is a Bin that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label. If present, the label is drawn in a gap in the top side of the frame. The position of the label can be controlled with set_label_align().

        Used to visually group objects.

        `GTK1.Frame("Title")->add(GTK1.Label("Contents"))`

        `GTK1.Frame()->add(GTK1.Label("Contents"))`

        `GTK1.Frame()->add(GTK1.Label("Contents"))->set_shadow_type(GTK1.SHADOW_IN)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Frame GTK1.Frame(string|void label_text)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Frame) widget.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method set_label

        `GTK1.Frame set_label(string|void label_text)`

      Description

        Set the text of the label.

      Method set_label_align

        `GTK1.Frame set_label_align(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Arguments are xalignment and yalignment. 0.0 is left or topmost, 1.0 is right or bottommost. The default value for a newly created Frame is 0.0.

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.Frame set_shadow_type(int shadow_type)`

      Description

        Set the shadow type for the Frame widget. The type is one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

    CLASS GTK1.GLArea

      Method create

        `GTK1.GLArea GTK1.GLArea(array gloptions)`

      Inherit DrawingArea

        inherit GTK1.DrawingArea : DrawingArea

      Method make_current

        `GTK1.GLArea make_current()`

      Method swap_buffers

        `GTK1.GLArea swap_buffers()`

      Method wait_gdk

        `GTK1.GLArea wait_gdk()`

      Method wait_gl

        `GTK1.GLArea wait_gl()`

    CLASS GTK1.GammaCurve

      Description

        A gamma curve widget.. Rather complex.

        Lets the user edit a gamma curve (a one-to-one mapping usually used to adjust the intensity of an image to the physical characteristics of the output device). You can set the minimum and maximum values for input and output. You can set the initial vector as well. You are guaranteed that every input value will have a (not necessarily unique) output value specified.

        `GTK1.GammaCurve()->set_usize(210,130)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.GammaCurve GTK1.GammaCurve()`

      Description

        Create a new gamma curve

      Method get_curve

        `GTK1.Curve get_curve()`

      Description

        The actual curve

      Method get_gamma

        `float get_gamma()`

      Description

        The current gamma value

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK1.Vbox : Vbox

    CLASS GTK1.GladeXML

      Description

        Glade is a free GUI builder for GTK+ and Gnome. It's normally used to create C-code, but can also produce code for other languages. Libglade is a utility library that builds the GUI from the Glade XML save files. This module uses libglade and allows you to easily make GUI designs to be used with your Pike applications. Since PiGTK doesn't support Gnome yet, you can only use the normal GTK widgets.

      Method get_widget

        `GTK1.Widget get_widget(string name)`

      Description

        This function is used to get get the widget corresponding to name in the interface description. You would use this if you have to do anything to the widget after loading.

      Method get_widget_by_long_name

        `GTK1.Widget get_widget_by_long_name(string long_name)`

      Description

        This function is used to get the widget corresponding to long_name in the interface description. You would use this if you have to do anything to the widget after loading. This function differs from GladeXML->get_widget, in that you have to give the long form of the widget name, with all its parent widget names, separated by periods.

      Method get_widget_long_name

        `string get_widget_long_name(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Used to get the long name of a widget that was generated by a GladeXML object.

      Method get_widget_name

        `string get_widget_name(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Used to get the name of a widget that was generated by a GladeXML object.

      Method new

        `GTK1.GladeXML new(string filename, string|void root, string|void domain)`

      Description

        Creates a new GladeXML object (and the corresponding widgets) from the XML file filename. Optionally it will only build the interface from the widget node root. This feature is useful if you only want to build say a toolbar or menu from the XML file, but not the window it is embedded in. Note also that the XML parse tree is cached to speed up creating another GladeXML object for the same file. The third optional argument is used to specify a different translation domain from the default to be used.

      Method new_from_memory

        `GTK1.GladeXML new_from_memory(string data, string|void root, string|void domain)`

      Description

        Creates a new GladeXML object (and the corresponding widgets) from the string data. Optionally it will only build the interface from the widget node root. This feature is useful if you only want to build say a toolbar or menu from the XML document, but not the window it is embedded in. The third optional argument is used to specify a different translation domain from the default to be used.

      Method signal_autoconnect

        `GTK1.GladeXML signal_autoconnect(mapping callbacks, mixed data)`

      Description

        Try to connect functions to all signals in the interface. The mapping should consist of handler name : function pairs. The data argument will be saved and sent as the first argument to all callback functions.

      Method signal_autoconnect_new

        `GTK1.GladeXML signal_autoconnect_new(mapping callbacks, mixed data)`

      Description

        Try to connect functions to all signals in the interface. The mapping should consist of handler name : function pairs. This function differs from the signal_connect function in how it calls the callback function.

        The old interface:

               void signal_handler( mixed data, GTK1.Object object,
                                    mixed ... signal_arguments )

        The new interface:

               void signal_handler( mixed ... signal_arguments,
                                    mixed data, GTK1.Object object )

    CLASS GTK1.HandleBox

      Description

        The contents of a handle box can be 'dragged' out of the box by the user. The contents will then be placed in a separate window. `GTK1.HandleBox()->add(GTK1.Label("The contents"))`

        Signals: child_attached Called when a new child is added to the box

        child_detached Called when a child is removed from the box

      Method create

        `GTK1.HandleBox GTK1.HandleBox()`

      Description

        Create a new handle box widget.

      Method get_child_detached

        `int get_child_detached()`

      Description

        Is the child detatched?

      Method get_float_window_mapped

        `int get_float_window_mapped()`

      Description

        Is the floating window mapped?

      Method get_handle_position

        `int get_handle_position()`

      Description

        The position of the handle. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method get_in_drag

        `int get_in_drag()`

      Description

        1 if the window is beeing dragged around right now.

      Method get_shrink_on_detach

        `int get_shrink_on_detach()`

      Description

        True if the container should shrink when the child is detatched

      Method get_snap_edge

        `int get_snap_edge()`

      Description

        The edge to snap to. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP, or -1 for unset.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

      Method set_handle_position

        `GTK1.HandleBox set_handle_position(int pos)`

      Description

        The position of the handle. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method set_set_shrink_on_detach

        `int set_set_shrink_on_detach()`

      Description

        True if the container should shrink when the child is detatched

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.HandleBox set_shadow_type(int shadow_type)`

      Description

        One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_snap_edge

        `GTK1.HandleBox set_snap_edge(int pos)`

      Description

        The edge to snap to. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP, or -1 for unset.

    CLASS GTK1.Hbox

      Description

        Most packing is done by creating boxes. These are invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into which come in two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box. This is the horizontal one. When packing widgets into a horizontal box, the objects are inserted horizontally from left to right or right to left depending on the call used.

        `GTK1.Hbox(0,0)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK1.Hbox(1,0)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK1.Hbox(1,40)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hbox GTK1.Hbox(int all_same_size, int hpadding)`

      Description

        Create a new horizontal box widget. If all_same_size is true, all widgets will have exactly the same size. hpadding is added to the left and right of the children.

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK1.Box : Box

    CLASS GTK1.HbuttonBox

      Description

        A HbuttonBox is very similar to a Hbox. The major diffference is that the button box is made to pack buttons in, and has a few convenience function for normal button layouts.

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_usize(400,30)`

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)->set_usize(400,30)`

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_EDGE)->set_usize(400,30)`

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_START)->set_usize(400,30)`

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_END)->set_usize(400,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.HbuttonBox GTK1.HbuttonBox()`

      Description

        Create a new horizontal button box

      Inherit ButtonBox

        inherit GTK1.ButtonBox : ButtonBox

    CLASS GTK1.Hpaned

      Description

        The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle that the user can drag to change the ratio. This widgets makes a horizontal division

        See W(Paned) for details.

        `GTK1.Hpaned()->add1(GTK1.Label("Left\nSide\nOf\nPane"))->add2(GTK1.Label("Right\nSide\nOf\nPane"))->set_usize(100,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hpaned GTK1.Hpaned()`

      Inherit Paned

        inherit GTK1.Paned : Paned

    CLASS GTK1.Hruler

      Description

        Ruler widgets are used to indicate the location of the mouse pointer in a given window. A window can have a vertical ruler spanning across the width and a horizontal ruler spanning down the height. A small triangular indicator on the ruler shows the exact location of the pointer relative to the ruler.

        `GTK1.Hruler()->set_metric(GTK1.PIXELS)->set_range(0.0,100.0,50.0,100.0)->draw_ticks()->draw_pos()->set_usize(300,30)`

        `GTK1.Hruler()->set_metric(GTK1.CENTIMETERS)->set_range(0.0,100.0,50.0,100.0)->draw_ticks()->draw_pos()->set_usize(300,30)`

        `GTK1.Hruler()->set_usize(300,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hruler GTK1.Hruler()`

      Description

        Used to create a new hruler widget.

      Inherit Ruler

        inherit GTK1.Ruler : Ruler

    CLASS GTK1.Hscale

      Description

        The GTK1.HScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a horizontal slider. A GTK1.Adjustment is used to set the initial value, the lower and upper bounds, and the step and page increments.

        See W(Scale) for details

        The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent W(Scale) class's functions.

        `GTK1.Hscale(GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(300,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hscale GTK1.Hscale(GTK1.Adjustment settings)`

      Description

        Used to create a new hscale widget. The adjustment argument can either be an existing W(Adjustment), or 0, in which case one will be created for you.

      Inherit Scale

        inherit GTK1.Scale : Scale

    CLASS GTK1.Hscrollbar

      Description

        A horizontal scrollbar. General documentation: See W(Scrollbar) `GTK1.Hscrollbar(GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(300,15)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hscrollbar GTK1.Hscrollbar(GTK1.Adjustment adjustment)`

      Description

        Used to create a new vscale widget. The adjustment argument can either be an existing W(Adjustment), or 0, in which case one will be created for you. Specifying 0 might actually be useful in this case, if you wish to pass the newly automatically created adjustment to the constructor function of some other widget which will configure it for you, such as a text widget.

      Inherit Scrollbar

        inherit GTK1.Scrollbar : Scrollbar

    CLASS GTK1.Hseparator

      Description

        Simply creates a horizontal separator. No bells or whistles. `GTK1.Hseparator()->set_usize(300,3)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Hseparator GTK1.Hseparator()`

      Description

        Used to create a new hseparator widget.

      Inherit Separator

        inherit GTK1.Separator : Separator

    CLASS GTK1.Image

      Description

        An image is a image object stored in client, not X server, memory. A pixmap, on the other hand, is a image object stored in the X-server. See GDK1.Image and GDK1.Pixmap.

        `GTK1.Image( GDK1.Image(0)->set(Image.Image(200,200)->test() ) );`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Image GTK1.Image(GDK1.Image image, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        You can skip the mask. The mask is used to mask the drawing of the image on it's background. It will not make the container transparent, though. Use shape_combine_mask on the container with the mask for that.

      Method get

        `mapping get()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "image":GDK1.Image img, "mask":GDK1.Bitmap mask ])

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK1.Misc : Misc

      Method set

        `GTK1.Image set(GDK1.Image image, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Args: GDK1.Image and GDK1.Bitmap, respectively. You can skip the mask. The mask is used to mask the drawing of the image on it's background. It will not make the container transparent, though. Use shape_combine_mask on the container with the mask for that.

        There is no need to call 'set' with the same GDK1.Image again if you have modified the image. You must, however, use -&gt;queue_draw() to redraw the image. Otherwise the old contens will be shown until an refresh of the widget is done for any other reason.

    CLASS GTK1.InputDialog

      Description

        This dialog is used to enable XInput devices. By default, no extension devices are enabled. We need a mechanism to allow users to enable and configure their extension devices. GTK provides the InputDialog widget to automate this process. The following procedure manages an InputDialog widget. It creates the dialog if it isn't present, and shows it otherwise.

             GTK1.InputDialog inputd;
             void create_input_dialog ()
             {
               if (!inputd)
               {
                 inputd = GTK1.InputDialog();
                 inputd-&gt;close_button()-&gt;signal_connect("clicked",inputd-&gt;hide, 0);
                 inputd-&gt;save_button()-&gt;hide();
                 inputd-&gt;show();
               }
               else
                 inputd-&gt;show();
             }

        `GTK1.InputDialog()`

        Signals: disable_device his signal is emitted when the user changes the mode of a device from a GDK_MODE_SCREEN or GDK_MODE_WINDOW to GDK_MODE_ENABLED

        enable_device This signal is emitted when the user changes the mode of a device from GDK_MODE_DISABLED to a GDK_MODE_SCREEN or GDK_MODE_WINDOW.

      Method create

        `GTK1.InputDialog GTK1.InputDialog()`

      Description

        Create a new input dialog window.

      Method get_close_button

        `GTK1.Button get_close_button()`

      Description

        The 'close' button of the dialog.

      Method get_save_button

        `GTK1.Button get_save_button()`

      Description

        The 'save' button of the dialog.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK1.Dialog : Dialog

    CLASS GTK1.Invisible

      Description

        An invisible container, useful, eh? :)

      Method create

        `GTK1.Invisible GTK1.Invisible()`

      Description

        Create a new invisible widget

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

    CLASS GTK1.Item

      Description

        This class is inherited by all 'item' type of widgets.

        Signals: deselect

        select

        toggle

      Method deselect

        `GTK1.Item deselect()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'deselect' event.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

      Method select

        `GTK1.Item select()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'select' event.

      Method toggle

        `GTK1.Item toggle()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'toggle' event.

    CLASS GTK1.Label

      Description

        A simple text label. `GTK1.Label("A simple text label")`

        `GTK1.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")`

        `GTK1.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")->set_justify(GTK1.JUSTIFY_LEFT)`

        `GTK1.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")->set_justify(GTK1.JUSTIFY_RIGHT)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Label GTK1.Label(string text)`

      Description

        Creates a new label.

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK1.Misc : Misc

      Method parse_uline

        `int parse_uline(string uline_string)`

      Description

        Convenience function to set the text and pattern by parsing a string with embedded underscores, returns the appropriate key symbol for the accelerator.

      Method set

        `GTK1.Label set(string text)`

      Description

        DEPRECATED Compatibility function to set the text in the label. Use set_text. This function can dissapear in the future.

      Method set_justify

        `GTK1.Label set_justify(int justify)`

      Description

        one of JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT

      Method set_line_wrap

        `GTK1.Label set_line_wrap(int wrapp)`

      Description

        Should the label autolinewrap?

      Method set_pattern

        `GTK1.Label set_pattern(string pattern_string)`

      Description

        A string with either spaces or underscores. It should be of the same length as the text.

        When a character in the text has a matching _ in the pattern, the character in the label will be underlined.

      Method set_text

        `GTK1.Label set_text(string text)`

      Description

        Set the text in the label

    CLASS GTK1.Layout

      Method create

        `GTK1.Layout GTK1.Layout(GTK1.Adjustment hadjustment, GTK1.Adjustment vadjustment)`

      Method freeze

        `GTK1.Layout freeze()`

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Method get_height

        `int get_height()`

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Method get_width

        `int get_width()`

      Method get_xoffset

        `int get_xoffset()`

      Method get_yoffset

        `int get_yoffset()`

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method move

        `GTK1.Layout move(GTK1.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Method put

        `GTK1.Layout put(GTK1.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Layout set_hadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adj)`

      Method set_size

        `GTK1.Layout set_size(int xsize, int ysize)`

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Layout set_vadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adj)`

      Method thaw

        `GTK1.Layout thaw()`

    CLASS GTK1.Menu

      Description

        A GTK1.Menu is a W(MenuShell) that implements a drop down menu consisting of a list of W(MenuItem) objects which can be navigated and activated by the user to perform application functions.

        A GTK1.Menu is most commonly dropped down by activating a W(MenuItem) in a W(MenuBar) or popped up by activating a W(MenuItem) in another GTK1.Menu.

        A GTK1.Menu can also be popped up by activating a W(OptionMenu). Other composite widgets such as the W(Notebook) can pop up a GTK1.Menu as well.

        Applications can display a GTK1.Menu as a popup menu by calling the popup() function. The example below shows how an application can pop up a menu when the 3rd mouse button is pressed.

               GTK1.Menu menu = create_menu();
               GTK1.Window window = create_window();
               window->signal_connect( "button_press_event", lambda(GTK1.Menu m,
                                                                    GTK1.Window w,
                                                                    mapping e ) {
                         if( e->button == 3 )
                          menu->popup();
                      }, menu );

      Method append

        `GTK1.Menu append(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to the end of the menu's item list.

      Method attach_to_widget

        `GTK1.Menu attach_to_widget(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Attach the menu to a widget

      Method create

        `GTK1.Menu GTK1.Menu()`

      Description

        Create a new GTK1.Menu widget.

      Method detach

        `GTK1.Menu detach()`

      Description

        Detaches the menu from the widget to which it had been attached.

      Method get_active

        `GTK1.Widget get_active()`

      Description

        Returns the selected menu item from the menu. This is used by the W(OptionMenu).

      Method get_attach_widget

        `GTK1.Widget get_attach_widget()`

      Description

        Returns the W(Widget) that the menu is attached to.

      Method get_torn_off

        `int get_torn_off()`

      Description

        return 1 if the menu is torn off.

      Inherit MenuShell

        inherit GTK1.MenuShell : MenuShell

      Method insert

        `GTK1.Menu insert(GTK1.Widget widget, int position)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to the menu's item list at the position indicated by position.

      Method popdown

        `GTK1.Menu popdown()`

      Description

        Removes the menu from the screen.

      Method popup

        `GTK1.Menu popup(int|void button_pressed_to_show_menu)`

      Description

        The default button is 3.

      Method prepend

        `GTK1.Menu prepend(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to the start of the menu's item list.

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK1.Menu reorder_child(GTK1.Widget menuitem, int pos)`

      Description

        Moves a W(MenuItem) to a new position within the GTK1.Menu.

      Method reposition

        `GTK1.Menu reposition()`

      Description

        Repositions the menu according to its position function.

      Method set_accel_group

        `GTK1.Menu set_accel_group(GTK1.AccelGroup accelerators)`

      Description

        Set the W(AccelGroup) which holds global accelerators for the menu.

      Method set_active

        `GTK1.Menu set_active(int activep)`

      Description

        Selects the specified menu item within the menu. This is used by the W(OptionMenu).

      Method set_tearoff_state

        `GTK1.Menu set_tearoff_state(int torn_off)`

      Description

        Changes the tearoff state of the menu. A menu is normally displayed as drop down menu which persists as long as the menu is active. It can also be displayed as a tearoff menu which persists until it is closed or reattached.

      Method set_title

        `GTK1.Menu set_title(string new_title)`

      Description

        Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu is shown as a tearoff menu.

    CLASS GTK1.MenuBar

      Description

        Basically a horizontal W(Menu). The menu image cannot be grabbed automatically, but this is how you would create a menu all in one line. This is not the recommended coding style. `GTK1.MenuBar()->add(GTK1.MenuItem("Menu")->set_submenu(GTK1.Menu()->add(GTK1.MenuItem("Sub")))->select()->activate())->add(GTK1.MenuItem("Bar"))`

      Method append

        `GTK1.MenuBar append(GTK1.Widget menu)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.MenuBar GTK1.MenuBar()`

      Inherit MenuShell

        inherit GTK1.MenuShell : MenuShell

      Method insert

        `GTK1.MenuBar insert(GTK1.Widget menu, int position)`

      Method prepend

        `GTK1.MenuBar prepend(GTK1.Widget menu)`

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.MenuBar set_shadow_type(int int)`

    CLASS GTK1.MenuItem

      Description

        Menu items, to be added to menues.

      Method activate

        `GTK1.MenuItem activate()`

      Description

        Emulate an activate signal

      Method configure

        `GTK1.MenuItem configure(int toggle_indicator, int submenu_indicator)`

      Description

        First argument is 'show_toggle_indicator', second is 'show_submenu_indicator'.

      Method create

        `GTK1.MenuItem GTK1.MenuItem(string|void label)`

      Description

        If a string is supplied, a W(Label) widget is created using that string and added to the item. Otherwise, you should add another widget to the list item with -&gt;add().

      Method deselect

        `GTK1.MenuItem deselect()`

      Description

        Emulate a deselect signal

      Method get_accelerator_width

        `int get_accelerator_width()`

      Description

        The width of the accelerator string, in pixels

      Method get_right_justify

        `int get_right_justify()`

      Description

        Is the widget right justified?

      Method get_show_submenu_indicator

        `int get_show_submenu_indicator()`

      Description

        Should the submenu indicator be shown?

      Method get_show_toggle_indicator

        `int get_show_toggle_indicator()`

      Description

        Should the toggle indicator be shown?

      Method get_submenu_direction

        `int get_submenu_direction()`

      Description

        The direction the submenu will be shown in. One of DIR_DOWN, DIR_LEFT, DIR_RIGHT, DIR_TAB_BACKWARD, DIR_TAB_FORWARD and DIR_UP

      Method get_submenu_placement

        `int get_submenu_placement()`

      Description

        The placement of the submenu.

      Method get_toggle_size

        `int get_toggle_size()`

      Description

        The size of the toggle indicator

      Inherit Item

        inherit GTK1.Item : Item

      Method remove_submenu

        `GTK1.MenuItem remove_submenu()`

      Description

        Remove the submenu for this menu button.

      Method right_justify

        `GTK1.MenuItem right_justify()`

      Description

        Make the menu item stick to the right edge of it's container.

      Method select

        `GTK1.MenuItem select()`

      Description

        Emulate a select signal

      Method set_placement

        `GTK1.MenuItem set_placement(int dir)`

      Description

        (sub menu placement) One of DIRECTION_LEFT and DIRECTION_RIGHT

      Method set_submenu

        `GTK1.MenuItem set_submenu(GTK1.Widget menu)`

      Description

        Set the submenu for this menu button.

    CLASS GTK1.MenuShell

      Description

        A GTK1.MenuShell is the abstract base class used to derive the W(Menu) and W(MenuBar) subclasses.

        A GTK1.MenuShell is a container of W(MenuItem) objects arranged in a list which can be navigated, selected, and activated by the user to perform application functions. A W(MenuItem) can have a submenu associated with it, allowing for nested hierarchical menus.

        Signals: activate_current An action signal that activates the current menu item within the menu shell.

        cancel An action signal which cancels the selection within the menu shell. Causes the selection_done signal to be emitted.

        deactivate This signal is emitted when a menu shell is deactivated.

        move_current An action signal which moves the current menu item in the direction specified by the third argument.

        selection_done This signal is emitted when a selection has been completed within a menu shell.

      Method activate_item

        `GTK1.MenuShell activate_item(GTK1.Widget menu_item, int force_deactivate)`

      Description

        Activates the menu item within the menu shell.

      Method append

        `GTK1.MenuShell append(GTK1.Widget what)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to the end of the menu shell's item list. Same as 'add'.

      Method children

        `array children()`

      Description

        This function returns all children of the menushell as an array.

      Method deactivate

        `GTK1.MenuShell deactivate()`

      Description

        Deactivates the menu shell. Typically this results in the menu shell being erased from the screen.

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        1 if the menu shell is currently active.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method insert

        `GTK1.MenuShell insert(GTK1.Widget what, int where)`

      Description

        Add a widget after the specified location

      Method prepend

        `GTK1.MenuShell prepend(GTK1.Widget what)`

      Description

        Add a menu item to the start of the widget (for a menu: top, for a bar: left)

      Method select_item

        `GTK1.MenuShell select_item(GTK1.Widget menuitem)`

      Description

        Selects the menu item from the menu shell.

    CLASS GTK1.Misc

      Description

        The GTK1.Misc widget is an abstract widget which is not useful itself, but is used to derive subclasses which have alignment and padding attributes.

        The horizontal and vertical padding attributes allows extra space to be added around the widget.

        The horizontal and vertical alignment attributes enable the widget to be positioned within its allocated area. Note that if the widget is added to a container in such a way that it expands automatically to fill its allocated area, the alignment settings will not alter the widgets position.

        `GTK1.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK1.Label("Label"))->set_usize(100,20)`

        `GTK1.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK1.Label("Label")->set_alignment(1.0,0.0))->set_usize(100,20)`

        `GTK1.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK1.Label("Label")->set_alignment(0.0,0.0))->set_usize(100,20)`

      Method get_xalign

        `float get_xalign()`

      Description

        The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).

      Method get_xpad

        `int get_xpad()`

      Description

        The amount of space to add on the left and right of the widget, in pixels.

      Method get_yalign

        `float get_yalign()`

      Description

        The vertical alignment, from 0 (top) to 1 (botton).

      Method get_ypad

        `int get_ypad()`

      Description

        The amount of space to add on the top and bottom of the widget, in pixels.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method set_alignment

        `GTK1.Misc set_alignment(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment of the widget. 0.0 is left or topmost, 1.0 is right or bottommost.

      Method set_padding

        `GTK1.Misc set_padding(int xpad, int ypad)`

      Description

        Sets the amount of space to add around the widget. xpand and ypad are specified in pixels.

    CLASS GTK1.Notebook

      Description

        The NoteBook Widget is a collection of 'pages' that overlap each other, each page contains different information. This widget has become more common lately in GUI programming, and it is a good way to show blocks similar information that warrant separation in their display.

        `GTK1.Notebook( )->set_tab_pos( GTK1.POS_LEFT )->append_page( GTK1.Label("Page 1\nContents"), GTK1.Label("Page 1"))->append_page( GTK1.Label(""), GTK1.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK1.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"), GTK1.Label("Page 3"))`

        `GTK1.Notebook( )->set_tab_pos( GTK1.POS_TOP )->append_page( GTK1.Label("Page 1\nContents"), GTK1.Label("Page 1"))->append_page( GTK1.Label(""), GTK1.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK1.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"), GTK1.Label("Page 3"))`

        `GTK1.Notebook( )->set_tab_pos( GTK1.POS_RIGHT )->append_page( GTK1.Label("Page 1\nContents"), GTK1.Label("Page 1"))->append_page( GTK1.Label(""), GTK1.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK1.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"), GTK1.Label("Page 3"))->next_page()->next_page()`

        Signals: switch_page Called when a different page is selected

      Method append_page

        `GTK1.Notebook append_page(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' to the notebook. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label.

      Method append_page_menu

        `GTK1.Notebook append_page_menu(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label, GTK1.Menu menu)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' to the notebook. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label, the third argument is a menu widget.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Notebook GTK1.Notebook()`

      Method get_current_page

        `int get_current_page()`

      Description

        Returns the index of the currently selected page

      Method get_menu_label

        `GTK1.Widget get_menu_label(GTK1.Widget page)`

      Method get_nth_page

        `GTK1.Widget get_nth_page(int index)`

      Description

        Returns the page for the specified index

      Method get_tab_label

        `GTK1.Widget get_tab_label(GTK1.Widget page)`

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method insert_page

        `GTK1.Notebook insert_page(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a page at the specified location, arguments as for append_page, but an aditional integer specifies the location.

      Method insert_page_menu

        `GTK1.Notebook insert_page_menu(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label, GTK1.Menu menu, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a page at the specified location, arguments as for append_page_menu, but an aditional integer specifies the location.

      Method next_page

        `GTK1.Notebook next_page()`

      Description

        Go to the next page

      Method page_num

        `int page_num(GTK1.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Returns the index for the specified page

      Method popup_disable

        `GTK1.Notebook popup_disable()`

      Description

        Disable the popup menu (set with insert_page_menu)

      Method popup_enable

        `GTK1.Notebook popup_enable()`

      Description

        Enable the popup menu (set with insert_page_menu)

      Method prepend_page

        `GTK1.Notebook prepend_page(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label)`

      Description

        Add a page at the end of the list of pages. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label.

      Method prepend_page_menu

        `GTK1.Notebook prepend_page_menu(GTK1.Widget contents, GTK1.Widget label, GTK1.Menu menu)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' at the end of the list of pages. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label, the third argument is a menu widget.

      Method prev_page

        `GTK1.Notebook prev_page()`

      Description

        Go to the previous page

      Method query_tab_label_packing

        `mapping query_tab_label_packing(GTK1.Widget page)`

      Description

        Returns ([ "expand":expandp, "fill":fillp, "pack_type":type ])

      Method remove_page

        `GTK1.Notebook remove_page(int pos)`

      Description

        Remove a page.

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK1.Notebook reorder_child(GTK1.Widget page, int new_index)`

      Description

        Move the specified page to the index new_index

      Method set_homogeneous_tabs

        `GTK1.Notebook set_homogeneous_tabs(int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        If true, all tabs will have the same size

      Method set_menu_label

        `GTK1.Notebook set_menu_label(GTK1.Widget page, GTK1.Widget label)`

      Method set_menu_label_text

        `GTK1.Notebook set_menu_label_text(GTK1.Widget page, string label)`

      Method set_page

        `GTK1.Notebook set_page(int pos)`

      Description

        Go to the specified page

      Method set_scrollable

        `GTK1.Notebook set_scrollable(int scrollablep)`

      Description

        If true, add scrollbars if nessesary.

      Method set_show_border

        `GTK1.Notebook set_show_border(int showborderp)`

      Description

        If true, show the borders around the contents and tabs.

      Method set_show_tabs

        `GTK1.Notebook set_show_tabs(int showtabsp)`

      Description

        If supplied with a true value, the tabs will be shown. Otherwise they will not be shown. The user will not be able to select the pages without them, but you can add 'next' and 'previous' buttons to create a wizard-line interface.

      Method set_tab_border

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_border(int border_width)`

      Description

        In pixels.

      Method set_tab_hborder

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_hborder(int border_width)`

      Description

        In pixels.

      Method set_tab_label

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_label(GTK1.Widget page, GTK1.Widget label)`

      Method set_tab_label_packing

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_label_packing(GTK1.Widget child, int expand, int fill, int type)`

      Method set_tab_label_text

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_label_text(GTK1.Widget page, string title)`

      Method set_tab_pos

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_pos(int pos)`

      Description

        One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method set_tab_vborder

        `GTK1.Notebook set_tab_vborder(int border_width)`

      Description

        In pixels.

    CLASS GTK1.Object

      Description

        The basic GTK class. All other GTK classes inherit this class. The only user-callable functions are the signal related ones.

        Signals: destroy Called when the object is destroyed

      Method destroy

        `GTK1.Object destroy()`

      Method signal_block

        `GTK1.Object signal_block(mixed signal_id)`

      Description

        Temporarily block a signal handler. No signals will be received while the hander is blocked. See signal connect for more info.

      Method signal_connect

        `mixed signal_connect(string signal, function(:void) callback, mixed|void callback_arg)`

      Description

        Connect a signal to a pike function. The function will be called with the last argument to this function as it's first argument (defaults to 0), the second argument is always the widget, any other arguments are the ones supplied by GTK1.

        The return value of this function can be used to remove a signal with signal_disconnect, and block and unblock the signal will signal_block and signal_unblock.

      Method signal_connect_new

        `mixed signal_connect_new(string signal, function(:void) callback, mixed|void callback_arg)`

      Description

        Connect a signal to a pike function.

        This function differs from the signal_connect function in how it calls the callback function.

        The old interface:

               void signal_handler( mixed my_arg, GTK1.Object object,
                                    mixed ... signal_arguments )

        The new interface:

               void signal_handler( mixed ... signal_arguments,
                                    mixed my_arg, GTK1.Object object )

        The return value of this function can be used to remove a signal with signal_disconnect, and block and unblock the signal will signal_block and signal_unblock.

      Method signal_disconnect

        `GTK1.Object signal_disconnect(mixed signal_id)`

      Description

        Remove a signal formerly added by signal_connect. The argument is the return value of signal_connect(). See signal connect for more info.

      Method signal_emit

        `GTK1.Object signal_emit(string signal_name)`

      Description

        Halt the emit of the current named signal. Useful in signal handlers when you want to override the behaviour of some default signal handler (key press events, as an example) See signal_connect.

      Method signal_unblock

        `GTK1.Object signal_unblock(mixed signal_id)`

      Description

        Unblock a formerly blocked signal handler. See signal_block and signal_connect for more info.

    CLASS GTK1.OptionMenu

      Description

        A OptionMenu is a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of valid choices. The OptionMenu displays the selected choice. When activated the OptionMenu displays a popup W(Menu) which allows the user to make a new choice.

        `GTK1.OptionMenu()->set_menu(GTK1.Menu()->add( GTK1.MenuItem("Option 1") ));`

      Method create

        `GTK1.OptionMenu GTK1.OptionMenu()`

      Description

        Create a new option menu widget

      Method get_menu

        `GTK1.Menu get_menu()`

      Description

        Returns the W(Menu) associated with the OptionMenu.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK1.Button : Button

      Method remove_menu

        `GTK1.OptionMenu remove_menu()`

      Description

        Remove the menu.

      Method set_history

        `GTK1.OptionMenu set_history(int index)`

      Description

        Selects the menu item specified by index making it the newly selected value for the option menu.

      Method set_menu

        `GTK1.OptionMenu set_menu(GTK1.Menu menu)`

      Description

        Provides the GtkMenu that is popped up to allow the user to choose a new value. You should provide a simple menu avoiding the use of tearoff menu items, submenus, and accelerators.

    CLASS GTK1.Packer

      Method add

        `GTK1.Packer add(GTK1.Widget widget, int side, int anchor, int options, int border_width, int pad_x, int pad_y, int i_pad_x, int i_pad_y)`

      Description

        side is one of SIDE_BOTTOM, SIDE_LEFT, SIDE_RIGHT and SIDE_TOP, anchor is one of ANCHOR_CENTER, ANCHOR_E, ANCHOR_EAST, ANCHOR_N, ANCHOR_NE, ANCHOR_NORTH, ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST, ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST, ANCHOR_NW, ANCHOR_S, ANCHOR_SE, ANCHOR_SOUTH, ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST, ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST, ANCHOR_SW, ANCHOR_W and ANCHOR_WEST, options is a bitwise or of GTK1.PackExpand, GTK1.FillX and GTK1.FillY

      Method add_defaults

        `GTK1.Packer add_defaults(GTK1.Widget widget, int side, int anchor, int options)`

      Description

        side is one of SIDE_BOTTOM, SIDE_LEFT, SIDE_RIGHT and SIDE_TOP, anchor is one of ANCHOR_CENTER, ANCHOR_E, ANCHOR_EAST, ANCHOR_N, ANCHOR_NE, ANCHOR_NORTH, ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST, ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST, ANCHOR_NW, ANCHOR_S, ANCHOR_SE, ANCHOR_SOUTH, ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST, ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST, ANCHOR_SW, ANCHOR_W and ANCHOR_WEST, options is a bitwise or of GTK1.PackExpand, GTK1.FillX and GTK1.FillY

      Method create

        `GTK1.Packer GTK1.Packer()`

      Method get_default_border_width

        `int get_default_border_width()`

      Method get_default_i_pad_x

        `int get_default_i_pad_x()`

      Method get_default_i_pad_y

        `int get_default_i_pad_y()`

      Method get_default_pad_x

        `int get_default_pad_x()`

      Method get_default_pad_y

        `int get_default_pad_y()`

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK1.Packer reorder_child(GTK1.Widget child, int pos)`

      Method set_child_packing

        `GTK1.Packer set_child_packing(GTK1.Widget child, int side, int anchor, int options, int border_width, int pad_x, int pad_y, int i_pad_x, int i_pad_y)`

      Description

        side is one of SIDE_BOTTOM, SIDE_LEFT, SIDE_RIGHT and SIDE_TOP, anchor is one of ANCHOR_CENTER, ANCHOR_E, ANCHOR_EAST, ANCHOR_N, ANCHOR_NE, ANCHOR_NORTH, ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST, ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST, ANCHOR_NW, ANCHOR_S, ANCHOR_SE, ANCHOR_SOUTH, ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST, ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST, ANCHOR_SW, ANCHOR_W and ANCHOR_WEST, options is a bitwise or of GTK1.PackExpand, GTK1.FillX and GTK1.FillY

      Method set_default_border_width

        `GTK1.Packer set_default_border_width(int border)`

      Method set_default_ipad

        `GTK1.Packer set_default_ipad(int xpad, int ypad)`

      Method set_default_pad

        `GTK1.Packer set_default_pad(int xpad, int ypad)`

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK1.Packer set_spacing(int new_spacing)`

    CLASS GTK1.Paned

      Description

        GTK1.Paned is the base class for widgets with two panes, arranged either horizontally (W(HPaned)) or vertically (W(VPaned)). Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with pack1() and pack2(). The division beween the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.

        A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter). Often, it is useful to put each child inside a W(Frame) with the shadow type set to GTK1.ShadowIn so that the gutter appears as a ridge.

        Each child has two options that can be set, resize and shrink. If resize is true, then when the GTK1.Paned is resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If shrink is true, then when that child can be made smaller than it's requisition by the user. Setting shrink to 0 allows the application to set a minimum size. If resize is false for both children, then this is treated as if resize is true for both children.

        The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling set_position().

      Method add1

        `GTK1.Paned add1(GTK1.Widget left_or_top)`

      Description

        Set the left or topmost item. This is equivalent to pack1(left_or_top,0,1)

      Method add2

        `GTK1.Paned add2(GTK1.Widget right_or_bottom)`

      Description

        Set the right or bottommost item This is equivalent to pack2(left_or_top,0,1)

      Method get_handle_size

        `int get_handle_size()`

      Description

        The size of the handle, in pixels

      Method get_handle_xpos

        `int get_handle_xpos()`

      Description

        The xpos of the handle, in pixels

      Method get_handle_ypos

        `int get_handle_ypos()`

      Description

        The ypos of the handle, in pixels

      Method get_in_drag

        `int get_in_drag()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the user is dragging the handle

      Method get_max_position

        `int get_max_position()`

      Description

        The maximum handle position possible.

      Method get_min_position

        `int get_min_position()`

      Description

        The minimum handle position possible.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method pack1

        `GTK1.Paned pack1(GTK1.Widget widget, int resize, int shrink)`

      Description

        Add a child to the top or left pane.

      Method pack2

        `GTK1.Paned pack2(GTK1.Widget widget, int resize, int shrink)`

      Description

        Add a child to the bottom or right pane.

      Method set_gutter_size

        `GTK1.Paned set_gutter_size(int gsize)`

      Description

        Set the width of the gutter. (The area between the two panes).

      Method set_handle_size

        `GTK1.Paned set_handle_size(int hsize)`

      Description

        The size of the handle in pixels

      Method set_position

        `GTK1.Paned set_position(int position)`

      Description

        Set the position of the separator, as if set by the user. If position is negative, the remembered position is forgotten, and the division is recomputed from the the requisitions of the children.

    CLASS GTK1.Pixmap

      Description

        Pixmaps are data structures that contain pictures. These pictures can be used in various places, but most visibly as icons on the X-Windows desktop, or as cursors. A bitmap is a 2-color pixmap.

        To use pixmaps in GTK, you must first build a GDK1.Pixmap object using GDK1.Pixmap.

        The pixels in a GTK1.Pixmap cannot be manipulated by the application after creation, since under the X Window system the pixel data is stored on the X server and so is not available to the client application. If you want to create graphical images which can be manipulated by the application, look at W(Image).

        `GTK1.Pixmap( GDK1.Pixmap( Image.Image(100,100)->test()) )`

        `GTK1.Pixmap( GDK1.Pixmap( Image.Image(100,100)->test()), GDK1.Bitmap(Image.Image(100,100,255,255,255)->box(10,10,80,80, 0,0,0) ))`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Pixmap GTK1.Pixmap(GDK1.Pixmap pixmap, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Create a new pixmap object, and sets the image and the mask.

      Method get

        `mapping get()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "pixmap":pixmap, "mask":mask, "pixmap_insensitive":insensitive version of the pixmap ])

      Method get_build_insensitive

        `int get_build_insensitive()`

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK1.Misc : Misc

      Method set

        `GTK1.Pixmap set(GDK1.Pixmap pixmap, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Sets the GDK1.Pixmap image and the optinal GDK1.Bitmap mask

      Method set_build_insensitive

        `GTK1.Pixmap set_build_insensitive(int buildp)`

      Description

        Set to TRUE if an extra pixmap should be automatically created to use when the pixmap is insensitive.

      Method set_insensitive_pixmap

        `GTK1.Pixmap set_insensitive_pixmap(GDK1.Pixmap insensitive_pixmap)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap to use when the pixmap is insensitive.

    CLASS GTK1.PixmapMenuItem

      Description

        GtkPixmapMenuItem works like a normal GTK menu item, but you can insert a arbitrary widget (most often a pixmap widget), which is displayed at the left side. The advantage is that indentation is handled the same way as GTK does (i.e if you create a menu with a gtk_check_menu_item, all normal menu items are automatically indented by GTK - so if you use a normal menu item to display pixmaps at the left side, the pixmaps will be indented, which is not what you want. This widget solves the problem).

      Method create

        `GTK1.PixmapMenuItem GTK1.PixmapMenuItem()`

      Description

        Creates a new pixmap menu item.

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK1.MenuItem : MenuItem

      Method set_pixmap

        `GTK1.PixmapMenuItem set_pixmap(GTK1.Widget pixmap)`

      Description

        Set the pixmap of the menu item.

    CLASS GTK1.Plug

      Description

        Together with W(Socket), GTK1.Plug provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a W(Socket) widget and, passes the XID of that widgets window to the other process, which then creates a GTK1.Plug window with that XID. Any widgets contained in the GTK1.Plug then will appear inside the first applications window.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Plug GTK1.Plug(int socket_id)`

      Description

        Create a new plug, the socket_id is the window into which this plug will be plugged.

      Method get_same_app

        `int get_same_app()`

      Description

        returns 1 if the socket the plug is connected to is in this application.

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

    CLASS GTK1.Progress

      Method configure

        `GTK1.Progress configure(float value, float min, float max)`

      Description

        Sets the current value, the minimum value and the maximum value. The default min and max are 0.0 and 1.0 respectively.

      Method get_activity_mode

        `int get_activity_mode()`

      Description

        The currently set activity mode.

      Method get_current_percentage

        `float get_current_percentage()`

      Description

        Returns a float between 0.0 and 1.0

      Method get_current_text

        `string get_current_text()`

      Description

        Return the current text (see set_format_string)

      Method get_format

        `string get_format()`

      Description

        The format used to convert the value to a the text

      Method get_percentage_from_value

        `float get_percentage_from_value(float value)`

      Description

        Returns a float between 0.0 and 1.0

      Method get_show_text

        `int get_show_text()`

      Description

        1 if the text will be shown

      Method get_text_from_value

        `string get_text_from_value(float value)`

      Description

        Formats 'value' and returns it as a text.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Return the current value

      Method get_x_align

        `float get_x_align()`

      Description

        The text alignment, 0.0 is leftmost, 1.0 is rightmost

      Method get_y_align

        `float get_y_align()`

      Description

        The text alignment, 0.0 is topmost, 1.0 is bottommost

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method set_activity_mode

        `GTK1.Progress set_activity_mode(int modep)`

      Description

        As well as indicating the amount of progress that has occurred, the progress bar may be set to just indicate that there is some activity. This can be useful in situations where progress cannot be measured against a value range. Mode is: 1: active 0: inactive

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK1.Progress set_adjustment(GTK1.Adjustment adjustment)`

      Description

        Sets the adjustment to use. See the adjustment documentation for more info

      Method set_format_string

        `GTK1.Progress set_format_string(string format)`

      Description

        More or less like sprintf. %[field width][character] 0&lt;=width&gt;=2 Supported characters:

             %: Insert a %
             p or P: The percentage completed, with 'digits' number of decimals
             v or V: The actual value, with digits decimals.
             l or L: The lower value (from the adjustment)
             u or U: The higer value (from the adjustment)
             %: Insert a %

        The default format is '%P%%'

      Method set_percentage

        `GTK1.Progress set_percentage(float pct)`

      Description

        Sets the value (between 0.0 and 1.0). Uses the min and max values.

      Method set_show_text

        `GTK1.Progress set_show_text(int textp)`

      Description

        If true, write a text in the progress bar.

      Method set_text_alignment

        `GTK1.Progress set_text_alignment(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        The location for the text in the progress bar. xalign is between 0.0 (leftmost) and 1.0 (rightmost) yalign is between 0.0 (topmost) and 1.0 (bottommost)

        Default is xalign == yalign == 0.5

      Method set_value

        `GTK1.Progress set_value(float value)`

      Description

        Set the value.

    CLASS GTK1.ProgressBar

      Description

        A simple progress bar. Useful when you are doing things that take a long time. Try to always have an 'abort' button whenever it makes sence. `GTK1.ProgressBar()->update(0.1)`

        `GTK1.ProgressBar()->set_show_text(1)->update(0.3)`

        `GTK1.ProgressBar()->update(0.6)`

        `GTK1.ProgressBar()->update(1.0)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.ProgressBar GTK1.ProgressBar()`

      Description

        Create a new progress bar. The default values are: Min 0.0, max 1.0, current 0.0

      Method get_activity_blocks

        `int get_activity_blocks()`

      Description

        The number of blocks that are set.

      Method get_activity_dir

        `int get_activity_dir()`

      Description

        The current direction of the progress meter. 1 is forward and 0 is backwards. Usefull if you for some strange reason would like to know in what direction the activity indicator is swinging right now...

      Method get_activity_pos

        `int get_activity_pos()`

      Description

        The position of the progress meter in pixels.

      Method get_activity_step

        `int get_activity_step()`

      Description

        The step size of the activity indicator in pixels.

      Method get_bar_style

        `int get_bar_style()`

      Description

        The progress bar style. GTK_PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS or GTK_PROGRESS_DISCRETE.

      Method get_blocks

        `int get_blocks()`

      Description

        The total number of blocks.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        The current orientation. GTK_PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT, GTK_PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT, GTK_PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP or GTK_PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM.

      Inherit Progress

        inherit GTK1.Progress : Progress

      Method set_activity_blocks

        `GTK1.ProgressBar set_activity_blocks(int blocks)`

      Description

        The number of activity blocks

      Method set_activity_step

        `GTK1.ProgressBar set_activity_step(int stepp)`

      Description

        Include activity blocks (empty gaps in the progressbar, ala windows 98)

      Method set_bar_style

        `GTK1.ProgressBar set_bar_style(int style)`

      Description

        One of GTK1.ProgressContinuous or GTK1.ProgressDiscrete

      Method set_discrete_blocks

        `GTK1.ProgressBar set_discrete_blocks(int blocks)`

      Description

        The number of discrete blocks in the progress bar

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK1.ProgressBar set_orientation(int style)`

      Description

        One of GTK1.ProgressLeftToRight, GTK1.ProgressRightToLeft, GTK1.ProgressBottomToTop or GTK1.ProgressTopToBottom

      Method update

        `GTK1.ProgressBar update(float fraction)`

      Description

        0.0 is the minimum value, 1.0 is the maximum value.

    CLASS GTK1.RadioButton

      Description

        Radio buttons are similar to check buttons except they are grouped so that only one may be selected/depressed at a time. This is good for places in your application where you need to select from a short list of options. To connect the buttons, use another button in the desired group as the second argument to GTK1.RadioButton().

        `GTK1.RadioButton("Button");`

      Method create

        `GTK1.RadioButton GTK1.RadioButton(string|void title, GTK1.RadioButton groupmember)`

      Description

        Normal creation: object GTK1.RadioButton(string title) - First button (with label) object GTK1.RadioButton()->add(widget) - First button (with widget) object GTK1.RadioButton(title, another_radio_button) - Second to n:th button (with title) object GTK1.RadioButton(0,another_radio_button)->add(widget) - Second to n:th button (with widget)

      Inherit CheckButton

        inherit GTK1.CheckButton : CheckButton

      Method set_group

        `GTK1.RadioButton set_group(GTK1.RadioButton groupmember)`

      Description

        the argument is another radio button to whose group this button should be added to. It is prefereable to use the second argument to the constructor instead, but if you for some reason want to move the button to another group, use this function.

    CLASS GTK1.RadioMenuItem

      Description

        Exactly like W(RadioButton), but it is an menu item. `GTK1.RadioMenuItem("Menu item")`

      Method create

        `GTK1.RadioMenuItem GTK1.RadioMenuItem(string|void title, GTK1.RadioMenuItem groupmember)`

      Description

        object GTK1.RadioMenuItem(string title) - First button (with label) object GTK1.RadioMenuItem()->add(widget) - First button (with widget) object GTK1.RadioMenuItem(title, another_radio_button) - Second to n:th button (with title) object GTK1.RadioMenuItem(0,another_radio_button)->add(widget) - Second to n:th button (with widget)

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK1.MenuItem : MenuItem

      Method set_group

        `GTK1.RadioMenuItem set_group(GTK1.RadioMenuItem groupmember)`

      Description

        the argument is another radio menu item to whose group this button should be added to. It is prefereable to use the second argument to the constructor instead, but if you for some reason want to move the button to another group, use this function.

    CLASS GTK1.Range

      Description

        The category of range widgets includes the ubiquitous scrollbar widget and the less common "scale" widget. Though these two types of widgets are generally used for different purposes, they are quite similar in function and implementation. All range widgets share a set of common graphic elements, each of which has its own X window and receives events. They all contain a "trough" and a "slider" (what is sometimes called a "thumbwheel" in other GUI environments). Dragging the slider with the pointer moves it back and forth within the trough, while clicking in the trough advances the slider towards the location of the click, either completely, or by a designated amount, depending on which mouse button is used.

        As mentioned in the W(Adjustment) page, all range widgets are associated with an adjustment object, from which they calculate the length of the slider and its position within the trough. When the user manipulates the slider, the range widget will change the value of the adjustment.

        All of the GTK range widgets react to mouse clicks in more or less the same way. Clicking button-1 in the trough will cause its adjustment's page_increment to be added or subtracted from its value, and the slider to be moved accordingly. Clicking mouse button-2 in the trough will jump the slider to the point at which the button was clicked. Clicking any button on a scrollbar's arrows will cause its adjustment's value to change step_increment at a time.

        It may take a little while to get used to, but by default, scrollbars as well as scale widgets can take the keyboard focus in GTK1. If you think your users will find this too confusing, you can always disable this by unsetting the GTK1.CanFocus flag on the scrollbar, like this:

        `scrollbar->unset_flag( GTK1.CanFocus );`

        The key bindings (which are, of course, only active when the widget has focus) are slightly different between horizontal and vertical range widgets, for obvious reasons. They are also not quite the same for scale widgets as they are for scrollbars, for somewhat less obvious reasons (possibly to avoid confusion between the keys for horizontal and vertical scrollbars in scrolled windows, where both operate on the same area).

      Method get_adjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_adjustment()`

      Method get_button

        `int get_button()`

      Method get_click_child

        `int get_click_child()`

      Method get_digits

        `int get_digits()`

      Method get_in_child

        `int get_in_child()`

      Method get_need_timer

        `int get_need_timer()`

      Method get_old_lower

        `float get_old_lower()`

      Method get_old_page_size

        `float get_old_page_size()`

      Method get_old_upper

        `float get_old_upper()`

      Method get_old_value

        `float get_old_value()`

      Method get_policy

        `int get_policy()`

      Method get_scroll_type

        `int get_scroll_type()`

      Method get_timer

        `int get_timer()`

      Method get_x_click_point

        `int get_x_click_point()`

      Method get_y_click_point

        `int get_y_click_point()`

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK1.Range set_adjustment(GTK1.Adjustment pos)`

      Description

        set_adjustment() does absolutely nothing if you pass it the adjustment that range is already using, regardless of whether you changed any of its fields or not. If you pass it a new Adjustment, it will unreference the old one if it exists (possibly destroying it), connect the appropriate signals to the new one, and call the private function gtk_range_adjustment_changed(), which will (or at least, is supposed to...) recalculate the size and/or position of the slider and redraw if necessary.

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK1.Range set_update_policy(int when)`

      Description

        The "update policy" of a range widget defines at what points during user interaction it will change the value field of its Adjustment and emit the "value_changed" signal on this Adjustment. The update policies are:

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyContinuous

          This is the default. The "value_changed" signal is emitted continuously, i.e., whenever the slider is moved by even the tiniest amount.

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyDiscontinuous

          The "value_changed" signal is only emitted once the slider has stopped moving and the user has released the mouse button.

        GTK1.UpdatePolicyDelayed

          The "value_changed" signal is emitted when the user releases the mouse button, or if the slider stops moving for a short period of time.

      Method slider_update

        `GTK1.Range slider_update()`

      Description

        Update the slider values.

    CLASS GTK1.Ruler

      Description

        Ruler widgets are used to indicate the location of the mouse pointer in a given window. A window can have a vertical ruler spanning across the width and a horizontal ruler spanning down the height. A small triangular indicator on the ruler shows the exact location of the pointer relative to the ruler.

      Method draw_pos

        `GTK1.Ruler draw_pos()`

      Description

        draw the position

      Method draw_ticks

        `GTK1.Ruler draw_ticks()`

      Description

        draw the ticks

      Method get_lower

        `float get_lower()`

      Description

        The currently defined lower extent of the ruler.

      Method get_max_size

        `float get_max_size()`

      Description

        The currently defined max_size of the ruler.

      Method get_position

        `float get_position()`

      Description

        The currently defined initial position of the pointer indicator within the ruler.

      Method get_upper

        `float get_upper()`

      Description

        The currently defined upper extent of the ruler.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

      Method set_metric

        `GTK1.Ruler set_metric(int unit)`

      Description

        Either GTK1.Pixels, GTK1.Centimers or GTK1.Inches. The default measure is GTK1.Pixels.

      Method set_range

        `GTK1.Ruler set_range(float lower, float upper, float position, float max_size)`

      Description

        The lower and upper arguments define the extent of the ruler, and max_size is the largest possible number that will be displayed. Position defines the initial position of the pointer indicator within the ruler.

    CLASS GTK1.Scale

      Description

        The GTK1.Scale widget is an abstract class, used only for deriving the subclasses GTK1.Hscale and GTK1.Vscale.

        See W(Range) for generic range documentation

      Method get_draw_value

        `int get_draw_value()`

      Description

        non-zero if the scale's current value is displayed next to the slider.

      Method get_value_pos

        `int get_value_pos()`

      Description

        The position in which the textual value is displayed, selected from POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method get_value_width

        `int get_value_width()`

      Description

        An internal function used to get the maximum width needed to display the value string. Not normaly used by applications.

      Inherit Range

        inherit GTK1.Range : Range

      Method set_digits

        `GTK1.Scale set_digits(int precision)`

      Description

        Sets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.

      Method set_draw_value

        `GTK1.Scale set_draw_value(int drawp)`

      Description

        Specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next to the slider.

      Method set_value_pos

        `GTK1.Scale set_value_pos(int where)`

      Description

        Sets the position in which the current value is displayed. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

    CLASS GTK1.Scrollbar

      Description

        These are your standard, run-of-the-mill scrollbars. These should be used only for scrolling some other widget, such as a list, a text box, or a viewport (and it's generally easier to use the scrolled window widget in most cases). For other purposes, you should use scale widgets, as they are friendlier and more featureful.

      Inherit Range

        inherit GTK1.Range : Range

    CLASS GTK1.ScrolledWindow

      Description

        Scrolled windows are used to create a scrollable area with another widget inside it. You may insert any type of widget into a scrolled window, and it will be accessible regardless of the size by using the scrollbars.

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->add(GTK1.Label("A small label"))->set_usize(100,80)->set_policy(GTK1.POLICY_AUTOMATIC,GTK1.POLICY_AUTOMATIC)`

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->add(GTK1.Label("A small label"))->set_usize(70,80)->set_policy(GTK1.POLICY_AUTOMATIC,GTK1.POLICY_AUTOMATIC)`

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->add(GTK1.Label("A small label"))->set_usize(80,80)`

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->add(GTK1.Label("A very huge label")->set_usize(700,700))->set_usize(80,80)`

      Method add

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow add(GTK1.Widget victim)`

      Description

        Add a widget to this container. This is equivalent to the C-GTK function gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport or gtk_container_add, depeneding on whether or not the child supports the set_scroll_adjustments signal.

        What this means in practice is that you do not have to care about this at all, it's all handled automatically.

      Method create

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow GTK1.ScrolledWindow(GTK1.Adjustment hadjustment, GTK1.Adjustment vadjustments)`

      Description

        The two adjustments are most commonly set to 0.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the horizontal adjustment used to scroll the window

      Method get_hscrollbar

        `GTK1.Hscrollbar get_hscrollbar()`

      Description

        The horizontal scrollbar

      Method get_hscrollbar_policy

        `int get_hscrollbar_policy()`

      Description

        One of POLICY_ALWAYS, POLICY_AUTOMATIC and POLICY_NEVER

      Method get_hscrollbar_visible

        `int get_hscrollbar_visible()`

      Description

        1 if the horizontal scrollbar is currently visible

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the vertical adjustment used to scroll the window

      Method get_vscrollbar

        `GTK1.Vscrollbar get_vscrollbar()`

      Description

        The vertical scrollbar

      Method get_vscrollbar_policy

        `int get_vscrollbar_policy()`

      Description

        One of POLICY_ALWAYS, POLICY_AUTOMATIC and POLICY_NEVER

      Method get_vscrollbar_visible

        `int get_vscrollbar_visible()`

      Description

        1 if the vertical scrollbar is currently visible

      Method get_window_placement

        `int get_window_placement()`

      Description

        The location of the window relative to the scrollbars. One of CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT, CORNER_TOP_LEFT and CORNER_TOP_RIGHT

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK1.Window : Window

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow set_hadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment hadjustment)`

      Description

        Set the horizontal adjustment object

      Method set_placement

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow set_placement(int window_corner_placement)`

      Description

        The location of the window relative to the scrollbars. One of CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT, CORNER_TOP_LEFT and CORNER_TOP_RIGHT

      Method set_policy

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow set_policy(int xpolicy, int ypolicy)`

      Description

        vertical and horiz policy. Both are one of POLICY_ALWAYS, POLICY_AUTOMATIC and POLICY_NEVER

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK1.ScrolledWindow set_vadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment vadjustment)`

      Description

        Set the vertical adjustment object

    CLASS GTK1.SelectionData

      Description

        The data associated with a selection.

      Method data

        `string data()`

      Description

        Returns the selection in the data. The return value is always a string, but the width can vary (8, 16 or 32 bits per character).

      Method format

        `int format()`

      Description

        Returns the selction format. The format is the number of bits per character.

      Method length

        `int length()`

      Description

        Return the size of the selection data, in bytes.

        The size of the data in characters (as returned by data()) is not necessarily the same.

      Method selection

        `GDK1.Atom selection()`

      Description

        The selection id, as a GDK(Atom).

      Method set

        `GTK1.SelectionData set(string data)`

      Description

        Store new data into a GtkSelectionData object. Should _only_ by called from a selection handler callback.

      Method target

        `GDK1.Atom target()`

      Description

        The target, as a GDK(Atom).

      Method type

        `GDK1.Atom type()`

      Description

        The selection type, as a GDK(Atom).

    CLASS GTK1.Separator

      Description

        A generic separator. Basicaly a line, like &lt;hr&gt; in HTML.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK1.Widget : Widget

    CLASS GTK1.Socket

      Description

        Together with W(Plug), GTK1.Socket provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a GTK1.Socket widget and, passes the XID of that widget's window to the other process, which then creates a W(Plug) window with that XID. Any widgets contained in the W(Plug) then will appear inside the first applications window.

        Note that if you pass the XID of the socket to another process that will create a plug in the socket, you must make sure that the socket widget is not destroyed until that plug is created. Violating this rule will cause unpredictable consequences, the most likely consequence being that the plug will appear as a separate toplevel window.

        A socket can also be used to swallow arbitrary pre-existing top-level windows using steal(), though the integration when this is done will not be as close as between a W(Plug) and a GTK1.Socket.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Socket GTK1.Socket()`

      Method get_same_app

        `int get_same_app()`

      Description

        return 1 if the widow contained in this socket comes from this process.

      Method has_plug

        `int has_plug()`

      Description

        Returns true if this socket is occupied

      Method id

        `int id()`

      Description

        Returns the window id, to be sent to the application providing the plug. You must realize this widget before calling this function.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method steal

        `GTK1.Socket steal(int window_id)`

      Description

        Reparents a pre-existing toplevel window (not nessesarily a GTK window) into a socket.

    CLASS GTK1.SpinButton

      Description

        The Spin Button widget is generally used to allow the user to select a value from a range of numeric values. It consists of a text entry box with up and down arrow buttons attached to the side. Selecting one of the buttons causes the value to "spin" up and down the range of possible values. The entry box may also be edited directly to enter a specific value.

        The Spin Button allows the value to have zero or a number of decimal places and to be incremented/decremented in configurable steps. The action of holding down one of the buttons optionally results in an acceleration of change in the value according to how long it is depressed.

        The Spin Button uses an W(Adjustment) object to hold information about the range of values that the spin button can take.

        The attributes of an W(Adjustment) are used by the Spin Button in the following way: <ul><li>value: initial value for the Spin Button</li> <li>lower: lower range value</li> <li>upper: upper range value</li> <li>step_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 1 on a button</li> <li>page_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 2 on a button</li> <li>page_size: unused</li> </ul>

        The argument order for the W(Adjustment) constructor is: value, lower, upper, step_increment, page_increment, page_size

        `GTK1.SpinButton( GTK1.Adjustment(),0.1, 1 )->set_usize(60,20)`

      Method configure

        `GTK1.SpinButton configure(GTK1.Adjustment range, float climb_rate, int precision)`

      Description

        Adjustment (with the lower/upper/increse values), climb_rate and digits

      Method create

        `GTK1.SpinButton GTK1.SpinButton(GTK1.Adjustment range, float climb_rate, int precision)`

      Description

        The climb_rate argument take a value between 0.0 and 1.0 and indicates the amount of acceleration that the Spin Button has. The digits argument specifies the number of decimal places to which the value will be displayed.

      Method get_climb_rate

        `float get_climb_rate()`

      Description

        The amount of acceleration that the Spin Button has. 0.0 is no accelleration and 1.0 is highest accelleration.

      Method get_digits

        `int get_digits()`

      Description

        The number of decimal places to which the value will be displayed.

      Method get_numeric

        `int get_numeric()`

      Description

        If != 0 the user can not enter anything but numeric values.

      Method get_snap_to_ticks

        `int get_snap_to_ticks()`

      Description

        If != 0 the Spin Button will round the value to the nearest step_increment.

      Method get_update_policy

        `int get_update_policy()`

      Description

        The update policy. GTK_UPDATE_ALWAYS or GTK_UPDATE_IF_VALID.

      Method get_value_as_float

        `float get_value_as_float()`

      Description

        The current value of a Spin Button can be retrieved as a float.

      Method get_value_as_int

        `int get_value_as_int()`

      Description

        The current value of a Spin Button can be retrieved as a int.

      Method get_wrap

        `int get_wrap()`

      Description

        If != 0 the Spin Button will wrap around between the upper and lower range values.

      Inherit Entry

        inherit GTK1.Entry : Entry

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_adjustment(GTK1.Adjustment range)`

      Description

        Set a new adjustment.

      Method set_digits

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_digits(int precision)`

      Description

        Set the number of digits to show to the user.

      Method set_numeric

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_numeric(int numericp)`

      Description

        If true, it is a numeric value. This prevents a user from typing anything other than numeric values into the text box of a Spin Button

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_shadow_type(int type)`

      Description

        Type is one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_snap_to_ticks

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_snap_to_ticks(int snapp)`

      Description

        Set the Spin Button to round the value to the nearest step_increment, which is set within the Adjustment object used with the Spin Button

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_update_policy(int policy)`

      Description

        The possible values of policy are either GTK1.UpdateAlways or GTK1.UpdateIfValid.

        These policies affect the behavior of a Spin Button when parsing inserted text and syncing its value with the values of the Adjustment.

        In the case of GTK1.UpdateIfValid the Spin Button value only gets changed if the text input is a numeric value that is within the range specified by the Adjustment. Otherwise the text is reset to the current value.

        In case of GTK1.UpdateAlways errors are ignored while converting text into a numeric value.

      Method set_value

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_value(float to)`

      Description

        Set the value.

      Method set_wrap

        `GTK1.SpinButton set_wrap(int wrapp)`

      Description

        If true, the spin button will wrap from the lowest to the highest value, and the highest to the lowest.

      Method spin

        `GTK1.SpinButton spin(int direction, float increment)`

      Description

        If you want to alter the value of a Spin Value relative to its current value, then this ffunction can be used.

        The direction paramenter is one of SPIN_END, SPIN_HOME, SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD, SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD, SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD, SPIN_STEP_FORWARD and SPIN_USER_DEFINED

        GTK1.SpinStepForward and GTK1.SpinStepBackward change the value of the Spin Button by the amount specified by increment, unless increment is equal to 0, in which case the value is changed by the value of step_increment in theAdjustment.

        GTK1.SpinPageForward and GTK1.SpinPageBackward simply alter the value of the Spin Button by increment.

        GTK1.SpinHome sets the value of the Spin Button to the bottom of the Adjustments range.

        GTK1.SpinEnd sets the value of the Spin Button to the top of the Adjustments range.

        GTK1.SpinUserDefined simply alters the value of the Spin Button by the specified amount.

      Method update

        `GTK1.SpinButton update()`

      Description

        Explicitly request that the Spin Button updates itself

    CLASS GTK1.Statusbar

      Description

        Statusbars are simple widgets used to display a text message. They keep a stack of the messages pushed onto them, so that popping the current message will re-display the previous text message.

        In order to allow different parts of an application to use the same statusbar to display messages, the statusbar widget issues Context Identifiers which are used to identify different 'users'. The message on top of the stack is the one displayed, no matter what context it is in. Messages are stacked in last-in-first-out order, not context identifier order.

        `lambda() {object sb = GTK1.Statusbar();int id = sb->get_context_id("test");sb->push(id,"A message");sb->push(id,"Another message");return sb;}()`

        `lambda() {object sb = GTK1.Statusbar();int id = sb->get_context_id("test");sb->push(id,"A message");sb->push(id,"Another message");sb->pop(id);return sb;}()`

        Signals: text_poped

        text_pushed

      Method create

        `GTK1.Statusbar GTK1.Statusbar()`

      Description

        Create a new statusbar widget

      Method get_context_id

        `int get_context_id(string context)`

      Description

        Create a new context id (or get the id of an old one). The argument is any string. The return value can be used for -&gt;push() -&gt;pop() and -&gt;remove later on.

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK1.Hbox : Hbox

      Method pop

        `GTK1.Statusbar pop(int context)`

      Description

        Remove the topmost message.

      Method push

        `int push(int context, string data)`

      Description

        Push a message onto the statusbar. The return value is an id that can be passed to remove later on.

      Method remove

        `GTK1.Statusbar remove(int context, int id)`

      Description

        Remove the specified message (the message id is the second argument).

    CLASS GTK1.Style

      Method apply_default_background

        `GTK1.Style apply_default_background(GDK1.Window window, int set_bgp, int state_type, GDK1.Rectangle area, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Set the background of the specified window (or the subarea indicated by the rectangle) to the default background for the state specified by state_type.

        If set_bgp is true, the background of the widget will be set, otherwise it will only be drawn into the window.

      Method attach

        `GTK1.Style attach(GDK1.Window to)`

      Description

        Attach a style to a window; this process allocates the colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may involve the creation of a new style if the style has already been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.

      Method copy

        `GTK1.Style copy()`

      Description

        Copy this style, and return the new style object

      Method destroy

        `GTK1.Style destroy()`

      Method detach

        `GTK1.Style detach()`

      Description

        Undo a previous attach

      Method get_base

        `array get_base()`

      Method get_base_gc

        `array get_base_gc()`

      Method get_bg

        `array get_bg()`

      Method get_bg_gc

        `array get_bg_gc()`

      Method get_bg_pixmap

        `array get_bg_pixmap()`

      Method get_black

        `GDK1.Color get_black()`

      Method get_black_gc

        `GDK1.GC get_black_gc()`

      Method get_dark

        `array get_dark()`

      Method get_dark_gc

        `array get_dark_gc()`

      Method get_fg

        `array get_fg()`

      Method get_fg_gc

        `array get_fg_gc()`

      Method get_font

        `GDK1.Font get_font()`

      Method get_light

        `array get_light()`

      Method get_light_gc

        `array get_light_gc()`

      Method get_mid

        `array get_mid()`

      Method get_mid_gc

        `array get_mid_gc()`

      Method get_text

        `array get_text()`

      Method get_text_gc

        `array get_text_gc()`

      Method get_white

        `GDK1.Color get_white()`

      Method get_white_gc

        `GDK1.GC get_white_gc()`

    CLASS GTK1.Table

      Description

        The Gtk.Table allow the programmer to arrange widgets in rows and columns, making it easy to align many widgets next to each other, horizontally and vertically.

        `GTK1.Table(2,2,0)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("0,0"), 0, 1, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("0,1"), 0, 1, 1, 2)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("1,0"), 1, 2, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("1,1"), 1, 2, 1, 2)->set_col_spacings(10)->set_row_spacings(10)`

        `GTK1.Table(2,2,0)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("0,0-1,0"), 0, 2, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("0,1"), 0, 1, 1, 2)->attach_defaults( GTK1.Label("1,1"), 1, 2, 1, 2)->set_col_spacings(10)->set_row_spacings(10)`

      Method attach

        `GTK1.Table attach(GTK1.Widget subwidget, int left, int right, int top, int bottom, int xoptions, int yoptions, int xpad, int ypad)`

      Description

        The left and right attach arguments specify where to place the widget, and how many boxes to use. If you want a button in the lower right table entry of our 2x2 table, and want it to fill that entry ONLY. left_attach would be = 1, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 1, bottom_attach = 2.

        Now, if you wanted a widget to take up the whole top row of our 2x2 table, you'd use left_attach = 0, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 0, bottom_attach = 1.

        The xoptions and yoptions are used to specify packing options and may be OR'ed together to allow multiple options.

        These options are: <ul> <li> GTK1.Fill - If the table box is larger than the widget, and GTK_FILL is specified, the widget will expand to use all the room available.</li> <li> GTK1.Shrink - If the table widget was allocated less space then was requested (usually by the user resizing the window), then the widgets would normally just be pushed off the bottom of the window and disappear. If GTK_SHRINK is specified, the widgets will shrink with the table.</li> <li> GTK1.Expand - This will cause the table cell to expand to use up any remaining space in the window.</li> </ul>

        Padding is just like in boxes, creating a clear area around the widget specified in pixels

      Method attach_defaults

        `GTK1.Table attach_defaults(GTK1.Widget subwidget, int left, int right, int top, int bottom)`

      Description

        As there are many options associated with attach(), this convenience function provides the programmer with a means to add children to a table with identical padding and expansion options.

        xoptions, yoptions, xpadding and ypadding are all set the their default values. For the options that is GTK1.Fill|GTK1.Expand. For the padding it is 0.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Table GTK1.Table(int width, int height, int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        Used to create a new table widget. An initial size must be given by specifying how many rows and columns the table should have, although this can be changed later with resize().

        There can never be more than 65535 colums nor more than 65535 rows.

        setting homogeneousp to 1 forces the all tablecells to be exactly the same size.

      Method get_column_spacing

        `int get_column_spacing()`

      Description

        The spacing between all columns, in pixels.

      Method get_homogeneous

        `int get_homogeneous()`

      Description

        If 1, all cells have exactly the same size

      Method get_ncols

        `int get_ncols()`

      Description

        The number of columns. Between 1 and 65535.

      Method get_nrows

        `int get_nrows()`

      Description

        The number of rows. Between 1 and 65535.

      Method get_row_spacing

        `int get_row_spacing()`

      Description

        The spacing between all rows, in pixels.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method resize

        `GTK1.Table resize(int rows, int columns)`

      Description

        If you need to change a table's size after it has been created, this function allows you to do so.

      Method set_col_spacing

        `GTK1.Table set_col_spacing(int x, int spacing)`

      Description

        alters the amount of space between a given table column and the adjacent columns.

      Method set_col_spacings

        `GTK1.Table set_col_spacings(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the space between every column in the table equal to spacing.

      Method set_homogeneous

        `GTK1.Table set_homogeneous(int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        Set the homogeneous flag.

      Method set_row_spacing

        `GTK1.Table set_row_spacing(int y, int spacing)`

      Description

        alters the amount of space between a given table row and the adjacent rows.

      Method set_row_spacings

        `GTK1.Table set_row_spacings(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the space between every row in the table equal to spacing.

    CLASS GTK1.TearoffMenuItem

      Description

        a GTK1.TearoffMenuItem is a special W(MenuItem) which is used to tear off and reattach its menu.

        When its menu is shown normally, the GTK1.TearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line indicating that the menu can be torn off. Activating it causes its menu to be torn off and displayed in its own window as a tearoff menu.

        When its menu is shown as a tearoff menu, the GTK1.TearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line which has a left pointing arrow graphic indicating that the tearoff menu can be reattached. Activating it will erase the tearoff menu window. `GTK1.TearoffMenuItem()->set_usize( 100,0 )`

      Method create

        `GTK1.TearoffMenuItem GTK1.TearoffMenuItem()`

      Description

        Create a new tear of menu item

      Method get_torn_off

        `int get_torn_off()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the menu the menu item is connected to is currently torn off.

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK1.MenuItem : MenuItem

    CLASS GTK1.Text

      Description

        The Text widget allows multiple lines of text to be displayed and edited. It supports both multi-colored and multi-font text, allowing them to be mixed in any way we wish. It also has a wide set of key based text editing commands, which are compatible with Emacs.

        The text widget supports full cut-and-paste facilities, including the use of double- and triple-click to select a word and a whole line, respectively.

        Bugs:<ul> <li> You cannot add text to the widget before it is realized.</li> </ul>

        `GTK1.Text(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())`

        `function_object(call_out(GTK1.Text(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->set_text, 0, "Some text")[0])`

        `function_object(call_out(GTK1.Text(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->insert, 0, "Some text", 0, GDK1.Color(255,255,0), GDK1.Color(0,0,0))[0])`

      Method backward_delete

        `GTK1.Text backward_delete(int nchars)`

      Description

        Delete n characters backwards from the cursor position

      Method create

        `GTK1.Text GTK1.Text(GTK1.Adjustment xadjustment, GTK1.Adjustment yadjustment)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK1.Text widget, initialized with the given Gtk.Adjustments. These pointers can be used to track the viewing position of the GTK1.Text widget. Passing NULL to either or both of them will make the text widget create it's own. You can set these later with the function gtk_text_set_adjustment()

      Method forward_delete

        `GTK1.Text forward_delete(int nchars)`

      Description

        Delete n characters forward from the cursor position

      Method freeze

        `GTK1.Text freeze()`

      Description

        Freezes the widget which disallows redrawing of the widget until it is thawed. This is useful if a large number of changes are going to made to the text within the widget, reducing the amount of flicker seen by the user.

      Method get_length

        `int get_length()`

      Description

        Returns the length of the all the text contained within the widget

      Method get_point

        `int get_point()`

      Description

        Gets the current position of the cursor as the number of characters from the upper left corner of the GtkText widget.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Get the current contents of the text object.

      Inherit Editable

        inherit GTK1.Editable : Editable

      Method insert

        `GTK1.Text insert(string text, GDK1.Font font, GDK1.Color bg, GDK1.Color fg)`

      Description

        syntax: object insert(string what); OR object insert(string what, GDK1.Font font, GDK1.Color fg, GDK1.Color bg); OR object insert(string what, 0, GDK1.Color fg, GDK1.Color bg); OR object insert(string what, 0, GDK1.Color fg); OR object insert(string what, 0, 0, GDK1.Color bg);

        Insert new text, optionally with colors.

      Method set_adjustments

        `GTK1.Text set_adjustments(GTK1.Adjustment xadjustment, GTK1.Adjustment yadjustment)`

      Description

        Change the adjustments (as supplied to the constructor) to other adjustments.

      Method set_editable

        `GTK1.Text set_editable(int editablep)`

      Description

        If true, the user can change the text in the widget.

      Method set_line_wrap

        `GTK1.Text set_line_wrap(int linewrapp)`

      Description

        If true, the widget will automatically wrap the contents.

      Method set_point

        `GTK1.Text set_point(int point)`

      Description

        Sets the cursor at the given point. In this case a point constitutes the number of characters from the extreme upper left corner of the widget.

      Method set_text

        `GTK1.Text set_text(string to)`

      Description

        Set the text to the specified string.

      Method set_word_wrap

        `GTK1.Text set_word_wrap(int wordwrapp)`

      Description

        If true, the widget will automatically wrap the contents.

      Method thaw

        `GTK1.Text thaw()`

      Description

        unfreeze the widget.

    CLASS GTK1.TipsQuery

      Method create

        `GTK1.TipsQuery GTK1.TipsQuery()`

      Method get_caller

        `GTK1.Widget get_caller()`

      Method get_in_query

        `int get_in_query()`

      Method get_label_inactive

        `string get_label_inactive()`

      Method get_label_no_tip

        `string get_label_no_tip()`

      Method get_last_crossed

        `GTK1.Widget get_last_crossed()`

      Inherit Label

        inherit GTK1.Label : Label

      Method set_caller

        `GTK1.TipsQuery set_caller(GTK1.Widget caller_widget)`

      Method set_labels

        `GTK1.TipsQuery set_labels(string label_inactive, string label_no_tip)`

      Method start_query

        `GTK1.TipsQuery start_query()`

      Method stop_query

        `GTK1.TipsQuery stop_query()`

    CLASS GTK1.ToggleButton

      Description

        Toggle buttons are derived from normal buttons and are very similar, except they will always be in one of two states, alternated by a click. They may be depressed, and when you click again, they will pop back up. Click again, and they will pop back down.

        `GTK1.ToggleButton("Toggle button")`

        `GTK1.ToggleButton("Toggle button")->set_active( 1 )`

        Signals: toggled

      Method create

        `GTK1.ToggleButton GTK1.ToggleButton(string|void label)`

      Description

        If you supply a string, a label will be created and inserted in the button. Otherwise, use -&gt;add(widget) to create the contents of the button.

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        returns 1 if the button is pressed, 0 otherwise.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK1.Button : Button

      Method set_active

        `GTK1.ToggleButton set_active(int activep)`

      Description

        If activep is true, the toggle button will be activated.

      Method set_mode

        `GTK1.ToggleButton set_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        If true, draw indicator

      Method toggled

        `GTK1.ToggleButton toggled()`

      Description

        emulate a 'toggle' of the button. This will emit a 'toggled' signal.

    CLASS GTK1.Toolbar

      Description

        Toolbars are usually used to group some number of widgets in order to simplify customization of their look and layout. Typically a toolbar consists of buttons with icons, labels and tooltips, but any other widget can also be put inside a toolbar. Finally, items can be arranged horizontally or vertically and buttons can be displayed with icons, labels, or both.

        Examples: `lambda(){object t=GTK1.Toolbar( GTK1.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, GTK1.TOOLBAR_TEXT );t->append_item( "Button 1", "Tooltip 1", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 2", "Tooltip 2", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 3", "Tooltip 3", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 4", "Tooltip 4", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 5", "Tooltip 5", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);return t;}()`

        `lambda(){object t=GTK1.Toolbar( GTK1.ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, GTK1.TOOLBAR_TEXT );t->append_item( "Button 1", "Tooltip 1", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 2", "Tooltip 2", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 3", "Tooltip 3", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 4", "Tooltip 4", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 5", "Tooltip 5", "", GTK1.Frame(), lambda(){},0);return t;}()`

        `lambda(){object i=GDK1.Image()->set(Image.Image(20,20)->test());object t=GTK1.Toolbar( GTK1.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, GTK1.TOOLBAR_BOTH );t->append_item( "Button 1", "Tooltip 1", "", GTK1.Image(i), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 2", "Tooltip 2", "", GTK1.Image(i), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 3", "Tooltip 3", "", GTK1.Image(i), lambda(){},0);t->append_space();t->append_item( "Button 4", "Tooltip 4", "", GTK1.Image(i), lambda(){},0);t->append_item( "Button 5", "Tooltip 5", "", GTK1.Image(i), lambda(){},0);return t;}()`

        Signals: orientation_changed

        style_changed

      Method append_item

        `GTK1.Toolbar append_item(string label, string tooltip, string prv, GTK1.Widget icon, function(:void) clicked_cb, mixed clicked_arg)`

      Description

        Adds a new button to the start of the toolbar.

      Method append_space

        `GTK1.Toolbar append_space()`

      Description

        Adds a small space.

      Method append_widget

        `GTK1.Toolbar append_widget(GTK1.Widget widget, string tootip, string prv)`

      Description

        Append a custom widgets. Arguments are widget, tooltip, private

      Method create

        `GTK1.Toolbar GTK1.Toolbar(int orientation, int style)`

      Description

        Orientation is one of ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and ORIENTATION_VERTICAL. Style is one of TOOLBAR_BOTH, TOOLBAR_ICONS and TOOLBAR_TEXT

      Method get_button_relief

        `int get_button_relief()`

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK1.Container : Container

      Method insert_item

        `GTK1.Toolbar insert_item(string label, string tooltip, string prv, GTK1.Widget icon, function(:void) clicked_cb, mixed clicked_arg, int position)`

      Description

        Arguments as for append_item, but an extra position argument at the end. Adds a new button after the item at the specified position.

      Method insert_space

        `GTK1.Toolbar insert_space(int pixels)`

      Description

        Inserts a small space at the specified postion.

      Method insert_widget

        `GTK1.Toolbar insert_widget(GTK1.Widget widget, string tootip, string prv, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a custom widgets.

      Method prepend_item

        `GTK1.Toolbar prepend_item(string label, string tooltip, string prv, GTK1.Widget icon, function(:void) clicked_cb, mixed clicked_arg)`

      Description

        Arguments as for append_item Adds a new button to the end of the toolbar.

      Method prepend_space

        `GTK1.Toolbar prepend_space()`

      Description

        Adds a small space.

      Method prepend_widget

        `GTK1.Toolbar prepend_widget(GTK1.Widget widget, string tootip, string prv)`

      Description

        Prepend a custom widgets. Arguments are widget, tooltip, private

      Method set_button_relief

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_button_relief(int relief)`

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_orientation(int orientation)`

      Description

        Set the orientation, one of ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and ORIENTATION_VERTICAL

      Method set_space_size

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_space_size(int pixels)`

      Description

        Set the width (or height) of the space created by append_space.

      Method set_space_style

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_space_style(int style)`

      Method set_style

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_style(int style)`

      Description

        Set the style, one of TOOLBAR_BOTH, TOOLBAR_ICONS and TOOLBAR_TEXT

      Method set_tooltips

        `GTK1.Toolbar set_tooltips(int tootipp)`

      Description

        If true, show the tooltips.

    CLASS GTK1.Tooltips

      Description

        Tooltips are the messages that appear next to a widget when the mouse pointer is held over it for a short amount of time. They are especially helpful for adding more verbose descriptions of things such as buttons in a toolbar.

        An individual tooltip belongs to a group of tooltips. A group is created with a call to GTK1.Tooltips(). Every tooltip in the group can then be turned off with a call to disable() and enabled with enable().

        The length of time the user must keep the mouse over a widget before the tip is shown, can be altered with set_delay(). This is set on a 'per group of tooltips' basis.

        To assign a tip to a particular W(Widget), set_tip() is used.

        The default appearance of all tooltips in a program is determined by the current gtk theme that the user has selected. To change the tooltip appearance manually, use set_colors(). Again, this is per group of tooltips.

      Method create

        `GTK1.Tooltips GTK1.Tooltips()`

      Description

        Creates an empty group of tooltips. This function initialises a GTK1.Tooltips structure. Without at least one such structure, you can not add tips to your application.

      Method disable

        `GTK1.Tooltips disable()`

      Description

        Disable this tooltip collection

      Method enable

        `GTK1.Tooltips enable()`

      Description

        Enable this tooltip collection

      Method force_window

        `GTK1.Tooltips force_window()`

      Description

        Realize the tooltip window (as returned from get_gdkwindow())

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK1.Data : Data

      Method set_colors

        `GTK1.Tooltips set_colors(GDK1.Color foreground, GDK1.Color background)`

      Description

        Changes the foreground and background colors.

      Method set_delay

        `GTK1.Tooltips set_delay(int delay)`

      Description

        Set the delat (in seconds)

      Method set_tip

        `GTK1.Tooltips set_tip(GTK1.Widget in, string to)`

      Description

        Adds a tooltip containing the message tip_text to the specified W(Widget).

    CLASS GTK1.Vbox

      Description

        Most packing is done by creating boxes. These are invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into which come in two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box. This is the vertical one. When packing widgets into a vertical box, the objects are inserted horizontally from top to bottom or bottom to top depending on the call used.

        `GTK1.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK1.Vbox(1,0)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK1.Vbox(1,40)->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK1.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK1.Button("From left"))`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vbox GTK1.Vbox(int uniformp, int padding)`

      Description

        Create a new horizontal box widget. If all_same_size is true, all widgets will have exactly the same size. padding is added to the top and bottom of the children.

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK1.Box : Box

    CLASS GTK1.VbuttonBox

      Description

        A Vbutton_box is very similar to a Vbox. The major diffference is that the button box is made to pack buttons in, and has a few convenience function for normal button layouts.

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_usize(100,300)`

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)->set_usize(100,300)`

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_EDGE)->set_usize(100,300)`

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_START)->set_usize(100,300)`

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK1.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK1.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK1.BUTTONBOX_END)->set_usize(100,300)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.VbuttonBox GTK1.VbuttonBox()`

      Description

        Create a new vertical button box

      Inherit ButtonBox

        inherit GTK1.ButtonBox : ButtonBox

    CLASS GTK1.Viewport

      Description

        This is a container that can be scrolled around, but it has no scrollbars. You can connect scrollbars to it using the adjustment objects. `GTK1.Viewport(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(100,100)`

        `GTK1.Viewport(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(100,100)->set_shadow_type(GTK1.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN)`

        `GTK1.Viewport(GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(100,100)->add(GTK1.Label("A label with a very long text on it, it will not fit"))->set_shadow_type(GTK1.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN)`

        `lambda(){ object a1;object v = GTK1.Viewport(a1=GTK1.Adjustment(),GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(100,100)->add(GTK1.Label("A label with a very long text on it, it will not fit"))->set_shadow_type(GTK1.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN);call_out(a1->set_value,0,100.0);return v;}()`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Viewport GTK1.Viewport(GTK1.Adjustment xscroll, GTK1.Adjustment yscroll)`

      Description

        Create a new viewport. The adjustments are used to select what part of the viewport to view to the user. They are normally connected to a scrollbar or something similar.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the current horizontal adjustment object

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the current vertical adjustment object

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK1.Viewport set_hadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment xscroll)`

      Description

        Set a new horizontal adjustment object.

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK1.Viewport set_shadow_type(int type)`

      Description

        Set the shadow style. One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK1.Viewport set_vadjustment(GTK1.Adjustment yscroll)`

      Description

        Set a new vertical adjustment object.

    CLASS GTK1.Vpaned

      Description

        The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle that the user can drag to change the ratio. This widgets makes a vertical division

        `GTK1.Vpaned()->add1(GTK1.Label("Top Side Of Pane"))->add2(GTK1.Label("Bottom"))->set_usize(100,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vpaned GTK1.Vpaned()`

      Inherit Paned

        inherit GTK1.Paned : Paned

    CLASS GTK1.Vruler

      Description

        Ruler widgets are used to indicate the location of the mouse pointer in a given window. A window can have a vertical ruler spanning across the width and a horizontal ruler spanning down the height. A small triangular indicator on the ruler shows the exact location of the pointer relative to the ruler.

        `GTK1.Vruler()->set_metric(GTK1.PIXELS)->set_range(0.0,100.0,50.0,100.0)->draw_ticks()->draw_pos()->set_usize(30,50)`

        `GTK1.Vruler()->set_metric(GTK1.CENTIMETERS)->set_range(0.0,100.0,50.0,100.0)->draw_ticks()->draw_pos()->set_usize(30,50)`

        `GTK1.Vruler()->set_usize(30,50)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vruler GTK1.Vruler()`

      Description

        Used to create a new vruler widget.

      Inherit Ruler

        inherit GTK1.Ruler : Ruler

    CLASS GTK1.Vscale

      Description

        The GTK1.VScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a vertical slider. A GtkAdjustment is used to set the initial value, the lower and upper bounds, and the step and page increments.

        The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent W(Scale) class's functions.

        `GTK1.Vscale(GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(30,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vscale GTK1.Vscale(GTK1.Adjustment settings)`

      Description

        Used to create a new vscale widget. The adjustment argument can either be an existing W(Adjustment), or 0, in which case one will be created for you. Specifying 0 might actually be useful in this case, if you wish to pass the newly automatically created adjustment to the constructor function of some other widget which will configure it for you, such as a text widget.

      Inherit Scale

        inherit GTK1.Scale : Scale

    CLASS GTK1.Vscrollbar

      Description

        General documentation: See W(Scrollbar) `GTK1.Vscrollbar(GTK1.Adjustment())->set_usize(15,60)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vscrollbar GTK1.Vscrollbar(GTK1.Adjustment pos)`

      Description

        Used to create a new vscrollbar widget. The adjustment argument can either be an existing W(Adjustment), or 0, in which case one will be created for you. Specifying 0 might actually be useful in this case, if you wish to pass the newly automatically created adjustment to the constructor function of some other widget which will configure it for you, such as a text widget.

      Inherit Scrollbar

        inherit GTK1.Scrollbar : Scrollbar

    CLASS GTK1.Vseparator

      Description

        Simply creates a vertical separator. No bells or whistles. `GTK1.Vseparator()->set_usize(3,50)`

      Method create

        `GTK1.Vseparator GTK1.Vseparator()`

      Description

        Used to create a new vseparator widget.

      Inherit Separator

        inherit GTK1.Separator : Separator

    CLASS GTK1.Widget

      Description

        The basic widget, inherited (directly or indirectly) by all widgets. Thus, all functions and signals defined in this widget works on all widgets.

        One of the most importat functions in this class is 'show', it lets GTK know that we are done setting the attributes of the widget, and it is ready to be displayed. You may also use hide to make it disappear again. The order in which you show the widgets is not important, but I suggest showing the toplevel window last so the whole window pops up at once rather than seeing the individual widgets come up on the screen as they're formed. The children of a widget (a window is a widget too) will not be displayed until the window itself is shown using the show() function.

        Signals: add_accelerator Called when an accelarator (keyboard shortcut) is added to the widget

        button_press_event Called when a mouse button is pressed

        button_release_event Called when a mouse button is released

        client_event An event sent by another client application

        configure_event The size, position or stacking order of the widget has changed

        debug_msg

        delete_event Called when the user has requested that the widget should be closed

        destroy_event Called when the widget is destroyed

        drag_begin Called when the drag is initiated, on the sending side

        drag_data_delete Called when the data can be safely deleted (there is no need to use this function in pigtk, it's all handled automatically)

        drag_data_get Called on the sending side when the drop is initiated

        drag_data_received Called on the receiving side when the drop is finished.

        drag_drop Called on the receiving side when the drop is initiated

        drag_end Called when the drag is finished, on the sending side

        drag_leave Called when the mouse leaves the widget while the user is dragging something

        drag_motion Called on the receiving side when the cursor is moved over the widget while dragging something

        draw Called when the widget should draw itself.

        draw_default Called when the widget should draw itself, and indicate that it's the default widget

        draw_focus Called when the widget should draw itself, and a focus indicator around itself (or otherwise indicate that is has the keyboard focus)

        enter_notify_event Called when the mouse enters the widget

        event Called for all events

        expose_event Called when the widget, or a part of the widget gets and expose event

        focus_in_event The keyboard focus has entered the widget

        focus_out_event The keyboard focus has left the widget

        hide Called when the widget is hidden

        key_press_event Called when a keyboard key is pressed

        key_release_event Called when a keyboard key is released

        leave_notify_event Called when the mouse leaves the widget

        map Called when the window associated with the widget is mapped

        map_event Called just before the 'map' signal

        motion_notify_event Called when the mouse is moved inside the widget

        no_expose_event

        other_event

        parent_set Called when the parent widget is changed

        property_notify_event Called when a property of the GDK window associated with the widget is changed

        proximity_in_event

        proximity_out_event

        realize Called when the widget is realized. Some methods cannot be used until the widget has been realized, if you get assertion errors related to 'w->window' or similar, this is probably the cause.

        remove_accelerator Called when an accelerator (keyboard shortcut) is removed from the widget

        selection_clear_event NYI

        selection_notify_event NYI

        selection_received NYI

        selection_request_event NYI

        show Called when the widget is shown

        size_allocate Called when the widget gets the size it should be

        size_request Called when the widget should calculate how big it wants to be

        state_changed

        style_set Called when the style is changed

        unmap Called when the window associated with the widget is unmapped

        unmap_event Called just before the 'unmap' signal

        unrealize Called when the widget is unrealized.

        visibility_notify_event The widget has been mapped, unmapped, hidden, or otherwise had its visibility modified

      Method activate

        `GTK1.Widget activate()`

      Description

        Activate the widget. This either activates the widget, if possible (as an example, buttons can be activated), or activates the default widget of its parent (or its parent, or its parents parent etc.)

      Method add_accelerator

        `GTK1.Widget add_accelerator(string signal, GTK1.AccelGroup group, int key, int modifiers, int flags)`

      Description

        Add an accelerator (keyboard shortcut).

        Flag is one of ACCEL_LOCKED, ACCEL_SIGNAL_VISIBLE and ACCEL_VISIBLE

        The signal is the signal to invoke when the accelerator key is pressed.

        The modifiers is a bitwise or of one or more of GDK1.ShiftMask, GDK1.LockMask, GDK1.ControlMask, GDK_MOD1_MASK, GDK_MOD2_MASK, GDK_MOD3_MASK, GDK_MOD4_MASK and GDK_MOD5_MASK.

        The group is the accelerator group in which the accelerator should be added.

        The key is the unicode code for the key to bind.

      Method add_events

        `GTK1.Widget add_events(int events)`

      Description

        Events is one or more of: GDK1.ExposureMask, GDK1.PointerMotionMask, GDK1.PointerMotion_HINTMask, GDK1.ButtonMotionMask, GDK1.Button1MotionMask, GDK1.Button2MotionMask, GDK1.Button3MotionMask, GDK1.ButtonPressMask, GDK1.ButtonReleaseMask, GDK1.KeyPressMask, GDK1.KeyReleaseMask, GDK1.EnterNotifyMask, GDK1.LeaveNotifyMask, GDK1.FocusChangeMask, GDK1.StructureMask, GDK1.PropertyChangeMask, GDK1.VisibilityNotifyMask, GDK1.ProximityInMask, GDK1.ProximityOutMask and GDK1.AllEventsMask

      Method allocation

        `mapping allocation()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "x":xoffset, "y":yoffset, "width":xsize, "height":ysize ])

      Method class_path

        `string class_path()`

      Description

        Returns the class 'pathname' of this widget. Useful for rc-files and such.

      Method copy_area

        `GTK1.Widget copy_area(GDK1.GC gc, int xdest, int ydest, GTK1.Widget source, int xsource, int ysource, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Copies the rectangle defined by xsource,ysource and width,height from the source widget, and places the results at xdest,ydest in the widget in which this function is called. NOTE: The widget must be realized before this function can be used

      Method drag_dest_set

        `GTK1.Widget drag_dest_set(int flags, array targets, int actions)`

      Description

        Register a drop site, and possibly add default behaviors. arguments: flags: Which types of default drag behavior to use (one of DEST_DEFAULT_ALL, DEST_DEFAULT_DROP, DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT and DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION) targets: Table of targets that can be accepted ({ ({ content_type(string), flags(int(try 0)), id(int) }), ...}) The id will be received in the signal handlers. actions: one of GDK_ACTION_ASK, GDK_ACTION_COPY, GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT, GDK_ACTION_LINK, GDK_ACTION_MOVE and GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE results:

      Method drag_dest_unset

        `GTK1.Widget drag_dest_unset()`

      Description

        Removes the drop support from this widget (see drag_dest_set)

      Method drag_get_data

        `GTK1.Widget drag_get_data(GDK1.DragContext ctx, int time)`

      Description

        Get the data from a context and an integer timestamp (from an event), requesting it from the dropping client. This function should probably never be used directly.

        Use the selection argument passed to the drag_data_received signal instead.

      Method drag_highlight

        `GTK1.Widget drag_highlight()`

      Description

        Highlight the widget. Not normaly used directly.

      Method drag_source_set

        `GTK1.Widget drag_source_set(int flags, array targets, int actions)`

      Description

        Register a drop site, and possibly add default behaviors. arguments: buttons: Which mouse buttons can be used to start the drag targets: Table of targets that can be accepted ({ ({ content_type(string), flags(int(try 0)), id(int) }), ...}) The id will be received in the signal handlers. actions: one of GDK_ACTION_ASK, GDK_ACTION_COPY, GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT, GDK_ACTION_LINK, GDK_ACTION_MOVE and GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE results:

      Method drag_source_set_icon

        `GTK1.Widget drag_source_set_icon(GDK1.Pixmap pm, GDK1.Bitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the icon that will be used (by default) for drags from this widget.

      Method drag_source_unset

        `GTK1.Widget drag_source_unset()`

      Description

        Remove the drag support from this widget. See drag_source_set.

      Method drag_unhighlight

        `GTK1.Widget drag_unhighlight()`

      Description

        Unhighlight the widget. Not normaly used directly.

      Method ensure_style

        `GTK1.Widget ensure_style()`

      Description

        Ensure that the widget has a style associated with it.

      Method get_composite_name

        `string get_composite_name()`

      Description

        Like set name, but it is inherited by the children of this widget.

      Method get_events

        `int get_events()`

      Description

        Return the current event mask (see set_events and add_events)

      Method get_extension_events

        `int get_extension_events()`

      Description

        Returns one of GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR and GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

      Method get_gdkwindow

        `GDK1.Window get_gdkwindow()`

      Description

        Return the GDK1.Window associated with this widget, if any.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Returns the name set by set_name or the class name

      Method get_parent

        `GTK1.Widget get_parent()`

      Description

        Returns the parent of this widget, if any, if there is no parent 0 is returned.

      Method get_style

        `GTK1.Style get_style()`

      Description

        Return the style associated with this widget

      Method get_toplevel

        `GTK1.Widget get_toplevel()`

      Description

        return the toplevel widget this widget is inside (or this widget if it is the toplevel widget)

      Method grab_default

        `GTK1.Widget grab_default()`

      Description

        Make this widget the default action for the parent widget

      Method grab_focus

        `GTK1.Widget grab_focus()`

      Description

        Grab the focus.

      Method has_set_flags

        `int has_set_flags(int mask)`

      Description

        All possible flags are: GTK1.AppPaintable, GTK1.CanDefault, GTK1.CanFocus, GTK1.CompositeChild, GTK1.HasDefault, GTK1.HasFocus, GTK1.HasGrab, GTK1.Mapped, GTK1.NoReparent, GTK1.NoWindow, GTK1.ParentSensitive, GTK1.RcStyle, GTK1.Realized, GTK1.ReceivesDefault GTK1.Sensitive, GTK1.Toplevel and GTK1.Visible.

      Method hide

        `GTK1.Widget hide()`

      Description

        Hide this widget

      Method hide_all

        `GTK1.Widget hide_all()`

      Description

        Hide this widget and all its children

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK1.Object : Object

      Method intersect

        `int intersect(GDK1.Rectangle area, GDK1.Rectangle intersection)`

      Description

        Do an intersection with the area and place the result in 'intersection'.

      Method is_ancestor

        `int is_ancestor(GTK1.Widget of)`

      Description

        Returns true if the specified widget is an ancestor of this widget.

      Method lock_accelerators

        `GTK1.Widget lock_accelerators()`

      Description

        Make it impossible to add new accelerators, or remove old ones

      Method map

        `GTK1.Widget map()`

      Description

        Map the widget. Should normally not be called directly.

      Method path

        `string path()`

      Description

        Returns the 'pathname' of this widget. Useful for rc-files and such.

      Method popup

        `GTK1.Widget popup(int xpos, int ypos)`

      Description

        Map the widget at the specified coordinates.

      Method queue_clear

        `GTK1.Widget queue_clear()`

      Description

        Force a clear (and subsequent redraw) of the widget

      Method queue_clear_area

        `GTK1.Widget queue_clear_area(int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Force a clear (and subsequent redraw) of part of the widget

      Method queue_draw

        `GTK1.Widget queue_draw()`

      Description

        Force a redraw of the widget

      Method queue_draw_area

        `GTK1.Widget queue_draw_area(int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Force a redraw of part of the widget

      Method queue_resize

        `GTK1.Widget queue_resize()`

      Description

        Force a allocation recalculation, followed by a redraw

      Method realize

        `GTK1.Widget realize()`

      Description

        Realize this widget, and its children, if nessesary

      Method remove_accelerator

        `GTK1.Widget remove_accelerator(GTK1.AccelGroup group, int key, int modifiers)`

      Description

        Remove an accelerator (keyboard shortcut).

        The modifiers is a bitwise or of one or more of GDK1.ShiftMask, GDK1.LockMask, GDK1.ControlMask, GDK_MOD1_MASK, GDK_MOD2_MASK, GDK_MOD3_MASK, GDK_MOD4_MASK and GDK_MOD5_MASK.

        The group is the accelerator group in which the accelerator should be added.

        The key is the unicode code for the key to bind.

      Method reparent

        `GTK1.Widget reparent(GTK1.Widget to)`

      Description

        Change the parent of the widget.

      Method reset_rc_styles

        `GTK1.Widget reset_rc_styles()`

      Description

        Reset all styles to their default value, recursively

      Method restore_default_style

        `GTK1.Widget restore_default_style()`

      Description

        Reset all styles to their default value

      Method selection_add_target

        `GTK1.Widget selection_add_target(GDK1.Atom|void selection, GDK1.Atom|void target, int|void info)`

      Description

        Supplying the selection is a bit more complicated than requesting it. You must register handlers that will be called when your selection is requested. For each selection/target pair you will handle, you make a call to this function.

        selection, and target identify the requests this handler will manage. When a request for a selection is received, the "selection_get" signal will be called. info can be used as an enumerator to identify the specific target within the callback function.

        Selection defaults to PRIMARY, and target defaults to STRING.

      Method selection_owner_set

        `GTK1.Widget selection_owner_set(GDK1.Atom|void selection, int|void time)`

      Description

        When prompted by the user, you claim ownership of the selection by calling this function.

        If another application claims ownership of the selection, you will receive a "selection_clear_event".

        The selection defaults to the PRIMARY selection, and the time to GDK1.CurrentTime.

      Method selecton_convert

        `int selecton_convert(GDK1.Atom|void selection, GDK1.Atom|void target, int|void time)`

      Description

        Retrieving the selection is an asynchronous process. To start the process, you call this function.

        This converts the selection into the form specified by target. If at all possible, the time field should be the time from the event that triggered the selection. This helps make sure that events occur in the order that the user requested them. However, if it is not available (for instance, if the conversion was triggered by a "clicked" signal), then you can omit it altogether. This will cause it to be set to GDK1.CurrentTime.

        When the selection owner responds to the request, a "selection_received" signal is sent to your application. The handler for this signal receives a pointer to a GTK1.SelectionData object.

        The special target TARGETS generates a list of all valid targets.

        Selection defaults to PRIMARY, and target defaults to STRING.

      Method set_app_paintable

        `GTK1.Widget set_app_paintable(int paintablep)`

      Description

        Make it possible to draw directly in the widget using the low-level drawing functions.

      Method set_background

        `GTK1.Widget set_background(GDK1.Color background)`

      Description

        Set the background color or image. The argument is either a GDK1.Pixmap or a GDK1.Color object. NOTE: The widget must be realized before this function can be used

      Method set_bitmap_cursor

        `GTK1.Widget set_bitmap_cursor(GDK1.Bitmap source, GDK1.Bitmap mask, GDK1.Color fg, GDK1.Color bg, int xhot, int yhot)`

      Description

        xhot and yhot are the locations of the x and y hotspot relative to the upper left corner of the cursor image. Both the bitmaps and the colors must be specified.

      Method set_composite_name

        `GTK1.Widget set_composite_name(string name)`

      Description

        Like set name, but it is inherited by the children of this widget.

      Method set_cursor

        `GTK1.Widget set_cursor(int|void cursor_type, GDK1.Color fg, GDK1.Color bg)`

      Description

        Change the widget cursor. If no arguments are passed, restore the default cursor. Both fg and bg must be specified if either one is. <table border="0" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0"> CURS(GDK1.Arrow) CURS(GDK1.BasedArrowDown) CURS(GDK1.BasedArrowUp) CURS(GDK1.Boat) CURS(GDK1.Bogosity) CURS(GDK1.BottomLeftCorner) CURS(GDK1.BottomRightCorner) CURS(GDK1.BottomSide) CURS(GDK1.BottomTee) CURS(GDK1.BoxSpiral) CURS(GDK1.CenterPtr) CURS(GDK1.Circle) CURS(GDK1.Clock) CURS(GDK1.CoffeeMug) CURS(GDK1.Cross) CURS(GDK1.CrossReverse) CURS(GDK1.Crosshair) CURS(GDK1.DiamondCross) CURS(GDK1.Dot) CURS(GDK1.Dotbox) CURS(GDK1.DoubleArrow) CURS(GDK1.DraftLarge) CURS(GDK1.DraftSmall) CURS(GDK1.DrapedBox) CURS(GDK1.Exchange) CURS(GDK1.Fleur) CURS(GDK1.Gobbler) CURS(GDK1.Gumby) CURS(GDK1.Hand1) CURS(GDK1.Hand2) CURS(GDK1.Heart) CURS(GDK1.Icon) CURS(GDK1.IronCross) CURS(GDK1.LeftPtr) CURS(GDK1.LeftSide) CURS(GDK1.LeftTee) CURS(GDK1.Leftbutton) CURS(GDK1.LlAngle) CURS(GDK1.LrAngle) CURS(GDK1.Man) CURS(GDK1.Middlebutton) CURS(GDK1.Mouse) CURS(GDK1.Pencil) CURS(GDK1.Pirate) CURS(GDK1.Plus) CURS(GDK1.QuestionArrow) CURS(GDK1.RightPtr) CURS(GDK1.RightSide) CURS(GDK1.RightTee) CURS(GDK1.Rightbutton) CURS(GDK1.RtlLogo) CURS(GDK1.Sailboat) CURS(GDK1.SbDownArrow) CURS(GDK1.SbHDoubleArrow) CURS(GDK1.SbLeftArrow) CURS(GDK1.SbRightArrow) CURS(GDK1.SbUpArrow) CURS(GDK1.SbVDoubleArrow) CURS(GDK1.Shuttle) CURS(GDK1.Sizing) CURS(GDK1.Spider) CURS(GDK1.Spraycan) CURS(GDK1.Star) CURS(GDK1.Target) CURS(GDK1.Tcross) CURS(GDK1.TopLeftArrow) CURS(GDK1.TopLeftCorner) CURS(GDK1.TopRightCorner) CURS(GDK1.TopSide) CURS(GDK1.TopTee) CURS(GDK1.Trek) CURS(GDK1.UlAngle) CURS(GDK1.Umbrella) CURS(GDK1.UrAngle) CURS(GDK1.Watch) CURS(GDK1.Xterm) </table>

      Method set_events

        `GTK1.Widget set_events(int events)`

      Description

        Events is one or more of: GDK1.ExposureMask, GDK1.PointerMotionMask, GDK1.PointerMotion_HINTMask, GDK1.ButtonMotionMask, GDK1.Button1MotionMask, GDK1.Button2MotionMask, GDK1.Button3MotionMask, GDK1.ButtonPressMask, GDK1.ButtonReleaseMask, GDK1.KeyPressMask, GDK1.KeyReleaseMask, GDK1.EnterNotifyMask, GDK1.LeaveNotifyMask, GDK1.FocusChangeMask, GDK1.StructureMask, GDK1.PropertyChangeMask, GDK1.VisibilityNotifyMask, GDK1.ProximityInMask, GDK1.ProximityOutMask and GDK1.AllEventsMask

      Method set_extension_events

        `GTK1.Widget set_extension_events(int events)`

      Description

        Events is one of GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR and GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

      Method set_flags

        `GTK1.Widget set_flags(int flags)`

      Description

        The flags that it makes sense to set are: GTK1.CanFocus and GTK1.CanDefault

      Method set_name

        `GTK1.Widget set_name(string name)`

      Description

        Set the name of the widget. The name is used when the rc-file is parsed, you can also parse your own resources by calling GTK1.parse_rc() with a resource string. Example: TODO

      Method set_rc_style

        `GTK1.Widget set_rc_style()`

      Description

        Set the style from the .rc files

      Method set_scroll_adjustments

        `int set_scroll_adjustments(GTK1.Adjustment hadjustment, GTK1.Adjustment vadjustment)`

      Description

        Set the scrolling (panning) adjustment objects for this widget. Returns 1 if it is possible to do so, and 0 otherwise.

      Method set_sensitive

        `GTK1.Widget set_sensitive(int sensitivep)`

      Description

        True (1) or false (0). If true, the widget can receive events, otherwise the user cannot interact with the widget. Most widgets are drawn 'greyed' or more dim when they are unsensitive.

      Method set_state

        `GTK1.Widget set_state(int state)`

      Description

        One of STATE_ACTIVE, STATE_INSENSITIVE, STATE_NORMAL, STATE_PRELIGHT and STATE_SELECTED. This function should normaly not be used directly.

      Method set_style

        `GTK1.Widget set_style(GTK1.Style cf)`

      Description

        Set the style to be associated with this widget

      Method set_uposition

        `GTK1.Widget set_uposition(int xpos, int ypos)`

      Description

        Set the absolute coordinates of the widget relative to its parent.

      Method set_usize

        `GTK1.Widget set_usize(int xsize, int ysize)`

      Description

        Set the absolute size of the widget. It might resize itself anyway, but this size is used as is in most widgets. Beware of this function, it might produce unexpected results. 0 for any size means 'keep old size'. When setting sizes of wtoplevel windows, it is preferable to use set_default_size

      Method shape_combine_mask

        `GTK1.Widget shape_combine_mask(GDK1.Bitmap shape, int xoffset, int yoffset)`

      Description

        Set the shape of the widget, or, rather, its window, to that of the supplied bitmap. Notice how the window behind the example window can be seen because of the rather odd shape the example window has. `GTK1.Window( GTK1.WINDOW_TOPLEVEL )->add(GTK1.Label("A rather Oddly shaped\n" "Window\n" "Indeed\n" "Or what do you\nthink?\n" "This text\n" "should\n" "be long enough"))->shape_combine_mask( GDK1.Bitmap(Image.Image(100,100,255,255,255)->rotate(10,0,0,0) ), 20,20)`

        NOTE: The widget must be realized before this function can be used

      Method show

        `GTK1.Widget show()`

      Description

        Show the widget. Most (almost all) widgets must be shown to be visible on the screen.

      Method show_all

        `GTK1.Widget show_all()`

      Description

        Show this widget and all its children

      Method show_now

        `GTK1.Widget show_now()`

      Description

        Show this widget and do not return until it is visible.

      Method text_width

        `int text_width(string text)`

      Description

        Returns the width, in pixels, the string would have if it was written with the default font in the style object assosiated with the widget.

      Method unlock_accelerators

        `GTK1.Widget unlock_accelerators()`

      Description

        Make it possible to add new accelerators, and remove old ones, again. Use this after lock_accelerators()

      Method unmap

        `GTK1.Widget unmap()`

      Description

        Unmap the widget. Should normally not be called directly.

      Method unparent

        `GTK1.Widget unparent()`

      Description

        Remove this widget from its parent

      Method unrealize

        `GTK1.Widget unrealize()`

      Description

        Unrealize this widget, and its children, if nessesary

      Method unset_flags

        `GTK1.Widget unset_flags(int flags)`

      Description

        The flags that it makes sense to unset are: GTK1.CanFocus and GTK1.CanDefault

      Method xoffset

        `int xoffset()`

      Description

        Returns the x position of the upper left corner relative to the widgets window in pixels. For widgets that have their own window this will most likely be 0.

      Method xsize

        `int xsize()`

      Description

        Returns the width of the widget in pixels.

      Method yoffset

        `int yoffset()`

      Description

        Returns the y position of the upper left corner relative to the widgets window in pixels. For widgets that have their own window this will most likely be 0.

      Method ysize

        `int ysize()`

      Description

        Returns the height of the widget in pixels.

    CLASS GTK1.Window

      Description

        The basic window. Nothing much to say about it. It can only contain one child widget. Show the main window last to avoid annoying flashes when the subwidget (and it's subwidgets) are added to it, this is done automatically by calling 'window->show_all' when you are done with your widget packing.

        Signals: move_resize

        set_focus

      Method activate_default

        `int activate_default()`

      Description

        Activate the default widget

      Method activate_focus

        `int activate_focus()`

      Description

        Activate the focus widget

      Method add_accel_group

        `GTK1.Window add_accel_group(GTK1.AccelGroup group)`

      Description

        This function adds an accelerator group to the window. The shortcuts in the table will work in the window, it's child, and all children of it's child that do not select keyboard input.

      Method add_embedded_xid

        `GTK1.Window add_embedded_xid(int x_window_id)`

      Description

        Add an embedded X-window

      Method create

        `GTK1.Window GTK1.Window(int window_type)`

      Description

        Argument is one of WINDOW_DIALOG, WINDOW_POPUP and WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      Method get_allow_grow

        `int get_allow_grow()`

      Description

        If true, the window can grow if nessesary

      Method get_allow_shrink

        `int get_allow_shrink()`

      Description

        If true, the window can be shrunk by the user

      Method get_auto_shrink

        `int get_auto_shrink()`

      Description

        If true, the window will shrink if possible

      Method get_default_widget

        `GTK1.Widget get_default_widget()`

      Description

        The default widget

      Method get_focus_widget

        `GTK1.Widget get_focus_widget()`

      Description

        The focus widget

      Method get_modal

        `int get_modal()`

      Description

        If true, this is a modal dialog window

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        The title of the window

      Method get_transient_parent

        `GTK1.Window get_transient_parent()`

      Description

        The parent window for this window if this is a transient window, 0 otherwise.

      Method get_type

        `int get_type()`

      Description

        The window type, one of WINDOW_DIALOG, WINDOW_POPUP and WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      Method get_wmclass_class

        `string get_wmclass_class()`

      Description

        The window manager class of this application.

      Method get_wmclass_name

        `string get_wmclass_name()`

      Description

        The window manager name of this application.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK1.Bin : Bin

      Method lower

        `GTK1.Window lower()`

      Description

        Lower this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method raise

        `GTK1.Window raise()`

      Description

        Raise this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method remove_accel_group

        `GTK1.Window remove_accel_group(GTK1.AccelGroup table)`

      Description

        Remove a previously installed table.

      Method remove_embedded_xid

        `GTK1.Window remove_embedded_xid(int x_window_id)`

      Description

        Remove the embeded X window

      Method set_default

        `GTK1.Window set_default(GTK1.Widget default_widget)`

      Description

        Set the default widget to the specified widget. The specified widget must have the GTK1.CanDefault flag set.

      Method set_default_size

        `GTK1.Window set_default_size(int width, int height)`

      Description

        The following differs from set_usize, in that set_usize() overrides the requisition, and thus sets a minimum size, while this only sets the size requested from the WM.

      Method set_focus

        `GTK1.Window set_focus(GTK1.Widget child)`

      Description

        Set the focus widget to the specified child. Please note that this is normaly handled automatically.

      Method set_icon

        `GTK1.Window set_icon(GDK1.Pixmap p, GDK1.Bitmap b, GDK1.Window w)`

      Description

        Set the icon to the specified image (with mask) or the specified GDK1.Window. It is up to the window manager to display the icon. Most window manager handles window and pixmap icons, but only a few can handle the mask argument. If you want a shaped icon, the only safe bet is a shaped window.

      Method set_icon_name

        `GTK1.Window set_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Set the icon name to the specified string.

      Method set_modal

        `GTK1.Window set_modal(int modalp)`

      Description

        / Is this a modal dialog?

      Method set_policy

        `GTK1.Window set_policy(int allow_shrink, int allow_grow, int auto_shrink)`

      Description

        If allow shrink is true, the user can resize the window to a smaller size. If allow_grow is true, the window can resize itself, and the user can resize the window, to a bigger size. It auto shrink is true, the window will resize itself to a smaller size when it's subwidget is resized.

      Method set_position

        `GTK1.Window set_position(int pos)`

      Description

        one of WINDOW_DIALOG, WINDOW_POPUP, WINDOW_TOPLEVEL, WIN_POS_CENTER, WIN_POS_MOUSE and WIN_POS_NONE

      Method set_title

        `GTK1.Window set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Set the window title. The default title is the value sent to setup_gtk, or if none is sent, Pike GTK1.

      Method set_transient_for

        `GTK1.Window set_transient_for(GTK1.Window parent)`

      Description

        Mark this window as a transient window for the parent window. Most window managers renders transient windows differently (different borders, sometimes no resize widgets etc)

        Useful for short lived dialogs.

      Method set_wmclass

        `GTK1.Window set_wmclass(string name, string class)`

      Description

        Set the window manager application name and class.

  Module GTK2

    Constant ACCEL_LOCKED

      `constant GTK2.ACCEL_LOCKED`

    Constant ACCEL_MASK

      `constant GTK2.ACCEL_MASK`

    Constant ACCEL_VISIBLE

      `constant GTK2.ACCEL_VISIBLE`

    Constant ANCHOR_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_CENTER`

    Constant ANCHOR_E

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_E`

    Constant ANCHOR_EAST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_N

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_N`

    Constant ANCHOR_NE

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_NE`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_NORTH`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST`

    Constant ANCHOR_NW

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_NW`

    Constant ANCHOR_S

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_S`

    Constant ANCHOR_SE

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_SE`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_SOUTH`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST`

    Constant ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST`

    Constant ANCHOR_SW

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_SW`

    Constant ANCHOR_W

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_W`

    Constant ANCHOR_WEST

      `constant GTK2.ANCHOR_WEST`

    Constant APP_PAINTABLE

      `constant GTK2.APP_PAINTABLE`

    Constant ARROW_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.ARROW_DOWN`

    Constant ARROW_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.ARROW_LEFT`

    Constant ARROW_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.ARROW_RIGHT`

    Constant ARROW_UP

      `constant GTK2.ARROW_UP`

    Constant ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM

      `constant GTK2.ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM`

    Constant ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONTENT

      `constant GTK2.ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONTENT`

    Constant ASSISTANT_PAGE_INTRO

      `constant GTK2.ASSISTANT_PAGE_INTRO`

    Constant ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS

      `constant GTK2.ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS`

    Constant ASSISTANT_PAGE_SUMMARY

      `constant GTK2.ASSISTANT_PAGE_SUMMARY`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_EDGE

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONBOX_EDGE`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_END

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONBOX_END`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_SPREAD

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD`

    Constant BUTTONBOX_START

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONBOX_START`

    Constant BUTTONS_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_CANCEL`

    Constant BUTTONS_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_CLOSE`

    Constant BUTTONS_NONE

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_NONE`

    Constant BUTTONS_OK

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_OK`

    Constant BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL`

    Constant BUTTONS_YES_NO

      `constant GTK2.BUTTONS_YES_NO`

    Constant CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE

      `constant GTK2.CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES

      `constant GTK2.CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING

      `constant GTK2.CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING`

    Constant CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS

      `constant GTK2.CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS`

    Constant CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY

      `constant GTK2.CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY`

    Constant CAN_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK2.CAN_DEFAULT`

    Constant CAN_FOCUS

      `constant GTK2.CAN_FOCUS`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_GTK

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_GTK`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_OTHER

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_OTHER`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_INSENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_INSENSITIVE`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_PRELIT

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_PRELIT`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_SELECTED

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_SELECTED`

    Constant CELL_RENDERER_SORTED

      `constant GTK2.CELL_RENDERER_SORTED`

    Constant CENTIMETERS

      `constant GTK2.CENTIMETERS`

    Constant COMPOSITE_CHILD

      `constant GTK2.COMPOSITE_CHILD`

    Constant CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT`

    Constant CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT`

    Constant CORNER_TOP_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.CORNER_TOP_LEFT`

    Constant CORNER_TOP_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.CORNER_TOP_RIGHT`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_FREE

      `constant GTK2.CURVE_TYPE_FREE`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR

      `constant GTK2.CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR`

    Constant CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE

      `constant GTK2.CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE`

    Constant DATABOX_BARS

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_BARS`

    Constant DATABOX_CROSS_SIMPLE

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_CROSS_SIMPLE`

    Constant DATABOX_GRID

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_GRID`

    Constant DATABOX_LINES

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_LINES`

    Constant DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED`

    Constant DATABOX_POINTS

      `constant GTK2.DATABOX_POINTS`

    Constant DELETE_CHARS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_CHARS`

    Constant DELETE_DISPLAY_LINES

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_DISPLAY_LINES`

    Constant DELETE_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS`

    Constant DELETE_PARAGRAPHS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_PARAGRAPHS`

    Constant DELETE_PARAGRAPH_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_PARAGRAPH_ENDS`

    Constant DELETE_WHITESPACE

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_WHITESPACE`

    Constant DELETE_WORDS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_WORDS`

    Constant DELETE_WORD_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.DELETE_WORD_ENDS`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_ALL

      `constant GTK2.DEST_DEFAULT_ALL`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_DROP

      `constant GTK2.DEST_DEFAULT_DROP`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT

      `constant GTK2.DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT`

    Constant DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION

      `constant GTK2.DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION`

    Constant DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT

      `constant GTK2.DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT`

    Constant DIALOG_MODAL

      `constant GTK2.DIALOG_MODAL`

    Constant DIALOG_NO_SEPARATOR

      `constant GTK2.DIALOG_NO_SEPARATOR`

    Constant DIR_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.DIR_DOWN`

    Constant DIR_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.DIR_LEFT`

    Constant DIR_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.DIR_RIGHT`

    Constant DIR_TAB_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK2.DIR_TAB_BACKWARD`

    Constant DIR_TAB_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.DIR_TAB_FORWARD`

    Constant DIR_UP

      `constant GTK2.DIR_UP`

    Constant DOUBLE_BUFFERED

      `constant GTK2.DOUBLE_BUFFERED`

    Constant ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY

      `constant GTK2.ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY`

    Constant ENTRY_ICON_SECONDARY

      `constant GTK2.ENTRY_ICON_SECONDARY`

    Constant EXPAND

      `constant GTK2.EXPAND`

    Constant EXPANDER_COLLAPSED

      `constant GTK2.EXPANDER_COLLAPSED`

    Constant EXPANDER_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.EXPANDER_EXPANDED`

    Constant EXPANDER_SEMI_COLLAPSED

      `constant GTK2.EXPANDER_SEMI_COLLAPSED`

    Constant EXPANDER_SEMI_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.EXPANDER_SEMI_EXPANDED`

    Constant FALSE

      `constant GTK2.FALSE`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_BAD_FILENAME

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_BAD_FILENAME`

    Constant FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_NONEXISTENT

      `constant GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_NONEXISTENT`

    Constant FILE_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME

      `constant GTK2.FILE_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME`

    Constant FILE_FILTER_FILENAME

      `constant GTK2.FILE_FILTER_FILENAME`

    Constant FILE_FILTER_MIME_TYPE

      `constant GTK2.FILE_FILTER_MIME_TYPE`

    Constant FILE_FILTER_URI

      `constant GTK2.FILE_FILTER_URI`

    Constant FILL

      `constant GTK2.FILL`

    Constant FLOATING

      `constant GTK2.FLOATING`

    Constant GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS`

    Constant GDK_3BUTTON_PRESS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_3BUTTON_PRESS`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_ASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_ASK`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_COPY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_COPY`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_LINK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_LINK`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_MOVE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_MOVE`

    Constant GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE`

    Constant GDK_ALL_EVENTS_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ALL_EVENTS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_AND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AND`

    Constant GDK_AND_INVERT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AND_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_AND_REVERSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AND_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_IGNORE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_IGNORE`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_LAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_LAST`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_PRESSURE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_PRESSURE`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_WHEEL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_WHEEL`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_X

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_X`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_XTILT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_XTILT`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_Y

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_Y`

    Constant GDK_AXIS_YTILT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_AXIS_YTILT`

    Constant GDK_BASED_ARROW_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BASED_ARROW_DOWN`

    Constant GDK_BASED_ARROW_UP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BASED_ARROW_UP`

    Constant GDK_BOAT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOAT`

    Constant GDK_BOGOSITY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOGOSITY`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOTTOM_LEFT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOTTOM_RIGHT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOTTOM_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_BOTTOM_TEE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOTTOM_TEE`

    Constant GDK_BOX_SPIRAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BOX_SPIRAL`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON1_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON1_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON2_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON2_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON3_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON3_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON4_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON4_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON5_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON5_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_PRESS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON_PRESS`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE`

    Constant GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_CAP_BUTT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CAP_BUTT`

    Constant GDK_CAP_NOT_LAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CAP_NOT_LAST`

    Constant GDK_CAP_PROJECTING

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CAP_PROJECTING`

    Constant GDK_CAP_ROUND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CAP_ROUND`

    Constant GDK_CENTER_PTR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CENTER_PTR`

    Constant GDK_CIRCLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CIRCLE`

    Constant GDK_CLEAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CLEAR`

    Constant GDK_CLIENT_EVENT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CLIENT_EVENT`

    Constant GDK_CLIP_BY_CHILDREN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CLIP_BY_CHILDREN`

    Constant GDK_CLOCK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CLOCK`

    Constant GDK_COFFEE_MUG

      `constant GTK2.GDK_COFFEE_MUG`

    Constant GDK_COLORSPACE_RGB

      `constant GTK2.GDK_COLORSPACE_RGB`

    Constant GDK_CONFIGURE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CONFIGURE`

    Constant GDK_CONTROL_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CONTROL_MASK`

    Constant GDK_COPY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_COPY`

    Constant GDK_COPY_INVERT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_COPY_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_CROSS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_CROSSHAIR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSSHAIR`

    Constant GDK_CROSSING_GRAB

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSSING_GRAB`

    Constant GDK_CROSSING_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSSING_NORMAL`

    Constant GDK_CROSSING_UNGRAB

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSSING_UNGRAB`

    Constant GDK_CROSS_REVERSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CROSS_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_ALL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_ALL`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_BORDER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_BORDER`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MAXIMIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_MAXIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MENU

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_MENU`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_MINIMIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_MINIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_RESIZEH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_RESIZEH`

    Constant GDK_DECOR_TITLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DECOR_TITLE`

    Constant GDK_DELETE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DELETE`

    Constant GDK_DESTROY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DESTROY`

    Constant GDK_DIAMOND_CROSS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DIAMOND_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_DOT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DOT`

    Constant GDK_DOTBOX

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DOTBOX`

    Constant GDK_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_DRAFT_LARGE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAFT_LARGE`

    Constant GDK_DRAFT_SMALL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAFT_SMALL`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_ENTER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_ENTER`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_LEAVE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_LEAVE`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_MOTION

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_MOTION`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_LOCAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_LOCAL`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_MOTIF

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_MOTIF`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_NONE`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_OLE2

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_OLE2`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_ROOTWIN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_ROOTWIN`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_WIN32_DROPFILES

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_WIN32_DROPFILES`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_PROTO_XDND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_PROTO_XDND`

    Constant GDK_DRAG_STATUS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAG_STATUS`

    Constant GDK_DRAPED_BOX

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DRAPED_BOX`

    Constant GDK_DROP_FINISHED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DROP_FINISHED`

    Constant GDK_DROP_START

      `constant GTK2.GDK_DROP_START`

    Constant GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_EQUIV

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EQUIV`

    Constant GDK_EVEN_ODD_RULE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EVEN_ODD_RULE`

    Constant GDK_EXCHANGE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXCHANGE`

    Constant GDK_EXPOSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXPOSE`

    Constant GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR`

    Constant GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE`

    Constant GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE`

    Constant GDK_FILTER_REMOVE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FILTER_REMOVE`

    Constant GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE`

    Constant GDK_FLEUR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FLEUR`

    Constant GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE`

    Constant GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_ALL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_ALL`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_CLOSE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MAXIMIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_MAXIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MINIMIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_MINIMIZE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_MOVE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_MOVE`

    Constant GDK_FUNC_RESIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_FUNC_RESIZE`

    Constant GDK_GC_BACKGROUND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_BACKGROUND`

    Constant GDK_GC_CAP_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_CAP_STYLE`

    Constant GDK_GC_CLIP_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_CLIP_MASK`

    Constant GDK_GC_CLIP_X_ORIGIN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_CLIP_X_ORIGIN`

    Constant GDK_GC_CLIP_Y_ORIGIN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_CLIP_Y_ORIGIN`

    Constant GDK_GC_EXPOSURES

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_EXPOSURES`

    Constant GDK_GC_FILL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_FILL`

    Constant GDK_GC_FONT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_FONT`

    Constant GDK_GC_FOREGROUND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_FOREGROUND`

    Constant GDK_GC_FUNCTION

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_FUNCTION`

    Constant GDK_GC_JOIN_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_JOIN_STYLE`

    Constant GDK_GC_LINE_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_LINE_STYLE`

    Constant GDK_GC_LINE_WIDTH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_LINE_WIDTH`

    Constant GDK_GC_STIPPLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_STIPPLE`

    Constant GDK_GC_SUBWINDOW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_SUBWINDOW`

    Constant GDK_GC_TILE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_TILE`

    Constant GDK_GC_TS_X_ORIGIN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_TS_X_ORIGIN`

    Constant GDK_GC_TS_Y_ORIGIN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GC_TS_Y_ORIGIN`

    Constant GDK_GOBBLER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GOBBLER`

    Constant GDK_GRAB_ALREADY_GRABBED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAB_ALREADY_GRABBED`

    Constant GDK_GRAB_FROZEN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAB_FROZEN`

    Constant GDK_GRAB_INVALID_TIME

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAB_INVALID_TIME`

    Constant GDK_GRAB_NOT_VIEWABLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAB_NOT_VIEWABLE`

    Constant GDK_GRAB_SUCCESS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAB_SUCCESS`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_CENTER`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_EAST`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_EAST`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_WEST`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC`

    Constant GDK_GRAVITY_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GRAVITY_WEST`

    Constant GDK_GUMBY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_GUMBY`

    Constant GDK_HAND1

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HAND1`

    Constant GDK_HAND2

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HAND2`

    Constant GDK_HEART

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HEART`

    Constant GDK_HINT_ASPECT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_ASPECT`

    Constant GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_HINT_MAX_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_MAX_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_HINT_POS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_POS`

    Constant GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC`

    Constant GDK_HINT_USER_POS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_USER_POS`

    Constant GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE`

    Constant GDK_ICON

      `constant GTK2.GDK_ICON`

    Constant GDK_IMAGE_FASTEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_IMAGE_FASTEST`

    Constant GDK_IMAGE_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_IMAGE_NORMAL`

    Constant GDK_IMAGE_SHARED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_IMAGE_SHARED`

    Constant GDK_INCLUDE_INFERIORS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INCLUDE_INFERIORS`

    Constant GDK_INPUT_EXCEPTION

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INPUT_EXCEPTION`

    Constant GDK_INPUT_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INPUT_ONLY`

    Constant GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT`

    Constant GDK_INPUT_READ

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INPUT_READ`

    Constant GDK_INPUT_WRITE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INPUT_WRITE`

    Constant GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR`

    Constant GDK_INTERP_HYPER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INTERP_HYPER`

    Constant GDK_INTERP_NEAREST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INTERP_NEAREST`

    Constant GDK_INTERP_TILES

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INTERP_TILES`

    Constant GDK_INVERT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_IRON_CROSS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_IRON_CROSS`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_BEVEL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_JOIN_BEVEL`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_MITER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_JOIN_MITER`

    Constant GDK_JOIN_ROUND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_JOIN_ROUND`

    Constant GDK_KEY_PRESS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_KEY_PRESS`

    Constant GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK`

    Constant GDK_KEY_RELEASE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_KEY_RELEASE`

    Constant GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LAST_CURSOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LAST_CURSOR`

    Constant GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LEFTBUTTON

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEFTBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_PTR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEFT_PTR`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_SIDE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEFT_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_LEFT_TEE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LEFT_TEE`

    Constant GDK_LINE_DOUBLE_DASH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LINE_DOUBLE_DASH`

    Constant GDK_LINE_ON_OFF_DASH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LINE_ON_OFF_DASH`

    Constant GDK_LINE_SOLID

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LINE_SOLID`

    Constant GDK_LL_ANGLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LL_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_LOCK_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LOCK_MASK`

    Constant GDK_LR_ANGLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LR_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_LSB_FIRST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_LSB_FIRST`

    Constant GDK_MAN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MAN`

    Constant GDK_MAP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MAP`

    Constant GDK_MIDDLEBUTTON

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MIDDLEBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_MOD1_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOD1_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD2_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOD2_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD3_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOD3_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD4_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOD4_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOD5_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOD5_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MODE_DISABLED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MODE_DISABLED`

    Constant GDK_MODE_SCREEN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MODE_SCREEN`

    Constant GDK_MODE_WINDOW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MODE_WINDOW`

    Constant GDK_MODIFIER_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MODIFIER_MASK`

    Constant GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_MOUSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MOUSE`

    Constant GDK_MSB_FIRST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_MSB_FIRST`

    Constant GDK_NAND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NAND`

    Constant GDK_NOOP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOOP`

    Constant GDK_NOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOR`

    Constant GDK_NOTHING

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTHING`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_ANCESTOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_ANCESTOR`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_INFERIOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_INFERIOR`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_NONLINEAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_NONLINEAR`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_NONLINEAR_VIRTUAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_NONLINEAR_VIRTUAL`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_UNKNOWN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_UNKNOWN`

    Constant GDK_NOTIFY_VIRTUAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NOTIFY_VIRTUAL`

    Constant GDK_NO_EXPOSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_NO_EXPOSE`

    Constant GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED`

    Constant GDK_OR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OR`

    Constant GDK_OR_INVERT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OR_INVERT`

    Constant GDK_OR_REVERSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OR_REVERSE`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_IN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_IN`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_OUT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_OUT`

    Constant GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_PART

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OVERLAP_RECTANGLE_PART`

    Constant GDK_OWNER_CHANGE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OWNER_CHANGE`

    Constant GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_CLOSE`

    Constant GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_DESTROY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_DESTROY`

    Constant GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_NEW_OWNER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_OWNER_CHANGE_NEW_OWNER`

    Constant GDK_PENCIL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PENCIL`

    Constant GDK_PIRATE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIRATE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_FULL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_FULL`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_BAD_OPTION

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_BAD_OPTION`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_CORRUPT_IMAGE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_CORRUPT_IMAGE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_FAILED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_FAILED`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_MEMORY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_MEMORY`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNKNOWN_TYPE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNKNOWN_TYPE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNSUPPORTED_OPERATION

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNSUPPORTED_OPERATION`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_CLOCKWISE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_CLOCKWISE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_COUNTERCLOCKWISE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_COUNTERCLOCKWISE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_NONE`

    Constant GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_UPSIDEDOWN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_UPSIDEDOWN`

    Constant GDK_PLUS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PLUS`

    Constant GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROPERTY_DELETE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROPERTY_DELETE`

    Constant GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE`

    Constant GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_APPEND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROP_MODE_APPEND`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_PREPEND

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROP_MODE_PREPEND`

    Constant GDK_PROP_MODE_REPLACE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROP_MODE_REPLACE`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_IN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROXIMITY_IN`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT`

    Constant GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_QUESTION_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_QUESTION_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_RELEASE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RELEASE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_RGB_DITHER_MAX

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RGB_DITHER_MAX`

    Constant GDK_RGB_DITHER_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RGB_DITHER_NONE`

    Constant GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL`

    Constant GDK_RIGHTBUTTON

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RIGHTBUTTON`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_PTR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RIGHT_PTR`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_SIDE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RIGHT_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_RIGHT_TEE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RIGHT_TEE`

    Constant GDK_RTL_LOGO

      `constant GTK2.GDK_RTL_LOGO`

    Constant GDK_SAILBOAT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SAILBOAT`

    Constant GDK_SB_DOWN_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_DOWN_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_LEFT_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_LEFT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_RIGHT_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_RIGHT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_UP_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_UP_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL_DOWN`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL_LEFT`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL_MASK`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL_RIGHT`

    Constant GDK_SCROLL_UP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SCROLL_UP`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_CLEAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SELECTION_CLEAR`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SELECTION_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_SELECTION_REQUEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SELECTION_REQUEST`

    Constant GDK_SET

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SET`

    Constant GDK_SETTING

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SETTING`

    Constant GDK_SETTING_ACTION_CHANGED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SETTING_ACTION_CHANGED`

    Constant GDK_SETTING_ACTION_DELETED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SETTING_ACTION_DELETED`

    Constant GDK_SETTING_ACTION_NEW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SETTING_ACTION_NEW`

    Constant GDK_SHIFT_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SHIFT_MASK`

    Constant GDK_SHUTTLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SHUTTLE`

    Constant GDK_SIZING

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SIZING`

    Constant GDK_SOLID

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SOLID`

    Constant GDK_SOURCE_CURSOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SOURCE_CURSOR`

    Constant GDK_SOURCE_ERASER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SOURCE_ERASER`

    Constant GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE`

    Constant GDK_SOURCE_PEN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SOURCE_PEN`

    Constant GDK_SPIDER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SPIDER`

    Constant GDK_SPRAYCAN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SPRAYCAN`

    Constant GDK_STAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_STAR`

    Constant GDK_STIPPLED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_STIPPLED`

    Constant GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_SUBSTRUCTURE_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_SUBSTRUCTURE_MASK`

    Constant GDK_TARGET

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TARGET`

    Constant GDK_TCROSS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TCROSS`

    Constant GDK_TILED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TILED`

    Constant GDK_TOP_LEFT_ARROW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TOP_LEFT_ARROW`

    Constant GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TOP_LEFT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TOP_RIGHT_CORNER`

    Constant GDK_TOP_SIDE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TOP_SIDE`

    Constant GDK_TOP_TEE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TOP_TEE`

    Constant GDK_TREK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_TREK`

    Constant GDK_UL_ANGLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_UL_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_UMBRELLA

      `constant GTK2.GDK_UMBRELLA`

    Constant GDK_UNMAP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_UNMAP`

    Constant GDK_UR_ANGLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_UR_ANGLE`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL`

    Constant GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_DIRECT_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_DIRECT_COLOR`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_GRAYSCALE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_GRAYSCALE`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_PSEUDO_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_PSEUDO_COLOR`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_COLOR`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_GRAY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_GRAY`

    Constant GDK_VISUAL_TRUE_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_VISUAL_TRUE_COLOR`

    Constant GDK_WATCH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WATCH`

    Constant GDK_WA_COLORMAP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_COLORMAP`

    Constant GDK_WA_CURSOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_CURSOR`

    Constant GDK_WA_NOREDIR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_NOREDIR`

    Constant GDK_WA_TITLE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_TITLE`

    Constant GDK_WA_VISUAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_VISUAL`

    Constant GDK_WA_WMCLASS

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_WMCLASS`

    Constant GDK_WA_X

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_X`

    Constant GDK_WA_Y

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WA_Y`

    Constant GDK_WINDING_RULE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDING_RULE`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_CHILD

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_CHILD`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_DIALOG

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_DIALOG`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_EAST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH_EAST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_NORTH_WEST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH_EAST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH_EAST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_SOUTH_WEST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_WEST

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_EDGE_WEST`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_FOREIGN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_FOREIGN`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_ROOT

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_ROOT`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_ABOVE

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_ABOVE`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_BELOW

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_BELOW`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_FULLSCREEN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_FULLSCREEN`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_ICONIFIED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_ICONIFIED`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_STICKY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_STICKY`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_STATE_WITHDRAWN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_STATE_WITHDRAWN`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TEMP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TEMP`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DESKTOP

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DESKTOP`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DIALOG

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DIALOG`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DOCK

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DOCK`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_MENU

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_MENU`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_SPLASHSCREEN

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_SPLASHSCREEN`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_TOOLBAR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_TOOLBAR`

    Constant GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_UTILITY

      `constant GTK2.GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_UTILITY`

    Constant GDK_XOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_XOR`

    Constant GDK_XTERM

      `constant GTK2.GDK_XTERM`

    Constant GDK_X_CURSOR

      `constant GTK2.GDK_X_CURSOR`

    Constant GNOME_CLIENT_IS_CONNECTED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_CLIENT_IS_CONNECTED`

    Constant GNOME_CLIENT_RESTARTED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_CLIENT_RESTARTED`

    Constant GNOME_CLIENT_RESTORED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_CLIENT_RESTORED`

    Constant GNOME_DATE_EDIT_24_HR

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DATE_EDIT_24_HR`

    Constant GNOME_DATE_EDIT_SHOW_TIME

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DATE_EDIT_SHOW_TIME`

    Constant GNOME_DATE_EDIT_WEEK_STARTS_ON_MONDAY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DATE_EDIT_WEEK_STARTS_ON_MONDAY`

    Constant GNOME_DIALOG_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DIALOG_ERROR`

    Constant GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_DOCK_TOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_DOCK_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_EDGE_FINISH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_EDGE_FINISH`

    Constant GNOME_EDGE_LAST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_EDGE_LAST`

    Constant GNOME_EDGE_OTHER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_EDGE_OTHER`

    Constant GNOME_EDGE_START

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_EDGE_START`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_FONT_INFO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_FONT_INFO`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_PIXMAP`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_UNKNOWN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_UNKNOWN`

    Constant GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_USER_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_FONT_PICKER_MODE_USER_WIDGET`

    Constant GNOME_INTERACT_ANY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_INTERACT_ANY`

    Constant GNOME_INTERACT_ERRORS

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_INTERACT_ERRORS`

    Constant GNOME_INTERACT_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_INTERACT_NONE`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_PREFERENCES_ALWAYS`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_NEVER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_PREFERENCES_NEVER`

    Constant GNOME_PREFERENCES_USER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_PREFERENCES_USER`

    Constant GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY`

    Constant GNOME_RESTART_IF_RUNNING

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_IF_RUNNING`

    Constant GNOME_RESTART_IMMEDIATELY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_IMMEDIATELY`

    Constant GNOME_RESTART_NEVER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_NEVER`

    Constant GNOME_SAVE_BOTH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_SAVE_BOTH`

    Constant GNOME_SAVE_GLOBAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_SAVE_GLOBAL`

    Constant GNOME_SAVE_LOCAL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_SAVE_LOCAL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_APPLY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_APPLY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CANCEL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_FONT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_HELP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_HELP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NEXT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NEXT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_NO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_OK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_OK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_PREV

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_PREV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_UP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_YES

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_BUTTON_YES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ABOUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ABOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_CENTER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_JUSTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_JUSTIFY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ALIGN_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ATTACH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_ATTACH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BACK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BACK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BLANK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BLANK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_BLUE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_BLUE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_GREEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_GREEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_RED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_RED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_YELLOW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOOK_YELLOW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CDROM

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CDROM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CONVERT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CONVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_COPY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_COPY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_CUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXEC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXEC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXIT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_EXIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FIRST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FIRST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FONT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_FORWARD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_HOME

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_HOME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_INDEX

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_INDEX`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_JUMP_TO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_JUMP_TO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LAST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LAST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LINE_IN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_LINE_IN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_FWD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_FWD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_NEW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RCV

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RCV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RPL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_RPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_SND

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MAIL_SND`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIDI

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_MIDI`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_NEW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PASTE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PASTE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PREF

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PREF`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PRINT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PRINT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PROP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_PROP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_QUIT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_QUIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REDO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REFRESH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REFRESH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REVERT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_REVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE_AS

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SAVE_AS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SCORES

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SCORES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SEARCH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SEARCH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SPELLCHECK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SPELLCHECK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SRCHRPL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_SRCHRPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_STOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_BOLD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_BOLD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_ITALIC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_ITALIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_STRIKEOUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_STRIKEOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TEXT_UNDERLINE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER_STOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TIMER_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH_FULL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_TRASH_FULL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDELETE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDELETE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UNDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_MENU_VOLUME

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_MENU_VOLUME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ABOUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ABOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ADD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ADD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_CENTER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_JUSTIFY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_JUSTIFY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_LEFT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ALIGN_RIGHT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ATTACH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_ATTACH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BACK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BACK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_BLUE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_BLUE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_GREEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_GREEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_RED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_RED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_YELLOW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOOK_YELLOW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_BOTTOM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CDROM

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CDROM`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLEAR

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLEAR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CLOSE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COLORSELECTOR

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COLORSELECTOR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CONVERT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CONVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COPY

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_COPY`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_CUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DISABLED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DISABLED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_DOWN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXEC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXEC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXIT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_EXIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FIRST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FIRST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FOCUSED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FOCUSED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FONT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FONT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_FORWARD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HELP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HELP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HOME

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_HOME`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_INDEX

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_INDEX`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_JUMP_TO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_JUMP_TO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LAST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LAST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LINE_IN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_LINE_IN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_FWD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_FWD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_NEW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RCV

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RCV`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RPL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_RPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_SND

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MAIL_SND`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIDI

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MIDI`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MULTIPLE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_MULTIPLE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NEW

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NEW`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NOT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_NOT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_OPEN`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PASTE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PASTE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PREFERENCES

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PREFERENCES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PRINT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PRINT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PROPERTIES

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_PROPERTIES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_QUIT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_QUIT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REDO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REFRESH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REFRESH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REGULAR

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REGULAR`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REMOVE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REMOVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REVERT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_REVERT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE_AS

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SAVE_AS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SCORES

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SCORES`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SEARCH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SEARCH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SPELLCHECK

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SPELLCHECK`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SRCHRPL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_SRCHRPL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_STOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_BORDERS

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_BORDERS`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_FILL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TABLE_FILL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BOLD

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BOLD`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BULLETED_LIST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_BULLETED_LIST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_INDENT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_INDENT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_ITALIC

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_ITALIC`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_NUMBERED_LIST

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_NUMBERED_LIST`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_STRIKEOUT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_STRIKEOUT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNDERLINE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNINDENT

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TEXT_UNINDENT`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER_STOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TIMER_STOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TOP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TOP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH_FULL

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TRASH_FULL`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_DATA

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_DATA`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_FILE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_FILE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_GPIXMAP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_GPIXMAP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB_SCALED

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_IMLIB_SCALED`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_NONE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_NONE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_PATH

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_PATH`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_TYPE_WIDGET`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDELETE

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDELETE`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDO

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UNDO`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UP

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_UP`

    Constant GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_VOLUME

      `constant GTK2.GNOME_STOCK_PIXMAP_VOLUME`

    Constant HAS_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK2.HAS_DEFAULT`

    Constant HAS_FOCUS

      `constant GTK2.HAS_FOCUS`

    Constant HAS_GRAB

      `constant GTK2.HAS_GRAB`

    Constant ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SVG

      `constant GTK2.ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SVG`

    Constant ICON_LOOKUP_NO_SVG

      `constant GTK2.ICON_LOOKUP_NO_SVG`

    Constant ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN

      `constant GTK2.ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_BUTTON

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_BUTTON`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_DIALOG

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_DIALOG`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_DND

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_DND`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_INVALID

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_INVALID`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_MENU

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_MENU`

    Constant ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR

      `constant GTK2.ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR`

    Constant ICON_THEME_FAILED

      `constant GTK2.ICON_THEME_FAILED`

    Constant ICON_THEME_NOT_FOUND

      `constant GTK2.ICON_THEME_NOT_FOUND`

    Constant IMAGE_ANIMATION

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_ANIMATION`

    Constant IMAGE_EMPTY

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_EMPTY`

    Constant IMAGE_ICON_NAME

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_ICON_NAME`

    Constant IMAGE_ICON_SET

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_ICON_SET`

    Constant IMAGE_IMAGE

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_IMAGE`

    Constant IMAGE_PIXBUF

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_PIXBUF`

    Constant IMAGE_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_PIXMAP`

    Constant IMAGE_STOCK

      `constant GTK2.IMAGE_STOCK`

    Constant IM_PREEDIT_CALLBACK

      `constant GTK2.IM_PREEDIT_CALLBACK`

    Constant IM_PREEDIT_NONE

      `constant GTK2.IM_PREEDIT_NONE`

    Constant IM_PREEDIT_NOTHING

      `constant GTK2.IM_PREEDIT_NOTHING`

    Constant IM_STATUS_CALLBACK

      `constant GTK2.IM_STATUS_CALLBACK`

    Constant IM_STATUS_NONE

      `constant GTK2.IM_STATUS_NONE`

    Constant IM_STATUS_NOTHING

      `constant GTK2.IM_STATUS_NOTHING`

    Constant INCHES

      `constant GTK2.INCHES`

    Constant IN_DESTRUCTION

      `constant GTK2.IN_DESTRUCTION`

    Constant JUSTIFY_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.JUSTIFY_CENTER`

    Constant JUSTIFY_FILL

      `constant GTK2.JUSTIFY_FILL`

    Constant JUSTIFY_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.JUSTIFY_LEFT`

    Constant JUSTIFY_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.JUSTIFY_RIGHT`

    Constant MAJOR_VERSION

      `constant GTK2.MAJOR_VERSION`

    Constant MAPPED

      `constant GTK2.MAPPED`

    Constant MENU_DIR_CHILD

      `constant GTK2.MENU_DIR_CHILD`

    Constant MENU_DIR_NEXT

      `constant GTK2.MENU_DIR_NEXT`

    Constant MENU_DIR_PARENT

      `constant GTK2.MENU_DIR_PARENT`

    Constant MENU_DIR_PREV

      `constant GTK2.MENU_DIR_PREV`

    Constant MESSAGE_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.MESSAGE_ERROR`

    Constant MESSAGE_INFO

      `constant GTK2.MESSAGE_INFO`

    Constant MESSAGE_QUESTION

      `constant GTK2.MESSAGE_QUESTION`

    Constant MESSAGE_WARNING

      `constant GTK2.MESSAGE_WARNING`

    Constant MICRO_VERSION

      `constant GTK2.MICRO_VERSION`

    Constant MINOR_VERSION

      `constant GTK2.MINOR_VERSION`

    Constant MOVEMENT_BUFFER_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_BUFFER_ENDS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINES

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINES`

    Constant MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_HORIZONTAL_PAGES

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_HORIZONTAL_PAGES`

    Constant MOVEMENT_LOGICAL_POSITIONS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_LOGICAL_POSITIONS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_PAGES

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_PAGES`

    Constant MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPHS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPHS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPH_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPH_ENDS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_VISUAL_POSITIONS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_VISUAL_POSITIONS`

    Constant MOVEMENT_WORDS

      `constant GTK2.MOVEMENT_WORDS`

    Constant NO_REPARENT

      `constant GTK2.NO_REPARENT`

    Constant NO_SHOW_ALL

      `constant GTK2.NO_SHOW_ALL`

    Constant NO_WINDOW

      `constant GTK2.NO_WINDOW`

    Constant ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK2.ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant ORIENTATION_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK2.ORIENTATION_VERTICAL`

    Constant PACK_DIRECTION_BTT

      `constant GTK2.PACK_DIRECTION_BTT`

    Constant PACK_DIRECTION_LTR

      `constant GTK2.PACK_DIRECTION_LTR`

    Constant PACK_DIRECTION_RTL

      `constant GTK2.PACK_DIRECTION_RTL`

    Constant PACK_DIRECTION_TTB

      `constant GTK2.PACK_DIRECTION_TTB`

    Constant PACK_END

      `constant GTK2.PACK_END`

    Constant PACK_START

      `constant GTK2.PACK_START`

    Constant PAGE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPE

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPE`

    Constant PAGE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT`

    Constant PAGE_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_LANDSCAPE

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_LANDSCAPE`

    Constant PAGE_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_PORTRAIT

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_PORTRAIT`

    Constant PAGE_SET_ALL

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_SET_ALL`

    Constant PAGE_SET_EVEN

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_SET_EVEN`

    Constant PAGE_SET_ODD

      `constant GTK2.PAGE_SET_ODD`

    Constant PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER`

    Constant PANGO_ALIGN_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ALIGN_LEFT`

    Constant PANGO_ALIGN_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ALIGN_RIGHT`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_BACKGROUND

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_BACKGROUND`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_FALLBACK

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_FALLBACK`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_FAMILY

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_FAMILY`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_FONT_DESC

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_FONT_DESC`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_FOREGROUND

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_FOREGROUND`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_INVALID

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_INVALID`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_LANGUAGE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_LANGUAGE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_LETTER_SPACING

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_LETTER_SPACING`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_RISE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_RISE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_SCALE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_SCALE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_SHAPE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_SIZE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_STRETCH

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_STRETCH`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_STRIKETHROUGH

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_STRIKETHROUGH`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_STYLE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_UNDERLINE`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_VARIANT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_VARIANT`

    Constant PANGO_ATTR_WEIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ATTR_WEIGHT`

    Constant PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END`

    Constant PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE`

    Constant PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE`

    Constant PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_FAMILY

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_FAMILY`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_SIZE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_SIZE`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_STRETCH

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_STRETCH`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_STYLE`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_VARIANT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_VARIANT`

    Constant PANGO_FONT_MASK_WEIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_FONT_MASK_WEIGHT`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_LARGE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_LARGE`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_MEDIUM

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_MEDIUM`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_SMALL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_SMALL`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_XX_LARGE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_XX_LARGE`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_XX_SMALL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_XX_SMALL`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_X_LARGE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_X_LARGE`

    Constant PANGO_SCALE_X_SMALL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_SCALE_X_SMALL`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_CONDENSED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_CONDENSED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_EXPANDED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_CONDENSED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_CONDENSED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_EXPANDED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_NORMAL`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_CONDENSED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_CONDENSED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_EXPANDED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_CONDENSED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_CONDENSED`

    Constant PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_EXPANDED

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_EXPANDED`

    Constant PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC`

    Constant PANGO_STYLE_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STYLE_NORMAL`

    Constant PANGO_STYLE_OBLIQUE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_STYLE_OBLIQUE`

    Constant PANGO_TAB_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_TAB_LEFT`

    Constant PANGO_UNDERLINE_DOUBLE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_DOUBLE`

    Constant PANGO_UNDERLINE_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_ERROR`

    Constant PANGO_UNDERLINE_LOW

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_LOW`

    Constant PANGO_UNDERLINE_NONE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_NONE`

    Constant PANGO_UNDERLINE_SINGLE

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_SINGLE`

    Constant PANGO_VARIANT_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_VARIANT_NORMAL`

    Constant PANGO_VARIANT_SMALL_CAPS

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_VARIANT_SMALL_CAPS`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_HEAVY

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_HEAVY`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_LIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_LIGHT`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_NORMAL`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRABOLD

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRABOLD`

    Constant PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRALIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRALIGHT`

    Constant PANGO_WRAP_CHAR

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WRAP_CHAR`

    Constant PANGO_WRAP_WORD

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WRAP_WORD`

    Constant PANGO_WRAP_WORD_CHAR

      `constant GTK2.PANGO_WRAP_WORD_CHAR`

    Constant PARENT_SENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.PARENT_SENSITIVE`

    Constant PATH_CLASS

      `constant GTK2.PATH_CLASS`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_APPLICATION

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_APPLICATION`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_GTK

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_GTK`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_HIGHEST

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_HIGHEST`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_LOWEST

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_LOWEST`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_RC

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_RC`

    Constant PATH_PRIO_THEME

      `constant GTK2.PATH_PRIO_THEME`

    Constant PATH_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.PATH_WIDGET`

    Constant PATH_WIDGET_CLASS

      `constant GTK2.PATH_WIDGET_CLASS`

    Constant PIXELS

      `constant GTK2.PIXELS`

    Constant POLICY_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK2.POLICY_ALWAYS`

    Constant POLICY_AUTOMATIC

      `constant GTK2.POLICY_AUTOMATIC`

    Constant POLICY_NEVER

      `constant GTK2.POLICY_NEVER`

    Constant POS_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.POS_BOTTOM`

    Constant POS_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.POS_LEFT`

    Constant POS_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.POS_RIGHT`

    Constant POS_TOP

      `constant GTK2.POS_TOP`

    Constant PRINT_DUPLEX_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_DUPLEX_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant PRINT_DUPLEX_SIMPLEX

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_DUPLEX_SIMPLEX`

    Constant PRINT_DUPLEX_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_DUPLEX_VERTICAL`

    Constant PRINT_ERROR_GENERAL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_ERROR_GENERAL`

    Constant PRINT_ERROR_INTERNAL_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_ERROR_INTERNAL_ERROR`

    Constant PRINT_ERROR_NOMEM

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_ERROR_NOMEM`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_EXPORT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_EXPORT`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PREVIEW

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PREVIEW`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_CANCEL`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR`

    Constant PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS`

    Constant PRINT_PAGES_ALL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_PAGES_ALL`

    Constant PRINT_PAGES_CURRENT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_PAGES_CURRENT`

    Constant PRINT_PAGES_RANGES

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_PAGES_RANGES`

    Constant PRINT_QUALITY_DRAFT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_QUALITY_DRAFT`

    Constant PRINT_QUALITY_HIGH

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_QUALITY_HIGH`

    Constant PRINT_QUALITY_LOW

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_QUALITY_LOW`

    Constant PRINT_QUALITY_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_QUALITY_NORMAL`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_FILE_FORMAT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_FILE_FORMAT`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_URI

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_URI`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_EXTRA

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_EXTRA`

    Constant PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_VERSION

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_VERSION`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED_ABORTED

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_FINISHED_ABORTED`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_GENERATING_DATA`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_INITIAL

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_INITIAL`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_PENDING

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_PENDING`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_PENDING_ISSUE

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_PENDING_ISSUE`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_PREPARING`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_PRINTING

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_PRINTING`

    Constant PRINT_STATUS_SENDING_DATA

      `constant GTK2.PRINT_STATUS_SENDING_DATA`

    Constant PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP`

    Constant PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS`

    Constant PROGRESS_DISCRETE

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_DISCRETE`

    Constant PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT`

    Constant PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT`

    Constant PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM`

    Constant RC_BASE

      `constant GTK2.RC_BASE`

    Constant RC_BG

      `constant GTK2.RC_BG`

    Constant RC_FG

      `constant GTK2.RC_FG`

    Constant RC_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.RC_STYLE`

    Constant RC_TEXT

      `constant GTK2.RC_TEXT`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_ACTIVE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_ACTIVE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_APPLICATION

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_APPLICATION`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_BASE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_BASE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_BG

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_BG`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_BG_PIXMAP

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_BG_PIXMAP`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_BIND

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_BIND`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_BINDING

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_BINDING`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_CLASS

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_CLASS`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_ENGINE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_ENGINE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_FG

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_FG`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_FONT

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_FONT`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_FONTSET

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_FONTSET`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_FONT_NAME

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_FONT_NAME`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_GTK

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_GTK`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_HIGHEST

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_HIGHEST`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_FILE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_FILE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_PATH

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_PATH`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_INCLUDE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_INCLUDE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_INSENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_INSENSITIVE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_INVALID

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_INVALID`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_LAST

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_LAST`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_LOWEST

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_LOWEST`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_LTR

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_LTR`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_MODULE_PATH

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_MODULE_PATH`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_NORMAL`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_PIXMAP_PATH

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_PIXMAP_PATH`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_PRELIGHT

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_PRELIGHT`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_RC

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_RC`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_RTL

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_RTL`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_SELECTED

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_SELECTED`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_STOCK

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_STOCK`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_STYLE

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_STYLE`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_TEXT

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_TEXT`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_THEME

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_THEME`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_WIDGET`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_WIDGET_CLASS

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_WIDGET_CLASS`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_XTHICKNESS

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_XTHICKNESS`

    Constant RC_TOKEN_YTHICKNESS

      `constant GTK2.RC_TOKEN_YTHICKNESS`

    Constant REALIZED

      `constant GTK2.REALIZED`

    Constant RECEIVES_DEFAULT

      `constant GTK2.RECEIVES_DEFAULT`

    Constant RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_INVALID_URI

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_INVALID_URI`

    Constant RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_AGE

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_AGE`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_APPLICATION

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_APPLICATION`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_GROUP

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_GROUP`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_MIME_TYPE

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_MIME_TYPE`

    Constant RECENT_FILTER_URI

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_FILTER_URI`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_ENCODING

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_ENCODING`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_URI

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_URI`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_REGISTERED

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_REGISTERED`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_READ

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_READ`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_UNKNOWN

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_UNKNOWN`

    Constant RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_WRITE

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_WRITE`

    Constant RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM`

    Constant RECENT_SORT_LRU

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_SORT_LRU`

    Constant RECENT_SORT_MRU

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_SORT_MRU`

    Constant RECENT_SORT_NONE

      `constant GTK2.RECENT_SORT_NONE`

    Constant RELIEF_HALF

      `constant GTK2.RELIEF_HALF`

    Constant RELIEF_NONE

      `constant GTK2.RELIEF_NONE`

    Constant RELIEF_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.RELIEF_NORMAL`

    Constant RESERVED_1

      `constant GTK2.RESERVED_1`

    Constant RESERVED_2

      `constant GTK2.RESERVED_2`

    Constant RESIZE_IMMEDIATE

      `constant GTK2.RESIZE_IMMEDIATE`

    Constant RESIZE_PARENT

      `constant GTK2.RESIZE_PARENT`

    Constant RESIZE_QUEUE

      `constant GTK2.RESIZE_QUEUE`

    Constant RESPONSE_ACCEPT

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_ACCEPT`

    Constant RESPONSE_APPLY

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_APPLY`

    Constant RESPONSE_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_CANCEL`

    Constant RESPONSE_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_CLOSE`

    Constant RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT`

    Constant RESPONSE_HELP

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_HELP`

    Constant RESPONSE_NO

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_NO`

    Constant RESPONSE_NONE

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_NONE`

    Constant RESPONSE_OK

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_OK`

    Constant RESPONSE_REJECT

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_REJECT`

    Constant RESPONSE_YES

      `constant GTK2.RESPONSE_YES`

    Constant SCROLL_END

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_END`

    Constant SCROLL_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_ENDS`

    Constant SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_ENDS

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_ENDS`

    Constant SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_PAGES

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_PAGES`

    Constant SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_STEPS

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_STEPS`

    Constant SCROLL_JUMP

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_JUMP`

    Constant SCROLL_NONE

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_NONE`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGES

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGES`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_BACKWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_DOWN`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_FORWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_LEFT`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_RIGHT`

    Constant SCROLL_PAGE_UP

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_PAGE_UP`

    Constant SCROLL_START

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_START`

    Constant SCROLL_STEPS

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEPS`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_BACKWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_DOWN`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_FORWARD`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_LEFT`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_RIGHT`

    Constant SCROLL_STEP_UP

      `constant GTK2.SCROLL_STEP_UP`

    Constant SELECTION_BROWSE

      `constant GTK2.SELECTION_BROWSE`

    Constant SELECTION_MULTIPLE

      `constant GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE`

    Constant SELECTION_NONE

      `constant GTK2.SELECTION_NONE`

    Constant SELECTION_SINGLE

      `constant GTK2.SELECTION_SINGLE`

    Constant SENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.SENSITIVE`

    Constant SENSITIVITY_AUTO

      `constant GTK2.SENSITIVITY_AUTO`

    Constant SENSITIVITY_OFF

      `constant GTK2.SENSITIVITY_OFF`

    Constant SENSITIVITY_ON

      `constant GTK2.SENSITIVITY_ON`

    Constant SHADOW_ETCHED_IN

      `constant GTK2.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN`

    Constant SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT

      `constant GTK2.SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT`

    Constant SHADOW_IN

      `constant GTK2.SHADOW_IN`

    Constant SHADOW_NONE

      `constant GTK2.SHADOW_NONE`

    Constant SHADOW_OUT

      `constant GTK2.SHADOW_OUT`

    Constant SHRINK

      `constant GTK2.SHRINK`

    Constant SIZE_GROUP_BOTH

      `constant GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_BOTH`

    Constant SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant SIZE_GROUP_NONE

      `constant GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_NONE`

    Constant SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL`

    Constant SORT_ASCENDING

      `constant GTK2.SORT_ASCENDING`

    Constant SORT_DESCENDING

      `constant GTK2.SORT_DESCENDING`

    Constant SOURCE_SEARCH_CASE_INSENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.SOURCE_SEARCH_CASE_INSENSITIVE`

    Constant SOURCE_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.SOURCE_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY`

    Constant SOURCE_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.SOURCE_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY`

    Constant SPIN_END

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_END`

    Constant SPIN_HOME

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_HOME`

    Constant SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD`

    Constant SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD`

    Constant SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD`

    Constant SPIN_STEP_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_STEP_FORWARD`

    Constant SPIN_USER_DEFINED

      `constant GTK2.SPIN_USER_DEFINED`

    Constant STATE_ACTIVE

      `constant GTK2.STATE_ACTIVE`

    Constant STATE_INSENSITIVE

      `constant GTK2.STATE_INSENSITIVE`

    Constant STATE_NORMAL

      `constant GTK2.STATE_NORMAL`

    Constant STATE_PRELIGHT

      `constant GTK2.STATE_PRELIGHT`

    Constant STATE_SELECTED

      `constant GTK2.STATE_SELECTED`

    Constant STOCK_ABOUT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ABOUT`

    Constant STOCK_ADD

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ADD`

    Constant STOCK_APPLY

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_APPLY`

    Constant STOCK_BOLD

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_BOLD`

    Constant STOCK_CANCEL

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CANCEL`

    Constant STOCK_CDROM

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CDROM`

    Constant STOCK_CLEAR

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CLEAR`

    Constant STOCK_CLOSE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CLOSE`

    Constant STOCK_COLOR_PICKER

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_COLOR_PICKER`

    Constant STOCK_CONNECT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CONNECT`

    Constant STOCK_CONVERT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CONVERT`

    Constant STOCK_COPY

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_COPY`

    Constant STOCK_CUT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_CUT`

    Constant STOCK_DELETE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DELETE`

    Constant STOCK_DIALOG_AUTHENTICATION

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIALOG_AUTHENTICATION`

    Constant STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR`

    Constant STOCK_DIALOG_INFO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIALOG_INFO`

    Constant STOCK_DIALOG_QUESTION

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIALOG_QUESTION`

    Constant STOCK_DIALOG_WARNING

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIALOG_WARNING`

    Constant STOCK_DIRECTORY

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DIRECTORY`

    Constant STOCK_DISCONNECT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DISCONNECT`

    Constant STOCK_DND

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DND`

    Constant STOCK_DND_MULTIPLE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_DND_MULTIPLE`

    Constant STOCK_EDIT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_EDIT`

    Constant STOCK_EXECUTE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_EXECUTE`

    Constant STOCK_FILE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_FILE`

    Constant STOCK_FIND

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_FIND`

    Constant STOCK_FIND_AND_REPLACE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_FIND_AND_REPLACE`

    Constant STOCK_FLOPPY

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_FLOPPY`

    Constant STOCK_FULLSCREEN

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_FULLSCREEN`

    Constant STOCK_GOTO_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GOTO_BOTTOM`

    Constant STOCK_GOTO_FIRST

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GOTO_FIRST`

    Constant STOCK_GOTO_LAST

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GOTO_LAST`

    Constant STOCK_GOTO_TOP

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GOTO_TOP`

    Constant STOCK_GO_BACK

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GO_BACK`

    Constant STOCK_GO_DOWN

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GO_DOWN`

    Constant STOCK_GO_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GO_FORWARD`

    Constant STOCK_GO_UP

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_GO_UP`

    Constant STOCK_HARDDISK

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_HARDDISK`

    Constant STOCK_HELP

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_HELP`

    Constant STOCK_HOME

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_HOME`

    Constant STOCK_INDENT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_INDENT`

    Constant STOCK_INDEX

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_INDEX`

    Constant STOCK_INFO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_INFO`

    Constant STOCK_ITALIC

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ITALIC`

    Constant STOCK_JUMP_TO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_JUMP_TO`

    Constant STOCK_JUSTIFY_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_JUSTIFY_CENTER`

    Constant STOCK_JUSTIFY_FILL

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_JUSTIFY_FILL`

    Constant STOCK_JUSTIFY_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_JUSTIFY_LEFT`

    Constant STOCK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT`

    Constant STOCK_LEAVE_FULLSCREEN

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_LEAVE_FULLSCREEN`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_FORWARD

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_FORWARD`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_NEXT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_NEXT`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_PAUSE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_PAUSE`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_PLAY

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_PLAY`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_PREVIOUS

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_PREVIOUS`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_RECORD

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_RECORD`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_REWIND

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_REWIND`

    Constant STOCK_MEDIA_STOP

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MEDIA_STOP`

    Constant STOCK_MISSING_IMAGE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_MISSING_IMAGE`

    Constant STOCK_NETWORK

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_NETWORK`

    Constant STOCK_NEW

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_NEW`

    Constant STOCK_NO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_NO`

    Constant STOCK_OK

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_OK`

    Constant STOCK_OPEN

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_OPEN`

    Constant STOCK_PASTE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_PASTE`

    Constant STOCK_PREFERENCES

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_PREFERENCES`

    Constant STOCK_PRINT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_PRINT`

    Constant STOCK_PRINT_PREVIEW

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_PRINT_PREVIEW`

    Constant STOCK_PROPERTIES

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_PROPERTIES`

    Constant STOCK_QUIT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_QUIT`

    Constant STOCK_REDO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_REDO`

    Constant STOCK_REFRESH

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_REFRESH`

    Constant STOCK_REMOVE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_REMOVE`

    Constant STOCK_REVERT_TO_SAVED

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_REVERT_TO_SAVED`

    Constant STOCK_SAVE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SAVE`

    Constant STOCK_SAVE_AS

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SAVE_AS`

    Constant STOCK_SELECT_COLOR

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SELECT_COLOR`

    Constant STOCK_SELECT_FONT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SELECT_FONT`

    Constant STOCK_SORT_ASCENDING

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SORT_ASCENDING`

    Constant STOCK_SORT_DESCENDING

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SORT_DESCENDING`

    Constant STOCK_SPELL_CHECK

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_SPELL_CHECK`

    Constant STOCK_STOP

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_STOP`

    Constant STOCK_STRIKETHROUGH

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_STRIKETHROUGH`

    Constant STOCK_UNDELETE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_UNDELETE`

    Constant STOCK_UNDERLINE

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_UNDERLINE`

    Constant STOCK_UNDO

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_UNDO`

    Constant STOCK_UNINDENT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_UNINDENT`

    Constant STOCK_YES

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_YES`

    Constant STOCK_ZOOM_100

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ZOOM_100`

    Constant STOCK_ZOOM_FIT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ZOOM_FIT`

    Constant STOCK_ZOOM_IN

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ZOOM_IN`

    Constant STOCK_ZOOM_OUT

      `constant GTK2.STOCK_ZOOM_OUT`

    Constant TARGET_SAME_APP

      `constant GTK2.TARGET_SAME_APP`

    Constant TARGET_SAME_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.TARGET_SAME_WIDGET`

    Constant TEXT_DIR_LTR

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_DIR_LTR`

    Constant TEXT_DIR_NONE

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_DIR_NONE`

    Constant TEXT_DIR_RTL

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_DIR_RTL`

    Constant TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY`

    Constant TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_TOP

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_TOP`

    Constant TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET

      `constant GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET`

    Constant TOOLBAR_BOTH

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_BOTH`

    Constant TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ`

    Constant TOOLBAR_ICONS

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_ICONS`

    Constant TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY`

    Constant TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE`

    Constant TOOLBAR_TEXT

      `constant GTK2.TOOLBAR_TEXT`

    Constant TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK2.TOPLEVEL`

    Constant TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST

      `constant GTK2.TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST`

    Constant TREE_MODEL_LIST_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.TREE_MODEL_LIST_ONLY`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_DROP_AFTER

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_DROP_AFTER`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_DROP_BEFORE

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_DROP_BEFORE`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_AFTER

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_AFTER`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_BEFORE

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_BEFORE`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_BOTH

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_BOTH`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_HORIZONTAL

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_HORIZONTAL`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_NONE

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_NONE`

    Constant TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_VERTICAL

      `constant GTK2.TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_VERTICAL`

    Constant TRUE

      `constant GTK2.TRUE`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_ACCELERATOR

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_ACCELERATOR`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_AUTO

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_AUTO`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_MENU

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_MENU`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_MENUITEM

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_MENUITEM`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_PLACEHOLDER

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_PLACEHOLDER`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_POPUP

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_POPUP`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_SEPARATOR

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_SEPARATOR`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR`

    Constant UI_MANAGER_TOOLITEM

      `constant GTK2.UI_MANAGER_TOOLITEM`

    Constant UNIT_INCH

      `constant GTK2.UNIT_INCH`

    Constant UNIT_MM

      `constant GTK2.UNIT_MM`

    Constant UNIT_PIXEL

      `constant GTK2.UNIT_PIXEL`

    Constant UNIT_POINTS

      `constant GTK2.UNIT_POINTS`

    Constant UPDATE_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK2.UPDATE_ALWAYS`

    Constant UPDATE_CONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK2.UPDATE_CONTINUOUS`

    Constant UPDATE_DELAYED

      `constant GTK2.UPDATE_DELAYED`

    Constant UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS

      `constant GTK2.UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS`

    Constant UPDATE_IF_VALID

      `constant GTK2.UPDATE_IF_VALID`

    Constant VISIBILITY_FULL

      `constant GTK2.VISIBILITY_FULL`

    Constant VISIBILITY_NONE

      `constant GTK2.VISIBILITY_NONE`

    Constant VISIBILITY_PARTIAL

      `constant GTK2.VISIBILITY_PARTIAL`

    Constant VISIBLE

      `constant GTK2.VISIBLE`

    Constant WIDGET_HELP_TOOLTIP

      `constant GTK2.WIDGET_HELP_TOOLTIP`

    Constant WIDGET_HELP_WHATS_THIS

      `constant GTK2.WIDGET_HELP_WHATS_THIS`

    Constant WINDOW_POPUP

      `constant GTK2.WINDOW_POPUP`

    Constant WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

      `constant GTK2.WINDOW_TOPLEVEL`

    Constant WIN_POS_CENTER

      `constant GTK2.WIN_POS_CENTER`

    Constant WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS

      `constant GTK2.WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS`

    Constant WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT

      `constant GTK2.WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT`

    Constant WIN_POS_MOUSE

      `constant GTK2.WIN_POS_MOUSE`

    Constant WIN_POS_NONE

      `constant GTK2.WIN_POS_NONE`

    Constant WRAP_CHAR

      `constant GTK2.WRAP_CHAR`

    Constant WRAP_NONE

      `constant GTK2.WRAP_NONE`

    Constant WRAP_WORD

      `constant GTK2.WRAP_WORD`

    Constant WRAP_WORD_CHAR

      `constant GTK2.WRAP_WORD_CHAR`

    Method add_builtin_icon

      `void add_builtin_icon(string name, int size, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

    Description

      Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea of build-in icons is to allow an application or library that uses themed icons to function requiring files to be present in the file system. For instance, the default images for all of GTK2+'s stock icons are registered as built-in icons.

      In general, if you use add_builtin_icon() you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so that the icon is generally available.

    Method false

      `int false()`

    Description

      Always returns false.

    Method flush

      `void flush()`

    Description

      Flush GDK. Not normally needed, can be useful while doing calculations.

    Method get_default_icon_list

      `array get_default_icon_list()`

    Description

      Gets the value set by set_default_icon_list().

    Method get_default_icon_theme

      `GTK2.IconTheme get_default_icon_theme()`

    Description

      Gets the icon theme.

    Method get_file_info

      `mapping get_file_info(string filename)`

    Description

      Parses an image file far enough to determine its format and size.

    Method get_formats

      `array get_formats()`

    Description

      Get information about the image formats supported.

    Method gnome_init

      `array gnome_init(string app_id, string app_version, array argv)`

    Description

      Initializes the application. This sets up all of the GNOME internals and prepares them (gdk/gtk, session-management, triggers, sound, user preferences). If corba init flags are specified, corba initialization is done as well as gnome initialization. corba_init_flags is 0 or more of GNORBA_INIT_SERVER_FUNC (1), GNORBA_INIT_DISABLE_COOKIES (2) and GNORBA_INIT_CORBA_PRIO_HIGH (4)

    Method grab_add

      `void grab_add(GTK2.Widget widget)`

    Description

      Grab a widget.

    Method grab_remove

      `void grab_remove(GTK2.Widget widget)`

    Description

      Remove the grab.

    Method gtk_init

      `array gtk_init(array|void argc, int|void no_pgtkrc)`

    Description

      Low level GTK init function (used by setup_gtk). This function is more or less equivalent to the C-GTK+ function gtk_init. setup_gtk does some extra things (such as parsing ~/.pgtkrc).

    Method list_toplevels

      `array list_toplevels()`

    Description

      Returns a list of all existing toplevel windows.

    Method low_flush

      `void low_flush()`

    Description

      Flush, but do not process events. Not normally needed.

    Method main

      `void main()`

    Description

      Start GTK in blocking mode. Doing this disables asynchronous I/O in pike. You can return -1 from main in pike to run GTK (and the rest of pike) in asynchronous mode.

    Method main_iteration_do

      `int main_iteration_do(int block)`

    Description

      Run one iteration in the mainloop. If block is true, wait for an event before returning.

    Method main_level

      `int main_level()`

    Description

      Return the current recursion depth.

    Method main_quit

      `void main_quit()`

    Description

      Exit from the gtk_main function on the next iteration.

    Method move_cursor

      `void move_cursor(int dx, int dy)`

    Description

      Move the mouse-cursor dx,dy pixels, relative to it's current position. This will generate a normal motion event.

      Note that this is a low-level X11 function, and thus only works when GDK uses X11.

    Method move_cursor_abs

      `void move_cursor_abs(GTK2.GdkWindow w, int dx, int dy)`

    Description

      Move the mouse-cursor to x,y, relative to the upper left corner of the specified window. This will generate a normal motion event.

      Note that this is a low-level X11 function, and thus only works when GDK uses X11.

    Method parse_rc

      `void parse_rc(string rc)`

    Description

      Takes a string and reads it as a gtkrc file.

    Method root_window

      `GTK2.GdkWindow root_window()`

    Description

      Returns the root window of the current display

    Method saver_disable

      `void saver_disable()`

    Description

      Disable the screensaver. This is a low-level X11 function, and thus only works when GDK uses X11

    Method saver_enable

      `void saver_enable()`

    Description

      Enable the screensaver again after saver_disable has been called. This is a low-level X11 function, and thus only works when GDK uses X11.

    Method set_auto_startup_notification

      `void set_auto_startup_notification(int setting)`

    Description

      By default, after showing the first GTK2.Window for each GDK2.Screen, GTK+ calls GDK2.Screen->notify_startup_complete(). Call this function to disable the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification until after your real main window has been shown, for example.

      In that example, you would disable startup notification temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that showing the main window would automatically result in notification.

    Method set_default_icon

      `void set_default_icon(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pix)`

    Description

      Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't had set_icon() called on them.

    Method set_default_icon_from_file

      `void set_default_icon_from_file(string filename)`

    Description

      Sets an icon to be used as fallback from a file on disk.

    Method set_default_icon_list

      `void set_default_icon_list(array list)`

    Description

      Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't had set_icon_list() called on them to set up a window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the icon for all windows in your app at once.

    Method set_default_icon_name

      `void set_default_icon_name(string name)`

    Description

      Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't had set_icon_list() called on them from a named themed icon.

    Method setup_gtk

      `array setup_gtk(array|void argv, int|void do_not_parse_rc)`

    Description

      Initialize GTK, and all that comes with it. Also parses $HOME/.pgtkrc and $HOME/.gtkrc if they exists. The single argument, if supplied, is the argument array passed to the program. This is used to set default window titles etc. The second argument, if supplied, indicates that pike specific *rc files should not be parsed.

      The most common usage is GTK2.setup_gtk(argv);

    Method true

      `int true()`

    Description

      Always returns true.

    Method version

      `array version()`

    Description

      Returns the version of the GTK library.

    CLASS GTK2.AboutDialog

      Description

        Properties: array(string) artists array(string) authors string comments string copyright array(string) documenters string license GDK2.Pixbuf logo string logo-icon-name string name string translator-credits string version string website string website-label

        Style properties: GDK2.Color link-color

      Method create

        `GTK2.AboutDialog GTK2.AboutDialog(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.AboutDialog.

      Method get_artists

        `array get_artists()`

      Description

        Returns the strings which are displayed in the artists tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method get_authors

        `array get_authors()`

      Description

        Returns the strings which are displayed in the authors tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method get_comments

        `string get_comments()`

      Description

        Returns the comments string.

      Method get_copyright

        `string get_copyright()`

      Description

        Returns the copyright string.

      Method get_documenters

        `array get_documenters()`

      Description

        Returns the strings which are displayed in the documenters tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method get_license

        `string get_license()`

      Description

        Returns the license information.

      Method get_logo

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_logo()`

      Description

        Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo.

      Method get_logo_icon_name

        `string get_logo_icon_name()`

      Description

        Returns the icon name.

      Method get_program_name

        `string get_program_name()`

      Description

        Returns the program name.

      Method get_property

        `mixed get_property(string property)`

      Description

        Get property.

      Method get_translator_credits

        `string get_translator_credits()`

      Description

        Returns the translator credis.

      Method get_version

        `string get_version()`

      Description

        Returns the version string.

      Method get_website

        `string get_website()`

      Description

        Returns the website URL.

      Method get_website_label

        `string get_website_label()`

      Description

        Returns the label used for the website link.

      Method get_wrap_license

        `int get_wrap_license()`

      Description

        Returns whether the license text is automatically wrapped.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Method set_artists

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_artists(array art)`

      Description

        Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method set_authors

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_authors(array auth)`

      Description

        Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method set_comments

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_comments(string comments)`

      Description

        Sets the comment string.

      Method set_copyright

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_copyright(string copyright)`

      Description

        Sets the copyright string.

      Method set_documenters

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_documenters(array doc)`

      Description

        Sets the strings which are displayed in the documenters tab of the secondary credits dialog.

      Method set_license

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_license(string license)`

      Description

        Sets the license information.

      Method set_logo

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_logo(GTK2.GdkPixbuf logo)`

      Description

        Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as the logo.

      Method set_logo_icon_name

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_logo_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the icon name.

      Method set_program_name

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_program_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the name to display in the dialog.

      Method set_translator_credits

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_translator_credits(string credits)`

      Description

        Sets the translator credits.

      Method set_version

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_version(string version)`

      Description

        Sets the version string.

      Method set_website

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_website(string website)`

      Description

        Sets the URL to use for the website link.

      Method set_website_label

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_website_label(string label)`

      Description

        Sets the label used for the website link. Defaults to the website URL.

      Method set_wrap_license

        `GTK2.AboutDialog set_wrap_license(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the license text is automatically wrapped.

    CLASS GTK2.AccelGroup

      Description

        An AccelGroup stores keybindings. A group is automatically created by W(MenuFactory)

        NOIMG

        Signals: accel_activate

        accel_changed

      Method connect

        `GTK2.AccelGroup connect(int accel_key, int accel_mods, int accel_flags, function(:void) cb, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Installs an accelerator in this group.

      Method connect_by_path

        `GTK2.AccelGroup connect_by_path(string accel_path, function(:void) cb, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Installs an accelerator in this group, using an accelerator path to look up the appropriate key and modifiers.

      Method create

        `GTK2.AccelGroup GTK2.AccelGroup()`

      Description

        Create a new accelerator group

      Method disconnect

        `GTK2.AccelGroup disconnect(int accel_key, int accel_mods)`

      Description

        Removes an accelerator previously installed.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method lock

        `GTK2.AccelGroup lock()`

      Description

        Locks the group.

      Method unlock

        `GTK2.AccelGroup unlock()`

      Description

        Undoes the last call to lock().

    CLASS GTK2.AccelLabel

      Description

        A label for accelerators. Properties: GTK2.Widget accel-widget

      Method create

        `GTK2.AccelLabel GTK2.AccelLabel(string|mapping text_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(AccelLabel).

      Method get_accel_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_accel_widget()`

      Description

        Fetches the widget monitored by this accelerator label.

      Method get_accel_width

        `int get_accel_width()`

      Description

        Returns the width needed to display the accelerator key(s). This is used by menus to align all of the W(MenuItem).

      Inherit Label

        inherit GTK2.Label : Label

      Method refetch

        `int refetch()`

      Description

        Recreates the string representing the accelerator keys. This should not be needed since the string is automatically updated whenever accelerators are added or removed from the associated widget.

      Method set_accel_widget

        `GTK2.AccelLabel set_accel_widget(GTK2.Widget accel_widget)`

      Description

        Sets the widget to be monitored.

    CLASS GTK2.Action

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.ActionGroup action-group int hide-if-empty int is-important string label string name int sensitive string short-label string stock-id string tooltip int visible int visible-horizontal int visible-overflown int visible-vertical

        Signals: activate

      Method activate

        `GTK2.Action activate()`

      Description

        Emits the "activate" signal, if it isn't insensitive.

      Method block_activate_from

        `GTK2.Action block_activate_from(GTK2.Widget proxy)`

      Description

        Disables calls to the activate() function by signals on the proxy. This is used to break notification loops for things like check or radio actions.

      Method connect_accelerator

        `GTK2.Action connect_accelerator()`

      Description

        Installs the accelerator if this action widget has an accel path and group.

      Method connect_proxy

        `GTK2.Action connect_proxy(GTK2.Widget proxy)`

      Description

        Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises various properties of the action with the widget (such as label text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the action gets activated when the proxy widget does.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Action GTK2.Action(string|mapping name_or_props, string|void label, string|void tooltip, string|void stock_id)`

      Description

        Creates a new object.

      Method create_icon

        `GTK2.Widget create_icon(int icon_size)`

      Description

        This function is intended for use by action implementations to create icons displayed in the proxy widgets. One of ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, ICON_SIZE_DIALOG, ICON_SIZE_DND, ICON_SIZE_INVALID, ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR, ICON_SIZE_MENU and ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR.

      Method create_menu

        `GTK2.Widget create_menu()`

      Description

        If this action provides a W(Menu) widget as a submenu for the menu item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an instance of that menu.

      Method create_menu_item

        `GTK2.Widget create_menu_item()`

      Description

        Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the action.

      Method create_tool_item

        `GTK2.Widget create_tool_item()`

      Description

        Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the action.

      Method disconnect_accelerator

        `GTK2.Action disconnect_accelerator()`

      Description

        Undoes the effect of one call to connect_accelerator().

      Method disconnect_proxy

        `GTK2.Action disconnect_proxy(GTK2.Widget proxy)`

      Description

        Disconnects a proxy widget. Does not destroy the widget.

      Method get_accel_path

        `string get_accel_path()`

      Description

        Returns the accel path for this action.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the action.

      Method get_proxies

        `array get_proxies()`

      Description

        Returns the proxy widgets.

      Method get_sensitive

        `int get_sensitive()`

      Description

        Returns whether the action itself is sensitive. Note that this doesn't necessarily mean effective sensitivity.

      Method get_visible

        `int get_visible()`

      Description

        Returns whether the action itself is visible.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method is_sensitive

        `int is_sensitive()`

      Description

        Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive.

      Method is_visible

        `int is_visible()`

      Description

        Returns whether the action is effectively visible.

      Method set_accel_group

        `GTK2.Action set_accel_group(GTK2.AccelGroup group)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.AccelGroup in which the accelerator for this action will be installed.

      Method set_accel_path

        `GTK2.Action set_accel_path(string accel_path)`

      Description

        Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated with this action will have this accel path, so that their accelerators are consistent.

      Method set_sensitive

        `GTK2.Action set_sensitive(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the sensitive property.

      Method set_visible

        `GTK2.Action set_visible(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the visible property.

      Method unblock_activate_from

        `GTK2.Action unblock_activate_from(GTK2.Widget proxy)`

      Description

        Re-enables calls to the activate() function.

    CLASS GTK2.ActionGroup

      Description

        Actions are organized into groups. An action group is essentially a map from names to GTK2.Action objects.

        All actions that would make sense to use in a particular context should be in a single group. Multiple action groups may be used for a particular user interface. In fact, it is expected that most non-trivial applications will make use of multiple groups. For example, in an application that can edit multiple documents, one group holding global actions (e.g. quit, about, new), and one group per document holding actions that act on that document (eg. save, cut/copy/paste, etc). Each window's menus would be constructed from a combination of two action groups.

        Accelerators are handled by the GTK2+ accelerator map. All actions are assigned an accelerator path (which normally has the form &lt;Actions&gt;/group-name/action-name) and a shortcut is associated with this accelerator path. All menuitems and toolitems take on this accelerator path. The GTK2+ accelerator map code makes sure that the correct shortcut is displayed next to the menu item. Properties: string name int sensitive int visible

        Signals: connect_proxy

        disconnect_proxy

        post_activate

        pre_activate

      Method add_action

        `GTK2.ActionGroup add_action(GTK2.Action action, string|void accelerator)`

      Description

        Adds an action object to the action group and sets up the accelerator.

        If accelerator is omitted, attempts to use the accelerator associated with the stock_id of the action.

        Accel paths are set to &lt;Actions&gt;/group-name/action-name.

      Method add_actions

        `GTK2.ActionGroup add_actions(array entries)`

      Description

        This is a convenience function to create a number of actions and add them to the action group.

        The "activate" signals of the actions are connect to the callbacks and their accel paths are set to <Actions>/group-name/action-name.

        Mapping is: ([ "name": string, "stock_id": string, "label": string, "accelerator": string, "tooltip": string, "callback": function(callback) "data": mixed ]);

      Method add_radio_actions

        `GTK2.ActionGroup add_radio_actions(array entries, function(:void) cb, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and add them to the action group.

        Mapping is: ([ "name": string, "stock_id": string, "label": string, "accelerator": string, "tooltip": string, "value": int ]);

      Method add_toggle_actions

        `GTK2.ActionGroup add_toggle_actions(array entries)`

      Description

        This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them to the action group.

        Mapping is: ([ "name": string, "stock_id": string, "label": string, "accelerator": string, "tooltip": string, "callback": function(callback), "data": mixed, "is_active": int ]);

      Method create

        `GTK2.ActionGroup GTK2.ActionGroup(string|mapping name_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.ActionGroup object. The name of the action group is used when associating keybindings with the actions.

      Method get_action

        `GTK2.Action get_action(string name)`

      Description

        Looks up an action in the action group by name.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of the action group.

      Method get_sensitive

        `int get_sensitive()`

      Description

        Returns true if the group is sensitive. The constituent actions can only be logically sensitive if they are sensitive and their group is sensitive.

      Method get_visible

        `int get_visible()`

      Description

        Returns true if the group is visible. The constituent actions can only be logically visible if they are visible and their group is visible.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method list_actions

        `array list_actions()`

      Description

        Lists the actions in the action group.

      Method remove_action

        `GTK2.ActionGroup remove_action(GTK2.Action action)`

      Description

        Removes an action object.

      Method set_sensitive

        `GTK2.ActionGroup set_sensitive(int setting)`

      Description

        Changes the sensitivity.

      Method set_visible

        `GTK2.ActionGroup set_visible(int setting)`

      Description

        Changes the visibility.

    CLASS GTK2.Activatable

      Description

        Activatable widgets can be connected to a GTK.Action and reflects the state of its action. A GTK.Activatable can also provide feedback through its action, as they are responsible for activating their related actions. Properties: GTK2.Action related-action int use-action-apperance

      Method get_related_action

        `GTK2.Action get_related_action()`

      Description

        Gets the related action

      Method get_use_action_appearance

        `int get_use_action_appearance()`

      Description

        Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance.

      Method set_related_action

        `GTK2.Activatable set_related_action(GTK2.Action a)`

      Description

        Sets the related action

      Method set_use_action_appearance

        `GTK2.Activatable set_use_action_appearance(int use_apperance)`

      Description

        Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance

    CLASS GTK2.Adjustment

      Description

        The GTK2.Adjustment object represents a value which has an associated lower and upper bound, together with step and page increments, and a page size. It is used within several GTK2+ widgets, including GtkSpinButton, GtkViewport, and GtkRange (which is a base class for GtkHScrollbar, GtkVScrollbar, GtkHScale, and GtkVScale).

        The GtkAdjustment object does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of the GtkAdjustment to control the value.

        The owner of the GtkAdjustment typically calls the value_changed() and changed() functions after changing the value or its bounds. This results in the emission of the "value_changed" or "changed" signal respectively.

        Properties: float lower float page-increment float page-size float step-increment float upper float value

        Signals: changed The adjustment changed in some way

        value_changed The value changed

      Method changed

        `GTK2.Adjustment changed()`

      Description

        Emites a "changed" signal.

      Method clamp_page

        `GTK2.Adjustment clamp_page(float lower, float upper)`

      Description

        Updates the W(Adjustment) value to ensure that the range between lower and upper is in the current page (i.e. between value and value+page_size). If the range is larger than the page size, then only the start of it will be in the current page. A "changed" signal will be emitted if the value is changed.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Adjustment GTK2.Adjustment(float|mapping value_or_props, float|void lower, float|void upper, float|void step_increment, float|void page_increment, float|void page_size)`

      Description

        The value argument is the initial value you want to give to the adjustment, usually corresponding to the topmost or leftmost position of an adjustable widget. The lower argument specifies the lowest value which the adjustment can hold. The step_increment argument specifies the "smaller" of the two increments by which the user can change the value, while the page_increment is the "larger" one. The page_size argument usually corresponds somehow to the visible area of a panning widget. The upper argument is used to represent the bottom most or right most coordinate in a panning widget's child. Therefore it is not always the largest number that value can take, since the page_size of such widgets is usually non-zero.

        All values are optional, they default to 0.0. For most widgets the unit is pixels.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Gets the current value.

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK2.Data : Data

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.Adjustment set_value(float to)`

      Description

        Sets the value. The value is clamped to lie between lower and upper.

        Note that for adjustments which are used in a W(Scrollbar), the effective range of allowed values goes from lower to upper-page_size.

      Method value_changed

        `GTK2.Adjustment value_changed()`

      Description

        Emits a "value-changed" signal.

    CLASS GTK2.Alignment

      Description

        The W(Alignment) widget controls the alignment and size of its child widget. It has four settings: xscale, yscale, xalign, and yalign.

        The scale settings are used to specify how much the child widget should expand to fill the space allocated to the W(Alignment). The values can range from 0 (meaning the child doesn't expand at all) to 1 (meaning the child expands to fill all of the available space).

        The align settings are used to place the child widget within the available area. The values range from 0 (top or left) to 1 (bottom or right). Of course, if the scale settings are both set to 1, the alignment settings have no effect.

        NOIMG Properties: int bottom-padding int left-padding int right-padding int top-padding float xalign float xscale float yalign float yscale

      Method create

        `GTK2.Alignment GTK2.Alignment(float|mapping xalign_or_props, float|void yalign, float|void xscale, float|void yscale)`

      Description

        xalign : | the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
        yalign : | the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
        xscale : | the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the GTK2.Alignment.
        yscale : | the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xscale.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set

        `GTK2.Alignment set(float xalign, float yalign, float xscale, float yscale)`

      Description

        xalign : | the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
        yalign : | the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
        xscale : | the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the GTK2.Alignment.
        yscale : | the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xscale.

      Method set_padding

        `GTK2.Alignment set_padding(int padding_top, int padding_bottom, int padding_left, int padding_right)`

      Description

        Sets the padding on the different sides.

    CLASS GTK2.Allocation

      Inherit Rectangle

        inherit GDK2.Rectangle : Rectangle

    CLASS GTK2.Arrow

      Description

        An arrow pointing in one of four directions. The 'etched' shadow types does not work. `GTK2.Arrow(GTK2.ARROW_UP, GTK2.SHADOW_OUT)`

        `GTK2.Arrow(GTK2.ARROW_LEFT, GTK2.SHADOW_IN)`

        `GTK2.Arrow(GTK2.ARROW_RIGHT, GTK2.SHADOW_IN)`

        `GTK2.Arrow(GTK2.ARROW_DOWN, GTK2.SHADOW_OUT)`

        Properties: int arrow-type ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP int shadow-type SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method create

        `GTK2.Arrow GTK2.Arrow(int|mapping arrow_type_or_props, int|void shadow_type)`

      Description

        First argument is one of ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP, second one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT.

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK2.Misc : Misc

      Method set

        `GTK2.Arrow set(int arrow_type, int shadow_type)`

      Description

        First argument is one of ARROW_DOWN, ARROW_LEFT, ARROW_RIGHT and ARROW_UP, second one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT.

    CLASS GTK2.AspectFrame

      Description

        A W(Frame) widget that always maintain a specified ratio between width and height. width/height == ratio

        `GTK2.AspectFrame("Title",0.5,0.5,0.4,0)->add( GTK2.Label("Wrong aspect"))->set_size_request(200,200)`

        Properties: int obey-child float ratio float xalign float yalign

      Method create

        `GTK2.AspectFrame GTK2.AspectFrame(mapping|string label, float|void xalign, float|void yalign, float|void ratio, int|void obey_child)`

      Description

        Create a new frame. Arguments are label, xalign, yalign, ratio, obey_child xalign is floats between 0 and 1, 0.0 is upper (or leftmost), 1.0 is lower (or rightmost). If 'obey_child' is true, the frame will use the aspect ratio of it's (one and only) child widget instead of 'ratio'.

      Inherit Frame

        inherit GTK2.Frame : Frame

      Method set

        `GTK2.AspectFrame set(float xalign, float yalign, float ratio, int obey_child)`

      Description

        Set the aspec values. Arguments are xalign, yalign, ratio, obey_child xalign is floats between 0 and 1, 0.0 is upper (or leftmost), 1.0 is lower (or rightmost). If 'obey_child' is true, the frame will use the aspect ratio of it's (one and only) child widget instead of 'ratio'.

    CLASS GTK2.Assistant

      Description

        Properties:

        int complete GDK2.Pixbuf header-image GTK2.AssistantPageType page-type GDK2.Pixbuf sidebar-image string title

        Style properties:

        int content-padding int header-padding

        Signals: apply

        cancel

        close

        prepare A GTK2.Assistant is a widget used to represent a generally complex operation splitted in several steps, guiding the user through its pages and controlling the page flow to collect the necessary data.

      Method add_action_widget

        `GTK2.Assistant add_action_widget(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Adds a widget to the action area.

      Method append_page

        `int append_page(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Appends a page to the assistant.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Assistant GTK2.Assistant(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new assistant.

      Method get_current_page

        `int get_current_page()`

      Description

        Returns the page number of the current page. Returns -1 if there are no pages.

      Method get_n_pages

        `int get_n_pages()`

      Description

        Returns the number of pages.

      Method get_nth_page

        `GTK2.Widget get_nth_page(int page_num)`

      Description

        Returnss the child widget contained in page number page_num.

      Method get_page_complete

        `int get_page_complete(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Gets whether page is complete.

      Method get_page_header_image

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_page_header_image(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Gets the header image for page.

      Method get_page_side_image

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_page_side_image(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Gets the side image for page.

      Method get_page_title

        `string get_page_title(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Gets the title for page.

      Method get_page_type

        `int get_page_type(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Gets the page type of page.

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK2.Window : Window

      Method insert_page

        `int insert_page(GTK2.Widget page, int pos)`

      Description

        Inserts a page at a given position. If pos equals -1 it will append the page.

      Method prepend_page

        `int prepend_page(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Prepends a page to the assistant.

      Method remove_action_widget

        `GTK2.Assistant remove_action_widget(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Removes a widget from the action area.

      Method set_current_page

        `GTK2.Assistant set_current_page(int page_num)`

      Description

        Switches the page to page_num.

      Method set_forward_page_func

        `GTK2.Assistant set_forward_page_func(function(:void) f, mixed data)`

      Description

        Set the forward page function.

      Method set_page_complete

        `GTK2.Assistant set_page_complete(GTK2.Widget page, int complete)`

      Description

        Sets whether page contents are complete. This will make assistant update the buttons state to be able to continue the task.

      Method set_page_header_image

        `GTK2.Assistant set_page_header_image(GTK2.Widget page, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Sets a header image for page. This image is displayed in the header area of the assistant when page is the current page.

      Method set_page_side_image

        `GTK2.Assistant set_page_side_image(GTK2.Widget page, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Sets a side image for page. This image is displayed in the side area of the assistant when page is the current page.

      Method set_page_title

        `GTK2.Assistant set_page_title(GTK2.Widget page, string title)`

      Description

        Sets a title for page. The title is displayed in the header area of the assistant when page is the current page.

      Method set_page_type

        `GTK2.Assistant set_page_type(GTK2.Widget page, int type)`

      Description

        Sets the page type for page. The page type determines the page behavior.

      Method update_buttons_state

        `GTK2.Assistant update_buttons_state()`

      Description

        Forces the assistant to recompute the buttons state.

        GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations, e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the visibility or completeness of a page changes.

        One situation where it can be necessary to call this function is when changing a value on the current page affects the future page flow of the assistant.

    CLASS GTK2.Bin

      Description

        A container that can only contain one child.

      Method get_child

        `GTK2.Widget get_child()`

      Description

        Return the child.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

    CLASS GTK2.Box

      Description

        A box is a container that can contain more than one child. The basic 'Box' class cannot be instantiated, it is a virtual class that only defines some common 'Box' functions shared with all other Box widgets. Properties: int homogeneous int spacing

        Child properties: int expand int fill int pack-type int padding int position

      Method get_homogeneous

        `int get_homogeneous()`

      Description

        Returns whether the box is homogeneous.

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Description

        Gets the spacing.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method pack_end

        `GTK2.Box pack_end(GTK2.Widget widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding)`

      Description

        Pack from the right (or bottom) of the box. Arguments are widget, expand, fill, paddingb widget, expand, fill, padding

      Method pack_end_defaults

        `GTK2.Box pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        The argument is the widget to add.

      Method pack_start

        `GTK2.Box pack_start(GTK2.Widget widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding)`

      Description

        Pack from the left (or top) of the box. Argument are widget, expand, fill, padding pack(widget,1,1,0) is equivalent to 'add' or 'pack_start_defaults'

      Method pack_start_defaults

        `GTK2.Box pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        The argument is the widget to add. This function is equivalent to 'add'

      Method query_child_packing

        `mapping query_child_packing(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Return a mapping: ([ "expand":expandp, "fill":fillp, "padding":paddingp, "type":type ])

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK2.Box reorder_child(GTK2.Widget child, int new_position)`

      Description

        Move widget to pos, pos is an integer, between 0 and sizeof(box->children())-1

      Method set_child_packing

        `GTK2.Box set_child_packing(GTK2.Widget child_widget, int expandp, int fillp, int padding, int pack_type)`

      Description

        widget, expand, fill, padding, pack_type. If exand is true, the widget will be expanded when the box is resized. If 'fill' is true, the widget will be resized to fill up all available space. Padding is the amount of padding to use, and pack_type is one of PACK_DIRECTION_BTT, PACK_DIRECTION_LTR, PACK_DIRECTION_RTL, PACK_DIRECTION_TTB, PACK_END and PACK_START.

        You can emulate pack_start and pack_end with add and set_child_packing.

      Method set_homogeneous

        `GTK2.Box set_homogeneous(int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        If true, all widgets in the box will get exactly the same amount of space

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK2.Box set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        This is the amount of spacing (in pixels) inserted beween all widgets

    CLASS GTK2.Button

      Description

        A container that can only contain one child, and accepts events. draws a bevelbox around itself. `GTK2.Button("A button")`

        `GTK2.Button("A button\nwith multiple lines\nof text")`

        `GTK2.Button()->add(GTK2.Image(GTK2.GdkImage(0)->set(Image.Image(100,40)->test())))`

        Properties: int focus-on-click GTK2.Widget image int image-position string label int relief int use-stock int use-underline float xalign float yalign

        Style properties: int child-displacement-x int child-displacement-y GTK2.Border default-border GTK2.Border default-outside-border int displace-focus int image-spacing int inner-border

        Signals: activate

        clicked Called when the button is pressed, and then released

        enter Called when the mouse enters the button

        leave Called when the mouse leaves the button

        pressed Called when the button is pressed

        released Called when the button is released

      Method clicked

        `GTK2.Button clicked()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'clicked' event (press followed by release).

      Method create

        `GTK2.Button GTK2.Button(string|mapping label_or_props)`

      Description

        If a string is supplied, a W(Label) is created and added to the button.

      Method enter

        `GTK2.Button enter()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'enter' event.

      Method get_alignment

        `mapping get_alignment()`

      Description

        Gets the alignment of the child.

      Method get_focus_on_click

        `int get_focus_on_click()`

      Description

        Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked.

      Method get_image

        `GTK2.Widget get_image()`

      Description

        Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of the button.

      Method get_image_position

        `int get_image_position()`

      Description

        Gets the position of the image relative to the text inside the button.

      Method get_label

        `string get_label()`

      Description

        Get the text from the label of the button.

      Method get_relief

        `int get_relief()`

      Description

        One of RELIEF_HALF, RELIEF_NONE and RELIEF_NORMAL, set with set_relief()

      Method get_use_stock

        `int get_use_stock()`

      Description

        Returns whether the button label is a stock item.

      Method get_use_underline

        `int get_use_underline()`

      Description

        Returns whether an embedded underline in the button indicates a mnemonic.

      Inherit Activatable

        inherit GTK2.Activatable : Activatable

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method leave

        `GTK2.Button leave()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'leave' event.

      Method pressed

        `GTK2.Button pressed()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'press' event.

      Method released

        `GTK2.Button released()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'release' event.

      Method set_alignment

        `GTK2.Button set_alignment(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment of the child.

      Method set_focus_on_click

        `GTK2.Button set_focus_on_click(int focus_on_click)`

      Description

        Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked.

      Method set_image

        `GTK2.Button set_image(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Set the image of the button to the given widget. Note that it depends on the gtk-button-images setting whether the image will be displayed or not.

      Method set_image_position

        `GTK2.Button set_image_position(int position)`

      Description

        Sets the position of the image relative to the text inside the button.

      Method set_label

        `GTK2.Button set_label(string label)`

      Description

        Set the text of the label.

      Method set_relief

        `GTK2.Button set_relief(int newstyle)`

      Description

        One of RELIEF_HALF, RELIEF_NONE and RELIEF_NORMAL

      Method set_use_stock

        `GTK2.Button set_use_stock(int use_stock)`

      Description

        If true, the label set on the button is used as a stock id to select the stock item for the button.

      Method set_use_underline

        `GTK2.Button set_use_underline(int use_underline)`

      Description

        If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.

    CLASS GTK2.ButtonBox

      Description

        More or less equivalent to a normal box, but you can set a few layout schemes that are not available for normal boxes. See the hbox and vbox documentation for examples. Properties: int layout-style

        Child properties: int secondary

        Style properties: int child-internal-pad-x int child-internal-pad-y int child-min-height int child-min-width

      Method get_child_secondary

        `int get_child_secondary(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Returns whether child should appear in a secondary group of children.

      Method get_layout

        `int get_layout()`

      Description

        Returns the currently configured layout. One of BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE, BUTTONBOX_EDGE, BUTTONBOX_END, BUTTONBOX_SPREAD and BUTTONBOX_START

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK2.Box : Box

      Method set_child_secondary

        `GTK2.ButtonBox set_child_secondary(GTK2.Widget child, int is_secondary)`

      Description

        Sets whether child should appear in a secondary group of children.

      Method set_layout

        `GTK2.ButtonBox set_layout(int layout)`

      Description

        layout is one of BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE, BUTTONBOX_EDGE, BUTTONBOX_END, BUTTONBOX_SPREAD and BUTTONBOX_START

    CLASS GTK2.Calendar

      Description

        A calendar widget. `GTK2.Calendar();`

        `GTK2.Calendar()->select_day( 16 );`

        Properties: int day int month int no-month-change int show-day-names int show-heading int show-week-numbers int year

        Signals: day_selected

        day_selected_double_click

        month_changed

        next_month

        next_year

        prev_month

        prev_year

      Method clear_marks

        `GTK2.Calendar clear_marks()`

      Description

        Remove all day markers

      Method create

        `GTK2.Calendar GTK2.Calendar(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new calendar widget

      Method freeze

        `GTK2.Calendar freeze()`

      Description

        Suspend all dynamic updating of the widget

      Method get_date

        `mapping get_date()`

      Description

        returns a mapping: ([ "year":year, "month":month, "day":day ])

      Method get_display_options

        `int get_display_options()`

      Description

        Returns the current display options.

      Method get_marked_dates

        `array get_marked_dates()`

      Description

        Returns an array (with 31 elements) with 1es and 0es.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method mark_day

        `GTK2.Calendar mark_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Mark a day

      Method select_day

        `GTK2.Calendar select_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Select a certain day of the currently selected month

      Method select_month

        `int select_month(int month, int year)`

      Description

        Select the month to be viewed.

      Method set_display_options

        `GTK2.Calendar set_display_options(int options)`

      Description

        Bitwise or of one or more of CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE, CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES, CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING, CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS and CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY.

      Method thaw

        `GTK2.Calendar thaw()`

      Description

        Resume dynamic updating of the widget

      Method unmark_day

        `GTK2.Calendar unmark_day(int day_of_month)`

      Description

        Unmark a day

    CLASS GTK2.CellEditable

      Description

        Interface for widgets which are used for editing cells.

        Signals: editing_done

        remove_widget

      Method editing_done

        `GTK2.CellEditable editing_done()`

      Description

        Emits the "editing-done" signal. This signal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its value from the cell.

      Method remove_widget

        `GTK2.CellEditable remove_widget()`

      Description

        Emits the "remove-widget" signal. This signal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished editing, and the widget may now be destroyed.

      Method start_editing

        `GTK2.CellEditable start_editing(GTK2.GdkEvent event)`

      Description

        Begins editing. event is the GDK2.Event that began the editing process. It may be empty, in the instance that editing was initiated through programmatic means.

    CLASS GTK2.CellLayout

      Description

        An interface for packing cells.

      Method add_attribute

        `GTK2.CellLayout add_attribute(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, string attribute, int column)`

      Description

        Adds an attribute mapping.

      Method clear

        `GTK2.CellLayout clear()`

      Description

        Unsets all the mappings on all renderers and removes all renderers.

      Method clear_attributes

        `GTK2.CellLayout clear_attributes(GTK2.CellRenderer cell)`

      Description

        Clears all existing attributes.

      Method pack_end

        `GTK2.CellLayout pack_end(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int expand)`

      Description

        See pack_start().

      Method pack_start

        `GTK2.CellLayout pack_start(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int expand)`

      Description

        Packs the cell into the beginning. If expand is false, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divied evenly between the cells for which expand is true.

      Method reorder

        `GTK2.CellLayout reorder(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int position)`

      Description

        Re-inserts cell at position.

      Method set_cell_data_func

        `GTK2.CellLayout set_cell_data_func(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the callback to use for this cell layout. This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for setting the column value, and should set the value of the cell layout's cell renderer(s) as appropriate. f may be 0 to remove an older one.

    CLASS GTK2.CellRenderer

      Description

        Properties: string cell-background GDK2.Color cell-background-gdk int cell-background-set int height int is-expanded int is-expander int mode CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE, CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE and CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT int sensitive int visible int width float xalign int xpad float yalign int ypad

        Signals: editing_canceled

        editing_started

      Method activate

        `int activate(GTK2.GdkEvent event, GTK2.Widget widget, string path, GTK2.GdkRectangle background_area, GTK2.GdkRectangle cell_area, int flags)`

      Description

        Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing. Some cell renderers may use events; for example, W(CellRendererToggle) toggles when it gets a mouse click.

      Method get_fixed_size

        `mapping get_fixed_size()`

      Description

        Fills in width and height with the appropriate size of the cell.

      Method get_size

        `mapping get_size(GTK2.Widget widget, GTK2.GdkRectangle cell_area)`

      Description

        Obtains the width and heigh needed to render the cell. Used by widgets to determine the appropriate size for the cell_area passed to render(). If cell_area is present, fills in the x and y offset of the cell relative to this location. Please note that the values set in width and height, as well as those in x_offset and y_offset are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK2.Data : Data

      Method render

        `GTK2.CellRenderer render(GTK2.GdkWindow window, GTK2.Widget widget, GTK2.GdkRectangle background_area, GTK2.GdkRectangle cell_area, GTK2.GdkRectangle expose_area, int flags)`

      Description

        Invokes the virtual render function of the W(CellRenderer). The three passed-in rectangles are areas of window. Most renderers will draw within cell_area; the xalign, yalign, xpad, and ypad fields of the W(CellRenderer) should be honored with respect to cell_area. background_area includes the blank space around the cell, and also the area containing the tree expander; so the background_area rectangles for all cells tile to cover the entire window. expose_area is a clip rectangle. flags is one of CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_GTK, CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_OTHER, CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED, CELL_RENDERER_INSENSITIVE, CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE, CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE, CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT, CELL_RENDERER_PRELIT, CELL_RENDERER_SELECTED and CELL_RENDERER_SORTED.

      Method set_fixed_size

        `GTK2.CellRenderer set_fixed_size(int width, int height)`

      Description

        Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.

      Method start_editing

        `GTK2.CellRenderer start_editing(GTK2.GdkEvent event, GTK2.Widget widget, string path, GTK2.GdkRectangle background_area, GTK2.GdkRectangle cell_area, int flags)`

      Description

        Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.

      Method stop_editing

        `GTK2.CellRenderer stop_editing(int canceled)`

      Description

        Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped. If canceled is true, the cell renderer will emit the "editing-canceled" signal. This function should be called by cell renderer implementations in response to the "editing-done" signal of W(CellEditable).

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererAccel

      Description

        Properties: int accel-key int accel-mode int accel-mods int keycode

        Signals: accel_cleared

        accel_edited

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererAccel GTK2.CellRendererAccel(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.CellRendererAccel.

      Inherit CellRendererText

        inherit GTK2.CellRendererText : CellRendererText

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererCombo

      Description

        Properties: int has-entry GTK2.TreeModel model int text-column

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererCombo GTK2.CellRendererCombo(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(CellRendererCombo).

      Inherit CellRendererText

        inherit GTK2.CellRendererText : CellRendererText

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererPixbuf

      Description

        Properties: GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf-expander-closed GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf-expander-open string stock-detail string stock-id int stock-size

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererPixbuf GTK2.CellRendererPixbuf(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(CellRendererPixbuf). Adjust rendering parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set globally with G.Object->set(). Also, with W(TreeViewColumn), you can bind a property to a value in a W(TreeModel). For example, you can bind the "pixbuf" property on the cell renderer to a pixbuf value in the model, thus rendering a different image in each row of the W(TreeView).

      Inherit CellRenderer

        inherit GTK2.CellRenderer : CellRenderer

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererProgress

      Description

        Properties: int orientation int pulse string text float text-xalign float text-yalign int value

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererProgress GTK2.CellRendererProgress(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(CellRendererProgress).

      Inherit CellRenderer

        inherit GTK2.CellRenderer : CellRenderer

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererSpin

      Description

        Properties: int digits GTK2.Adjustment adjustment float climb-rate

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererSpin GTK2.CellRendererSpin(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.CellRendererSpin.

      Inherit CellRendererText

        inherit GTK2.CellRendererText : CellRendererText

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererText

      Description

        Properties: int alignment Pango.AttrList attributes string background GDK2.Color background-gdk int background-set int editable int editable-set int ellipsize PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE and PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START int ellipsize-set string family int family-set string font Pango.FontDescription font-desc string foreground GDK2.Color foreground-gdk int foreground-set string language int language-set string markup int rise int rise-set float scale int scale-set int single-paragraph-mode int size float size-points int size-set int stretch PANGO_STRETCH_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_NORMAL, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_CONDENSED and PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_EXPANDED int stretch-set int strikethrough int strikethrough-set int style PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC, PANGO_STYLE_NORMAL and PANGO_STYLE_OBLIQUE int style-set string text int underline PANGO_UNDERLINE_DOUBLE, PANGO_UNDERLINE_ERROR, PANGO_UNDERLINE_LOW, PANGO_UNDERLINE_NONE and PANGO_UNDERLINE_SINGLE int underline-set int variant PANGO_VARIANT_NORMAL and PANGO_VARIANT_SMALL_CAPS int variant-set int weight int weight-set int width-chars

        Signals: edited

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererText GTK2.CellRendererText(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(CellRendererText). Adjust how text is drawn using object properties. Object properties can be set globally (with G.Object->set()). Also, with W(TreeViewColumn), you can bind a property to a value in a W(TreeModel). For example, you can bind the "text" property on the cell renderer to a string value in the model, thus rendering a different string in each row of the W(TreeView).

      Inherit CellRenderer

        inherit GTK2.CellRenderer : CellRenderer

      Method set_fixed_height_from_font

        `GTK2.CellRendererText set_fixed_height_from_font(int number_of_rows)`

      Description

        Sets the height of a renderer to explicitly be determined by the "font" and "y_bad" property set on it. Further changes in these properties do not affect the height, so they must be accompanied by a subsequent call to this function. Using this function is unflexible, and should really only be used if calculating the size of cell is too slow (i.e., a massive number of cells displayed). If number_of_rows is -1, then the fixed height is unset, and the height is determined by the properties again.

    CLASS GTK2.CellRendererToggle

      Description

        Properties: int activatable The toggle button can be activated. int active The toggle state of the button. int inconsistent The inconsistent state of the button. int indicator-size int radio Draw the toggle butotn as a radio button.

        Signals: toggled

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellRendererToggle GTK2.CellRendererToggle(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(CellRendererToggle). Adjust rendering parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set globally with set().

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Returns whether the cell renderer is active.

      Method get_radio

        `int get_radio()`

      Description

        Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.

      Inherit CellRenderer

        inherit GTK2.CellRenderer : CellRenderer

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.CellRendererToggle set_active(int setting)`

      Description

        Activates or deactivates a cell renderer.

      Method set_radio

        `GTK2.CellRendererToggle set_radio(int radio)`

      Description

        If radio is true, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle (i.e a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles). If false, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option). This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just before rendering each cell in the model (for W(TreeView), you set up a per-row setting using W(TreeViewColumn) to associate model columns with cell renderer properties).

    CLASS GTK2.CellView

      Description

        Properties: string background GDK2.Color background-gdk int background-set

      Method create

        `GTK2.CellView GTK2.CellView(string|GdkPixbuf|mapping text, int|void markup)`

      Description

        Create a new W(CellView) widget.

      Method get_cell_renderers

        `array get_cell_renderers()`

      Description

        Returns the cell renderers which have been added to this view.

      Method get_displayed_row

        `GTK2.TreePath get_displayed_row()`

      Description

        Returns a W(TreePath) referring to the currently displayed row. If no row is currently displayed, 0 is returned.

      Method get_size_of_row

        `mapping get_size_of_row(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Returns width and height of the size needed to display the model row pointed to by path.

      Inherit CellLayout

        inherit GTK2.CellLayout : CellLayout

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method set_background_color

        `GTK2.CellView set_background_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the background color.

      Method set_displayed_row

        `GTK2.CellView set_displayed_row(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Sets the row of the model that is currently displayed. If the path is omitted, then the contents of the cellview "stick" at their last value; this is not normally a desired result, but may be a needed intermediate state if say, the mode becomes temporarily empty.

      Method set_model

        `GTK2.CellView set_model(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Sets the model. If this view already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model.

    CLASS GTK2.CheckButton

      Description

        Check buttons inherent many properties and functions from the the toggle buttons, but look a little different. Rather than being buttons with text inside them, they are small squares with the text to the right of them. These are often used for toggling options on and off in applications. `GTK2.CheckButton( "title" )`

        Style properties: int indicator-size int indicator-spacing

      Method create

        `GTK2.CheckButton GTK2.CheckButton(string|mapping label_or_props, int|void mnemonic)`

      Description

        The argument, if specified, is the label of the item. If no label is specified, use object->add() to add some other widget (such as an pixmap or image widget)

      Inherit ToggleButton

        inherit GTK2.ToggleButton : ToggleButton

    CLASS GTK2.CheckMenuItem

      Description

        A check menu item is more or less identical to a check button, but it should be used in menus. `GTK2.CheckMenuItem("Hi there")`

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem("Hi there")->set_active(1)`

        Properties: int active int draw-as-radio int inconsistent

        Style properties: int indicator-size

        Signals: toggled Called when the state of the menu item is changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem GTK2.CheckMenuItem(string|mapping label_or_props)`

      Description

        The argument, if specified, is the label of the item. If no label is specified, use object->add() to add some other widget (such as an pixmap or image widget)

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Get whether item is active.

      Method get_draw_as_radio

        `int get_draw_as_radio()`

      Description

        Get whether check menu item is drawn like a radio button.

      Method get_inconsistent

        `int get_inconsistent()`

      Description

        Retrieves the value set by set_inconsistent().

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK2.MenuItem : MenuItem

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem set_active(int new_state)`

      Description

        State is either 1 or 0. If 1, the button will be 'pressed'.

      Method set_draw_as_radio

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem set_draw_as_radio(int draw_as_radio)`

      Description

        Set whether check menu item is drawn like a radio button.

      Method set_inconsistent

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem set_inconsistent(int setting)`

      Description

        If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to display the check in an "in between" state. This function turns on "in between" display.

      Method toggled

        `GTK2.CheckMenuItem toggled()`

      Description

        Emulate a toggled event

    CLASS GTK2.Clipboard

      Description

        Clipboard implementation.

      Method clear

        `GTK2.Clipboard clear()`

      Description

        Clears the contents of the clipboard.

      Method get

        `GTK2.Clipboard get(GDK2.Atom selection)`

      Description

        Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.

      Method get_display

        `GTK2.GdkDisplay get_display()`

      Description

        Gets the GDK2.Display associated with this clipboard.

      Method get_for_display

        `GTK2.Clipboard get_for_display(GTK2.GdkDisplay display, GDK2.Atom selection)`

      Description

        Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_image

        `GTK2.Clipboard set_image(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given GDK2(Pixbuf).

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.Clipboard set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given string. If multiple arguments are supplied, sprintf() is called implicitly.

      Method wait_for_image

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf wait_for_image()`

      Description

        Requests the contents of the clipboard as image and converts the result to a GDK2.Pixbuf.

      Method wait_for_rich_text

        `string wait_for_rich_text(GTK2.TextBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text.

      Method wait_for_text

        `string wait_for_text()`

      Description

        Requests the contents of the clipboard as text

      Method wait_is_image_available

        `int wait_is_image_available()`

      Description

        Test to see if tehre is an image available to be pasted.

      Method wait_is_rich_text_available

        `int wait_is_rich_text_available(GTK2.TextBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Test to see if there is rich text available to be pasted.

      Method wait_is_text_available

        `int wait_is_text_available()`

      Description

        Test to see if there is text available to be pasted. This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking if it contains any of the supported text targets.

    CLASS GTK2.ColorButton

      Description

        Properties: int alpha GDK2.Color color string title int use-alpha

        Signals: color_set When a user selects a color.

      Method create

        `GTK2.ColorButton GTK2.ColorButton(GTK2.GdkColor red_or_props, int|void green, int|void blue)`

      Description

        Create a new W(ColorButton).

      Method get_alpha

        `int get_alpha()`

      Description

        Get the current alpha value.

      Method get_color

        `GTK2.GdkColor get_color()`

      Description

        Returns the current color.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Get the title.

      Method get_use_alpha

        `int get_use_alpha()`

      Description

        Gets whether the color button uses the alpha channel.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_alpha

        `GTK2.ColorButton set_alpha(int alpha)`

      Description

        Sets the current opacity to alpha.

      Method set_color

        `GTK2.ColorButton set_color(int|GdkColor red, int|void green, int|void blue)`

      Description

        Sets the current color.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.ColorButton set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the title for the color selection dialog.

      Method set_use_alpha

        `GTK2.ColorButton set_use_alpha(int use_alpha)`

      Description

        Sets whether or not the color button should use the alpha channel.

    CLASS GTK2.ColorSelection

      Description

        The color selection widget is, not surprisingly, a widget for interactive selection of colors. This composite widget lets the user select a color by manipulating RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) triples. This is done either by adjusting single values with sliders or entries, or by picking the desired color from a hue-saturation wheel/value bar. Optionally, the opacity of the color can also be set.

        The color selection widget currently emits only one signal, "color_changed", which is emitted whenever the current color in the widget changes, either when the user changes it or if it's set explicitly through set_color().

        `GTK2.ColorSelection()`

        Properties: int current-alpha GDK2.Color current-color int has-opacity-control int has-palette

        Signals: color_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.ColorSelection GTK2.ColorSelection(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new color selection.

      Method get_current_alpha

        `int get_current_alpha()`

      Description

        Returns the current alpha value.

      Method get_current_color

        `mapping get_current_color()`

      Description

        When you need to query the current color, typically when you've received a "color_changed" signal, you use this function. The return value is an array of floats, See the set_color() function for the description of this array.

      Method get_has_opacity_control

        `int get_has_opacity_control()`

      Description

        Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.

      Method get_has_palette

        `int get_has_palette()`

      Description

        Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.

      Method get_previous_alpha

        `int get_previous_alpha()`

      Description

        Returns the previous alpha value.

      Method get_previous_color

        `mapping get_previous_color()`

      Description

        Returns the original color value.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

      Method is_adjusting

        `int is_adjusting()`

      Description

        Gets the current state of the colorsel.

      Method set_current_alpha

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_current_alpha(int alpha)`

      Description

        Sets the current opacity to be alpha. The first time this is called, it will also set the original opacity to be alpha too.

      Method set_current_color

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_current_color(mapping color)`

      Description

        You can set the current color explicitly by calling this function with an array of colors (floats). The length of the array depends on whether opacity is enabled or not. Position 0 contains the red component, 1 is green, 2 is blue and opacity is at position 3 (only if opacity is enabled, see set_opacity()) All values are between 0 and 65535

      Method set_has_opacity_control

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_has_opacity_control(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether or not to use opacity.

      Method set_has_palette

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_has_palette(int has_palette)`

      Description

        Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of has_palette

      Method set_previous_alpha

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_previous_alpha(int alpha)`

      Description

        Sets the 'previous' alpha to be alpha. This function should be called with some hesitation, as it might seem confusing to have that alpha change.

      Method set_previous_color

        `GTK2.ColorSelection set_previous_color(mapping colors)`

      Description

        Sets the 'previous' color to be color.

    CLASS GTK2.ColorSelectionDialog

      Description

        Color Selection Dialog

      Method create

        `GTK2.ColorSelectionDialog GTK2.ColorSelectionDialog(string|mapping title_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new Color Selection Dialog

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK2.Widget get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        The Cancel button.

      Method get_colorsel

        `GTK2.Widget get_colorsel()`

      Description

        The Color Selection widget contained within the dialog

      Method get_help_button

        `GTK2.Widget get_help_button()`

      Description

        The Help button.

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK2.Widget get_ok_button()`

      Description

        The OK button.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

    CLASS GTK2.ComboBox

      Description

        Properties: int active int add-tearoffs int column-span-column int focus-on-click int has-frame GTK2.TreeModel model int row-span-column string tearoff-title int wrap-width

        Style properties: int appears-as-list int arrow-size int shadow-type

        Signals: changed

      Method append_text

        `GTK2.ComboBox append_text(string text)`

      Description

        Appends text to the list of strings stored in this combo box. Note that you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with GTK2.ComboBox("a string").

      Method create

        `GTK2.ComboBox GTK2.ComboBox(GTK2.TreeModel model_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new ComboBox, either empty or with a model. If a string is passed int instead, it will create a new W(ComboBox) with only text strings. If you do so, you should only manipulate it with the following functions: append_text(), insert_text(), prepend_text(), and remove_text().

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Returns the index of the currently active item, or -1 if none. If the model is a non-flat treemodel, and the active item is not an immediate child of the root of the tree, this function returns path_get_indices(path)[0], where path is the GTK2.TreePath of the active item.

      Method get_active_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter get_active_iter()`

      Description

        Get the current active item.

      Method get_active_text

        `string get_active_text()`

      Description

        Returns the currently active string. Note that you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with GTK2.ComboBox("a string").

      Method get_add_tearoffs

        `int get_add_tearoffs()`

      Description

        Gets whether the popup menu has tearoff items.

      Method get_column_span_column

        `int get_column_span_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column with column span information.

      Method get_focus_on_click

        `int get_focus_on_click()`

      Description

        Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Get the GTK2.TreeModel which is acting as a data source.

      Method get_row_span_column

        `int get_row_span_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column with row span information.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode.

      Method get_wrap_width

        `int get_wrap_width()`

      Description

        Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box is in table mode.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Inherit CellEditable

        inherit GTK2.CellEditable : CellEditable

      Inherit CellLayout

        inherit GTK2.CellLayout : CellLayout

      Method insert_text

        `GTK2.ComboBox insert_text(int position, string text)`

      Description

        Inserts string at position in the list of strings stored. Note that you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with GTK2.ComboBox("a string").

      Method popdown

        `GTK2.ComboBox popdown()`

      Description

        Hides the menu or dropdown list.

      Method popup

        `GTK2.ComboBox popup()`

      Description

        Pops up the menu or dropdown list.

      Method prepend_text

        `GTK2.ComboBox prepend_text(string text)`

      Description

        Prepends string to the list of strings stored in this combo box. Note that you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with GTK2.ComboBox("a string").

      Method remove_text

        `GTK2.ComboBox remove_text(int position)`

      Description

        Removes the string at position from this combo box. Note that you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with GTK2.ComboBox("a string").

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_active(int index_)`

      Description

        Sets the active item.

      Method set_active_iter

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_active_iter(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by iter. iter must correspond to a path of depth one.

      Method set_add_tearoffs

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_add_tearoffs(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff menu item.

      Method set_column_span_column

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_column_span_column(int column_span)`

      Description

        Sets the column span information. The column span column contains integers which indicate how many columns an item should span.

      Method set_focus_on_click

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_focus_on_click(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.

      Method set_model

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_model(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Sets the model used by this widget. Will unset a previously set model. If no arguments are passed, then it will unset the model.

      Method set_row_separator_func

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_row_separator_func(function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator function is 0 no separators are drawn. This is the default value.

      Method set_row_span_column

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_row_span_column(int row_span)`

      Description

        Sets the column with row span information. The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows an item should span.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.

      Method set_wrap_width

        `GTK2.ComboBox set_wrap_width(int width)`

      Description

        Sets the wrap width. The wrap width is basically the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out in a table.

    CLASS GTK2.ComboBoxEntry

      Description

        Properties: int text-column

      Method create

        `GTK2.ComboBoxEntry GTK2.ComboBoxEntry(string|TreeModel|mapping model, int|void text_column)`

      Description

        Create a new ComboBoxEntry, either empty or with a model.

      Method entry

        `GTK2.Widget entry()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.Entry widget

      Method get_text_column

        `int get_text_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column which this widget is using to get the strings from.

      Inherit CellEditable

        inherit GTK2.CellEditable : CellEditable

      Inherit CellLayout

        inherit GTK2.CellLayout : CellLayout

      Inherit ComboBox

        inherit GTK2.ComboBox : ComboBox

      Method set_text_column

        `GTK2.ComboBoxEntry set_text_column(int text_column)`

      Description

        Sets the model column which this widget should use to get strings from.

    CLASS GTK2.Container

      Description

        The basic container class. Properties: int border-width GTK2.Widget child int resize-mode RESIZE_IMMEDIATE, RESIZE_PARENT and RESIZE_QUEUE

        Signals: add Called when a new object is added to the container. (used internally)

        check_resize Called when the container needs resizing (used internally)

        remove Called when a object is removed from the container (used internally)

        set_focus_child

      Method add

        `GTK2.Container add(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Add a subwidget to the container. Don't forget to call show() in the subwidget. Some (even most) containers can only contain one child. Calling this function might result in a resize of the container.

      Method check_resize

        `GTK2.Container check_resize()`

      Description

        Undocumented

      Method get_border_width

        `int get_border_width()`

      Description

        Retrieves the border width.

      Method get_children

        `array get_children()`

      Description

        This function returns all children of the container as an array.

      Method get_focus_chain

        `array get_focus_chain()`

      Description

        Returns the focus chain.

      Method get_focus_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_focus_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment.

      Method get_focus_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_focus_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Retrieves the vertical focus adjustment.

      Method get_resize_mode

        `int get_resize_mode()`

      Description

        Returns the resize mode.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method remove

        `GTK2.Container remove(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Remove a child from the container. The argument is the child to remove. Calling this function might result in a resize of the container.

      Method resize_children

        `GTK2.Container resize_children()`

      Description

        Undocumented.

      Method set_border_width

        `GTK2.Container set_border_width(int width)`

      Description

        Sets the border width.

      Method set_focus_chain

        `GTK2.Container set_focus_chain(array focusable_widgets)`

      Description

        Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computer automatically by GTK+.

        In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done when the focus chain is actually traversed.

      Method set_focus_child

        `GTK2.Container set_focus_child(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Emulate a set_focus_child signal. Focus on the specified child.

      Method set_focus_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Container set_focus_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Set the hadjustment used to focus children.

      Method set_focus_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Container set_focus_vadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Set the vadjustment used to focus children.

      Method set_reallocate_redraws

        `GTK2.Container set_reallocate_redraws(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the reallocate_redraws flag.

      Method set_resize_mode

        `GTK2.Container set_resize_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        One of RESIZE_IMMEDIATE, RESIZE_PARENT and RESIZE_QUEUE

    CLASS GTK2.Data

      Description

        A class inherited by all objects used to store data (they are not widgets)

        Signals: disconnect

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK2.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.Databox

      Description

        GtkDatabox is designed to display large amounts of numerical data fast and easy. Thousands of data points (X and Y coordinate) may be displayed without any problems, zooming and scrolling as well as optional rulers are already included.

        The widget may be used as display for oscilloscopes or other applications that need to display fast changes in their data.

        `GTK2.Databox x=GTK2.Databox(); x->data_add_x_y(3, ({ 1.0, 0.5, 0.0 }), ({1.0, -1.0, 0.0}),GTK2.GdkColor(Image.Color.red), GTK2.DataboxLines,2); x->rescale(); x->set_size_request(300,300); return x;`

        Signals: marked

        selection_canceled

        selection_changed

        selection_started

        selection_stopped

        zoomed

      Method create

        `GTK2.Databox GTK2.Databox()`

      Description

        Create a new databox widget

      Method data_add

        `int data_add(int nelems, array x, array y, GTK2.GdkColor color, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_CROSS_SIMPLE, DATABOX_GRID, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method data_get_color

        `GTK2.GdkColor data_get_color(int index)`

      Description

        Get the color at index.

      Method data_get_extrema

        `array data_get_extrema()`

      Description

        Get the bounds of the data set (?)

      Method data_get_grid_config

        `int data_get_grid_config(int index)`

      Description

        See data_set_grid_config().

      Method data_get_type

        `array data_get_type(int index)`

      Description

        Return type and dot size at index.

      Method data_get_value

        `mapping data_get_value(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Get the value at the given coordinates.

      Method data_get_visible_extrema

        `array data_get_visible_extrema()`

      Description

        Get the positions of the edges of the display.

      Method data_remove

        `int data_remove(int index)`

      Description

        Remove data at index.

      Method data_remove_all

        `int data_remove_all()`

      Description

        Remove all data.

      Method data_set_color

        `int data_set_color(int index, GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Set the color at index.

      Method data_set_grid_config

        `int data_set_grid_config(int index, int hlines, int vlines)`

      Description

        Not useful unless the data type is GTK2.DATABOX_GRID.

      Method data_set_type

        `int data_set_type(int index, int type, int dot_size)`

      Description

        Type is one of DATABOX_BARS, DATABOX_CROSS_SIMPLE, DATABOX_GRID, DATABOX_LINES, DATABOX_NOT_DISPLAYED and DATABOX_POINTS

      Method get_rulers_enable

        `GTK2.Databox get_rulers_enable()`

      Description

        Get whether rulers will be displayed.

      Method get_scrollbars_enable

        `GTK2.Databox get_scrollbars_enable()`

      Description

        Get whether scrollbars will be displayed.

      Method get_selection_enable

        `int get_selection_enable()`

      Description

        Get whether selection is enabled.

      Method get_selection_fill_enable

        `int get_selection_fill_enable()`

      Description

        Get whether the selection will be filled.

      Method get_zoom_enable

        `GTK2.Databox get_zoom_enable()`

      Description

        Get whether zoom is enabled.

      Method get_zoom_limit

        `float get_zoom_limit()`

      Description

        Get the zoom limit.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

      Method redraw

        `GTK2.Databox redraw()`

      Description

        Redraw.

      Method rescale

        `GTK2.Databox rescale()`

      Description

        Rescale with automatically-calculated extrema.

      Method rescale_inverted

        `GTK2.Databox rescale_inverted(int invertX, int invertY)`

      Description

        Rescale with an inverted x and/or y direction.

      Method rescale_with_values

        `GTK2.Databox rescale_with_values(float minx, float miny, float maxx, float maxy)`

      Description

        Rescale with specific data extrema.

      Method set_background_color

        `GTK2.Databox set_background_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Set the background color.

      Method set_rulers_enable

        `GTK2.Databox set_rulers_enable(int setting)`

      Description

        Set whether rulers will be displayed.

      Method set_scrollbars_enable

        `GTK2.Databox set_scrollbars_enable(int setting)`

      Description

        Set whether scrollbars will be displayed.

      Method set_selection_enable

        `GTK2.Databox set_selection_enable(int setting)`

      Description

        Set whether selection is enabled.

      Method set_selection_fill_enable

        `GTK2.Databox set_selection_fill_enable(int setting)`

      Description

        Set whether the selection will be filled.

      Method set_zoom_enable

        `GTK2.Databox set_zoom_enable(int setting)`

      Description

        Set whether zoom is enabled.

      Method set_zoom_limit

        `GTK2.Databox set_zoom_limit(float limit)`

      Description

        Set the zoom limit. Default is 0.01, which is 100 times.

    CLASS GTK2.Dialog

      Description

        A dialog is a window with a few default widgets added. The 'vbox' is the main content area of the widget. The 'action_area' is allocated for buttons (ok, cancel etc) Properties: int has-separator

        Style properties: int action-area-border int button-spacing int content-area-border

        Signals: close

        response

      Method add_action_widget

        `GTK2.Dialog add_action_widget(GTK2.Widget child, int response_id)`

      Description

        Adds an activatable widget to the action area, connecting a signal handler that will emit the "response" signal on the dialog when the widget is activated.

      Method add_button

        `GTK2.Widget add_button(string button_text, int response_id)`

      Description

        Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit the "response" signal with the given response_id.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Dialog GTK2.Dialog(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new dialog widget.

      Method get_action_area

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox get_action_area()`

      Description

        The action area, this is where the buttons (ok, cancel etc) go

      Method get_has_separator

        `int get_has_separator()`

      Description

        Accessor for whether the dialog has a separator.

      Method get_response_for_widget

        `int get_response_for_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Gets the response id of a widget in the action area.

      Method get_vbox

        `GTK2.Vbox get_vbox()`

      Description

        The vertical box that should contain the contents of the dialog

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK2.Window : Window

      Method response

        `GTK2.Dialog response(int response_id)`

      Description

        Emits the "response" signal with the given response ID.

      Method run

        `int run()`

      Description

        Run the selected dialog.

      Method set_default_response

        `GTK2.Dialog set_default_response(int response_id)`

      Description

        Sets the last widget in the action area with the given response_id as the default widget. Pressing "Enter" normally activates the default widget.

      Method set_has_separator

        `GTK2.Dialog set_has_separator(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether this dialog has a separator above the buttons. True by default.

      Method set_response_sensitive

        `GTK2.Dialog set_response_sensitive(int response_id, int setting)`

      Description

        Calls GTK2.Widget->set_sensitive() for each widget in the dialog's action area with the given response_id.

    CLASS GTK2.DrawingArea

      Description

        The drawing area is a window you can draw in. Please note that you must handle refresh and resize events on your own. Use W(pDrawingArea) for a drawingarea with automatic refresh/resize handling. `GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100)`

      Method clear

        `GTK2.DrawingArea clear(int|void x, int|void y, int|void width, int|void height)`

      Description

        Either clears the rectangle defined by the arguments, of if no arguments are specified, the whole drawable.

      Method copy_area

        `GTK2.DrawingArea copy_area(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int xdest, int ydest, GTK2.Widget source, int xsource, int ysource, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Copies the rectangle defined by xsource,ysource and width,height from the source drawable, and places the results at xdest,ydest in the drawable in which this function is called.

      Method create

        `GTK2.DrawingArea GTK2.DrawingArea(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new drawing area.

      Method draw_arc

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_arc(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int angle1, int angle2)`

      Description

        Draws a single circular or elliptical arc. Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles. The center of the circle or ellipse is the center of the rectangle, and the major and minor axes are specified by the width and height. Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion, and negative angles indicate clockwise motion. If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees, it is truncated to 360 degrees.

      Method draw_bitmap

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_bitmap(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkBitmap bitmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw a GDK2(Bitmap) in this drawable. NOTE: This drawable must be a bitmap as well. This will be fixed in GTK 1.3

      Method draw_image

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_image(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkImage image, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK2(Image) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_line

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_line(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_line(g,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end

      Method draw_pixbuf

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_pixbuf(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw a GDK2(Pixbuf) in this drawable.

      Method draw_pixmap

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_pixmap(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkPixmap pixmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK2(Pixmap) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_point

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_point(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x, int y)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(10,10); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_point(g, x, x); img_end

      Method draw_rectangle

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_rectangle(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_rectangle(g,0,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w); delay: for(int x = 0; x<30; x++) { delay: g->set_foreground(GDK2.Color(random(255),random(255),random(255)) ); delay: w->draw_rectangle(g,1,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); delay: } img_end

      Method draw_text

        `GTK2.DrawingArea draw_text(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x, int y, string|PangoLayout text)`

      Description

        y is used as the baseline for the text.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method set_background

        `GTK2.DrawingArea set_background(GTK2.GdkColor to)`

      Description

        Set the background color or image. The argument is either a GDK2.Pixmap or a GDK2.Color object.

    CLASS GTK2.Editable

      Description

        Interface for text-editing widgets.

        Signals: changed

        delete_text

        insert_text

      Method copy_clipboard

        `GTK2.Editable copy_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard.

      Method cut_clipboard

        `GTK2.Editable cut_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the characters in the current selection to be copied to the clipboard and then deleted.

      Method delete_selection

        `GTK2.Editable delete_selection()`

      Description

        Deletes the current contents of the selection.

      Method delete_text

        `GTK2.Editable delete_text(int start, int end)`

      Description

        Deletes a sequence of characters.

      Method get_chars

        `string get_chars(int start, int end)`

      Description

        Retrieves a sequence of characters.

      Method get_editable

        `int get_editable()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether this widget is editable.

      Method get_position

        `int get_position()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current cursor position.

      Method get_selection_bounds

        `array get_selection_bounds()`

      Description

        Returns the selection bounds.

      Method insert_text

        `int insert_text(string text, int length, int pos)`

      Description

        Inserts text at a given position. Returns the position after the new text.

      Method paste_clipboard

        `GTK2.Editable paste_clipboard()`

      Description

        Causes the contents of the clipboard to be pasted into the given widget at the current cursor position.

      Method select_region

        `GTK2.Editable select_region(int start, int end)`

      Description

        Selects a region of text.

      Method set_editable

        `GTK2.Editable set_editable(int setting)`

      Description

        Determines if the user can edit the text or not.

      Method set_position

        `GTK2.Editable set_position(int pos)`

      Description

        Sets the cursor position.

    CLASS GTK2.Entry

      Description

        Use this widget when you want the user to input a single line of text. `GTK2.Entry()->set_text("Hello world")->set_editable(1)`

        Properties: int activates-default int cursor-position int editable int has-frame int inner-border int invisible-char int max-length int scroll-offset int selection-bound int shadow-type string text int truncate-multiline int visibility int width-chars float xalign

        Style properties:

        Signals: activate

        backspace

        copy_clipboard

        cut_clipboard

        delete_from_cursor

        insert_at_cursor

        move_cursor

        paste_clipboard

        populate_popup

        toggle_overwrite

      Method create

        `GTK2.Entry GTK2.Entry(int|mapping maxlen_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Entry) widget.

      Method get_activates_default

        `int get_activates_default()`

      Description

        Retrieves the value set by set_activates_default().

      Method get_alignment

        `float get_alignment()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_alignment().

      Method get_completion

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion get_completion()`

      Description

        Returns the completion object.

      Method get_cursor_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_cursor_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment

      Method get_has_frame

        `int get_has_frame()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_has_frame().

      Method get_inner_border

        `array get_inner_border()`

      Description

        This function returns the entry's inner-border property.

      Method get_invisible_char

        `int get_invisible_char()`

      Description

        Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters for entries with visibility set to false.

      Method get_layout

        `GTK2.Pango.Layout get_layout()`

      Description

        Gets the Pango.Layout used to display the entry. The layout is useful to e.g. convert text positions to pixel positions, in combination with get_layout_offsets().

        Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so layout_index_to_text_index() and text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.

      Method get_layout_offsets

        `mapping get_layout_offsets()`

      Description

        Obtains the position of the Pango.Layout used to render text in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.

        Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the Pango.Layout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text is clicked.

        Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so layout_index_to_text_index() and text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.

      Method get_max_length

        `int get_max_length()`

      Description

        Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Returns the contents of the entry widget.

      Method get_visibility

        `int get_visibility()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether the text is visible.

      Method get_width_chars

        `int get_width_chars()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_width_chars().

      Inherit CellEditable

        inherit GTK2.CellEditable : CellEditable

      Inherit Editable

        inherit GTK2.Editable : Editable

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method layout_index_to_text_index

        `int layout_index_to_text_index(int layout_index)`

      Description

        Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned by get_text()) to a position in the entry's Pango.Layout (returned by get_layout()), with text retrieved via Pango.Layout->get_text().

      Method set_activates_default

        `GTK2.Entry set_activates_default(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, pressing Enter will activate the default widget for the window containing the entry. This usually means that the dialog box containing the entry will be closed, since the default widget is usually one of the dialog buttons.

      Method set_alignment

        `GTK2.Entry set_alignment(float align)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment for the ocntents of the entry. This controls the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed text is shorter than the width of the entry.

      Method set_completion

        `GTK2.Entry set_completion(GTK2.EntryCompletion completion)`

      Description

        Sets completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use. All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on completion using the GTK2.EntryCompletion API.

      Method set_cursor_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Entry set_cursor_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.

      Method set_has_frame

        `GTK2.Entry set_has_frame(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.

      Method set_icon_from_pixbuf

        `GTK2.Entry set_icon_from_pixbuf(int icon_pos, GTK2.GdkPixbuf b)`

      Description

        Set the icon from the given in-memory image, or 0 to remove the icon at that position.

      Method set_icon_from_stock

        `GTK2.Entry set_icon_from_stock(int icon_pos, string id)`

      Description

        Set the icon using a stock icon. To remove the icon, use set_icon_from_pixbuf().

      Method set_inner_border

        `GTK2.Entry set_inner_border(int left, int right, int top, int bottom)`

      Description

        Sets the inner-border property to border, or clears it if 0 is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry's text, but inside its frame.

        If set, this property overrides the inner-border style property. Overriding the style-provided border is useful when you want to do in-place editing of some text in a canvas or list widget, where pixel-exact positioning of the entry is important.

      Method set_invisible_char

        `GTK2.Entry set_invisible_char(int ch)`

      Description

        Sets the character to use in place of the actual text when set_invisibility() has been called to set text visibility to false. i.e. this is the character used in "password" mode to show the user how many characters have been type. The default invisible char is an asterisk ('*'). If you set the invisible char to 0, then the user will get no feedback at all; there will be no text on the screen as they type.

      Method set_max_length

        `GTK2.Entry set_max_length(int maxlen)`

      Description

        Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents. If the current contents are longer than the given length, then they will be truncated to fit. Range is 0-65536. 0 means no maximum.

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.Entry set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Set the text to the specified string, replacing the current contents.

      Method set_visibility

        `GTK2.Entry set_visibility(int visiblep)`

      Description

        0 indicates invisible text (password boxes, as an example)

      Method set_width_chars

        `GTK2.Entry set_width_chars(int n_chars)`

      Description

        changes the size request of the entry to be about the right size for n_chars characters. Note that it changes the size request, the size can still be affected by how you pack the widget into containers. If n_chars is -1, the size reverts to the default entry size.

      Method text_index_to_layout_index

        `int text_index_to_layout_index(int text_index)`

      Description

        Opposite of layout_index_to_text_index().

    CLASS GTK2.EntryCompletion

      Description

        Properties: int inline-completion int minimum-key-length GTK2.TreeModel model int popup-completion int popup-single-match int text-column

        Signals: action_activated

        insert_prefix

        match_selected

      Method complete

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion complete()`

      Description

        Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list view will be updated accordingly.

      Method create

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion GTK2.EntryCompletion(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new widget.

      Method delete_action

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion delete_action(int index)`

      Description

        Deletes the action at index.

      Method get_entry

        `GTK2.Widget get_entry()`

      Description

        Gets the entry this widget has been attached to.

      Method get_inline_completion

        `int get_inline_completion()`

      Description

        Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should be automatically inserted in the entry.

      Method get_minimum_key_length

        `int get_minimum_key_length()`

      Description

        Returns the minimum key length.

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Returns the model being used as the data source.

      Method get_popup_completion

        `int get_popup_completion()`

      Description

        Returns whether completions should be presented in a popup window.

      Method get_popup_set_width

        `int get_popup_set_width()`

      Description

        Returns whether the completion popup window will be resized to the width of the entry.

      Method get_popup_single_match

        `int get_popup_single_match()`

      Description

        Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is only a single match.

      Method get_text_column

        `int get_text_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column in the model to get strings from.

      Inherit CellLayout

        inherit GTK2.CellLayout : CellLayout

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method insert_action_markup

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion insert_action_markup(int index, string markup)`

      Description

        Inserts an action in the action item list at position index with the specified markup.

      Method insert_action_text

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion insert_action_text(int index, string text)`

      Description

        Inserts an action in the action item list at position index with the specified text. If you want the action item to have markup, use insert_action_markup().

      Method insert_prefix

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion insert_prefix()`

      Description

        Requests a prefix insertion.

      Method set_inline_completion

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_inline_completion(int inline_completion)`

      Description

        Sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should be automatically inserted in the entry.

      Method set_inline_selection

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_inline_selection(int inline_selection)`

      Description

        Sets whether it is possible to cycle through the possible completions inside the entry.

      Method set_match_func

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_match_func(function(:void) cb)`

      Description

        Sets the function to be called to decide if a specific row should be displayed.

      Method set_minimum_key_length

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_minimum_key_length(int length)`

      Description

        Requires the length of the search key to be at least length long. This is useful for long lists, where completing using a small key takes a lot of time and will come up with meaningless results anyway (i.e. a too large dataset).

      Method set_model

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_model(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Sets the model. If this completion already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If omitted it will unset the model.

      Method set_popup_completion

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_popup_completion(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.

      Method set_popup_set_width

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_popup_set_width(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same width as the entry.

      Method set_popup_single_match

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_popup_single_match(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is only a single match. You may want to set this to 0 if you are using inline completion.

      Method set_text_column

        `GTK2.EntryCompletion set_text_column(int column)`

      Description

        Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a completion list with just strings. This function will set up the completion to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the list, and to get those strings from column column in the model.

    CLASS GTK2.EventBox

      Description

        Some gtk widgets don't have associated X windows, so they just draw on their parents. Because of this, they cannot receive events and if they are incorrectly sized, they don't clip so you can get messy overwritting etc. If you require more from these widgets, the EventBox is for you.

        At first glance, the EventBox widget might appear to be totally useless. It draws nothing on the screen and responds to no events. However, it does serve a function - it provides an X window for its child widget. This is important as many GTK2 widgets do not have an associated X window. Not having an X window saves memory and improves performance, but also has some drawbacks. A widget without an X window cannot receive events, and does not perform any clipping on it's contents. Although the name EventBox emphasizes the event-handling function, the widget can also be used for clipping.

        The primary use for this widget is when you want to receive events for a widget without a window. Examples of such widgets are labels and images.

        `GTK2.EventBox()->set_size_request(100,100)`

        Properties: int above-child int visible-window

      Method create

        `GTK2.EventBox GTK2.EventBox(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new event box widget

      Method get_above_child

        `int get_above_child()`

      Description

        Returns whether the event box window is above or below the windows of its child.

      Method get_visible_window

        `int get_visible_window()`

      Description

        Returns whether the event box has a visible window.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_above_child

        `GTK2.EventBox set_above_child(int above_child)`

      Description

        Sets whether the event box window is positioned above the windows of its child, as opposed to below it. If the window is above, all events inside the event box will go to the event box. If the window is below, events in windows of child widgets will first go to that widget, and then to its parents.

        The default is to keep the window below the child.

      Method set_visible_window

        `GTK2.EventBox set_visible_window(int visible_window)`

      Description

        Sets whether the event box uses a visible or invisible child window. The default is to use visible windows.

    CLASS GTK2.Expander

      Description

        Properties: int expanded string label GTK2.Widget label-widget int spacing int use-markup int use-underline

        Style properties: int expander-size int expander-spacing

        Signals: activate

      Method create

        `GTK2.Expander GTK2.Expander(string|mapping label)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.Expander. Set mnemonic to 1 for a mnemonic expander, otherwise omitting it creates a regular expander.

      Method get_expanded

        `int get_expanded()`

      Description

        Returns true if the child widget is revealed.

      Method get_label

        `string get_label()`

      Description

        Fetches the text from the label of the expander.

      Method get_label_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_label_widget()`

      Description

        Retrieves the label widget for the frame.

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Description

        Returns the spacing.

      Method get_use_markup

        `int get_use_markup()`

      Description

        Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with the Pango text markup language.

      Method get_use_underline

        `int get_use_underline()`

      Description

        Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a mnemonic.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_expanded

        `GTK2.Expander set_expanded(int expanded)`

      Description

        Sets the state of the expander. Set to true if you want the child widget to be revealed, and false if you want the child widget to be hidden.

      Method set_label

        `GTK2.Expander set_label(string label)`

      Description

        Sets the text of the label of the expander.

      Method set_label_widget

        `GTK2.Expander set_label_widget(GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Set the label widget for the expander. This is the widget that will appear embedded alongside the expander arrow.

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK2.Expander set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the spacing field of the expander, which is the number of pixels to place between the expander and the child.

      Method set_use_markup

        `GTK2.Expander set_use_markup(int use_markup)`

      Description

        Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in Pango's text markup language.

      Method set_use_underline

        `GTK2.Expander set_use_underline(int use_underline)`

      Description

        If true, an underline in the text of the label indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelarator key.

    CLASS GTK2.FileChooser

      Description

        Properties: int action GTK2.Widget extra-widget string file-system-backend GTK2.FileFilter filter int local-only GTk.Widget preview-widget int preview-widget-active int select-multiple int show-hidden int use-preview-label

        Signals: current_folder_changed

        file_activated

        selection_changed

        update_preview

      Method add_filter

        `GTK2.FileChooser add_filter(GTK2.FileFilter filter)`

      Description

        Adds filter to the list of filters that the user can select between. When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that filter are displayed.

      Method add_shortcut_folder

        `int add_shortcut_folder(string folder)`

      Description

        Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser. Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the application. For example, you can use this to add a "/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.

      Method add_shortcut_folder_uri

        `int add_shortcut_folder_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders.

      Method get_action

        `int get_action()`

      Description

        Get the type of action the file chooser is performing.

      Method get_current_folder

        `string get_current_folder()`

      Description

        Gets the current folder as a local filename.

      Method get_current_folder_uri

        `string get_current_folder_uri()`

      Description

        Gets the current folder as a URI.

      Method get_do_overwrite_confirmation

        `int get_do_overwrite_confirmation()`

      Description

        Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user types a file name that already exists.

      Method get_extra_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_extra_widget()`

      Description

        Gets the extra widget.

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Gets the filename for the currently select file.

      Method get_filenames

        `array get_filenames()`

      Description

        Get a list of all selected file and subfolders. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current folder cannot be represented as local filenames, they will be ignored. If you want those files, You may want to use get_uris() instead.

      Method get_filter

        `GTK2.FileFilter get_filter()`

      Description

        Gets the current filter.

      Method get_local_only

        `int get_local_only()`

      Description

        Gets whether only local files can be selected in the file selector.

      Method get_preview_filename

        `string get_preview_filename()`

      Description

        Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview widget.

      Method get_preview_uri

        `string get_preview_uri()`

      Description

        Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview widget.

      Method get_preview_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_preview_widget()`

      Description

        Gets the current preview widget.

      Method get_preview_widget_active

        `int get_preview_widget_active()`

      Description

        Gets whether the preview widget set by set_preview_widget_active() should be shown for the current filename.

      Method get_select_multiple

        `int get_select_multiple()`

      Description

        Gets whether multiple files can be selected.

      Method get_show_hidden

        `int get_show_hidden()`

      Description

        Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed.

      Method get_uri

        `string get_uri()`

      Description

        Gets the URI for the currently selected file.

      Method get_uris

        `array get_uris()`

      Description

        List all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder. The returned names are full absolute URIs.

      Method get_use_preview_label

        `int get_use_preview_label()`

      Description

        Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed file.

      Method list_filters

        `array list_filters()`

      Description

        Lists the current set of user-selectable filters.

      Method list_shortcut_folder_uris

        `array list_shortcut_folder_uris()`

      Description

        Queries the list of shortcut folders.

      Method list_shortcut_folders

        `array list_shortcut_folders()`

      Description

        Queries the list of shortcut folders.

      Method remove_filter

        `GTK2.FileChooser remove_filter(GTK2.FileFilter filter)`

      Description

        Removes filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.

      Method remove_shortcut_folder

        `GTK2.FileChooser remove_shortcut_folder(string folder)`

      Description

        Removes a folder from the list of shortcut folders.

      Method remove_shortcut_folder_uri

        `GTK2.FileChooser remove_shortcut_folder_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Removes a folder URI.

      Method select_all

        `GTK2.FileChooser select_all()`

      Description

        Select all files.

      Method select_filename

        `int select_filename(string filename)`

      Description

        Selects a filename.

      Method select_uri

        `int select_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Selects the file by uri.

      Method set_action

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_action(int action)`

      Description

        Sets type of action, from opening or saving a file, or opening or saving a folder. Options are: FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER

      Method set_current_folder

        `int set_current_folder(string folder)`

      Description

        Sets the current folder from a local filename. The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder, plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.

      Method set_current_folder_uri

        `int set_current_folder_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Sets the current folder from a URI.

      Method set_current_name

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_current_name(string filename)`

      Description

        Sets current name.

      Method set_do_overwrite_confirmation

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_do_overwrite_confirmation(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether a file chooser in GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present a confirmation dialog if the users types a file name that already exists. This is FALSE by default.

        Regardless of this setting, the chooser will emit the "confirm-overwrite" signal when appropriate.

        If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to TRUE. You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the "confirm-overwrite" signal.

      Method set_extra_widget

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_extra_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.

      Method set_filename

        `int set_filename(string filename)`

      Description

        Sets filename as the current filename. Same as unselect_all() followed by select_filename();

      Method set_filter

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_filter(GTK2.FileFilter filter)`

      Description

        Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed set of files without letting the user change it.

      Method set_local_only

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_local_only(int local_only)`

      Description

        Sets whether on local files can be selected.

      Method set_preview_widget

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_preview_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the preview widget, you connect to the "update-preview" signal, and call get_preview_filename() or get_preview_uri() on each change. If you can display a preview of the new file, update your widget and set the preview active using set_preview_widget_active(). Otherwise, set the preview inactive.

        When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the application- supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser may display an internally generated preview of the current file or it may display no preview at all.

      Method set_preview_widget_active

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_preview_widget_active(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the preview widget set by set_preview_widget() should be shown for the current filename. When setting is set to false, the file chooser may display an internally generated preview of the current file or it may display no preview at all.

      Method set_select_multiple

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_select_multiple(int select_multiple)`

      Description

        Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector. This is only relevant if the action is set to be FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN or FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE

      Method set_show_hidden

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_show_hidden(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed.

      Method set_uri

        `int set_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Sets the uri as the current file.

      Method set_use_preview_label

        `GTK2.FileChooser set_use_preview_label(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of the file that is being previewed; the default is true. Applications that want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to false and display the name themselves in their preview widget.

      Method unselect_all

        `GTK2.FileChooser unselect_all()`

      Description

        Unselect all files.

      Method unselect_filename

        `GTK2.FileChooser unselect_filename(string filename)`

      Description

        Unselects a currently selected filename.

      Method unselect_uri

        `GTK2.FileChooser unselect_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Unselect the uri.

    CLASS GTK2.FileChooserButton

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.FileChooserDialog dialog int focus-on-click string title int width-chars

      Method create

        `GTK2.FileChooserButton GTK2.FileChooserButton(string|mapping title_or_props, int|void action)`

      Description

        Create a new file-selecting button widget. action is one of FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER, FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN, FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE and FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER

      Method get_focus_on_click

        `int get_focus_on_click()`

      Description

        Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Retrieves the title of the browse dialog.

      Method get_width_chars

        `int get_width_chars()`

      Description

        Retrieves the width in characters of the button widget's entry and/or label.

      Inherit FileChooser

        inherit GTK2.FileChooser : FileChooser

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK2.Hbox : Hbox

      Method set_focus_on_click

        `GTK2.FileChooserButton set_focus_on_click(int focus)`

      Description

        Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the application.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.FileChooserButton set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Modifies the title of the browse dialog.

      Method set_width_chars

        `GTK2.FileChooserButton set_width_chars(int n_chars)`

      Description

        Sets the width (in characters) that the button will use.

    CLASS GTK2.FileChooserDialog

      Description

        GtkFileChooserDialog should be used to retrieve file or directory names from the user. It will create a new dialog window containing a directory list, and a file list corresponding to the current working directory. The filesystem can be navigated using the directory list, the drop-down history menu, or the TAB key can be used to navigate using filename completion common in text based editors such as emacs and jed.

        The default filename can be set using set_filename() and the selected filename retrieved using get_filename().

        Use complete() to display files that match a given pattern. This can be used for example, to show only *.txt files, or only files beginning with gtk*.

        Simple file operations; create directory, delete file, and rename file, are available from buttons at the top of the dialog. These can be hidden using hide_fileop_buttons() and shown again using show_fileop_buttons().

        `GTK2.FileChooserDialog("File selector", 0, GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN, ({(["text":"Transmogrify", "id":17]), (["text":"Never mind", "id":42])}))`

      Method create

        `GTK2.FileChooserDialog GTK2.FileChooserDialog(string title, GTK2.Window parent, int mode, array buttons)`

      Description

        Creates a new file selection dialog box. By default it will list the files in the current working directory. Operation buttons allowing the user to create a directory, delete files, and rename files will also be present by default.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Inherit FileChooser

        inherit GTK2.FileChooser : FileChooser

    CLASS GTK2.FileChooserWidget

      Description

        File chooser widget that can be embedded in other widgets. `GTK2.FileChooserWidget(GTK2.FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN);`

      Method create

        `GTK2.FileChooserWidget GTK2.FileChooserWidget(int|mapping action_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new file chooser widget. action is one of FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER, FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN, FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE and FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER

      Inherit FileChooser

        inherit GTK2.FileChooser : FileChooser

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

    CLASS GTK2.FileFilter

      Description

        A filter for selecting a file subset.

      Method add_mime_type

        `GTK2.FileFilter add_mime_type(string mime_type)`

      Description

        Adds a rule allowing a given mime type.

      Method add_pattern

        `GTK2.FileFilter add_pattern(string pattern)`

      Description

        Adds a rule allowing a shell style glob.

      Method add_pixbuf_formats

        `GTK2.FileFilter add_pixbuf_formats()`

      Description

        Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats support by W(Pixbuf).

      Method create

        `GTK2.FileFilter GTK2.FileFilter()`

      Description

        Creates a new W(FileFilter) with no rules added to it. Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not particularly useful until you add rules with add_mime_type(), add_pattern(), or add_custom(). To create a filter accepts any file, use add_pattern("*").

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Gets the human-readable name for the filter.

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK2.Data : Data

      Method set_name

        `GTK2.FileFilter set_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string that will be displayed in the file selector user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.

    CLASS GTK2.FileSelection

      Description

        GtkFileSelection should be used to retrieve file or directory names from the user. It will create a new dialog window containing a directory list, and a file list corresponding to the current working directory. The filesystem can be navigated using the directory list, the drop-down history menu, or the TAB key can be used to navigate using filename completion common in text based editors such as emacs and jed.

        The default filename can be set using set_filename() and the selected filename retrieved using get_filename().

        Use complete() to display files that match a given pattern. This can be used for example, to show only *.txt files, or only files beginning with gtk*.

        Simple file operations; create directory, delete file, and rename file, are available from buttons at the top of the dialog. These can be hidden using hide_fileop_buttons() and shown again using show_fileop_buttons().

        `GTK2.FileSelection("File selector")`

        Properties: string filename int select-multiple int show-fileops

      Method complete

        `GTK2.FileSelection complete(string pattern)`

      Description

        Will attempt to match pattern to a valid filename in the current directory. If a match can be made, the matched filename will appear in the text entry field of the file selection dialog. If a partial match can be made, the "Files" list will contain those file names which have been partially matched.

      Method create

        `GTK2.FileSelection GTK2.FileSelection(string|mapping title_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new file selection dialog box. By default it will list the files in the current working directory. Operation buttons allowing the user to create a directory, delete files, and rename files will also be present by default.

      Method get_action_area

        `GTK2.Vbox get_action_area()`

      Description

        The action area

      Method get_button_area

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox get_button_area()`

      Description

        The button area

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK2.Button get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        The cancel button

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Return the filename.

      Method get_fileop_c_dir

        `GTK2.Button get_fileop_c_dir()`

      Description

        The create directory button in the file operation button group

      Method get_fileop_del_file

        `GTK2.Button get_fileop_del_file()`

      Description

        The delete file button in the file operation button group

      Method get_fileop_dialog

        `GTK2.Dialog get_fileop_dialog()`

      Description

        Dialog box for GTK2.FileSelection

      Method get_fileop_ren_file

        `GTK2.Button get_fileop_ren_file()`

      Description

        The rename file button in the file operation button group

      Method get_help_button

        `GTK2.Button get_help_button()`

      Description

        The help button

      Method get_main_vbox

        `GTK2.Vbox get_main_vbox()`

      Description

        The main vbox

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK2.Button get_ok_button()`

      Description

        The ok button

      Method get_select_multiple

        `int get_select_multiple()`

      Description

        Gets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files.

      Method get_selection

        `array get_selection()`

      Description

        Retrieves the list of selections the user has made.

      Method hide_fileop_buttons

        `GTK2.FileSelection hide_fileop_buttons()`

      Description

        Hides the file operation buttons that normally appear at the top of the dialog. Useful if you wish to create a custom file selector, based on GTK2.FileSelection.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Method set_filename

        `GTK2.FileSelection set_filename(string fname)`

      Description

        Sets a default path for the file requestor. If filename includes a directory path, then the requestor will open with that path as its current working directory.

      Method set_select_multiple

        `GTK2.FileSelection set_select_multiple(int select_multiple)`

      Description

        Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files.

      Method show_fileop_buttons

        `GTK2.FileSelection show_fileop_buttons()`

      Description

        Shows the file operation buttons, if they have previously been hidden. The rest of the widgets in the dialog will be resized accordingly.

    CLASS GTK2.Fixed

      Description

        A fixed container is a container that keeps it's children at fixed locations and give them fixed sizes, both given in pixels.

        Example: `GTK2.Fixed()->put(GTK2.Label("100,100"), 100, 100)->put(GTK2.Label("0,0"), 0, 0)->set_size_request(150,115)`

        Child properties: int x int y

      Method create

        `GTK2.Fixed GTK2.Fixed(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new fixed widget

      Method get_children

        `array get_children()`

      Description

        Get a list of the children and their x,y positions.

      Method get_has_window

        `int get_has_window()`

      Description

        Gets whether GTK2.Fixed has its own GDK2.Window.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method move

        `GTK2.Fixed move(GTK2.Widget widget, int new_xpos, int new_ypos)`

      Description

        Move the widget to new_xpos,new_ypos from it's old location.

      Method put

        `GTK2.Fixed put(GTK2.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Place the widget at xpos,ypos.

      Method set_has_window

        `GTK2.Fixed set_has_window(int has_window)`

      Description

        Sets wither a GTK2.Fixed widget is created with a separate GDK2.Window for the window or now.

    CLASS GTK2.FontButton

      Description

        Properties: string font-name int show-size int show-style string title int use-font int use-size

        Signals: font_set

      Method create

        `GTK2.FontButton GTK2.FontButton(string|mapping font_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new font picker widget. If font is specified, it will be displayed in the font selection dialog.

      Method get_font_name

        `string get_font_name()`

      Description

        Retrieves the name of the currently selected font.

      Method get_show_size

        `int get_show_size()`

      Description

        Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.

      Method get_show_style

        `int get_show_style()`

      Description

        Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog.

      Method get_use_font

        `int get_use_font()`

      Description

        Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.

      Method get_use_size

        `int get_use_size()`

      Description

        Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_font_name

        `int set_font_name(string font)`

      Description

        Sets or updates the currently-displayed font.

      Method set_show_size

        `GTK2.FontButton set_show_size(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, the font size will be displayed along with the name of the selected of the selected font.

      Method set_show_style

        `GTK2.FontButton set_show_style(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, the font style will be displayed along with the name of the selected font.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.FontButton set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the title for the font selection dialog.

      Method set_use_font

        `GTK2.FontButton set_use_font(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, the font name will be written using the selected font.

      Method set_use_size

        `GTK2.FontButton set_use_size(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, the font name will be written using the selected size.

    CLASS GTK2.FontSelection

      Description

        The W(FontSelection) widget lists the available fonts, styles and sizes, allowing the user to select a font. It is used in W(FontSelectionDialog). `GTK2.FontSelection();`

        Properties: string font-name string preview-text

      Method create

        `GTK2.FontSelection GTK2.FontSelection(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.FontSelection widget.

      Method get_font_name

        `string get_font_name()`

      Description

        Gets the currently-selected font name.

      Method get_preview_text

        `string get_preview_text()`

      Description

        Gets the text displayed in the preview area.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

      Method set_font_name

        `GTK2.FontSelection set_font_name(string fontname)`

      Description

        This sets the currently displayed font.

      Method set_preview_text

        `GTK2.FontSelection set_preview_text(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the text displayed in the preview area.

    CLASS GTK2.FontSelectionDialog

      Description

        The GtkFontSelectionDialog widget is a dialog box for selecting a font.

        To set the font which is initially selected, use set_font_name().

        To get the selected font use get_font_name().

        To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use set_preview_text().

        `GTK2.FontSelectionDialog("Select a font")`

      Method create

        `GTK2.FontSelectionDialog GTK2.FontSelectionDialog(string title)`

      Description

        Create a new font selection dialog with the specified window title

      Method get_apply_button

        `GTK2.Button get_apply_button()`

      Description

        The apply button

      Method get_cancel_button

        `GTK2.Button get_cancel_button()`

      Description

        The cancel button

      Method get_font_name

        `string get_font_name()`

      Description

        Gets the currently-selected font name.

      Method get_ok_button

        `GTK2.Button get_ok_button()`

      Description

        The ok button

      Method get_preview_text

        `string get_preview_text()`

      Description

        Gets the text displayed in the preview area.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Method set_font_name

        `int set_font_name(string font)`

      Description

        Sets the currently-selected font.

      Method set_preview_text

        `GTK2.FontSelectionDialog set_preview_text(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the text displayed in the preview area.

    CLASS GTK2.Frame

      Description

        The frame widget is a Bin that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label. If present, the label is drawn in a gap in the top side of the frame. The position of the label can be controlled with set_label_align().

        Used to visually group objects.

        `GTK2.Frame("Title")->add(GTK2.Label("Contents"))`

        `GTK2.Frame()->add(GTK2.Label("Contents"))`

        `GTK2.Frame()->add(GTK2.Label("Contents"))->set_shadow_type(GTK2.SHADOW_IN)`

        Properties: string label GTK2.Widget label-widget float label-xalign float label-yalign int shadow int shadow-type

      Method create

        `GTK2.Frame GTK2.Frame(string|mapping label_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Frame) widget.

      Method get_label

        `string get_label()`

      Description

        Return the text in the label widget.

      Method get_label_align

        `array get_label_align()`

      Description

        Retrieves the x and y alignment of the label.

      Method get_label_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_label_widget()`

      Description

        Retrieves the label widget.

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Return the shadow type.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_label

        `GTK2.Frame set_label(string|void label_text)`

      Description

        Set the text of the label.

      Method set_label_align

        `GTK2.Frame set_label_align(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Arguments are xalignment and yalignment. 0.0 is left or topmost, 1.0 is right or bottommost. The default value for a newly created Frame is 0.0.

      Method set_label_widget

        `GTK2.Frame set_label_widget(GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Sets the label widget for the frame. This is the widget that will appear embedded in the top edge of the frame as a title.

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK2.Frame set_shadow_type(int shadow_type)`

      Description

        Set the shadow type for the Frame widget. The type is one of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

    CLASS GTK2.GdkBitmap

      Description

        A bitmap is a black and white pixmap. Most commonly used as masks for images, widgets and pixmaps.

        NOIMG

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkBitmap GTK2.GdkBitmap(int|Image.Image xsize_or_image, int|void ysize, string|void bitmap)`

      Description

        Create a new GDK2.Bitmap object. Argument is either an Image.image object, or {xsisze,ysize,xbitmapdata}.

      Inherit Drawable

        inherit GDK2.Drawable : Drawable

      Method ref

        `GDK2.Bitmap ref()`

      Description

        Add a reference

      Method unref

        `GDK2.Bitmap unref()`

      Description

        Remove a reference

    CLASS GTK2.GdkColor

      Description

        The GDK2.Color object is used to represent a color. When you call GDK2.Color(r,g,b) the color will be allocated from the X-server. The constructor can return an exception if there are no more colors to allocate. NOIMG

      Method blue

        `int blue()`

      Description

        Returns the blue color component.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkColor GTK2.GdkColor(object|int color_or_r, int|void g, int|void b)`

      Description

        r g and b are in the range 0 to 255, inclusive. If color is specified, it should be an Image.Color object, and the only argument.

      Method destroy

        `GDK2.Color destroy()`

      Description

        Destroys the color object. Please note that this function does not free the color from the X-colormap (in case of pseudocolor) right now.

      Method green

        `int green()`

      Description

        Returns the green color component.

      Method image_color_object

        `Image.Color.Color image_color_object()`

      Description

        Return a Image.Color.Color instance. This gives better precision than the rgb function.

      Method pixel

        `int pixel()`

      Description

        Returns the pixel value of the color. See GDK2.Image->set_pixel.

      Method red

        `int red()`

      Description

        Returns the red color component.

      Method rgb

        `array rgb()`

      Description

        Returns the red green and blue color components as an array.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkColormap

      Description

        A colormap is an object that contains the mapping between the color values stored in memory and the RGB values that are used to display color values. In general, colormaps only contain significant information for pseudo-color visuals, but even for other visual types, a colormap object is required in some circumstances.

      Method alloc_color

        `int alloc_color(GTK2.GdkColor color, int writeable, int best_match)`

      Description

        Alocates a single color from a colormap.

      Method alloc_colors

        `int alloc_colors(array colors, int writeable, int best_match)`

      Description

        Allocates colors from a colormap.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkColormap GTK2.GdkColormap(GTK2.GdkVisual visual, int|void allocate, int|void system)`

      Description

        Creates a new colormap.

      Method free_colors

        `GDK2.Colormap free_colors(array colors)`

      Description

        Free colors.

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen()`

      Description

        Returns the screen.

      Method get_visual

        `GTK2.GdkVisual get_visual()`

      Description

        Returns the visual.

      Method query_color

        `GTK2.GdkColor query_color(int pixel)`

      Description

        Locates the RGB color corresponding to the given hardware pixel. pixel must be a valid pixel in the colormap; it's a programmer error to call this function with a pixel which is not in the colormap. Hardware pixels are normally obtained from alloc_colors(), or from a GDK2.Image.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkDisplay

      Description

        GdkDisplay object.

        Signals: closed

      Method beep

        `GDK2.Display beep()`

      Description

        Emits a short beep on display

      Method close

        `GDK2.Display close()`

      Description

        Closes the connection to the window system for the given display, and cleans up associated resources.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkDisplay GTK2.GdkDisplay()`

      Description

        Get the default display.

      Method flush

        `GDK2.Display flush()`

      Description

        Flushes any requests queued for the windowing system; this happens automatically when the main loop blocks waiting for new events, but if your application is drawing without returning control to the main loop, you may need to call this function explicitly. A common case where this function needs to be called is when an application is executing drawing commands from a thread other than the thread where the main loop is running.

      Method get_default_cursor_size

        `int get_default_cursor_size()`

      Description

        Returns the default size to use for cursors.

      Method get_default_group

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_default_group()`

      Description

        Returns the default group leader window for all toplevel windows. This window is implicitly create by GDK.

      Method get_default_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_default_screen()`

      Description

        Get the default screen.

      Method get_event

        `GTK2.GdkEvent get_event()`

      Description

        Gets the next GDK2.Event to be processed, fetching events from the windowing system if necessary.

      Method get_maximal_cursor_size

        `mapping get_maximal_cursor_size()`

      Description

        Returns the maximal size to use for cursors.

      Method get_n_screens

        `int get_n_screens()`

      Description

        Gets the number of screens managed by the display.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of the display.

      Method get_pointer

        `mapping get_pointer()`

      Description

        Gets the current location of the pointer and the current modifier mask.

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen(int screen_num)`

      Description

        Returns a screen for one of the screens.

      Method get_window_at_pointer

        `mapping get_window_at_pointer()`

      Description

        Obtains the window underneath the mouse pointer, and the x,y location. Returns 0 if the window is not known to GDK (for example, belongs to another application).

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method keyboard_ungrab

        `GDK2.Display keyboard_ungrab()`

      Description

        Release any keyboard grab.

      Method open

        `GDK2.Display open(string name)`

      Description

        Opens a display.

      Method peek_event

        `GTK2.GdkEvent peek_event()`

      Description

        Gets a copy of the first GDK2.Event in the event queue, without removing the event from the queue. (Note that this function will not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)

      Method pointer_is_grabbed

        `int pointer_is_grabbed()`

      Description

        Test if the pointer is grabbed.

      Method pointer_ungrab

        `GDK2.Display pointer_ungrab()`

      Description

        Release any pointer grab.

      Method put_event

        `GDK2.Display put_event(GTK2.GdkEvent event)`

      Description

        Appends a copy of the given event onto the front of the event queue.

      Method request_selection_notification

        `int request_selection_notification(GDK2.Atom selection)`

      Description

        Request GdkEventOwnerChange events for ownership changes of the selection named by the given atom.

      Method set_double_click_distance

        `GDK2.Display set_double_click_distance(int distance)`

      Description

        Sets the double click distance (two clicks within this distance count as a double click and result in a GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event). See also set_double_click_time().

      Method set_double_click_time

        `GDK2.Display set_double_click_time(int msec)`

      Description

        Sets the double click time (two clicks within this time interval counts as a double click and result in a GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS event). Applications should not set this, it is a global user-configured setting.

      Method store_clipboard

        `GDK2.Display store_clipboard(GTK2.GdkWindow clipboard_window, array targets)`

      Description

        Issues a request to the clipboard manager to store the clipboard data.

      Method supports_clipboard_persistence

        `int supports_clipboard_persistence()`

      Description

        Returns whether the specified display supports clipboard persistence, i.e. if it's possible to store the clipboard data after an application has quit. On X11 this checks if a clipboard daemon is running.

      Method supports_cursor_alpha

        `int supports_cursor_alpha()`

      Description

        Returns true if cursors can use an 8bit alpha channel. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel alpha (i.e. a mask).

      Method supports_cursor_color

        `int supports_cursor_color()`

      Description

        Returns true if multicolored cursors are supported. Otherwise, cursors have only a foreground and a background color.

      Method supports_input_shapes

        `int supports_input_shapes()`

      Description

        Returns true if GDK2.Window->input_shape_combine_mask() can be used to modify the input shape of windows.

      Method supports_selection_notification

        `int supports_selection_notification()`

      Description

        Returns whether GdkEventOwnerChange events will be sent when the owner of a selection changes.

      Method supports_shapes

        `int supports_shapes()`

      Description

        Returns true if GDK2.Window->shape_combine_mask() can be used to create shaped windows.

      Method sync

        `GDK2.Display sync()`

      Description

        Flushes any requests queued for the windowing system and waits until all requests have been handled. This is often used for making sure that the display is synchronized with the current state of the program. Calling sync() before (gdk_error_trap_pop()) makes sure that any errors generated from earlier requests are handled before the error trap is removed.

        This is most useful for X11. On windowing systems where requests are handled synchronously, this function will do nothing.

      Method warp_pointer

        `GDK2.Display warp_pointer(GTK2.GdkScreen screen, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Warps the pointer to the point x,y on the screen, unless the pointer is confined to a window by a grab, in which case it will be moved as far as allowed by the grab. Warping the pointer creates events as if the user had moved the mouse instantaneously to the destination.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkDragContext

      Description

        The drag context contains all information about the drag'n'drop connected to the signal to which it is an argument.

        NOIMG

      Method drag_abort

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_abort(int time)`

      Description

        Abort the drag

      Method drag_drop

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_drop(int time)`

      Description

        Drag drop.

      Method drag_finish

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_finish(int success, int del)`

      Description

        If success is true, the drag succeded. If del is true, the source should be deleted. time is the current time.

      Method drag_set_icon_default

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_set_icon_default()`

      Description

        Use the default drag icon associated with the source widget.

      Method drag_set_icon_pixmap

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_set_icon_pixmap(GTK2.GdkPixmap p, GTK2.GdkBitmap b, int hot_x, int hot_y)`

      Description

        Set the drag pixmap, and optionally mask. The hot_x and hot_y coordinates will be the location of the mouse pointer, relative to the upper left corner of the pixmap.

      Method drag_set_icon_widget

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_set_icon_widget(GTK2.Widget widget, int hot_x, int hot_y)`

      Description

        Set the drag widget. This is a widget that will be shown, and then dragged around by the user during this drag.

      Method drag_status

        `GDK2.DragContext drag_status(int action)`

      Description

        Setting action to -1 means use the suggested action

      Method drop_reply

        `GDK2.DragContext drop_reply(int ok)`

      Description

        Drop reply.

      Method get_action

        `int get_action()`

      Description

        One of GDK_ACTION_ASK, GDK_ACTION_COPY, GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT, GDK_ACTION_LINK, GDK_ACTION_MOVE and GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE;

      Method get_actions

        `int get_actions()`

      Description

        A bitwise or of one or more of GDK_ACTION_ASK, GDK_ACTION_COPY, GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT, GDK_ACTION_LINK, GDK_ACTION_MOVE and GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE;

      Method get_is_source

        `int get_is_source()`

      Description

        Is this application the source?

      Method get_protocol

        `int get_protocol()`

      Description

        One of GDK_DRAG_PROTO_LOCAL, GDK_DRAG_PROTO_MOTIF, GDK_DRAG_PROTO_NONE, GDK_DRAG_PROTO_OLE2, GDK_DRAG_PROTO_ROOTWIN, GDK_DRAG_PROTO_WIN32_DROPFILES and GDK_DRAG_PROTO_XDND

      Method get_source_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_source_widget()`

      Description

        Return the drag source widget.

      Method get_start_time

        `int get_start_time()`

      Description

        The start time of this drag, as a unix time_t (seconds since 0:00 1/1 1970)

      Method get_suggested_action

        `int get_suggested_action()`

      Description

        One of GDK_ACTION_ASK, GDK_ACTION_COPY, GDK_ACTION_DEFAULT, GDK_ACTION_LINK, GDK_ACTION_MOVE and GDK_ACTION_PRIVATE;

    CLASS GTK2.GdkDrawable

      Description

        The GDK2.Bitmap, GDK2.Window and GDK2.Pixmap classes are all GDK drawables.

        This means that you can use the same set of functions to draw in them.

        Pixmaps are offscreen drawables. They can be drawn upon with the standard drawing primitives, then copied to another drawable (such as a GDK2.Window) with window->draw_pixmap(), set as the background for a window or widget, or otherwise used to show graphics (in a W(Pixmap), as an example). The depth of a pixmap is the number of bits per pixels. Bitmaps are simply pixmaps with a depth of 1. (That is, they are monochrome bitmaps - each pixel can be either on or off).

        Bitmaps are mostly used as masks when drawing pixmaps, or as a shape for a GDK2.Window or a W(Widget)

      Method clear

        `GDK2.Drawable clear(int|void x, int|void y, int|void width, int|void height)`

      Description

        Either clears the rectangle defined by the arguments, of if no arguments are specified, the whole drawable.

      Method copy_area

        `GDK2.Drawable copy_area(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int xdest, int ydest, GTK2.Widget source, int xsource, int ysource, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Copies the rectangle defined by xsource,ysource and width,height from the source drawable, and places the results at xdest,ydest in the drawable in which this function is called.

      Method draw_arc

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_arc(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int angle1, int angle2)`

      Description

        Draws a single circular or elliptical arc. Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles. The center of the circle or ellipse is the center of the rectangle, and the major and minor axes are specified by the width and height. Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion, and negative angles indicate clockwise motion. If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees, it is truncated to 360 degrees.

      Method draw_bitmap

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_bitmap(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkBitmap bitmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw a GDK2(Bitmap) in this drawable. NOTE: This drawable must be a bitmap as well. This will be fixed in GTK 1.3

      Method draw_image

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_image(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkImage image, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK2(Image) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_line

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_line(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_line(g,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end

      Method draw_pixbuf

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_pixbuf(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw a GDK2(Pixbuf) in this drawable.

      Method draw_pixmap

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_pixmap(GTK2.GdkGC gc, GTK2.GdkPixmap pixmap, int xsrc, int ysrc, int xdest, int ydest, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draw the rectangle specified by xsrc,ysrc+width,height from the GDK2(Pixmap) at xdest,ydest in the destination drawable

      Method draw_point

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_point(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x, int y)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(10,10); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_point(g, x, x); img_end

      Method draw_rectangle

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_rectangle(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int filledp, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2)`

      Description

        img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w)->set_foreground( GDK2.Color(255,0,0) ); delay: for(int x = 0; x<10; x++) w->draw_rectangle(g,0,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); img_end img_begin w = GTK2.DrawingArea()->set_size_request(100,100); delay: g = GDK2.GC(w); delay: for(int x = 0; x<30; x++) { delay: g->set_foreground(GDK2.Color(random(255),random(255),random(255)) ); delay: w->draw_rectangle(g,1,x*10,0,100-x*10,99); delay: } img_end

      Method draw_text

        `GDK2.Drawable draw_text(GTK2.GdkGC gc, int x, int y, string|PangoLayout text)`

      Description

        y is used as the baseline for the text.

      Method get_geometry

        `mapping get_geometry()`

      Description

        Get width, height position and depth of the drawable as a mapping.

        ([ "x":xpos, "y":ypos, "width":xsize, "height":ysize, "depth":bits_per_pixel ])

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_background

        `GDK2.Drawable set_background(GTK2.GdkColor to)`

      Description

        Set the background color or image. The argument is either a GDK2.Pixmap or a GDK2.Color object.

      Method xid

        `int xid()`

      Description

        Return the xwindow id.

      Method xsize

        `int xsize()`

      Description

        Returns the width of the drawable specified in pixels

      Method ysize

        `int ysize()`

      Description

        Returns the height of the drawable specified in pixels

    CLASS GTK2.GdkEvent

      Description

        Gdk events.

      Method _index

        `protected mixed _index(string ind)`

      Description

        Return an index.

      Method cast

        `(mapping)GTK2.GdkEvent()`

      Description

        Cast to different types.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkGC

      Description

        A GC, or Graphics Context, is used for most low-level drawing operations.

        As an example, the foreground color, background color, and drawing function is stored in the GC.

        NOIMG

      Method copy

        `GDK2.GC copy(GTK2.GdkGC source)`

      Description

        Copy all attributes from the source GC

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkGC GTK2.GdkGC(GTK2.Widget context, mapping|void attributes)`

      Description

        The argument is either a W(Widget) or a GDK2(Drawable) in which the gc will be valid.

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen()`

      Description

        Gets the screen.

      Method get_values

        `mapping get_values()`

      Description

        Get all (or rather most) values from the GC. Even though GdkGCValues contains a GdkFont object, we won't return this value because GdkFont is deprecated. The Pango methods should be used instead.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_background

        `GDK2.GC set_background(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Set the background to the specified GDK2.Color.

      Method set_clip_mask

        `GDK2.GC set_clip_mask(GTK2.GdkBitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set the clip mask to the specified GDK2.Bitmap

      Method set_clip_origin

        `GDK2.GC set_clip_origin(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Set the clip mask origin to the specified point.

      Method set_clip_rectangle

        `GDK2.GC set_clip_rectangle(GTK2.GdkRectangle rect)`

      Description

        Sets the clip mask for a graphics context from a rectangle. The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip origin.

      Method set_clip_region

        `GDK2.GC set_clip_region(GTK2.GdkRegion rect)`

      Description

        Sets the clip mask for a graphs context from a region. The clip mask is interpreted relative to the clip origin.

      Method set_dashes

        `GDK2.GC set_dashes(int offset, array dashes)`

      Description

        Sets the way dashed-lines are drawn. Lines will be drawn with alternating on and off segments of the lengths specified in dashes. The manner in which the on and off segments are drawn is determined by the line_style value of the GC.

      Method set_exposures

        `GDK2.GC set_exposures(int exp)`

      Description

        Sets whether copying non-visible portions of a drawable using this gc generates exposure events for the corresponding regions of the dest drawable.

      Method set_fill

        `GDK2.GC set_fill(int fill)`

      Description

        Set the fill method to fill.

      Method set_foreground

        `GDK2.GC set_foreground(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Set the foreground to the specified GDK2.Color.

      Method set_function

        `GDK2.GC set_function(int fun)`

      Description

        Set the function to the specified one. One of GDK2.Xor, GDK2.Invert and GDK2.Copy.

      Method set_line_attributes

        `GDK2.GC set_line_attributes(int line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style)`

      Description

        Control how lines are drawn. line_style is one of GDK2.LineSolid, GDK2,LineOnOffDash and GDK2.LineDoubleDash. cap_style is one of GDK2.CapNotLast, GDK2.CapButt, GDK2.CapRound and GDK2.CapProjecting. join_style is one of GDK2.JoinMiter, GDK2.JoinRound and GDK2.JoinBevel.

      Method set_stipple

        `GDK2.GC set_stipple(GTK2.GdkBitmap stipple)`

      Description

        Set the background type. Fill must be GDK_STIPPLED or GDK_OPAQUE_STIPPLED.

      Method set_subwindow

        `GDK2.GC set_subwindow(int draw_on_subwindows)`

      Description

        If set, anything drawn with this GC will draw on subwindows as well as the window in which the drawing is done.

      Method set_tile

        `GDK2.GC set_tile(GTK2.GdkPixmap tile)`

      Description

        Set the background type. Fill must be GDK_TILED

      Method set_ts_origin

        `GDK2.GC set_ts_origin(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Set the origin when using tiles or stipples with the GC. The tile or stipple will be aligned such that the upper left corner of the tile or stipple will coincide with this point.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkImage

      Description

        A gdk (low level) image. Mainly used for W(Image) objects.

        NOIMG

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkImage GTK2.GdkImage(int|void fast_mode, Image.Image|void image)`

      Description

        Create a new GDK2.Image object. The first argument is either 0, which indicates that you want a 'slow' image. If you use '1', you indicate that you want a 'fast' image. Fast images are stored in shared memory, and thus are not sent over any network. But please limit your usage of fast images, they use up a possibly limited system resource set. See the man page for shmget(2) for more information on the limits on shared segments on your system.

        A 'fast' image will automatically revert back to 'slow' mode if no shared memory is available.

        If the second argument is specified, it is the actual image data.

      Method get_pixel

        `int get_pixel(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Get the pixel value of a pixel as a X-pixel value. It is usualy not very easy to convert this value to a rgb triple. See get_pnm.

      Method get_pnm

        `string get_pnm()`

      Description

        Returns the data in the image as a pnm object. Currently, this is always a P6 (true color raw) image. This could change in the future. To get a pike image object do 'Image.PNM.decode( gdkimage->get_pnm() )'

      Method grab

        `GDK2.Image grab(GTK2.Widget widget, int xoffset, int yoffset, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Call this function to grab a portion of a widget (argument 1) to the image. Grabbing non-toplevel widgets may produce unexpected results. To get the size of a widget use -&gt;xsize() and -&gt;ysize(). To get the offset of the upper left corner of the widget, relative to it's X-window (this is what you want for the offset arguments), use -&gt;xoffset() and -&gt;yoffset().

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set

        `GDK2.Image set(Image.Image|int image_or_xsize, int|void ysize)`

      Description

        Call this to set this image to either the contents of a pike image or a blank image of a specified size.

      Method set_pixel

        `GDK2.Image set_pixel(int x, int y, int pixel)`

      Description

        Set the pixel value of a pixel. Please note that the pixel argument is a X-pixel value, which is not easily gotten from a RGB color. See get_pixel and set.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixbuf

      Description

        Properties: int bits-per-sample int colorspace (GdkColorspace) int has-alpha int height int n-channels object pixels int rowstride int width

      Method add_alpha

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf add_alpha(int substitute_color, int r, int g, int b)`

      Description

        Adds an alpha channel to this pixbuf and returns a copy. If it already has an alpha channel, the channel values are copied from the original; otherwise, the alpha channel is initialized to 255 (full opacity). If substitute_color is true, then the color specified by (r,g,b) will be assigned zero opacity. That is, if you pass (255,255,255) for the substitute color, all white pixels will become fully transparent.

      Method composite

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf composite(GTK2.GdkPixbuf dest, int dest_x, int dest_y, int dest_width, int dest_height, float offset_x, float offset_y, float scale_x, float scale_y, int type, int overall_alpha)`

      Description

        Creates a transformation of the source image by scalling by scale_x and scale_y, then translating by offset_x and offset_y. This gives an image in the coordinates of the destination pixbuf. The rectangle (dest_x,dest_y,dest_width,dest_height) is then composited onto the corresponding rectangle of the original destination image. when the destination rectangle contain parts not in the source image, the data at the edges of the source image is replicated to infinity.

      Method composite_color

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf composite_color(GTK2.GdkPixbuf dest, int dest_x, int dest_y, int dest_width, int dest_height, float offset_x, float offset_y, float scale_x, float scale_y, int type, int overall_alpha, int check_x, int check_y, int check_size, int color1, int color2)`

      Description

        Creates a transformation of the source image by scaling by scale_x and scale_y, then translating by offset_x and offset_y, then composites the rectangle (dest_x,dest_y,dest_width,dest_height) of the resulting image with a checkboard of the colors color1 and color2 and renders it onto the destinagion image.

        See composite_color_simple() for a simpler variant of this function suitable for many tasks.

      Method composite_color_simple

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf composite_color_simple(int dest_width, int dest_height, int type, int overall_alpha, int check_size, int color1, int color2)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(Pixbuf) by scalling src to dest_width x dest_height and compositing the result with a checkboard of colors color1 and color2.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf copy()`

      Description

        Creates a new GDK2.Pixbuf with a copy of this one.

      Method copy_area

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf copy_area(GTK2.GdkPixbuf dest, int src_x, int src_y, int widt, int height, int dest_x, int dest_y)`

      Description

        Copies a rectangular area from this pixbuf to dest. Conversion of pixbuf formats is done automatically.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf GTK2.GdkPixbuf(string|mapping options)`

      Description

        Create a GDK2.Pixbuf object.

      Parameter `options`

        options is either a filename or a mapping of options.

        If it is a mapping, it may contain:

        `"filename" : string` | Name of file to load.
        `"xpm" : string` | If this key exists, then value is xpm data to create from.
        `"data" : string` | If this key exists, then value is pixel data.
        `"bits" : int` | Number of bits per sample.
        `"width" : int` | Width of image.
        `"height" : int` | Height of image.
        `"alpha" : int` | True if alpha channel.
        `"scale" : int` | True if use width and height as scale.
        `"preserve" : int` | True if preserve aspect ratio.

        The following is additional keys may exist if the member `"data"` exists:

        `"colorspace" : int` | Colorspace, default GDK2.COLORSPACE_RGB, currently ignored.
        `"rowstride" : int` | Distance in bytes between row starts.

      Method flip

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf flip(int horizontal)`

      Description

        Flips a pixbuf horizontally or vertically and returns the result in a new pixbuf.

      Method get_bits_per_sample

        `int get_bits_per_sample()`

      Description

        Queries the number of bits per color sample.

      Method get_colorspace

        `int get_colorspace()`

      Description

        Queries the color space.

      Method get_has_alpha

        `int get_has_alpha()`

      Description

        Queries whether a pixbuf has an alpha channel.

      Method get_height

        `int get_height()`

      Description

        Queries the height.

      Method get_n_channels

        `int get_n_channels()`

      Description

        Queries the number of channels.

      Method get_option

        `string get_option(string key)`

      Description

        Looks up key in the list of options that may have been attached to the pixbuf when it was loaded.

      Method get_pixels

        `string get_pixels()`

      Description

        Returns the pixel data as a string.

      Method get_rowstride

        `int get_rowstride()`

      Description

        Queries the rowstride of a pixbuf, which is the number of bytes between the start of a row and the start of the next row.

      Method get_width

        `int get_width()`

      Description

        Queries the width.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method new_subpixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf new_subpixbuf(int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Creates a new pixbuf which represents a sub-region of src. The new pixbuf shares its pixels with the original pixbuf, so writing to one affects both. The new pixbuf holds a reference to this one, so this object will not be finalized until the new pixbuf is finalized.

      Method put_pixel

        `int put_pixel(int x, int y, int r, int g, int b)`

      Description

        Set pixel to value.

      Method render_threshold_alpha

        `GTK2.GdkBitmap render_threshold_alpha(int src_x, int src_y, int dest_c, int dest_y, int width, int height, int alpha_threshold)`

      Description

        Takes the opacity values in a rectangular portion of a pixbuf and thresholds them to produce a bi-level alpha mask that can be used as a clipping mask for a drawable.

      Method rotate_simple

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf rotate_simple(int angle)`

      Description

        Rotates a pixbuf by a multiple of 90 degrees, and returns the result in a new pixbuf. angle is either a multiple of 90 degrees (0,90,180,270), or one of GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_CLOCKWISE, GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_COUNTERCLOCKWISE, GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_NONE and GDK_PIXBUF_ROTATE_UPSIDEDOWN, which are merely aliases.

      Method saturate_and_pixelate

        `GDK2.Pixbuf saturate_and_pixelate(GTK2.GdkPixbuf dest, float saturation, int pixelate)`

      Description

        Modifes saturation and optionally pixelates this pixbuf, placing the result in dest. The source and dest may be the same pixbuf with no ill effects. If saturation is 1.0 then saturation is not changed. If it's less than 1.0, saturation is reduced (the image is darkened); if greater than 1.0, saturation is increased (the image is brightened). If pixelate is true, then pixels are faded in a checkerboard pattern to create a pixelated image. This pixbuf and dest must have the same image format, size, and rowstride.

      Method save

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf save(string filename, string type, mapping|void options)`

      Description

        Save to a file in format type. "jpeg", "png", "ico", "bmp", are the only valid writable types at this time. Quality is only valid for jpeg images.

      Method scale

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf scale(GTK2.GdkPixbuf dest, int dest_x, int dest_y, int dest_width, int dest_height, float offset_x, float offset_y, float scale_x, float scale_y, int type)`

      Description

        Creates a transformation of the source image by scaling by scale_x and scale_y, then translating by offset_x and offset_y, then renders the rectangle (dest_x,dest_y,dest_width,dest_height) of the resulting image onto the destination image replacing the previous contents. Try to use scale_simple() first, this function is the industrial- strength power tool you can fall back to if scale_simple() isn't powerful enough.

      Method scale_simple

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf scale_simple(int dest_width, int dest_height, int|void interp_type)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Pixbuf) containing a copy of this W(Pixbuf) scaled to dest_width x dest_height. Leaves this W(Pixbuf) unaffected. intertype should be GDK2.INTERP_NEAREST if you want maximum speed (but when scaling down GDK2.INTERP_NEAREST is usually unusably ugly). The default interp_type should be GDK2.INTERP_BILINEAR which offers reasonable quality and speed. You can scale a sub-portion by create a sub-pixbuf with new_subpixbuf().

      Method set_alpha

        `int set_alpha(int x, int y, int setting)`

      Description

        Set alpha value.

      Method set_option

        `int set_option(string key, string value)`

      Description

        Attaches a key/value pair as an option. If the key already exists in the list of options, the new value is ignored.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation

      Description

        The GdkPixbufAnimation object. Holds animations, like gifs.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation(string filename)`

      Description

        Create a new PixbufAnimation.

      Method get_height

        `int get_height()`

      Description

        Returns the height of the bounding box.

      Method get_iter

        `GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimationIter get_iter()`

      Description

        Get an iterator for displaying an animation. The iterator provides the frames that should be displayed at a given time.

        Returns the beginning of the animation. Afterwards you should probably immediately display the pixbuf return by GDK2.PixbufAnimationIter->get_pixbuf(). Then, you should install a timeout or by some other mechanism ensure that you'll update the image after GDK2.PixbufAnimationIter->get_delay_time() milliseconds. Each time the image is updated, you should reinstall the timeout with the new, possibly changed delay time.

        To update the image, call GDK2.PixbufAnimationIter->advance().

      Method get_static_image

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_static_image()`

      Description

        If an animation is really just a plain image (has only one frame), this function returns that image. If the animation is an animation, this function returns reasonable thing to display as a static unanimated image, which might be the first frame, or something more sophisticated. If an animation hasn't loaded any frames yet, this function will return 0.

      Method get_width

        `int get_width()`

      Description

        Returns the width of the bounding box.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method is_static_image

        `int is_static_image()`

      Description

        If the file turns out to be a plain, unanimated image, this function will return true. Use get_static_image() to retrieve the image.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimationIter

      Description

        An iterator for a PixbufAnimation.

      Method advance

        `int advance()`

      Description

        Possibly advance an animation to a new frame.

      Method get_delay_time

        `int get_delay_time()`

      Description

        Gets the number of milliseconds the current pixbuf should be displayed, or -1 if the current pixbuf should be displayed forever.

      Method get_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_pixbuf()`

      Description

        Gets the current pixbuf which should be displayed; the pixbuf will be the same size as the animation itself (GDK2.PixbufAnimation->get_width(), GDK2.PixbufAnimation->get_height()). This pixbuf should be displayed for get_delay_time() milliseconds.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method on_currently_loading_frame

        `int on_currently_loading_frame()`

      Description

        Used to determine how to respond to the area_updated signal on GDK2.PixbufLoader when loading an animation.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixbufLoader

      Method close

        `bool close()`

      Description

        informs a pixbuf loader that no further writes with write() will occur, so that it can free its internal loading structures. Also, tries to parse any data that hasn't yet been parsed; if the remaining data is partial or corrupt, FALSE will be returned.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkPixbufLoader GTK2.GdkPixbufLoader()`

      Method get_animation

        `GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation get_animation()`

      Description

        Queries the GDK2.PixbufAnimation that a pixbuf loader is currently creating. In general it only makes sense to call this function after the "area-prepared" signal has been emitted by the loader. If the loader doesn't have enough bytes yet (hasn't emitted the "area-prepared" signal) this function will return NULL.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_size

        `GDK2.PixbufLoader set_size(int width, int height)`

      Description

        Causes the image to be scaled while it is loaded. Attempts to set the desired image size are ignored after the emission of the size-prepared signal. (once loading start)

      Method write

        `bool write(string|Stdio.Buffer data)`

      Description

        This will cause a pixbuf loader to parse the more data for an image. It will return TRUE if the data was loaded successfully, and FALSE if an error occurred. In the latter case, the loader will be closed, and will not accept further writes.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixbufSimpleAnim

      Description

        Properties: bool loop

      Method add_frame

        `GDK2.PixbufSimpleAnim add_frame(GTK2.GdkPixbuf frame)`

      Description

        Adds a new frame to animation . The pixbuf must have the dimensions specified when the animation was constructed.

      Method get_loop

        `bool get_loop()`

      Description

        Returns if animation will loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.

      Inherit PixbufAnimation

        inherit GDK2.PixbufAnimation : PixbufAnimation

      Method set_loop

        `GDK2.PixbufSimpleAnim set_loop(bool loop)`

      Description

        Sets whether animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkPixmap

      Description

        This class creates a GDK2.Pixmap from either an GDK2.Image or Image.image object (or a numeric ID, see your X-manual for XIDs). The GDK2.Pixmap object can be used in a lot of different GTK widgets. The most notable is the W(Pixmap) widget.

        NOIMG

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkPixmap GTK2.GdkPixmap(int|object image)`

      Description

        Create a new GDK2.Pixmap object. Argument is a GDK2.Image object or a Image.Image object

      Inherit Drawable

        inherit GDK2.Drawable : Drawable

      Method ref

        `GDK2.Pixmap ref()`

      Description

        Ref this object.

      Method set

        `GDK2.Pixmap set(GTK2.GdkImage image)`

      Description

        Argument is a GDK2.Image object or an Image.image object. It is much faster to use an gdkImage object, especially one allocated in shared memory. This is only an issue if you are going to change the contents of the pixmap often, toggling between a small number of images.

      Method unref

        `GDK2.Pixmap unref()`

      Description

        Unref this object.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkRectangle

      Description

        Rectangle class.

      Method cast

        `(int)GTK2.GdkRectangle()
        (float)GTK2.GdkRectangle()
        (string)GTK2.GdkRectangle()
        (array)GTK2.GdkRectangle()
        (mapping)GTK2.GdkRectangle()
        (multiset)GTK2.GdkRectangle()`

      Description

        Normally used like (mapping)rectangle or (array)rectangle.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle GTK2.GdkRectangle(int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Create a new rectangle

        NOIMG

      Method set

        `GDK2.Rectangle set(int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Set the upper left corner and the size of the rectangle.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkRegion

      Description

        Region information.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkRegion GTK2.GdkRegion()`

      Description

        Create a new (empty) region

        NOIMG

      Method equal

        `int equal(GTK2.GdkRegion victim)`

      Description

        Return true if the region used as an argument is equal to the current region. Also available as a==b when a is a region.

      Method intersect

        `GTK2.GdkRegion intersect(GTK2.GdkRegion victim)`

      Description

        Computes the intersection of the given region and the region. Also available as region &amp; region

      Method offset

        `GDK2.Region offset(int dx, int dy)`

      Description

        Offset(move) the region by dx,dy pixels.

      Method point_in

        `int point_in(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Returns true if the given point resides in the given region

      Method rect_in

        `int rect_in(GTK2.GdkRectangle r)`

      Description

        Returns true if the given rectangle resides inside the given region

      Method shrink

        `GDK2.Region shrink(int dx, int dy)`

      Description

        reduces the size of a region by a specified amount. Positive values shrink the size of the region, and negative values expand the region.

      Method subtract

        `GTK2.GdkRegion subtract(GTK2.GdkRegion victim)`

      Description

        Computes the difference of the given region and the region. Also available as region - region

      Method union

        `GTK2.GdkRegion union(GTK2.GdkRegion victim)`

      Description

        Computes the union of the given rectangle or region and the region. Also available as region | rectangle, region | region, region + region and region + rectangle.

      Method xor

        `GTK2.GdkRegion xor(GTK2.GdkRegion victim)`

      Description

        Computes the exlusive or of the given region and the region. Also available as region ^ region

    CLASS GTK2.GdkScreen

      Description

        Properties: font-options float resolution

        Signals: composite_changed

        size_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkScreen GTK2.GdkScreen()`

      Description

        Gets the default screen.

      Method get_active_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_active_window()`

      Description

        Returns the currently active window.

      Method get_default_colormap

        `GTK2.GdkColormap get_default_colormap()`

      Description

        Gets the default colormap.

      Method get_display

        `GTK2.GdkDisplay get_display()`

      Description

        Gets the display to which this screen belongs.

      Method get_height

        `int get_height()`

      Description

        Gets the height in pixels.

      Method get_height_mm

        `int get_height_mm()`

      Description

        Returns the height in millimeters.

      Method get_monitor_at_point

        `int get_monitor_at_point(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Returns the monitor number in which x,y is located.

      Method get_monitor_at_window

        `int get_monitor_at_window(GTK2.GdkWindow window)`

      Description

        Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the bounding rectangle of window resides.

      Method get_monitor_geometry

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_monitor_geometry(int num)`

      Description

        Retrieves the GDK2.Rectangle representing the size and position of the individual monitor within the entire screen area.

      Method get_n_monitors

        `int get_n_monitors()`

      Description

        Returns the number of monitors which this screen consists of.

      Method get_number

        `int get_number()`

      Description

        Gets the index of this screen among the screens in the display to which it belongs.

      Method get_resolution

        `float get_resolution()`

      Description

        Gets the resolution for font handling.

      Method get_rgb_colormap

        `GTK2.GdkColormap get_rgb_colormap()`

      Description

        Gets the preferred colormap for rendering image data.

      Method get_rgb_visual

        `GTK2.GdkVisual get_rgb_visual()`

      Description

        Get a "preferred visual" chosen by GdkRGB for rendering image data.

      Method get_rgba_colormap

        `GTK2.GdkColormap get_rgba_colormap()`

      Description

        Gets a colormap to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an alpha channel.

      Method get_rgba_visual

        `GTK2.GdkVisual get_rgba_visual()`

      Description

        Gets a visual to use for creating windows or pixmaps with an alpha channel.

      Method get_root_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_root_window()`

      Description

        Gets the root window.

      Method get_system_colormap

        `GTK2.GdkColormap get_system_colormap()`

      Description

        Gets the system default colormap.

      Method get_system_visual

        `GTK2.GdkVisual get_system_visual()`

      Description

        Get the default system visual.

      Method get_toplevel_windows

        `array get_toplevel_windows()`

      Description

        Returns a list of all toplevel windows known to GDK on the screen.

      Method get_width

        `int get_width()`

      Description

        Gets the width of the screen in pixels.

      Method get_width_mm

        `int get_width_mm()`

      Description

        Gets the width in millimeters.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method is_composited

        `int is_composited()`

      Description

        Returns whether windows with an RGBA visual can reasonable be expected to have their alpha channel drawn correctly on the screen.

      Method list_visuals

        `array list_visuals(int|void def)`

      Description

        List the available visuals. If def is true, return the available visuals for the default screen.

      Method make_display_name

        `string make_display_name()`

      Description

        Determines the name to pass to GDK2.Display->open() to get a GDK2.Display with this screen as the default screen.

      Method set_default_colormap

        `GDK2.Screen set_default_colormap(GTK2.GdkColormap colormap)`

      Description

        Sets the default colormap.

      Method set_resolution

        `GDK2.Screen set_resolution(float dpi)`

      Description

        Sets the resolution for font handling.

    CLASS GTK2.GdkVisual

      Description

        A GdkVisual describes a particular video hardware display format. It includes information about the number of bits used for each color, the way the bits are translated into an RGB value for display, and the way the bits are stored in memory.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkVisual GTK2.GdkVisual(int|void best, int|void depth, int|void type)`

      Parameter `best`

        If best is false the systems default GDK screen is returned, otherwise the screen that best fulfills the given depth and type. If none is given, the one with most colors is selected.

      Parameter `depth`

        The requested bit depth, or 0.

      Parameter `type`

        The requested visual type.

        `GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_GRAY` | Each pixel value indexes a grayscale value directly.
        `GDK_VISUAL_GRAYSCALE` | Each pixel is an index into a color map that maps pixel values into grayscale values. The color map can be changed by an application.
        `GDK_VISUAL_STATIC_COLOR` | Each pixel value is an index into a predefined, unmodifiable color map that maps pixel values into RGB values.
        `GDK_VISUAL_PSEUDO_COLOR` | Each pixel is an index into a color map that maps pixel values into rgb values. The color map can be changed by an application.
        `GDK_VISUAL_TRUE_COLOR` | Each pixel value directly contains red, green, and blue components. The red_mask, green_mask, and blue_mask fields of the GdkVisual structure describe how the components are assembled into a pixel value.
        `GDK_VISUAL_DIRECT_COLOR` | Each pixel value contains red, green, and blue components as for GDK_VISUAL_TRUE_COLOR, but the components are mapped via a color table into the final output table instead of being converted directly.

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen()`

      Description

        Gets the screen to which this visual belongs.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.GdkWindow

      Description

        a GDK2.Window object.

        NOIMG

      Method change_property

        `GDK2.Window change_property(GDK2.Atom property, GDK2.Atom type, int mode, string data)`

      Description

        mode is one of GDK_PROP_MODE_APPEND, GDK_PROP_MODE_PREPEND and GDK_PROP_MODE_REPLACE

      Method children

        `array children()`

      Description

        Returns an array of GDK2.Window objects.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GdkWindow GTK2.GdkWindow(GTK2.GdkWindow parent, mapping|void attributes)`

      Description

        Not for non-experts. I promise.

      Method delete_property

        `GDK2.Window delete_property(GDK2.Atom a)`

      Description

        Delete a property.

      Method get_geometry

        `mapping get_geometry()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "x":xpos, "y":ypos, "width":width, "height":height, "depth":bits_per_pixel ])

      Method get_property

        `mapping get_property(GDK2.Atom atom, int|void offset, int|void delete_when_done)`

      Description

        Returns the value (as a string) of the specified property. The arguments are:

        property: The property atom, as an example GDK2.Atom.__SWM_VROOT offset (optional): The starting offset, in elements delete_when_done (optional): If set, the property will be deleted when it has been fetched.

        Example usage: Find the 'virtual' root window (many window managers put large windows over the screen)

               GDK2.Window root = GTK.root_window();
               array maybe=root->children()->
                           get_property(GDK2.Atom.__SWM_VROOT)-({0});
               if(sizeof(maybe))
                 root=GDK2.Window( maybe[0]->data[0] );

      Method grab_input_focus

        `GDK2.Window grab_input_focus()`

      Description

        Forcibly grab the input focus.

        Useful for override-redirect windows in games. Note that the only way to get rid of the focus is to close the window, be careful.

      Inherit Drawable

        inherit GDK2.Drawable : Drawable

      Method is_viewable

        `int is_viewable()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the window is mapped.

      Method is_visible

        `int is_visible()`

      Description

        Return 1 if the window, or a part of the window, is visible right now.

      Method lower

        `GDK2.Window lower()`

      Description

        Lower this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method move_resize

        `GDK2.Window move_resize(int x, int y, int w, int h)`

      Description

        Move and resize the window in one call.

      Method raise

        `GDK2.Window raise()`

      Description

        Raise this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method set_background

        `GDK2.Window set_background(GTK2.GdkColor to)`

      Description

        Set the background color or image. The argument is either a GDK2.Pixmap or a GDK2.Color object.

      Method set_bitmap_cursor

        `GDK2.Window set_bitmap_cursor(GTK2.GdkBitmap image, GTK2.GdkBitmap mask, GTK2.GdkColor fg, GTK2.GdkColor bg, int xhot, int yhot)`

      Description

        xhot,yhot are the locations of the x and y hotspot relative to the upper left corner of the cursor image.

      Method set_cursor

        `GDK2.Window set_cursor(int new_cursor)`

      Description

        Change the window cursor.<table border="0" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0"> CURS(GDK2.Arrow) CURS(GDK2.BasedArrowDown) CURS(GDK2.BasedArrowUp) CURS(GDK2.Boat) CURS(GDK2.Bogosity) CURS(GDK2.BottomLeftCorner) CURS(GDK2.BottomRightCorner) CURS(GDK2.BottomSide) CURS(GDK2.BottomTee) CURS(GDK2.BoxSpiral) CURS(GDK2.CenterPtr) CURS(GDK2.Circle) CURS(GDK2.Clock) CURS(GDK2.CoffeeMug) CURS(GDK2.Cross) CURS(GDK2.CrossReverse) CURS(GDK2.Crosshair) CURS(GDK2.DiamondCross) CURS(GDK2.Dot) CURS(GDK2.Dotbox) CURS(GDK2.DoubleArrow) CURS(GDK2.DraftLarge) CURS(GDK2.DraftSmall) CURS(GDK2.DrapedBox) CURS(GDK2.Exchange) CURS(GDK2.Fleur) CURS(GDK2.Gobbler) CURS(GDK2.Gumby) CURS(GDK2.Hand1) CURS(GDK2.Hand2) CURS(GDK2.Heart) CURS(GDK2.Icon) CURS(GDK2.IronCross) CURS(GDK2.LeftPtr) CURS(GDK2.LeftSide) CURS(GDK2.LeftTee) CURS(GDK2.Leftbutton) CURS(GDK2.LlAngle) CURS(GDK2.LrAngle) CURS(GDK2.Man) CURS(GDK2.Middlebutton) CURS(GDK2.Mouse) CURS(GDK2.Pencil) CURS(GDK2.Pirate) CURS(GDK2.Plus) CURS(GDK2.QuestionArrow) CURS(GDK2.RightPtr) CURS(GDK2.RightSide) CURS(GDK2.RightTee) CURS(GDK2.Rightbutton) CURS(GDK2.RtlLogo) CURS(GDK2.Sailboat) CURS(GDK2.SbDownArrow) CURS(GDK2.SbHDoubleArrow) CURS(GDK2.SbLeftArrow) CURS(GDK2.SbRightArrow) CURS(GDK2.SbUpArrow) CURS(GDK2.SbVDoubleArrow) CURS(GDK2.Shuttle) CURS(GDK2.Sizing) CURS(GDK2.Spider) CURS(GDK2.Spraycan) CURS(GDK2.Star) CURS(GDK2.Target) CURS(GDK2.Tcross) CURS(GDK2.TopLeftArrow) CURS(GDK2.TopLeftCorner) CURS(GDK2.TopRightCorner) CURS(GDK2.TopSide) CURS(GDK2.TopTee) CURS(GDK2.Trek) CURS(GDK2.UlAngle) CURS(GDK2.Umbrella) CURS(GDK2.UrAngle) CURS(GDK2.Watch) CURS(GDK2.Xterm) </table>

      Method set_events

        `GDK2.Window set_events(int events)`

      Description

        events is a bitwise or of one or more of the following constants: GDK2.ExposureMask, GDK2.PointerMotionMask, GDK2.PointerMotion_HINTMask, GDK2.ButtonMotionMask, GDK2.Button1MotionMask, GDK2.Button2MotionMask, GDK2.Button3MotionMask, GDK2.ButtonPressMask, GDK2.ButtonReleaseMask, GDK2.KeyPressMask, GDK2.KeyReleaseMask, GDK2.EnterNotifyMask, GDK2.LeaveNotifyMask, GDK2.FocusChangeMask, GDK2.StructureMask, GDK2.PropertyChangeMask, GDK2.VisibilityNotifyMask, GDK2.ProximityInMask, GDK2.ProximityOutMask and GDK2.AllEventsMask

      Method set_icon

        `GDK2.Window set_icon(GTK2.GdkPixmap pixmap, GTK2.GdkBitmap mask, GTK2.GdkWindow window)`

      Description

        Set the icon to the specified image (with mask) or the specified GDK2.Window. It is up to the window manager to display the icon. Most window manager handles window and pixmap icons, but only a few can handle the mask argument. If you want a shaped icon, the only safe bet is a shaped window.

      Method set_icon_name

        `GDK2.Window set_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Set the icon name to the specified string.

      Method shape_combine_mask

        `GDK2.Window shape_combine_mask(GTK2.GdkBitmap mask, int xoffset, int yoffset)`

      Description

        Set the shape of the widget, or, rather, it's window, to that of the supplied bitmap.

    CLASS GTK2.Gdk_Atom

      Description

        An X-atom. You most likely want to use GDK2.Atom.atom_name instead of GDK2._Atom(name).

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gdk_Atom GTK2.Gdk_Atom(string atom_name, int|void only_if_exists)`

      Description

        Create a new low-level atom. You should normally not call this function directly. Use GDK2.Atom[name] instead of GDK2._Atom(name,0).

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the atom.

    CLASS GTK2.GladeXML

      Description

        Glade is a free GUI builder for GTK2+ and Gnome. It's normally used to create C-code, but can also produce code for other languages. Libglade is a utility library that builds the GI from the Glade XML save files. This module uses libglade and allows you to easily make GUI designs to be used with your Pike applications.

      Method create

        `GTK2.GladeXML GTK2.GladeXML(string filename_or_buffer, int|void size, string|void root, string|void domain)`

      Description

        Creates a new GladeXML object (and the corresponding widgets) from the XML file. Optionally it will only build the interface from the widget node root. This feature is useful if you only want to build say a toolbar or menu from the XML file, but not the window it is embedded in. Note also that the XML parse tree is cached to speed up creating another GladeXML object from the same file. The third optional argument is used to specify a different translation domain from the default to be used. If xml description is in a string buffer instead, specify the size (or -1 to auto-calculate). If size is 0, then it will assume a file with root and/or domain specified.

      Method get_signal_id

        `int get_signal_id(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Used to get the signal id attached to a GladeXML object.

      Method get_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_widget(string name)`

      Description

        This function is used to get the widget corresponding to name in the interface description. You would use this if you have to do anything to the widget after loading.

      Method get_widget_name

        `string get_widget_name(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Used to get the name of a widget that was generated by a GladeXML object.

      Method get_widget_prefix

        `array get_widget_prefix(string name)`

      Description

        This function is used to get a list GTK2.Widgets with names that start with the string name in the interface description.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method signal_autoconnect

        `GTK2.GladeXML signal_autoconnect(mapping callbacks, mixed data)`

      Description

        Try to connect functions to all signals in the interface. The mapping should consist of handler name : function pairs. The data argument will be saved and sent as the first argument to all callback functions.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2App

      Description

        Toplevel GNOME applications would normally use one Gnome2.App widget as their toplevel window. You can create as many Gnome2.App widgets as you want, for example, some people use one GnomeApp per document their application loads.

        Once you have created one instance of this widget, you would add your main application view information to this window by using set_contents() routine.

        The GnomeApp has support for including a menubar, one or more toolbars and a statusbar for your application. It also takes care of intalling the accelerators for you when used in conjuction with the gnome-app-helper routines. The toolbars are inserted into Gnome2.Dock widgets.

        The gnome-app-helper module provides various helper routines to simplify the configuration of your menus and toolbars, but you can create those yourself and use the set_menus(), add_toolbar(), set_toolbar(), add_dock_item() and add_docked(). Properties: string app-id

      Method add_docked

        `Gnome2.App add_docked(GTK2.Widget widget, string name, int behavior, int placement, int band_num, int band_position, int|void offset)`

      Description

        Create a new Gnome2.DockItem widget containing widget, and add it to app's dock with the specified layout information. Notice that, if automatic layout configuration is enabled, the layout is overridden by the saved configuration, if any.

        widget : Widget to be added to app's dock name : Name for the dock item that will contain toolbar behavior : Behavior for the new dock item. One of GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL and GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL placement : Placement for the new dock item, one of Gnome2.DockTop, Gnome2.DockRight, Gnome2.DockBottom, Gnome2.DockLeft and Gnome2.DockFloating band_num : Number of the band where the dock item should be placed band_position : Position of the new dock item in band band_num offset : Offset from the previous dock item in the band; if there is no previous item, offset from the beginning of the band.

      Method add_toolbar

        `Gnome2.App add_toolbar(GTK2.Toolbar toolbar, string name, int behavior, int placement, int band_num, int band_position, int|void offset)`

      Description

        Create a new Gnome2.DockItem widget containing toolbar, and add it to app's dock with the specified layout information. Notice that, if automatic layout configuration is enabled, the layout is overridden by the saved configuration, if any.

        toolbar : Toolbar to be added to app's dock name : Name for the dock item that will contain toolbar behavior : Behavior for the new dock item. One or more of GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_LOCKED, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_HORIZONTAL, GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL and GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NORMAL placement : Placement for the new dock item, one of Gnome2.DockTop, Gnome2.DockRight, Gnome2.DockBottom, Gnome2.DockLeft and Gnome2.DockFloating band_num : Number of the band where the dock item should be placed band_position : Position of the new dock item in band band_num offset : Offset from the previous dock item in the band; if there is no previous item, offset from the beginning of the band.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2App GTK2.Gnome2App(string appname, string|void title)`

      Description

        Create a new (empty) application window. You must specify the application's name (used internally as an identifier). title can be left as 0, in which case the window's title will not be set.

      Method enable_layout_config

        `Gnome2.App enable_layout_config(int enable)`

      Description

        Specify whether the the dock's layout configuration should be automatically saved via gnome-config whenever it changes, or not.

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK2.Window : Window

      Method set_contents

        `Gnome2.App set_contents(GTK2.Widget contents)`

      Description

        Sets the status bar of the application window.

      Method set_menus

        `Gnome2.App set_menus(GTK2.MenuBar menu_bar)`

      Description

        Sets the menu bar of the application window.

      Method set_statusbar

        `Gnome2.App set_statusbar(GTK2.Widget statusbar)`

      Description

        Sets the status bar of the application window.

      Method set_statusbar_custom

        `Gnome2.App set_statusbar_custom(GTK2.Widget container, GTK2.Widget statusbar)`

      Description

        Sets the status bar of the application window, but use container as its container.

      Method set_toolbar

        `Gnome2.App set_toolbar(GTK2.Toolbar toolbar)`

      Description

        Sets the main toolbar of the application window.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2Appbar

      Description

        A bar that GNOME applications put on the bottom of the windows to display status, progress, hints for menu items or a minibuffer for getting some sort of response. It has a stack for status messages `GTK2.Gnome2Appbar( 1, 1, GTK2.GNOME_PREFERENCES_USER )->set_progress_percentage( 0.4 );`

        Properties: int has-progress int has-status int interactivity

        Signals: clear_prompt Emitted when the prompt is cleared. mixed user_data

        user_response Emitted when the user hits enter after a prompt. mixed user_data

      Method clear_prompt

        `Gnome2.Appbar clear_prompt()`

      Description

        Remove any prompt.

      Method clear_stack

        `Gnome2.Appbar clear_stack()`

      Description

        Remove all status messages from appbar, and display default status message (if present).

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2Appbar GTK2.Gnome2Appbar(int has_progress, int has_status, int interactivity)`

      Description

        Create a new GNOME application status bar. If has_progress is TRUE, a small progress bar widget will be created, and placed on the left side of the appbar. If has_status is TRUE, a status bar, possibly an editable one, is created.

        interactivity determines whether the appbar is an interactive "minibuffer" or just a status bar. If it is set to Gnome2.PREFERENCES_NEVER, it is never interactive. If it is set to Gnome2.PREFERENCES_USER we respect user preferences from ui-properties. If it's Gnome2.PREFERENCES_ALWAYS we are interactive whether the user likes it or not. Basically, if your app supports both interactive and not (for example, if you use the gnome-app-util interfaces), you should use Gnome2.PREFERENCES_USER. Otherwise, use the setting you support. Please note that "interactive" mode is not functional now; GtkEntry is inadequate and so a custom widget will be written eventually.

      Method get_progress

        `GTK2.ProgressBar get_progress()`

      Description

        Returns GTK2.ProgressBar widget pointer, so that the progress bar may be manipulated further.

      Method get_response

        `string get_response()`

      Description

        Get the response to the prompt, if any.

      Method get_status

        `GTK2.Widget get_status()`

      Description

        Retrieves the statusbar widget.

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK2.Hbox : Hbox

      Method pop

        `Gnome2.Appbar pop()`

      Description

        Remove current status message, and display previous status message, if any. It is OK to call this with an empty stack.

      Method push

        `Gnome2.Appbar push(string what)`

      Description

        Push a new status message onto the status bar stack, and display it.

      Method refresh

        `Gnome2.Appbar refresh()`

      Description

        Reflect the current state of stack/default. Useful to force a set_status to disappear.

      Method set_default

        `Gnome2.Appbar set_default(string default_status)`

      Description

        What to show when showing nothing else; defaults to "".

      Method set_progress_percentage

        `Gnome2.Appbar set_progress_percentage(float percentage)`

      Description

        Sets progress bar to the given percentage.

      Method set_prompt

        `Gnome2.Appbar set_prompt(string prompt, int modal)`

      Description

        Put a prompt in the appbar and wait for a response. When the user responds or cancels, a "user-response" signal is emitted.

      Method set_status

        `Gnome2.Appbar set_status(string status)`

      Description

        Sets the status label without changing widget state; next set or push will destroy this permanently.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2Canvas

      Description

        Gnome2.Canvas is an engine for structured graphics that offers a rich imaging model, high performance rendering, and a powerful, high level API. It offers a choice of two rendering back-ends, one based on Xlib for extremely fast display, and another based on Libart, a sophisticated, antialiased, alpha-compositing engine. This widget can be used for flexible display of graphics and for creating interactive user interface elements.

        A Gnome2.Canvas widget contains one or more Gnome2.CanvasItem objects. Items consist of graphing elements like lines, ellipses, polygons, images, text, and curves. These items are organized using Gnome2.CanvasGroup objects, which are themselves derived from Gnome2.CanvasItem. Since a group is an item it can be contained within other groups, forming a tree of canvas items. Certain operations, like translating and scaling, can be performed on all items in a group. See http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/libgnomecanvas/GnomeCanvas.html for more information. Properties: int aa

        Signals: draw_background

        render_background

      Method c2w

        `array c2w(int cx, int cy)`

      Description

        Converts canvas pixel coordinates to world coordinates.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2Canvas GTK2.Gnome2Canvas(int|void anti_alias)`

      Description

        Create a new Gnome2.Canvas widget. Set anti_alias to true to create a canvas in antialias mode.

      Method get_center_scroll_region

        `int get_center_scroll_region()`

      Description

        Returns whether the canvas is set to center the scrolling region in the window if the former is smaller than the canvas' allocation.

      Method get_color

        `GTK2.GdkColor get_color(string|void spec)`

      Description

        Allocates a color based on the specified X color specification. An omitted or empty string is considered transparent.

      Method get_color_pixel

        `int get_color_pixel(int rgba)`

      Description

        Allocates a color from the RGBA value passed into this function. The alpha opacity value is discarded, since normal X colors do not support it.

      Method get_dither

        `int get_dither()`

      Description

        Returns the type of dithering used to render an antialiased canvas.

      Method get_item_at

        `GTK2.Gnome2CanvasItem get_item_at(float x, float y)`

      Description

        Looks for the item that is under the specified position, which must be specified in world coordinates.

      Method get_scroll_offsets

        `array get_scroll_offsets()`

      Description

        Queries the scrolling offsets of a canvas. The values are returned in canvas pixel units.

      Method get_scroll_region

        `mapping get_scroll_region()`

      Description

        Queries the scrolling region of a canvas.

      Inherit Layout

        inherit GTK2.Layout : Layout

      Method root

        `GTK2.Gnome2CanvasGroup root()`

      Description

        Queries the root group.

      Method scroll_to

        `Gnome2.Canvas scroll_to(int cx, int cy)`

      Description

        Makes a canvas scroll to the specified offsets, given in canvas pixel units. The canvas will adjust the view so that it is not outside the scrolling region. This function is typically not used, as it is better to hook scrollbars to the canvas layout's scrolling adjustments.

      Method set_center_scroll_region

        `Gnome2.Canvas set_center_scroll_region(int setting)`

      Description

        When the scrolling region of the canvas is smaller than the canvas window, e.g. the allocation of the canvas, it can be either centered on the window or simply made to be on the upper-left corner on the window.

      Method set_dither

        `Gnome2.Canvas set_dither(int dither)`

      Description

        Controls the dithered rendering for antialiased canvases. The value of dither should be GDK2.RgbDitherNone, GDK2.RgbDitherNormal, or GDK2.RgbDitherMax. The default canvas setting is GDK2.RgbDitherNormal.

      Method set_pixels_per_unit

        `Gnome2.Canvas set_pixels_per_unit(float n)`

      Description

        Sets the zooming factor of a canvas by specifying the number of pixels that correspond to one canvas unit.

        The anchor point for zooming, i.e. the point that stays fixed and all others zoom inwards or outwards from it, depends on whether the canvas is set to center the scrolling region or not. You can contorl this using the set_center_scroll_region() function. If the canvas is set to center the scroll region, then the center of the canvas window is used as the anchor point for zooming. Otherwise, the upper-left corner of the canvas window is used as the anchor point.

      Method set_scroll_region

        `Gnome2.Canvas set_scroll_region(float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2)`

      Description

        Sets the scrolling region of a canvas to the specified rectangle. The canvas will then be able to scroll only within this region. The view of the canvas is adjusted as appropriate to display as much of the new region as possible.

      Method w2c

        `array w2c(float wx, float wy)`

      Description

        Converts world coordinates into canvas pixel coordinates.

      Method w2c_affine

        `array w2c_affine()`

      Description

        Gets the affine transform that converts from world coordinates to canvas pixel coordinates.

      Method w2c_d

        `array w2c_d(float wx, float wy)`

      Description

        Converts world coordinates into canvas pixel coordinates. This version returns coordinates in floating point coordinates, for greater precision.

      Method window_to_world

        `array window_to_world(float winx, float winy)`

      Description

        Converts window-relative coordinates into world coordinates. You can use this when you need to convert mouse coordinates into world coordinates, for example.

      Method world_to_window

        `array world_to_window(float worldx, float worldy)`

      Description

        Converts world coordinates into window-relative coordinates.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasBpath

      Inherit CanvasShape

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasShape : CanvasShape

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasClipgroup

      Description

        Properties: string path int wind

      Inherit CanvasGroup

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasGroup : CanvasGroup

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasEllipse

      Inherit CanvasRE

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasRE : CanvasRE

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasGroup

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasItem

      Description

        This is the base class for all canvas items. Canvas items are the drawing elements of a Gnome2.Canvas. Example items include lines, ellipses, polygons, images, text, curves, and even arbitary GTK+ widgets.

        Properties: Gnome2.CanvasItem parent

        Signals: event

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK2.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasLine

      Description

        Properties: float arrow-shape-a float arrow-shape-b float arrow-shape-c int cap-style string fill-color GDK2.Color fill-color-gdk int fill-color-rgba GDK2.Drawable fill-stipple int first-arrowhead int join-style int last-arrowhead int line-style Gnome2.CanvasPoints points int smooth int spline-steps int width-pixels float width-units

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasPixbuf

      Description

        Properties: int anchor float height int height-in-pixels int height-set GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf float width int width-in-pixels int width-set float x int x-in-pixels float y int y-in-pixels

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasRE

      Description

        Properties: float x1 float x2 float y1 float y2

      Inherit CanvasShape

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasShape : CanvasShape

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasRect

      Inherit CanvasRE

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasRE : CanvasRE

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasRichText

      Description

        Properties: int anchor int cursor-blink int cursor-visible int direction int editable int grow-height float height int indent int justification int left-margin int pixels-above-lines int pixels-below-lines int pixels-inside-wrap int right-margin string text int visible float width int wrap-mode float x float y

        Signals: tag_changed

      Method get_buffer

        `GTK2.TextBuffer get_buffer()`

      Description

        Get the text buffer.

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

      Method set_buffer

        `Gnome2.CanvasRichText set_buffer(GTK2.TextBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Set the text buffer.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasShape

      Description

        Properties: int cap-style string dash string fill-color GDK2.Color fill-color-gdk int fill-color-rgba GDK2.Drawable fill-stipple int join-style float miterlimit string outline-color GDK2.Color outline-color-gdk int outline-color-rgba GDK2.Drawable outline-stipple int width-pixels float width-units int wind

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasText

      Description

        Properties: int anchor Pango.AttrList attributes int clip float clip-height float clip-width string family int family-set string fill-color GDK2.Color fill-color-gdk int fill-color-rgba GDK2.Drawable fill-stipple string font Pango.FontDescription font-dest int justification string markup int rise int rise-set float scale int scale-set int size float size-points int size-set Pango.Stretch stretch int stretch-set int strikethrough int strikethrough-set Pango.Style style int style-set string text float text-height float text-width Pango.Underline underline int underline-set Pango.Variant variant int variant-set int weight float x float x-offset float y float y-offset

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2CanvasWidget

      Description

        Properties: int anchor float height int size-pixels GTK2.Widget widget float width float x float y

      Inherit CanvasItem

        inherit Gnome2.CanvasItem : CanvasItem

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2Client

      Description

        Signals: connect Called once the client has been connected to the signal manager. int arg1, mixed user_data

        die Called when the session manager wants the client to shut down. mixed user_data

        disconnect Called when the client is disconnected from the session manager. mixed user_data

        save_complete Called when the session manager has finished checkpointing all of the clients. Clients are then free to change their state. mixed user_data

        save_yourself Called when either a "SaveYourself" or a "SaveYourselfPhase2" call is made by the session manager. int arg1: the phase of the "SaveYourself" command ('1' or '2'). int arg2: the data which should be saved (local, global, or both). int arg3: true if the session manager is shutting down. int arg4: how the client is allowed to interact with the user while saving. int arg5: true if this is to be a "fast" shutdown. mixed user_data

        shutdown_cancelled Called if the session manager had sent a "SaveYourself" to all clients in preparation for shutting down and the shutdown was then cancelled. A client can then continue running and change its state. mixed user_data

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2Client GTK2.Gnome2Client()`

      Description

        Gets the master session management client.

      Method disconnect

        `Gnome2.Client disconnect()`

      Description

        Disconnect the client from the session manager.

      Method flush

        `Gnome2.Client flush()`

      Description

        This will force the underlying connection to the session manager to be flushed. This is useful if you have some pending changes that you want to make sure get committed.

      Method get_config_prefix

        `string get_config_prefix()`

      Description

        Get the config prefix. This config prefix provides a suitable place to store any details about the state of the client which can not be described using the app's command line arguments (as set in the restart command).

      Method get_desktop_id

        `string get_desktop_id()`

      Description

        Get the client ID of the desktop's current instance, i.e. if you consider the desktop as a whole as a session managed app, this returns its session ID using a gnome extension to session management. May return empty for apps not running under a recent version of gnome-session; apps should handle that case.

      Method get_flags

        `int get_flags()`

      Description

        Determine the client's status with the session manager.

      Method get_global_config_prefix

        `string get_global_config_prefix()`

      Description

        Get the config prefix that will be returned by get_config_prefix() for clients which have NOT been restarted or cloned (i.e. for clients started by the user without '--sm-' options). This config prefix may be used to write the user's preferred config for these "new"clients".

        You could also use this prefix as a place to store and retrieve config details that you wish to apply to ALL instances of the app. However, this practice limits the users freedom to configure each instance in a different way so it should be used with caution.

      Method get_id

        `string get_id()`

      Description

        Returns the session management ID.

      Method get_previous_id

        `string get_previous_id()`

      Description

        Get the session management ID from the previous session.

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK2.Object : Object

      Method request_phase_2

        `Gnome2.Client request_phase_2()`

      Description

        Request the session manager to emit the "save-yourself" signal for a second time after all the clients in the session have ceased interacting with the user and entered an idle state. This might be useful if your app managers other apps and requires that they are in an idle state before saving its final data.

      Method request_save

        `Gnome2.Client request_save(int save_style, int shutdown, int interact_style, int fast, int global)`

      Description

        Request the session manager to save the session in some way. The arguments correspond with the arguments passed to the "save-yourself" signal handler.

        The save_style (GNOME_SAVE_BOTH, GNOME_SAVE_GLOBAL and GNOME_SAVE_LOCAL) indicates whether the save should affect data accessible to other users (GTK2.GNOME_SAVE_GLOBAL) or only the state visible to the current user (GTK2.GNOME_SAVE_LOCAL), or both. Setting shutdown to true will initiate a logout. The interact_style (GNOME_INTERACT_ANY, GNOME_INTERACT_ERRORS and GNOME_INTERACT_NONE) specifies which kinds of interaction will be available. Setting fast to true will limit the save to setting the session manager properties plus any essential data. Setting the value of global to true will request that all the other apps in the session do a save as well. A global save is mandatory when doing a shutdown.

      Method save_any_dialog

        `Gnome2.Client save_any_dialog(GTK2.Dialog dialog)`

      Description

        May be called during a "save-yourself" handler to request that a (modal) dialog is presented to the user. The session manager decides when the dialog is shown, but it will not be shown it unless the session manager is sending an interaction style of GTK2.GNOME_INTERACT_ANY. "Cancel" and "Log out" buttons will be added during a shutdown.

      Method save_error_dialog

        `Gnome2.Client save_error_dialog(GTK2.Dialog dialog)`

      Description

        May be called during a "save-yourself" handler when an error has occurred during the save.

      Method set_clone_command

        `Gnome2.Client set_clone_command(array argv)`

      Description

        Set a command the session manager can use to create a new instance of the application. Not implemented yet.

      Method set_current_directory

        `Gnome2.Client set_current_directory(string dir)`

      Description

        Set the directory to be in when running shutdown, discard, restart, etc. commands.

      Method set_discard_command

        `Gnome2.Client set_discard_command(array argv)`

      Description

        Provides a command to run when a client is removed from the session. It might delete session-specific config files, for example. Executing the discard command on the local host should delete the information saved as part of the session save that was in progress when the discard command was set. For example: string prefix=client->get_config_prefix(); array argv=({ "rm","-r" }); argv+=({ Gnome2.Config->get_real_path(prefix) }); client->set_discard_command(argv); Not implemented yet.

      Method set_environment

        `Gnome2.Client set_environment(string name, string value)`

      Description

        Set an environment variable to be placed in the client's environment prior to running restart, shutdown, discard, etc. commands.

      Method set_global_config_prefix

        `Gnome2.Client set_global_config_prefix(string prefix)`

      Description

        Set the value used for the global config prefix. The global config prefix defaults to a name based on the name of the executable. This function allows you to set it to a different value. It should be called BEFORE retrieving the config prefix for the first time. Later calls will be ignored.

      Method set_priority

        `Gnome2.Client set_priority(int priority)`

      Description

        The gnome-session manager restarts clients in order of their priorities in a similar way to the start up ordering in SysV. This function allows the app to suggest a position in this ordering. The value should be between 0 and 99. A default value of 50 is assigned to apps that do not provide a value. The user may assign a different priority.

      Method set_resign_command

        `Gnome2.Client set_resign_command(array argv)`

      Description

        Some clients can be "undone", removing their effects and deleting any saved state. For example, xmodmap could register a resign command to undo the keymap changes it saved.

        Used by clients that use the GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY restart style to undo their effects (these clients usually perform initialization functions and leave effects behind after they die). The resign command combines the effects of a shutdown command and a discard command. It is executed when the user decides that the client should cease to be restarted. Not implemented yet.

      Method set_restart_command

        `Gnome2.Client set_restart_command(array argv)`

      Description

        When clients crash or the user logs out and back in, they are restarted. This command should perform the restart. Executing the restart command on the local host should reproduce the state of the client at the time of the session save as closely as possible. Saving config info under the get_config_prefix() is generally useful. Not implemented yet.

      Method set_restart_style

        `Gnome2.Client set_restart_style(int style)`

      Description

        Tells the session manager how the client should be restarted in future sessions. One of GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY, GNOME_RESTART_IF_RUNNING, GNOME_RESTART_IMMEDIATELY and GNOME_RESTART_NEVER

      Method set_shutdown_command

        `Gnome2.Client set_shutdown_command(array argv)`

      Description

        GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY clients can set this command to run when the user logs out but the client is no longer running.

        Used by clients that use the GTK2.GNOME_RESTART_ANYWAY restart style to undo their effects (these clients usually perform initialization functions and leave effects behind after they die). The shutdown command simply undoes the effects of the client. It is executed during a normal logout. Not implemented yet.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2DateEdit

      Description

        The GnomeDateEdit widget provides a way to enter dates and times with a helper calendar to let the user select the date. `GTK2.Gnome2DateEdit(time(),1,1);`

        `GTK2.Gnome2DateEdit(time(),0,1);`

        Properties: int dateedit-flags int initial-time int lower-hour int time int upper-hour

        Signals: date_changed

        time_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2DateEdit GTK2.Gnome2DateEdit(int the_time, int show_time, int use_24_format)`

      Description

        Creates a new GnomeDateEdit widget which can be used to provide an easy to use way for entering dates and times.

      Method get_flags

        `int get_flags()`

      Description

        Get the flags.

      Method get_initial_time

        `int get_initial_time()`

      Description

        Queries the initial time that was set using set_time() or during creation.

      Method get_time

        `int get_time()`

      Description

        Return the time entered in the widget.

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK2.Hbox : Hbox

      Method set_flags

        `Gnome2.DateEdit set_flags(int flags)`

      Description

        Bitwise or of GNOME_DATE_EDIT_24_HR, GNOME_DATE_EDIT_SHOW_TIME and GNOME_DATE_EDIT_WEEK_STARTS_ON_MONDAY.

      Method set_popup_range

        `Gnome2.DateEdit set_popup_range(int low_hour, int up_hour)`

      Description

        Sets the range of times that will be provide by the time popup selectors.

      Method set_time

        `Gnome2.DateEdit set_time(int the_time)`

      Description

        Changes the displayed date and time in the GnomeDateEdit widget to be the one represented by the_time.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2Druid

      Description

        The GNOME druid is a system for assisting the user with installing a service. It is roughly equivalent in functionality to the "Wizards" available in Windows.

        There are two major parts of the druid, the Gnome2.Druid widget, and the set of W(Gnome2.DruidPage) widgets. The Gnome2.Druid widget is the main widget that interacts with the user. It has a Next, a Prev, and a Cancel button, and acts as a container for the pages. It is not a top-level window, so it needs to be put in a W(GTK2.Window) in almost all cases. The W(Gnome2.DruidPage) is a virtual widget, from which all of the actual content of the page inherits from. There are currently three of these available within gnome-libs.

        GNOME druids are fairly simple to program with. You start by creating a GnomeDruid into which you put all of your pages. This widget will handle the presentation of the W(GnomeDruidPage) widgets.

        You then create all appropriate W(GnomeDruidPage) widgets. There are three implementations of these, although there is no reason why more couldn't be written. They are the W(GnomeDruidPageStart), the W(GnomeDruidPageStandard), and the W(GnomeDruidPageFinish). The W(GnomeDruidPageStandard) acts as a W(Container), and is probably the most commonly used druid page. The other ones, as their names might suggest, are used at the endpoints of the druid. More information on the specific properties of these widgets can be found on their respective pages.

        You will need to add the pages to the druid in order for them to appear. The druid itself keeps an internal list of all pages, and using the prepend_page(), append_page(), and insert_page() functions will place them into it.

        Properties: int show-finish int show-help

        Signals: cancel This signal is emitted when the "cancel" button has been pressed. Note that the current druid page has the option to trap the signal and use it, if need be, preventing this signal from being emitted.

        help

      Method append_page

        `Gnome2.Druid append_page(GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage page)`

      Description

        This will append a GnomeDruidPage into the internal list of pages that the druid has.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2Druid GTK2.Gnome2Druid()`

      Description

        Create a new druid

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method insert_page

        `Gnome2.Druid insert_page(GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage back_page, GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage page)`

      Description

        This will insert page after back_page into the list of internal pages that the druid has. If back_page is not present in the list or is 0, page will be prepended to the list.

      Method prepend_page

        `Gnome2.Druid prepend_page(GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage page)`

      Description

        This will prepend a GnomeDruidPage into the internal list of pages that the druid has.

      Method set_buttons_sensitive

        `Gnome2.Druid set_buttons_sensitive(int back_sensitive, int next_sensitive, int cancel_sensitive, int help_sensitive)`

      Description

        Sets the sensitivity of the druid's control-buttons. If the variables are TRUE, then they will be clickable. This function is used primarily by the actual W(GnomeDruidPage) widgets.

      Method set_page

        `Gnome2.Druid set_page(GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage page)`

      Description

        This will make page the currently showing page in the druid. page must already be in the druid.

      Method set_show_finish

        `Gnome2.Druid set_show_finish(int show_finish)`

      Description

        Sets the text on the last button on the druid. If show_finish is TRUE, then the text becomes "Finish". If show_finish is FALSE, then the text becomes "Cancel".

      Method set_show_help

        `Gnome2.Druid set_show_help(int show_help)`

      Description

        Sets the "Help" button on the druid to be visible in the lower left corner of the widget, if show_help is true.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage

      Description

        This widget is a virtual widget to define the interface to a druid page. It's descendants are placed in a W(Gnome2.Druid) widget.

        Signals: back

        cancel

        finish

        next

        prepare

      Method back

        `int back()`

      Description

        This will emit the "back" signal for that particular page.

      Method cancel

        `int cancel()`

      Description

        This will emit the "cancel" signal for that particular page.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage GTK2.Gnome2DruidPage()`

      Description

        Creates a new Gnome2.DruidPage.

      Method finish

        `Gnome2.DruidPage finish()`

      Description

        This emits the "finish" signal for the page.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method next

        `int next()`

      Description

        This will emit the "next" signal for that particular page. It is called by gnome-druid exclusviely. It is expected that non-linear Druid's will override this signal and return true if it handles changing pages.

      Method prepare

        `Gnome2.DruidPage prepare()`

      Description

        This emits the "prepare" signal for the page. It is called by gnome-druid exclusively. This function is called immediately prior to a druid page being show so that it can "prepare" for display.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageEdge

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageEdge GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageEdge(int position, int|void anti_alias)`

      Description

        Create a new Gnome2.DruidPageEdge, with optional anti-aliasing.

      Inherit DruidPage

        inherit Gnome2.DruidPage : DruidPage

      Method set_bg_color

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_bg_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        This will set the background color.

      Method set_logo

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_logo(GTK2.GdkPixbuf logo)`

      Description

        Sets a GDK2.Pixbuf as the logo in the top right corner. If omitted, then no logo will be displayed.

      Method set_logo_bg_color

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_logo_bg_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the color behind the druid page's logo.

      Method set_text

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Sets the contents of the text portion.

      Method set_text_color

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_text_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the color of the text in the body of the page.

      Method set_textbox_color

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_textbox_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the color of the background in the main text area of the page.

      Method set_title

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the contents of the page's title text.

      Method set_title_color

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_title_color(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the color of the title text.

      Method set_top_watermark

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_top_watermark(GTK2.GdkPixbuf watermark)`

      Description

        Sets a GDK2.Pixbuf as the watermark on top of the top strip on the druid. If watermark is omitted, it is reset to the normal color.

      Method set_watermark

        `Gnome2.DruidPageEdge set_watermark(GTK2.GdkPixbuf watermark)`

      Description

        Sets a GDK2.Pixbuf as the watermark on the left strip on the druid. If watermark is omitted, it is reset to the normal color.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageStandard

      Description

        Properties: string background GDK2.Color background-gdk int background-set string contents-background GDK2.Color contents-background-gdk int contents-background-set GDK2.Pixbuf logo string logo-background GDK2.Color logo-background-gdk int logo-background-set string title string title-foreground GDK2.Color title-foreground-gdk int title-foreground-set GDK2.Pixbuf top-watermark

      Method append_item

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard append_item(string question, GTK2.Widget item, string additional_info)`

      Description

        Convenience function to add a GTK2.Widget to the vbox. This function creates a new contents section that has the question text followed by the item widget and then the additional_info text, all stacked vertically from top to bottom.

        The item widget could be something like a set of radio checkbuttons requesting a choice from the user.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageStandard GTK2.Gnome2DruidPageStandard(string|void title, GTK2.GdkPixbuf logo, GTK2.GdkPixbuf top_watermark)`

      Description

        Construct a new Gnome2.DruidPageStandard.

      Inherit DruidPage

        inherit Gnome2.DruidPage : DruidPage

      Method set_background

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_background(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the background color of the top section.

      Method set_contents_background

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_contents_background(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the color of the main contents section's background.

      Method set_logo

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_logo(GTK2.GdkPixbuf logo)`

      Description

        Sets a GDK2.Pixbuf as the logo in the top right corner. If omitted, then no logo will be displayed.

      Method set_logo_background

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_logo_background(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the background color of the logo.

      Method set_title

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the title.

      Method set_title_foreground

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_title_foreground(GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the title text to the specified color.

      Method set_top_watermark

        `Gnome2.DruidPageStandard set_top_watermark(GTK2.GdkPixbuf watermark)`

      Description

        Sets a GDK2.Pixbuf as the watermark on top of the top strip on the druid. If watermark is omitted, it is reset to the normal color.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2Href

      Description

        This widget is a GtkButton button that contains a URL. When clicked it invokes the configured browser for the URL you provided.

        `GTK2.Gnome2Href( "http://www.gnome.org", "GNOME Web Site" )`

        `GTK2.Gnome2Href( "http://www.gnome.org" )`

        Properties: string text string url

        Style properties: GDK.Color link-color

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2Href GTK2.Gnome2Href(string url, string|void label)`

      Description

        Created a GNOME href object, a label widget with a clickable action and an associated URL. If label is set to 0, url is used as the label.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Returns the contents of the label widget used to display the link text.

      Method get_url

        `string get_url()`

      Description

        Return the url

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_text

        `Gnome2.Href set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Sets the internal label widget text (used to display a URL's link text) to the given value.

      Method set_url

        `Gnome2.Href set_url(string url)`

      Description

        Sets the internal URL

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2IconEntry

      Description

        This widget provides the facilities to select an icon. An icon is displayed inside a button, when the button is pressed, an Icon selector (a dialog with a W(GnomeIconSelection) widget) pops up to let the user choose an icon. It also allows one to Drag and Drop the images to and from the preview button. Properties: string browse-dialog-title string filename string history-id GTK2.Dialog pick-dialog string pixmap-subdir

        Signals: browse

        changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2IconEntry GTK2.Gnome2IconEntry(string history_id, string title)`

      Description

        Creates a new icon entry widget

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Gets the file name of the image if it was possible to load it into the preview. That is, it will only return a filename if the image exists and it was possible to load it as an image.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

      Method pick_dialog

        `GTK2.Widget pick_dialog()`

      Description

        If a pick dialog exists, returns it. This is if you need to do something with all dialogs. You would use the browse signal with connect_after to get the pick dialog when it is displayed.

      Method set_browse_dialog_title

        `Gnome2.IconEntry set_browse_dialog_title(string title)`

      Description

        Set the title of the browse dialog.

      Method set_filename

        `int set_filename(string filename)`

      Description

        Sets the icon of Gnome2.IconEntry to be the one pointed to by filename.

      Method set_history_id

        `Gnome2.IconEntry set_history_id(string history_id)`

      Description

        Set the history_id of the entry in the browse dialog and reload the history.

      Method set_pixmap_subdir

        `Gnome2.IconEntry set_pixmap_subdir(string subdir)`

      Description

        Sets the subdirectory below gnome's default pixmap directory to use as the default path for the file entry.

    CLASS GTK2.Gnome2IconSelection

      Description

        An icon listing/chooser display.

      Method add_defaults

        `Gnome2.IconSelection add_defaults()`

      Description

        Adds the default pixmap directory into the selection widget.

      Method add_directory

        `Gnome2.IconSelection add_directory(string dir)`

      Description

        Adds the icons from the directory dir to the selection widget.

      Method clear

        `Gnome2.IconSelection clear(int|void not_shown)`

      Description

        Clear the currently shown icons, the ones that weren't shown yet are not cleared unless the not_shown parameter is given, in which case even those are cleared.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Gnome2IconSelection GTK2.Gnome2IconSelection()`

      Description

        Creates a new icon selection widget, it uses a W(GnomeIconList) for the listing of icons

      Method get_box

        `GTK2.Widget get_box()`

      Description

        Gets the W(Vbox) widget.

      Method get_icon

        `string get_icon(int full_path)`

      Description

        Gets the currently selected icon name, if full_path is true, it returns the full path to the icon, if none is selected it returns 0.

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

      Method select_icon

        `Gnome2.IconSelection select_icon(string filename)`

      Description

        Selects the icon filename. This icon must have already been added and shown

      Method show_icons

        `Gnome2.IconSelection show_icons()`

      Description

        Shows the icons inside the widget that were added with add_defaults and add_directory. Before this function isf called the icons aren't actually added to the listing and can't be picked by the user.

      Method stop_loading

        `Gnome2.IconSelection stop_loading()`

      Description

        Stop the loading of images when we are in the loop in show_icons.

    CLASS GTK2.HScrollbar

      Description

        A horizontal scrollbar. General documentation: See W(Scrollbar) `GTK2.HScrollbar(GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(300,15)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.HScrollbar GTK2.HScrollbar(GTK2.Adjustment adjustment_or_props)`

      Description

        Used to create a new hscrollbar widget.

      Inherit Scrollbar

        inherit GTK2.Scrollbar : Scrollbar

    CLASS GTK2.HandleBox

      Description

        The contents of a handle box can be 'dragged' out of the box by the user. The contents will then be placed in a separate window. `GTK2.HandleBox()->add(GTK2.Label("The contents"))`

        Properties: int handle-position int shadow int shadow-type int snap-edge int snap-edge-set

        Signals: child_attached Called when a new child is added to the box

        child_detached Called when a child is removed from the box

      Method create

        `GTK2.HandleBox GTK2.HandleBox(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new handle box widget.

      Method get_handle_position

        `int get_handle_position()`

      Description

        Get the handle position.

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Get the shadow type.

      Method get_snap_edge

        `int get_snap_edge()`

      Description

        Get the snap edge.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_handle_position

        `GTK2.HandleBox set_handle_position(int pos)`

      Description

        The position of the handle. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK2.HandleBox set_shadow_type(int shadow_type)`

      Description

        One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_snap_edge

        `GTK2.HandleBox set_snap_edge(int pos)`

      Description

        The edge to snap to. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP, or -1 for unset.

    CLASS GTK2.Hbox

      Description

        Most packing is done by creating boxes. These are invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into which come in two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box. This is the horizontal one. When packing widgets into a horizontal box, the objects are inserted horizontally from left to right or right to left depending on the call used.

        `GTK2.Hbox(0,0)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK2.Hbox(1,0)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK2.Hbox(1,40)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Hbox GTK2.Hbox(int|mapping uniformp_or_props, int|void hpadding)`

      Description

        Create a new horizontal box widget. If all_same_size is true, all widgets will have exactly the same size. hpadding is added to the left and right of the children.

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK2.Box : Box

    CLASS GTK2.HbuttonBox

      Description

        A HbuttonBox is very similar to a Hbox. The major diffference is that the button box is made to pack buttons in, and has a few convenience function for normal button layouts.

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_size_request(400,30)`

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)->set_size_request(400,30)`

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_EDGE)->set_size_request(400,30)`

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_START)->set_size_request(400,30)`

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_END)->set_size_request(400,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.HbuttonBox GTK2.HbuttonBox(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new horizontal button box

      Inherit ButtonBox

        inherit GTK2.ButtonBox : ButtonBox

    CLASS GTK2.Hpaned

      Description

        The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle that the user can drag to change the ratio. This widgets makes a horizontal division

        See W(Paned) for details.

        `GTK2.Hpaned()->add1(GTK2.Label("Left\nSide\nOf\nPane"))->add2(GTK2.Label("Right\nSide\nOf\nPane"))->set_size_request(100,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Hpaned GTK2.Hpaned(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Hpaned) widget.

      Inherit Paned

        inherit GTK2.Paned : Paned

    CLASS GTK2.Hscale

      Description

        The GTK2.HScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a horizontal slider. A GTK2.Adjustment is used to set the initial value, the lower and upper bounds, and the step and page increments.

        See W(Scale) for details

        The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent W(Scale) class's functions.

        `GTK2.Hscale(GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(300,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Hscale GTK2.Hscale(GTK2.Adjustment settings_or_min_props, float|void max, float|void step)`

      Description

        Used to create a new hscale widget. Either pass an W(Adjustment), or three floats representing min, max, and step values.

      Inherit Scale

        inherit GTK2.Scale : Scale

    CLASS GTK2.Hseparator

      Description

        Simply creates a horizontal separator. No bells or whistles. `GTK2.Hseparator()->set_size_request(300,3)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Hseparator GTK2.Hseparator(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Used to create a new hseparator widget.

      Inherit Separator

        inherit GTK2.Separator : Separator

    CLASS GTK2.IconFactory

      Description

        Icon factory, for holding icon sets.

      Method add

        `GTK2.IconFactory add(string stock_id, GTK2.IconSet icon_set)`

      Description

        Adds the given icon_set to the icon factory, under the name of stock_id. stock_id should be namespaced for your application, e.g. "myapp-whatever-icon". Normally applications create a GTK2.IconFactory, then add it to the list of default factories with add_default(). Then they pass the stock_id to widgets such as GTK2.Image to display the icon. Themes can provide an icon with the same name (such as "myapp-whatever-icon") to override your application's default icons. If an icon already existed in this factory for stock_id, it is unreferenced and replaced with the new icon_set.

      Method add_default

        `GTK2.IconFactory add_default()`

      Description

        Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories search by GTK2.Style->lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example, GTK2.Image->create("stock-id") will be able to find icons in factory. There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or application that comes with icons. The default icon factories can be overridden by themes.

      Method create

        `GTK2.IconFactory GTK2.IconFactory()`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.IconFactory. An icon factory manages a collection of GTK2.IconSets; a GTK2.IconSet manages a set of variants of a particular icon (i.e. a GTK2.IconSet contains variants for different sizes and widget states). Icons in an icon factory are named by a stock ID, which is a simple string identifying the icon. Each GTK2.Style has a list of GTK2.IconFactorys derived from the current theme; those icon factories are consulted first when searching for an icon. If the theme doesn't set a particular icon, GTK2+ looks for the icon in a list of default icon factories, maintained by add_default() and remove_default(). Applications with icons should add a default icon factory with their icons, which will allow themes to override the icons for the application.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method lookup

        `GTK2.IconSet lookup(string stock_id)`

      Description

        Looks up stock_id in the icon factory, returning an icon set if found, otherwise 0. For display to the user, you should use GTK2.Style->lookup_icon_set() on the GTK2.Style for the widget that will display the icon, instead of using this function directly, so that themes are taken into account.

      Method lookup_default

        `GTK2.IconSet lookup_default(string stock_id)`

      Description

        Looks for an icon in the list of default icon factories. For display to the user, you should use GTK2.Style->lookup_icon_set() on the GTK2.Style for the widget that will display the icon, instead of using this function directly, so that themes are taken into account.

      Method remove_default

        `GTK2.IconFactory remove_default()`

      Description

        Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon factories.

    CLASS GTK2.IconInfo

      Description

        Contains information found when looking up an icon in an icon theme.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.IconInfo copy()`

      Description

        Make a copy.

      Method get_base_size

        `int get_base_size()`

      Description

        Gets the base size for the icon. The base size is a size for the icon that was specified by the icon theme creator. This may be different than the actual size of image; an example of this is small emblem icons that can be attached to a larger icon. These icons will be given the same base size as the larger icons to which they are attached.

      Method get_builtin_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_builtin_pixbuf()`

      Description

        Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow GTK2+ to use built-in icon images, you must pass the GTK2.ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to GTK2.IconTheme->lookup_icon().

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Gets the filename for the icon. If the GTK2.ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed to GTK2.IconTheme->lookup_icon(), there may be no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this case, you should use get_builtin_pixbuf().

      Method load_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf load_icon()`

      Description

        Renders an icon previously looked up in an icon theme using GTK2.IconTheme->lookup_icon(); the size will be based on the size passed to GTK2.IconTheme->lookup_icon(). Note that the resulting pixbuf may not be exactly this size; an icon theme may have icons that differe slightly from their nominal sizes, and in addition GTK2+ will avoid scaling icons that it considers sufficiently close to the requested size or for which the source image would have to be scaled up too far. (This maintains sharpness.)

    CLASS GTK2.IconSet

      Description

        Iconset. A single icon.

      Method add_source

        `GTK2.IconSet add_source(GTK2.IconSource source)`

      Description

        Icon sets have a list of GTK2.IconSource, which they use as base icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in render_icon(), but GTK2.IconSet needs base images to work with. The base images and when to use them are described by a GTK2.IconSource.

        This function copies source, so you can reuse the same source immediately without affecting the icon set.

        An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direciton in Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive; and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.

        You should nearly always add a "default" icon source with all fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more specific source matches. GTK2.IconSet always prefers more specific icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you add the sources to the icon set does not matter.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.IconSet copy()`

      Description

        Create a copy.

      Method create

        `GTK2.IconSet GTK2.IconSet(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.IconSet. A GTK2.IconSet represents a single icon in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a GDK2.Pixbuf for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches some of the rendered GDK2.Pixbuf objects.

        Normally you would use GTK2.Widget->render_icon() instead of using GTK2.IconSet directly. The one case where you'd use GTK2.IconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in a GTK2.IconFactory.

      Method get_sizes

        `array get_sizes()`

      Description

        Obtains a list of icon sizes this icon set can render.

    CLASS GTK2.IconSize

      Description

        Iconsize.

      Method from_name

        `int from_name(string name)`

      Description

        Looks up the icon size associated with name.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name(int size)`

      Description

        Gets the canonical name of the given icon size.

      Method register

        `int register(string name, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Registers a new icon size, along the same lines as GTK2.ICON_SIZE_MENU, etc. Returns the integer value for the size.

      Method register_alias

        `GTK2.IconSize register_alias(string alias, int target)`

      Description

        Registers alias as another name for target. So calling GTK2.IconSize->from_name() with alias will return target.

    CLASS GTK2.IconSource

      Description

        Iconsource.

      Method create

        `GTK2.IconSource GTK2.IconSource()`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.IconSource. A GTK2.IconSource contains a GDK2.Pixbuf (or image filename) that serves as the base image for one or more of the icons in a GTK2.IconSet, along with a specification for which icons in the icon set will be based on that pixbuf or image file. An icon set contains a set of icons that represent "the same" logical concept in different states, different global text directions, and different sizes.

        So for example a web browser's "Back to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive; and it might change size depending on toolbar mode small/large icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of the icon. GTK2.IconSet contains a list of GTK2.IconSource from which it can derive specific icon variants in the set.

        In the simplest case, GTK2.IconSet contains one source pixbuf from which it derives all variants. The convenience function GTK2.IconSet->create(pixbuf) handles this case; if you only have one source pixbuf, just use that function.

        If you want to use a different base pixbuf for different icon variants, you create multiple icon sources, mark which variants they'll be used to create, and add them to the icon set with GTK2.IconSet->add_source().

        By default, the icon source has all parameters wildcarded. That is, the icon source will be used as the base icon for any desired text direction, widget state, or icon size.

      Method get_direction

        `int get_direction()`

      Description

        Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is not wildcarded.

      Method get_direction_wildcarded

        `int get_direction_wildcarded()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_direction_wildcarded().

      Method get_filename

        `string get_filename()`

      Description

        Retrieves the source filename, or empty.

      Method get_icon_name

        `string get_icon_name()`

      Description

        Retrieves the source icon name, or empty.

      Method get_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_pixbuf()`

      Description

        Retrieves the source pixbuf, or 0. In addition, if a filename source is in use, this function in some cases will return the pixbuf loaded from the filename. This is, for example, true for the GTK2.IconSource passed to the GTK2.Style->render_icon() virtual function.

      Method get_size

        `int get_size()`

      Description

        Obtains the icon size this source applies to. The return value is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is not wildcarded.

      Method get_size_wildcarded

        `int get_size_wildcarded()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_size_wildcarded().

      Method get_state

        `int get_state()`

      Description

        Obtains the widget state this icon source applies to. The return value is only useful/meaningful if the widget state is not wildcarded.

      Method get_state_wildcarded

        `int get_state_wildcarded()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_state_wildcarded().

      Method set_direction

        `GTK2.IconSource set_direction(int dir)`

      Description

        Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used with.

        Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually call set_direction_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it in addition to calling this function.

      Method set_direction_wildcarded

        `GTK2.IconSource set_direction_wildcarded(int setting)`

      Description

        If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used as the base image for an icon in any text direction. If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the text direction the icon source applies to should be set with set_direction(), and the icon source will only be used with that text direction.

        GTK2.IconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.

      Method set_filename

        `GTK2.IconSource set_filename(string filename)`

      Description

        Sets the name of an image file to use as a base image when creating icon variants for GTK2.IconSet. The filename must be absolute.

      Method set_icon_name

        `GTK2.IconSource set_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the name of an icon to look up in the current icon theme to use as a base image.

      Method set_pixbuf

        `GTK2.IconSource set_pixbuf(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Sets a pixbuf to use as a base image.

      Method set_size

        `GTK2.IconSource set_size(int size)`

      Description

        Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be with.

      Method set_size_wildcarded

        `GTK2.IconSource set_size_wildcarded(int setting)`

      Description

        If the icon size is wildcarded, this source can be used as the base image for an icon of any size. If the size is not wildcarded, then the size the source applies to should be set with set_size() and the icon source will only be used with that specific size.

      Method set_state

        `GTK2.IconSource set_state(int state)`

      Description

        Sets the widget state this icon source is intended to be used with.

      Method set_state_wildcarded

        `GTK2.IconSource set_state_wildcarded(int setting)`

      Description

        If the widget state is wildcarded, this source can be used as the base image for an icon in any state. If the widget state is not wildcarded, then the state the source applies to should be set with set_state() and the icon source will only be used with that specific state.

    CLASS GTK2.IconTheme

      Description

        Looking up icons by name.

        Signals: changed

      Method append_search_path

        `GTK2.IconTheme append_search_path(string path)`

      Description

        Appends a directory to the search path.

      Method create

        `GTK2.IconTheme GTK2.IconTheme()`

      Description

        Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used to lookup an icon by name in a particular icon theme. Usually you'll want to use get_default() rather than creating a new icon theme object from scratch.

      Method get_example_icon_name

        `string get_example_icon_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the current theme (for instance, to use when presenting a list of themes to the user.)

      Method get_icon_sizes

        `array get_icon_sizes(string name)`

      Description

        Returns an array of integers describing the sizes at which the icon is available without scaling. A size of -1 means that the icon is available in a scalable format.

      Method get_search_path

        `array get_search_path()`

      Description

        Gets the current search path.

      Method has_icon

        `int has_icon(string icon_name)`

      Description

        Checks whether this icon theme includes an icon for a particular name.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method list_icons

        `array list_icons(string|void context)`

      Description

        Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset of the icons can be listed by providing a context string. The set of values for the context string is system dependent, but will typically include such values as 'apps' and 'mimetypes'.

      Method load_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf load_icon(string name, int size, int flags)`

      Description

        Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size and renders it into a pixbuf.

      Method lookup_icon

        `GTK2.IconInfo lookup_icon(string name, int size, int flags)`

      Description

        Looks up a named icon and returns an object containing information such as the filename of the icon. The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using GTK2.IconInfo->load_icon().

      Method prepend_search_path

        `GTK2.IconTheme prepend_search_path(string path)`

      Description

        Prepends a directory to the search path.

      Method rescan_if_needed

        `int rescan_if_needed()`

      Description

        Checks to see if the icon theme has changed; if it has, any currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded next time this theme is accessed.

      Method set_custom_theme

        `GTK2.IconTheme set_custom_theme(string theme_name)`

      Description

        Sets the name of the icon theme that the GTK2.IconTheme object uses overriding system configuration. This function cannot be called on the icon theme objects return from get_default().

      Method set_search_path

        `GTK2.IconTheme set_search_path(array path)`

      Description

        Sets the search path for the icon theme object. When looking for an icon theme, GTK2+ will search for a subdirectory of one or more of the directories in path with the same name as the icon theme. (Themes from multiple of the path elemets are combined to allow themes to be extended by adding icons in the user's home directory.)

        In addition if an icon found isn't found either in the current icon theme or the default icon theme, and an image file with the right name is found directly in one of the elements of path, then that image will be used for the icon name. (This is a legacy feature, and new icons should be put into the default icon theme, which is called DEFAULT_THEME_NAME, rather than directly on the icon path.)

    CLASS GTK2.IconView

      Description

        GTK2.IconView provides an alternative view on a list model. It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like GTK2.TreeView, it allows to select one or multiple items (depending on the selection mode). In addition to seleciton with the arrow keys, GTK2.IconView supports rubberband selections, which is controlled by dragging the pointer. Properties: int column-spacing int columns int item-width int margin int markup-column GTK2.TreeModel model int orientation int pixbuf-column int row-spacing int selection-mode int spacing int text-column

        Style properties: int selection-box-alpha GDK2.Color selection-box-color

        Signals: activate_cursor_item

        item_activated

        move_cursor

        select_all

        select_cursor_item

        selection_changed

        set_scroll_adjustments

        toggle_cursor_item

        unselect_all

      Method create

        `GTK2.IconView GTK2.IconView(GTK2.TreeModel model_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.IconView widget Not implemented yet.

      Method get_column_spacing

        `int get_column_spacing()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the column-spacing property.

      Method get_columns

        `int get_columns()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the columns property.

      Method get_cursor

        `array get_cursor()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.TreePath and GTK2.CellRenderer of the current cursor path and cell. If the cursor isn't currently set, then path will be 0. If no cell currently has focus, then cell will be 0.

      Method get_item_at_pos

        `array get_item_at_pos(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Finds the path at the point (x,y) relative to widget coordinates. In contrast to get_path_at_pos(), this function also obtains the cell at the specified position.

      Method get_item_width

        `int get_item_width()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the item-width property.

      Method get_margin

        `int get_margin()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the margin property.

      Method get_markup_column

        `int get_markup_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column with markup text.

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Gets the model.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the orientation property.

      Method get_path_at_pos

        `GTK2.TreePath get_path_at_pos(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Finds the path at the point(x,y) relative to widget coordinates.

      Method get_pixbuf_column

        `int get_pixbuf_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column with pixbufs.

      Method get_reorderable

        `int get_reorderable()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.

      Method get_row_spacing

        `int get_row_spacing()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the row-spacing property.

      Method get_selected_items

        `array get_selected_items()`

      Description

        Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Not implemented yet.

      Method get_selection_mode

        `int get_selection_mode()`

      Description

        Gets the selection mode.

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Description

        Returns the value of the spacing property

      Method get_text_column

        `int get_text_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column with text.

      Method get_visible_range

        `array get_visible_range()`

      Description

        Returns the first and last visible path. Note that there may be invisible paths in between.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method item_activated

        `GTK2.IconView item_activated(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Activates the item determined by path.

      Method path_is_selected

        `int path_is_selected(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Returns true if the icon pointed to by path is currently selected. If icon does not point to a valid location, false is returned.

      Method scroll_to_path

        `GTK2.IconView scroll_to_path(GTK2.TreePath path, int use_align, float row_align, float col_align)`

      Description

        Moves the alignments to the position specified by path. row_align determines where the row is placed, and col_align determines where column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0. 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means center.

        If use_align is FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen. This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.

        This funciton only works if the model is set, and path is a valid row on the model. If the model changes before this icon view is realized, the centered path will be modified to reflect this change.

      Method select_all

        `GTK2.IconView select_all()`

      Description

        Selects all the icons. This widget must have its selection mode set to GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE.

      Method select_path

        `GTK2.IconView select_path(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Selects the row at path

      Method set_column_spacing

        `GTK2.IconView set_column_spacing(int column_spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the column-spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.

      Method set_columns

        `GTK2.IconView set_columns(int columns)`

      Description

        Sets the columns property which determines in how many columns the icons are arranged. If columns is -1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically to fill the available area.

      Method set_cursor

        `GTK2.IconView set_cursor(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int|void start_editing)`

      Description

        Sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is usefull when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular item. If cell is not 0, then focus is given to the cell speicified by it. Additionally, if start_editing is TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.

        This function is often followed by grab_focus() in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.

      Method set_item_width

        `GTK2.IconView set_item_width(int item_width)`

      Description

        Sets the item-width property which specifies the width to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will automatically determine a suitable item size.

      Method set_margin

        `GTK2.IconView set_margin(int margin)`

      Description

        Sets the margin property.

      Method set_markup_column

        `GTK2.IconView set_markup_column(int column)`

      Description

        Sets the column with markup information to be column.

      Method set_model

        `GTK2.IconView set_model(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Sets the model.

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK2.IconView set_orientation(int orientation)`

      Description

        Sets the orientation property which determines whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. One of ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and ORIENTATION_VERTICAL

      Method set_pixbuf_column

        `GTK2.IconView set_pixbuf_column(int column)`

      Description

        Sets the column with pixbufs to be column.

      Method set_reorderable

        `GTK2.IconView set_reorderable(int setting)`

      Description

        This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models. Both GTK2.TreeStore and GTK2.ListStore support this. If setting is TRUE, then the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's "row-inserted" and "row-deleted" signals.

      Method set_row_spacing

        `GTK2.IconView set_row_spacing(int row_spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the row-spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.

      Method set_selection_mode

        `GTK2.IconView set_selection_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets the selection mode. One of SELECTION_BROWSE, SELECTION_MULTIPLE, SELECTION_NONE and SELECTION_SINGLE

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK2.IconView set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the spacing property which specifies the space which is inserted between the cells (i.e. the icon and the text) of an item.

      Method set_text_column

        `GTK2.IconView set_text_column(int column)`

      Description

        Sets the column with text to be column.

      Method unselect_all

        `GTK2.IconView unselect_all()`

      Description

        Unselects all the icons.

      Method unselect_path

        `GTK2.IconView unselect_path(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Unselects the row at path

    CLASS GTK2.Image

      Description

        An image is a image object stored in client, not X server, memory. A pixmap, on the other hand, is a image object stored in the X-server. See GDK2.Image and GDK2.Pixmap.

        `GTK2.Image("tornado_nguyen_big.jpg");`

        Properties: string file string icon-name icon-set int icon-size GDK2.Image image GDK2.Pixmap mask GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf GDK2.PixbufAnimation pixbuf-animation int pixel-size GDK2.Pixmap pixmap string stock int storage-type IMAGE_ANIMATION, IMAGE_EMPTY, IMAGE_ICON_NAME, IMAGE_ICON_SET, IMAGE_IMAGE, IMAGE_PIXBUF, IMAGE_PIXMAP and IMAGE_STOCK

      Method clear

        `GTK2.Image clear()`

      Description

        Resets the image to be empty.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Image GTK2.Image(string|GdkPixbuf|GdkPixbufAnimation|GdkImage|GdkPixmap|mapping file_or_props, GTK2.GdkBitmap mask_or_size)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Image) from either a file or a GDK2.Pixbuf.

      Method get_animation

        `GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation get_animation()`

      Description

        Gets the GDK2.PixbufAnimation being displayed.

      Method get_icon_name

        `mapping get_icon_name()`

      Description

        Gets the icon name and size.

      Method get_image

        `mapping get_image()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "image":GDK2.Image img, "mask":GDK2.Bitmap mask ])

      Method get_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_pixbuf()`

      Description

        Gets the GDK2.Pixbuf being displayed. The storage type of the image must be GTK2.IMAGE_EMPTY or GTK2.IMAGE_PIXBUF).

      Method get_pixel_size

        `int get_pixel_size()`

      Description

        Gets the pixel size used for named icons.

      Method get_pixmap

        `mapping get_pixmap()`

      Description

        Gets the pixmap and mask.

      Method get_stock

        `mapping get_stock()`

      Description

        Gets the stock icon name and size.

      Method get_storage_type

        `int get_storage_type()`

      Description

        Gets the type of representation being used to store data. If it has no image data, the return value will be GTK2.IMAGE_EMPTY. One of IMAGE_ANIMATION, IMAGE_EMPTY, IMAGE_ICON_NAME, IMAGE_ICON_SET, IMAGE_IMAGE, IMAGE_PIXBUF, IMAGE_PIXMAP and IMAGE_STOCK

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK2.Misc : Misc

      Method set_from_animation

        `GTK2.Image set_from_animation(GTK2.GdkPixbufAnimation anim)`

      Description

        Causes the W(Image) to display the given animation.

      Method set_from_file

        `GTK2.Image set_from_file(string filename)`

      Description

        Set the image from a file.

      Method set_from_icon_name

        `GTK2.Image set_from_icon_name(string icon_name, int size)`

      Description

        Sets from an icon name.

      Method set_from_icon_set

        `GTK2.Image set_from_icon_set(GTK2.IconSet icon_set, int size)`

      Description

        Set this image from an icon set.

      Method set_from_image

        `GTK2.Image set_from_image(GTK2.GdkImage gdk_image, GTK2.GdkBitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set this image from a GDK2.Image plus optional mask.

      Method set_from_pixbuf

        `GTK2.Image set_from_pixbuf(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Set image from a pixbuf

      Method set_from_pixmap

        `GTK2.Image set_from_pixmap(GTK2.GdkPixmap pixmap, GTK2.GdkBitmap mask)`

      Description

        Set this image from a GDK2.Pixmap plus optional mask.

      Method set_from_stock

        `GTK2.Image set_from_stock(string stock_id, int size)`

      Description

        Sets from a stock icon. Sample icon names are GTK2.STOCK_OPEN, GTK2.STOCK_EXIT. Sample stock sizes are GTK2.ICON_SIZE_MENU, GTK2.ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR. If the stock name isn't known, the image will be empty.

      Method set_pixel_size

        `GTK2.Image set_pixel_size(int pixel_size)`

      Description

        Sets the pixel size to use for named icons. If the pixel size is set to a value != -1, it is used instead of the icon size set by set_from_icon_name().

    CLASS GTK2.ImageMenuItem

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.Widget image

      Method create

        `GTK2.ImageMenuItem GTK2.ImageMenuItem(string|mapping label)`

      Description

        Create a new ImageMenuItem.

      Method get_image

        `GTK2.Widget get_image()`

      Description

        Gets the widget that is currently set as the image.

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK2.MenuItem : MenuItem

      Method set_image

        `GTK2.ImageMenuItem set_image(GTK2.Widget image)`

      Description

        Sets the image of the image menu item.

    CLASS GTK2.Invisible

      Description

        An invisible container, useful, eh? :) Properties: GDK2.Screen screen

      Method create

        `GTK2.Invisible GTK2.Invisible(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new invisible widget

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen()`

      Description

        Gets the screen associated with this object.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method set_screen

        `GTK2.Invisible set_screen(GTK2.GdkScreen screen)`

      Description

        Sets the screen where this object will be displayed.

    CLASS GTK2.Item

      Description

        This class is inherited by all 'item' type of widgets.

        Signals: deselect

        select

        toggle

      Method deselect

        `GTK2.Item deselect()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'deselect' event.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method select

        `GTK2.Item select()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'select' event.

      Method toggle

        `GTK2.Item toggle()`

      Description

        Emulate a 'toggle' event.

    CLASS GTK2.KeywordListTag

      Method create

        `GTK2.KeywordListTag GTK2.KeywordListTag(string id, string name, array keywords, int case_sensitive, int match_empty_string_at_beginning, int match_empty_string_at_end, string beginning_regex, string end_regex)`

      Description

        Creates a new keyword list tag object with the provided arguments.

      Inherit SourceTag

        inherit GTK2.SourceTag : SourceTag

    CLASS GTK2.Label

      Description

        A simple text label. `GTK2.Label("A simple text label")`

        `GTK2.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")`

        `GTK2.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")->set_justify(GTK2.JUSTIFY_LEFT)`

        `GTK2.Label("Multi\nline text\nlabel here")->set_justify(GTK2.JUSTIFY_RIGHT)`

        Properties: float angle Pango.AttrList attributes int cursor-position int ellipsize PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE and PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START int justfy JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT string label int max-width-chars int mnemonic-keyval int mnemonic-widget string pattern int selectable int single-line-mode int use-markup int use-underline int width-chars int wrap

        Signals: copy_clipboard

        move_cursor

        populate_popup

      Method create

        `GTK2.Label GTK2.Label(string|mapping text_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new label.

      Method get_angle

        `float get_angle()`

      Description

        Gets the angle of rotation for the label.

      Method get_ellipsize

        `int get_ellipsize()`

      Description

        Returns the ellipsizing position of the label.

      Method get_justify

        `int get_justify()`

      Description

        Returns the justification of the label.

      Method get_label

        `string get_label()`

      Description

        Fetches the text from a label widget including any underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup.

      Method get_layout

        `GTK2.Pango.Layout get_layout()`

      Description

        Gets the Pango.Layout used to display the label. The layout is useful to e.g. convert text positions to pixel positions, in combination with get_layout_offsets().

      Method get_layout_offsets

        `mapping get_layout_offsets()`

      Description

        Obtains the coordinates where the label will draw the Pango.Layout representing the text in the label; useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the Pango.Layout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the label is clicked. Of course, you will need to create a GTK2.EventBox to receive the events, and pack the label inside it, since labels are a GTK2.NO_WINDOW widget. Remember when using the Pango.Layout functions you need to convert to and from pixels using GTK2.PANGO_SCALE.

      Method get_line_wrap

        `int get_line_wrap()`

      Description

        Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped.

      Method get_line_wrap_mode

        `int get_line_wrap_mode()`

      Description

        Returns line wrap mode used by the label.

      Method get_max_width_chars

        `int get_max_width_chars()`

      Description

        Retrieves the desired maximum width, in characters.

      Method get_mnemonic_keyval

        `int get_mnemonic_keyval()`

      Description

        If the label has been set so that is has a mnemonic key, this function returns the keyval used for the mnemonic accelerator. If there is no mnemonic set up it returns GDK_VoidSymbol.

      Method get_mnemonic_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_mnemonic_widget()`

      Description

        Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut).

      Method get_selectable

        `int get_selectable()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_selectable().

      Method get_selection_bounds

        `mapping get_selection_bounds()`

      Description

        Gets the selected range of characters in the label. If there isn't a selection, returns -1 for both start and end.

      Method get_single_line_mode

        `int get_single_line_mode()`

      Description

        Returns whether the label is in single line mode.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Fetches the text from a label widget, as displayed on the screen. This does not include any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics or Pango markup. (see get_label()).

      Method get_use_markup

        `int get_use_markup()`

      Description

        Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with the Pango text markup language.

      Method get_use_underline

        `int get_use_underline()`

      Description

        Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a mnemonic.

      Method get_width_chars

        `int get_width_chars()`

      Description

        Retrieves the desired width, in characters.

      Inherit Misc

        inherit GTK2.Misc : Misc

      Method select_region

        `GTK2.Label select_region(int start_offset, int end_offset)`

      Description

        Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable. See set_selectable(). If the label is not selectable, this function has no effect. If start_offset or end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.

      Method set_angle

        `GTK2.Label set_angle(int|float angle)`

      Description

        Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from bottom to top, and angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle setting for the label is igrnored if the lable is selectable, wrapped, or ellipsized.

      Method set_ellipsize

        `GTK2.Label set_ellipsize(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text if there is not enough space to render the entire string. One of PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE and PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START.

      Method set_justify

        `GTK2.Label set_justify(int jtype)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to each other. GTK2.JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the widget is first created. If you instead want to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use set_alignment() instead. set_justify() has no efect on labels containing only a single line. One of JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT.

      Method set_label

        `GTK2.Label set_label(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the text of the label. The label is interpreted as including embedded underlines and/or Pango markup depending on the values of use-underline and use-markup.

      Method set_line_wrap

        `GTK2.Label set_line_wrap(int wrap)`

      Description

        Toggles line wrapping within the widget. True makes it break lines if text exceeds the widget's size. False lets the text get cut off by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.

      Method set_line_wrap_mode

        `GTK2.Label set_line_wrap_mode(int wrap_mode)`

      Description

        If line wrapping is on, this controls how the line wrapping is done. The Default is Pango.WRAP_WORD, which means wrap on word boundaries.

      Method set_markup

        `GTK2.Label set_markup(string text)`

      Description

        Parses text which is marked up with the Pango text markup language, setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results.

      Method set_markup_with_mnemonic

        `GTK2.Label set_markup_with_mnemonic(string text)`

      Description

        Parses text which is marked up with the Pango text markup language, setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If characters in text are preceded by an underscore, they are underline indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.

        The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using set_mnemonic_widget().

      Method set_max_width_chars

        `GTK2.Label set_max_width_chars(int n_chars)`

      Description

        Sets the desired maximum width in characters to n_chars.

      Method set_mnemonic_widget

        `GTK2.Label set_mnemonic_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        If the label has been set so that it has a mnemonic key (using i.e. set_markup_with_mnemonic(), set_text_with_mnemonic(), or the "use_underline" property) the label can be associated with a widget that is the target of the mnemonic. When the label is inside a widget (like a GTK2.Button or GTK2.Notebook tab) it is automatically associated with the correct widget, but sometimes (i.e. when the target is a GTK2.Entry next to the label) you need to set it explicitly using this function.

        The target widget will be accelerated by emitting "mnemonic_activate" on it. The default handler for this signal will activate the widget if there are no mnemonic collisions and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.

      Method set_pattern

        `GTK2.Label set_pattern(string pattern_string)`

      Description

        A string with either spaces or underscores. It should be of the same length as the text.

        When a character in the text has a matching _ in the pattern, the character in the label will be underlined.

      Method set_selectable

        `GTK2.Label set_selectable(int setting)`

      Description

        Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for copy and past.

      Method set_single_line_mode

        `GTK2.Label set_single_line_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets whether the label is in single line mode.

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.Label set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Set the text in the label

      Method set_text_with_mnemonic

        `GTK2.Label set_text_with_mnemonic(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Sets the label's text from the string text. If characters in text are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chose automatically, or explicitly using set_mnemonic_widget().

      Method set_use_markup

        `GTK2.Label set_use_markup(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in Pango's text markup language.

      Method set_use_underline

        `GTK2.Label set_use_underline(int setting)`

      Description

        If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.

      Method set_width_chars

        `GTK2.Label set_width_chars(int n_chars)`

      Description

        Sets the desired width in characters to n_chars.

    CLASS GTK2.Layout

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment int height GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment int width

        Child properties: int x int y

        Signals: set_scroll_adjustments

      Method create

        `GTK2.Layout GTK2.Layout(GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment_or_props, GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.Layout.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Gets the GTK2.Adjustment used for communicaiton between the horizontal scrollbar and this layout. This should only be called after the layout has been placed in a GTK2.ScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for scrolling.

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Gets the vertical GTK2.Adjustment.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method move

        `GTK2.Layout move(GTK2.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Moves a current child to a new position.

      Method put

        `GTK2.Layout put(GTK2.Widget widget, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Adds widget to the layout at position (x,y). The layout becomes the new parent.

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Layout set_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.

      Method set_size

        `GTK2.Layout set_size(int xsize, int ysize)`

      Description

        Sets the size of the scrollable area of the layout.

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Layout set_vadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Sets the vertical scroll adjustment for the layout.

    CLASS GTK2.LineCommentTag

      Method create

        `GTK2.LineCommentTag GTK2.LineCommentTag(string id, string name, string pattern_start)`

      Description

        Creates a new line comment tag object with the provided arguments.

      Inherit SourceTag

        inherit GTK2.SourceTag : SourceTag

    CLASS GTK2.LinkButton

      Description

        Properties:

        string uri A GTK2.LinkButton is a GTK2.Button with a hyperlink, similar to the one used by web browsers, which triggers an action when clicked. It is useful to show quick links to resources.

      Method create

        `GTK2.LinkButton GTK2.LinkButton(string|mapping uri_or_props, string|void label)`

      Description

        Creates a new LinkButton.

      Method get_uri

        `string get_uri()`

      Description

        Retrieves the URI set using set_uri().

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_uri

        `GTK2.LinkButton set_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Sets uri as the URI.

    CLASS GTK2.ListStore

      Description

        A list-like data structure that can be used with W(TreeView).

      Method append

        `GTK2.TreeIter append()`

      Description

        Append a new row.

      Method clear

        `GTK2.ListStore clear()`

      Description

        Removes all rows.

      Method create

        `GTK2.ListStore GTK2.ListStore(array types)`

      Description

        Create a new list store with as many columns as there are items in the array. A type is either a string representing a type name, such as "int" or "float", or an actual widget. If it is a widget, the column in question should be a widget of the same type that you would like this column to represent.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Inherit TreeDragDest

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragDest : TreeDragDest

      Inherit TreeDragSource

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragSource : TreeDragSource

      Inherit TreeModel

        inherit GTK2.TreeModel : TreeModel

      Inherit TreeSortable

        inherit GTK2.TreeSortable : TreeSortable

      Method insert

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert(int position)`

      Description

        Insert a row at position. If parent is valid, will create as child, otherwise at top level. If position is larger than then number of rows at that level, it will be added to the end of the list. iter will be changed to point to the new row.

      Method insert_after

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert_after(GTK2.TreeIter sibling)`

      Description

        Insert a new row after sibling. If sibling is 0, then the row will be prepended to parent's children. If parent and sibling are both 0, then the row will be prepended to the toplevel.

      Method insert_before

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert_before(GTK2.TreeIter sibling)`

      Description

        Insert a row before sibling. If sibling is 0, then the row will be appended to parent's children. If parent and sibling are 0, then the row will be appended to the toplevel.

      Method move_after

        `GTK2.ListStore move_after(GTK2.TreeIter iter, GTK2.TreeIter position)`

      Description

        Moves iter to after position. These should be at the same level. This only works if the store is unsorted. If position is omitted, iter will be moved to the start of the level.

      Method move_before

        `GTK2.ListStore move_before(GTK2.TreeIter iter, GTK2.TreeIter position)`

      Description

        Moves iter to before position. These should be at the same level. This only works if the store is unsorted. If position is omitted, iter will be moved to the end of the level.

      Method prepend

        `GTK2.TreeIter prepend()`

      Description

        Prepend a new row.

      Method remove

        `GTK2.ListStore remove(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Remove iter. iter is set to the next valid row at that level, or invalidated if it was the last one.

      Method set_row

        `GTK2.ListStore set_row(GTK2.TreeIter iter, array values)`

      Description

        Set the data in an entire row.

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.ListStore set_value(GTK2.TreeIter iter, int column, mixed value)`

      Description

        Set the data in the cell specified by iter and column.

      Method swap

        `GTK2.ListStore swap(GTK2.TreeIter a, GTK2.TreeIter b)`

      Description

        Swap 2 rows. Only works if this store is unsorted.

    CLASS GTK2.Menu

      Description

        A GTK2.Menu is a W(MenuShell) that implements a drop down menu consisting of a list of W(MenuItem) objects which can be navigated and activated by the user to perform application functions.

        A GTK2.Menu is most commonly dropped down by activating a W(MenuItem) in a W(MenuBar) or popped up by activating a W(MenuItem) in another GTK2.Menu.

        A GTK2.Menu can also be popped up by activating a W(OptionMenu). Other composite widgets such as the W(Notebook) can pop up a GTK2.Menu as well.

        Applications can display a GTK2.Menu as a popup menu by calling the popup() function. The example below shows how an application can pop up a menu when the 3rd mouse button is pressed.

               GTK2.Menu menu = create_menu();
               GTK2.Window window = create_window();
               window->signal_connect( "button_press_event", lambda(GTK2.Menu m,
                                                                    GTK2.Window w,
                                                                    mapping e ) {
                         if( e->button == 3 )
                          menu->popup();
                      }, menu );

        Properties: int tearoff-state string tearoff-title

        Child properties: int bottom-attach int left-attach int right-attach int top-attach

        Style properties: int horizontal-offset int vertical-offset int vertical-padding

        Signals: move_scroll

      Method attach

        `GTK2.Menu attach(GTK2.Widget child, int left_attach, int right_attach, int top_attach, int bottom_attach)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to a (table) menu. The number of 'cells' that an item will occupy is specified by left_attach, right_attach, top_attach, and bottom_attach. These each represent the leftmost, rightmost, uppermost and lower column row numbers of the table.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Menu GTK2.Menu(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.Menu widget.

      Method detach

        `GTK2.Menu detach()`

      Description

        Detaches the menu from the widget to which it had been attached.

      Method get_accel_group

        `GTK2.AccelGroup get_accel_group()`

      Description

        Gets the W(AccelGroup) which holds global accelerators for the menu.

      Method get_active

        `GTK2.Widget get_active()`

      Description

        Returns the selected menu item from the menu. This is used by the W(OptionMenu).

      Method get_attach_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_attach_widget()`

      Description

        Returns the W(Widget) that the menu is attached to.

      Method get_for_attach_widget

        `array get_for_attach_widget()`

      Description

        Returns a list of the menus which are attached to this widget.

      Method get_tearoff_state

        `int get_tearoff_state()`

      Description

        Returns whether the menu is torn off.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Returns the title of the menu.

      Inherit MenuShell

        inherit GTK2.MenuShell : MenuShell

      Method popdown

        `GTK2.Menu popdown()`

      Description

        Removes the menu from the screen.

      Method popup

        `GTK2.Menu popup(int|void button_pressed_to_show_menu)`

      Description

        The default button is 3.

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK2.Menu reorder_child(GTK2.Widget child, int position)`

      Description

        Moves a W(MenuItem) to a new position within the GTK2.Menu.

      Method reposition

        `GTK2.Menu reposition()`

      Description

        Repositions the menu according to its position function.

      Method set_accel_group

        `GTK2.Menu set_accel_group(GTK2.AccelGroup accelerators)`

      Description

        Set the W(AccelGroup) which holds global accelerators for the menu.

      Method set_accel_path

        `GTK2.Menu set_accel_path(string accel_path)`

      Description

        Sets an accelerator path for this menu.

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.Menu set_active(int activep)`

      Description

        Selects the specified menu item within the menu. This is used by the W(OptionMenu).

      Method set_screen

        `GTK2.Menu set_screen(GTK2.GdkScreen screen)`

      Description

        Sets the screen on which the menu is displayed.

      Method set_tearoff_state

        `GTK2.Menu set_tearoff_state(int torn_off)`

      Description

        Changes the tearoff state of the menu. A menu is normally displayed as a drop down menu which persists as long as the menu is active. It can also be displayed as a tearoff menu which persists until it is closed or reattached.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.Menu set_title(string new_title)`

      Description

        Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu is shown as a tearoff menu.

    CLASS GTK2.MenuBar

      Description

        Basically a horizontal W(Menu). The menu image cannot be grabbed automatically, but this is how you would create a menu all in one line. This is not the recommended coding style. `GTK2.MenuBar()->add(GTK2.MenuItem("Menu")->set_submenu(GTK2.Menu()->add(GTK2.MenuItem("Sub")))->select()->activate())->add(GTK2.MenuItem("Bar"))`

        Properties: int child-pack-direction int pack-direction

        Style properties: int internal-padding int shadow-type

      Method create

        `GTK2.MenuBar GTK2.MenuBar(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new menu bar.

      Method get_child_pack_direction

        `int get_child_pack_direction()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current child pack direction.

      Method get_pack_direction

        `int get_pack_direction()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar.

      Inherit MenuShell

        inherit GTK2.MenuShell : MenuShell

      Method set_child_pack_direction

        `GTK2.MenuBar set_child_pack_direction(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.

      Method set_pack_direction

        `GTK2.MenuBar set_pack_direction(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets how items should be packed inside a menubar. One of PACK_DIRECTION_BTT, PACK_DIRECTION_LTR, PACK_DIRECTION_RTL and PACK_DIRECTION_TTB.

    CLASS GTK2.MenuItem

      Description

        Menu items, to be added to menus. Properties GTK2.Menu submenu

        Style properties: int arrow-spacing int horizontal-padding int selected-shadow-type int toggle-spacing

        Signals: activate

        activate_item

        toggle_size_allocate

        toggle_size_request

      Method activate

        `GTK2.MenuItem activate()`

      Description

        Emulate an activate signal

      Method create

        `GTK2.MenuItem GTK2.MenuItem(string|mapping label_or_props)`

      Description

        If a string is supplied, a W(Label) widget is created using that string and added to the item. Otherwise, you should add another widget to the list item with -&gt;add().

      Method deselect

        `GTK2.MenuItem deselect()`

      Description

        Emulate a deselect signal

      Method get_right_justified

        `int get_right_justified()`

      Description

        Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right side of the menu bar.

      Method get_submenu

        `GTK2.Widget get_submenu()`

      Description

        Gets the submenu underneath this menu item.

      Inherit Activatable

        inherit GTK2.Activatable : Activatable

      Inherit Item

        inherit GTK2.Item : Item

      Method select

        `GTK2.MenuItem select()`

      Description

        Emulate a select signal

      Method set_accel_path

        `GTK2.MenuItem set_accel_path(string path)`

      Description

        Sets the accelerator path.

      Method set_right_justified

        `GTK2.MenuItem set_right_justified(int setting)`

      Description

        Make the menu item stick to the right edge of it's container.

      Method set_submenu

        `GTK2.MenuItem set_submenu(GTK2.Widget menu)`

      Description

        Set the submenu for this menu button.

      Method toggle_size_allocate

        `GTK2.MenuItem toggle_size_allocate(int allocation)`

      Description

        Emits the "toggle-size-allocate" signal on the given item.

      Method toggle_size_request

        `int toggle_size_request(int requisition)`

      Description

        Emits the "toggle-size-request" signal on the given item.

    CLASS GTK2.MenuShell

      Description

        A GTK2.MenuShell is the abstract base class used to derive the W(Menu) and W(MenuBar) subclasses.

        A GTK2.MenuShell is a container of W(MenuItem) objects arranged in a list which can be navigated, selected, and activated by the user to perform application functions. A W(MenuItem) can have a submenu associated with it, allowing for nested hierarchical menus.

        Signals: activate_current An action signal that activates the current menu item within the menu shell.

        cancel An action signal which cancels the selection within the menu shell. Causes the selection-done signal to be emitted.

        cycle_focus

        deactivate This signal is emitted when a menu shell is deactivated.

        move_current An action signal which moves the current menu item in the direction specified.

        move_selected

        selection_done This signal is emitted when a selection has been completed within a menu shell.

      Method activate_item

        `GTK2.MenuShell activate_item(GTK2.Widget menu_item, int force_deactivate)`

      Description

        Activates the menu item within the menu shell.

      Method append

        `GTK2.MenuShell append(GTK2.Widget what)`

      Description

        Adds a new W(MenuItem) to the end of the menu shell's item list. Same as 'add'.

      Method cancel

        `GTK2.MenuShell cancel()`

      Description

        Cancels the selection within the menu shell.

      Method deactivate

        `GTK2.MenuShell deactivate()`

      Description

        Deactivates the menu shell. Typically this results in the menu shell being erased from the screen.

      Method deselect

        `GTK2.MenuShell deselect()`

      Description

        Deselects the currently selected item from the menu shell, if any.

      Method get_children

        `array get_children()`

      Description

        This function returns all children of the menushell as an array.

      Method get_take_focus

        `int get_take_focus()`

      Description

        Returns TRUE if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method insert

        `GTK2.MenuShell insert(GTK2.Widget what, int where)`

      Description

        Add a widget after the specified location

      Method prepend

        `GTK2.MenuShell prepend(GTK2.Widget what)`

      Description

        Add a menu item to the start of the widget (for a menu: top, for a bar: left)

      Method select_first

        `GTK2.MenuShell select_first(int search_sensitive)`

      Description

        Select the first visible or selectable child of the menu shell; don't select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff item.

      Method select_item

        `GTK2.MenuShell select_item(GTK2.Widget menuitem)`

      Description

        Selects the menu item from the menu shell.

      Method set_take_focus

        `GTK2.MenuShell set_take_focus(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is TRUE (the default), the menu shell will take the keyboard focus so that it will receive all keyboard events which is needed to enable keyboard navigation in menus.

    CLASS GTK2.MenuToolButton

      Description

        Properties to be notified. GTK2.Menu menu

        Signals: show_menu

      Method create

        `GTK2.MenuToolButton GTK2.MenuToolButton(GTK2.Widget icon, string|void label)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.MenuToolButton. If icon is a string, label should be omitted. If it isn't, it will be igrnored. The result will be a button from a stock item, one of STOCK_ABOUT, STOCK_ADD, STOCK_APPLY, STOCK_BOLD, STOCK_CANCEL, STOCK_CDROM, STOCK_CLEAR, STOCK_CLOSE, STOCK_COLOR_PICKER, STOCK_CONNECT, STOCK_CONVERT, STOCK_COPY, STOCK_CUT, STOCK_DELETE, STOCK_DIALOG_AUTHENTICATION, STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR, STOCK_DIALOG_INFO, STOCK_DIALOG_QUESTION, STOCK_DIALOG_WARNING, STOCK_DIRECTORY, STOCK_DISCONNECT, STOCK_DND, STOCK_DND_MULTIPLE, STOCK_EDIT, STOCK_EXECUTE, STOCK_FILE, STOCK_FIND, STOCK_FIND_AND_REPLACE, STOCK_FLOPPY, STOCK_FULLSCREEN, STOCK_GOTO_BOTTOM, STOCK_GOTO_FIRST, STOCK_GOTO_LAST, STOCK_GOTO_TOP, STOCK_GO_BACK, STOCK_GO_DOWN, STOCK_GO_FORWARD, STOCK_GO_UP, STOCK_HARDDISK, STOCK_HELP, STOCK_HOME, STOCK_INDENT, STOCK_INDEX, STOCK_INFO, STOCK_ITALIC, STOCK_JUMP_TO, STOCK_JUSTIFY_CENTER, STOCK_JUSTIFY_FILL, STOCK_JUSTIFY_LEFT, STOCK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT, STOCK_LEAVE_FULLSCREEN, STOCK_MEDIA_FORWARD, STOCK_MEDIA_NEXT, STOCK_MEDIA_PAUSE, STOCK_MEDIA_PLAY, STOCK_MEDIA_PREVIOUS, STOCK_MEDIA_RECORD, STOCK_MEDIA_REWIND, STOCK_MEDIA_STOP, STOCK_MISSING_IMAGE, STOCK_NETWORK, STOCK_NEW, STOCK_NO, STOCK_OK, STOCK_OPEN, STOCK_PASTE, STOCK_PREFERENCES, STOCK_PRINT, STOCK_PRINT_PREVIEW, STOCK_PROPERTIES, STOCK_QUIT, STOCK_REDO, STOCK_REFRESH, STOCK_REMOVE, STOCK_REVERT_TO_SAVED, STOCK_SAVE, STOCK_SAVE_AS, STOCK_SELECT_COLOR, STOCK_SELECT_FONT, STOCK_SORT_ASCENDING, STOCK_SORT_DESCENDING, STOCK_SPELL_CHECK, STOCK_STOP, STOCK_STRIKETHROUGH, STOCK_UNDELETE, STOCK_UNDERLINE, STOCK_UNDO, STOCK_UNINDENT, STOCK_YES, STOCK_ZOOM_100, STOCK_ZOOM_FIT, STOCK_ZOOM_IN and STOCK_ZOOM_OUT. If icon is a GTK2.Widget, it will be used as the icon, and label will be the label. The label must exist if that is the case.

      Method get_menu

        `GTK2.Widget get_menu()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.Menu.

      Inherit ToolButton

        inherit GTK2.ToolButton : ToolButton

      Method set_arrow_tooltip

        `GTK2.MenuToolButton set_arrow_tooltip(GTK2.Tooltips tooltips, string tip_text, string tip_private)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.Tooltips object to be used for the arrow button which pops up the menu.

      Method set_menu

        `GTK2.MenuToolButton set_menu(GTK2.Widget menu)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.Menu that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow.

    CLASS GTK2.MessageDialog

      Description

        A dialog with an image representing the type of message (Error, Question). alongside some message text. It's simply a convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of GTK2.MessageDialog from GTK2.Dialog without too much effort, but GTK2.MessageDialog saves typing. Properties: int buttons GTK2.Widget image int message-type string secondary-text

        Style properties: int message-border int use-separator

      Method create

        `GTK2.MessageDialog GTK2.MessageDialog(mapping|int flags, int|void type, int|void buttons, string|void message, GTK2.Window parent)`

      Description

        Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc) and some text the user may want to see. When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with response IDs from RESPONSE_ACCEPT, RESPONSE_APPLY, RESPONSE_CANCEL, RESPONSE_CLOSE, RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT, RESPONSE_HELP, RESPONSE_NO, RESPONSE_NONE, RESPONSE_OK, RESPONSE_REJECT and RESPONSE_YES. See GTK2.Dialog for more details.

      Method format_secondary_markup

        `GTK2.MessageDialog format_secondary_markup(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be text, which is marked up with the Pango text markup language.

        Note tha tsetting a secondary text makes the primary text become bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.

      Method format_secondary_text

        `GTK2.MessageDialog format_secondary_text(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be text.

        Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Method set_image

        `GTK2.MessageDialog set_image(GTK2.Widget image)`

      Description

        Sets the dialog's image to image.

      Method set_markup

        `GTK2.MessageDialog set_markup(string text)`

      Description

        Sets the text of the message dialog to be text, which is marked up with the Pango text markup language.

    CLASS GTK2.Misc

      Description

        The GTK2.Misc widget is an abstract widget which is not useful itself, but is used to derive subclasses which have alignment and padding attributes.

        The horizontal and vertical padding attributes allows extra space to be added around the widget.

        The horizontal and vertical alignment attributes enable the widget to be positioned within its allocated area. Note that if the widget is added to a container in such a way that it expands automatically to fill its allocated area, the alignment settings will not alter the widgets position.

        `GTK2.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK2.Label("Label"))->set_size_request(100,20)`

        `GTK2.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK2.Label("Label")->set_alignment(1.0,0.0))->set_size_request(100,20)`

        `GTK2.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK2.Label("Label")->set_alignment(0.0,0.0))->set_size_request(100,20)`

        Properties: float xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right). int xpad The amount of space to add on the left and right of the widget, in pixels. float yalign The vertical alignment, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom). int ypad The amount of space to add on the top and bottom of the widget, in pixels.

      Method get_alignment

        `mapping get_alignment()`

      Description

        Gets the x and y alignment.

      Method get_padding

        `mapping get_padding()`

      Description

        Gets the x and y padding.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method set_alignment

        `GTK2.Misc set_alignment(float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment of the widget. 0.0 is left or topmost, 1.0 is right or bottommost.

      Method set_padding

        `GTK2.Misc set_padding(int xpad, int ypad)`

      Description

        Sets the amount of space to add around the widget. xpad and ypad are specified in pixels.

    CLASS GTK2.Notebook

      Description

        The NoteBook Widget is a collection of 'pages' that overlap each other, each page contains different information. This widget has become more common lately in GUI programming, and it is a good way to show blocks similar information that warrant separation in their display.

        `GTK2.Notebook()->set_tab_pos(GTK2.POS_LEFT)->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 1\nContents"),GTK2.Label("Page 1"))->append_page(GTK2.Label(""),GTK2.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"),GTK2.Label("Page 3"))`

        `GTK2.Notebook()->set_tab_pos(GTK2.POS_TOP)->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 1\nContents"),GTK2.Label("Page 1"))->append_page(GTK2.Label(""),GTK2.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"),GTK2.Label("Page 3"))`

        `GTK2.Notebook()->set_tab_pos(GTK2.POS_RIGHT)->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 1\nContents"),GTK2.Label("Page 1"))->append_page(GTK2.Label(""),GTK2.Label("Page 2"))->append_page(GTK2.Label("Page 3 contents\nare here!"),GTK2.Label("Page 3"))->next_page()->next_page()`

        Properties: int enable-popup int homogeneous int page int scrollable int show-border int show-tabs int tab-border int tab-hborder int tab-pos int tab-vborder

        Child properties: string menu-label int position int tab-expand int tab-fill string tab-label int tab-pack

        Style properties: int has-backward-stepper int has-forward-stepper int has-secondary-backward-stepper int has-secondary-forward-stepper int tab-curvature int tab-overlap

        Signals: change_current_page

        focus_tab

        move_focus_out

        select_page

        switch_page Called when a different page is selected

      Method append_page

        `GTK2.Notebook append_page(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' to the notebook. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label.

      Method append_page_menu

        `GTK2.Notebook append_page_menu(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label, GTK2.Widget menu)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' to the notebook. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label, the third argument is a menu label widget.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Notebook GTK2.Notebook(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a W(Notebook) widget with no pages.

      Method get_current_page

        `int get_current_page()`

      Description

        Returns the index of the currently selected page

      Method get_group_id

        `int get_group_id()`

      Description

        Gets the current group identifier.

      Method get_menu_label

        `GTK2.Widget get_menu_label(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Return the menu label widget.

      Method get_menu_label_text

        `string get_menu_label_text(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing child.

      Method get_n_pages

        `int get_n_pages()`

      Description

        Get the number of pages.

      Method get_nth_page

        `GTK2.Widget get_nth_page(int index)`

      Description

        Returns the page for the specified index

      Method get_scrollable

        `int get_scrollable()`

      Description

        Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling.

      Method get_show_border

        `int get_show_border()`

      Description

        Returns whether a bevel will be drawn around the pages.

      Method get_show_tabs

        `int get_show_tabs()`

      Description

        Returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown.

      Method get_tab_detachable

        `int get_tab_detachable(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Returns whether the tab contents can be detached.

      Method get_tab_label

        `GTK2.Widget get_tab_label(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Returns the tab label widget.

      Method get_tab_label_text

        `string get_tab_label_text(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing child.

      Method get_tab_pos

        `int get_tab_pos()`

      Description

        Gets the edge at which the tabs are located.

      Method get_tab_reorderable

        `int get_tab_reorderable(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method insert_page

        `GTK2.Notebook insert_page(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a page at the specified location, arguments as for append_page, but an aditional integer specifies the location.

      Method insert_page_menu

        `GTK2.Notebook insert_page_menu(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label, GTK2.Widget menu, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a page at the specified location, arguments as for append_page_menu, but an additional integer specifies the location.

      Method next_page

        `GTK2.Notebook next_page()`

      Description

        Go to the next page

      Method page_num

        `int page_num(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Returns the index for the specified page.

      Method popup_disable

        `GTK2.Notebook popup_disable()`

      Description

        Disable the popup menu (set with insert_page_menu).

      Method popup_enable

        `GTK2.Notebook popup_enable()`

      Description

        Enable the popup menu (set with insert_page_menu).

      Method prepend_page

        `GTK2.Notebook prepend_page(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Add a page at the end of the list of pages. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label.

      Method prepend_page_menu

        `GTK2.Notebook prepend_page_menu(GTK2.Widget contents, GTK2.Widget label, GTK2.Widget menu)`

      Description

        Add a new 'page' at the end of the list of pages. The first argument is the contents of the page, the second argument is the label, the third argument is a menu label widget.

      Method prev_page

        `GTK2.Notebook prev_page()`

      Description

        Go to the previous page

      Method query_tab_label_packing

        `mapping query_tab_label_packing(GTK2.Widget page)`

      Description

        Returns ([ "expand":expandp, "fill":fillp, "pack_type":type ])

      Method remove_page

        `GTK2.Notebook remove_page(int pos)`

      Description

        Remove a page.

      Method reorder_child

        `GTK2.Notebook reorder_child(GTK2.Widget child, int position)`

      Description

        Reorders the page containing child, so that it appears at position.

      Method set_current_page

        `GTK2.Notebook set_current_page(int pos)`

      Description

        Go to the specified page

      Method set_group_id

        `GTK2.Notebook set_group_id(int id)`

      Description

        Sets an group identifier for notebook; notebooks sharing the same group identifier will be able to exchange tabs via drag and drop. A notebook with group identifier -1 will not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.

      Method set_menu_label

        `GTK2.Notebook set_menu_label(GTK2.Widget child, GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Changes the menu label for the page containing child.

      Method set_menu_label_text

        `GTK2.Notebook set_menu_label_text(GTK2.Widget child, string label_text)`

      Description

        Creates a new label with label_text sets it as the menu label.

      Method set_scrollable

        `GTK2.Notebook set_scrollable(int scrollablep)`

      Description

        If true, add scrollbars if necessary.

      Method set_show_border

        `GTK2.Notebook set_show_border(int showborderp)`

      Description

        If true, show the borders around the contents and tabs.

      Method set_show_tabs

        `GTK2.Notebook set_show_tabs(int showtabsp)`

      Description

        If supplied with a true value, the tabs will be shown. Otherwise they will not be shown. The user will not be able to select the pages without them, but you can add 'next' and 'previous' buttons to create a wizard-line interface.

      Method set_tab_detachable

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_detachable(GTK2.Widget child, int how)`

      Description

        Returns whether the tab contents can be detached.

      Method set_tab_label

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_label(GTK2.Widget child, GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Changes the tab label for child.

      Method set_tab_label_packing

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_label_packing(GTK2.Widget child, int expand, int fill, int type)`

      Description

        Sets the packing parameters for the tab label of the page child.

      Method set_tab_label_text

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_label_text(GTK2.Widget child, string title)`

      Description

        Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page containing child.

      Method set_tab_pos

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_pos(int pos)`

      Description

        Sets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the notebook are drawn. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

      Method set_tab_reorderable

        `GTK2.Notebook set_tab_reorderable(GTK2.Widget child, int how)`

      Description

        Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.

    CLASS GTK2.Object

      Description

        The basic GTK class. All other GTK classes inherit this class. The only user-callable functions are the signal related ones. Properties: gpointer user-data

        Signals: destroy

      Inherit InitiallyUnowned

        inherit G.InitiallyUnowned : InitiallyUnowned

    CLASS GTK2.PageSetup

      Description

        A GtkPageSetup object stores the page size, orientation and margins. The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog and then pass it to the GTK2.PrintOperation when printing. The benefit of splitting this out of the GTK2.PrintSettings is that these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set long before user prints.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.PageSetup copy()`

      Description

        Returns a copy of this GTK2.PageSetup.

      Method create

        `GTK2.PageSetup GTK2.PageSetup(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.PageSetup.

      Method get_bottom_margin

        `float get_bottom_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the bottom margin in units of unit.

      Method get_left_margin

        `float get_left_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the left margin in units of unit.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        Gets the page orientation.

      Method get_page_height

        `float get_page_height(int unit)`

      Description

        Returns the page height in units of unit.

      Method get_page_width

        `float get_page_width(int unit)`

      Description

        Returns the page width in units of unit.

      Method get_paper_height

        `float get_paper_height(int unit)`

      Description

        Returns the paper height in units of unit.

      Method get_paper_size

        `GTK2.PaperSize get_paper_size()`

      Description

        Gets the paper size.

      Method get_paper_width

        `float get_paper_width(int unit)`

      Description

        Returns the paper width in units of unit.

      Method get_right_margin

        `float get_right_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the right margin in units of unit.

      Method get_top_margin

        `float get_top_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the top margin in units of unit.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_bottom_margin

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_bottom_margin(float margin, int unit)`

      Description

        Sets the bottom margin.

      Method set_left_margin

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_left_margin(float margin, int unit)`

      Description

        Sets the left margin.

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_orientation(int orientation)`

      Description

        Sets the page orientation.

      Method set_paper_size

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_paper_size(GTK2.PaperSize size)`

      Description

        Sets the paper size without changing the margins.

      Method set_paper_size_and_default_margins

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_paper_size_and_default_margins(GTK2.PaperSize size)`

      Description

        Sets the paper size and modifies the margins.

      Method set_right_margin

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_right_margin(float margin, int unit)`

      Description

        Sets the right margin.

      Method set_top_margin

        `GTK2.PageSetup set_top_margin(float margin, int unit)`

      Description

        Sets the top margin.

    CLASS GTK2.Paned

      Description

        GTK2.Paned is the base class for widgets with two panes, arranged either horizontally (W(HPaned)) or vertically (W(VPaned)). Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with pack1() and pack2(). The division beween the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.

        A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter). Often, it is useful to put each child inside a W(Frame) with the shadow type set to GTK2.ShadowIn so that the gutter appears as a ridge.

        Each child has two options that can be set, resize and shrink. If resize is true, then when the GTK2.Paned is resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If shrink is true, then when that child can be made smaller than it's requisition by the user. Setting shrink to 0 allows the application to set a minimum size. If resize is false for both children, then this is treated as if resize is true for both children.

        The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling set_position().

        Properties: int max-position int min-position int position int position-set

        Child properties: int resize int shrink

        Style properties: int handle-size

        Signals: accept_position

        cancel_position

        cycle_child_focus

        cycle_handle_focus

        move_handle

        toggle_handle_focus

      Method add1

        `GTK2.Paned add1(GTK2.Widget left_or_top)`

      Description

        Set the left or topmost item. This is equivalent to pack1(left_or_top,0,1)

      Method add2

        `GTK2.Paned add2(GTK2.Widget right_or_bottom)`

      Description

        Set the right or bottommost item This is equivalent to pack2(left_or_top,0,1)

      Method get_child1

        `GTK2.Widget get_child1()`

      Description

        Obtains the first child of the paned widget.

      Method get_child2

        `GTK2.Widget get_child2()`

      Description

        Obtains the second child of the paned widget.

      Method get_position

        `int get_position()`

      Description

        Obtains the position of the divider between the two panes.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method pack1

        `GTK2.Paned pack1(GTK2.Widget widget, int resize, int shrink)`

      Description

        Add a child to the top or left pane.

      Method pack2

        `GTK2.Paned pack2(GTK2.Widget widget, int resize, int shrink)`

      Description

        Add a child to the bottom or right pane.

      Method set_position

        `GTK2.Paned set_position(int position)`

      Description

        Set the position of the separator, as if set by the user. If position is negative, the remembered position is forgotten, and the division is recomputed from the the requisitions of the children.

    CLASS GTK2.PaperSize

      Description

        A Paper Size.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.PaperSize copy()`

      Description

        Copy this GTK2.PaperSize.

      Method create

        `GTK2.PaperSize GTK2.PaperSize(string|void name, string|void ppd_display_name, float|void width, float|void height, int|void unit)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.PaperSize object by parsing a PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG paper name.

      Method destroy

        `GTK2.PaperSize destroy()`

      Description

        Destructor.

      Method get_default

        `string get_default()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the default paper size.

      Method get_default_bottom_margin

        `float get_default_bottom_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the default bottom margin.

      Method get_default_left_margin

        `float get_default_left_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the default left margin.

      Method get_default_right_margin

        `float get_default_right_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the default right margin.

      Method get_default_top_margin

        `float get_default_top_margin(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the default top margin.

      Method get_display_name

        `string get_display_name()`

      Description

        Get the human-readable name.

      Method get_height

        `float get_height(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the paper height in units of unit.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Get the name.

      Method get_ppd_name

        `string get_ppd_name()`

      Description

        Get the ppd name. May return an empty string.

      Method get_width

        `float get_width(int unit)`

      Description

        Gets the paper width in units of unit.

      Method is_custom

        `int is_custom()`

      Description

        Returns 1 if this paper size is not a standard paper size.

      Method is_equal

        `int is_equal(GTK2.PaperSize size1)`

      Description

        Comparison.

      Method set_size

        `GTK2.PaperSize set_size(float width, float height, int unit)`

      Description

        Changes the dimensions to width x height.

    CLASS GTK2.PatternTag

      Method create

        `GTK2.PatternTag GTK2.PatternTag(string id, string name, string pattern)`

      Description

        Creates a new pattern tag object with the provided arguments.

      Inherit SourceTag

        inherit GTK2.SourceTag : SourceTag

    CLASS GTK2.Plug

      Description

        Together with W(Socket), GTK2.Plug provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a W(Socket) widget and, passes the XID of that widgets window to the other process, which then creates a GTK2.Plug window with that XID. Any widgets contained in the GTK2.Plug then will appear inside the first applications window. Properties int embedded

        Signals: embedded

      Method create

        `GTK2.Plug GTK2.Plug(int|mapping socket_id_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new plug, the socket_id is the window into which this plug will be plugged.

      Method get_id

        `int get_id()`

      Description

        Gets the window id of this widget.

      Inherit Window

        inherit GTK2.Window : Window

    CLASS GTK2.PrintContext

      Method create_pango_context

        `GTK2.Pango.Context create_pango_context()`

      Description

        Creates a new Pango.Context that can be used with this PrintContext.

      Method create_pango_layout

        `GTK2.Pango.Layout create_pango_layout()`

      Description

        Creates a new Pango.Layout that is suitable for use with this PrintContext.

      Method get_dpi_x

        `float get_dpi_x()`

      Description

        Obtains the horizontal resolution, in dots per inch.

      Method get_dpi_y

        `float get_dpi_y()`

      Description

        Obtains the vertical resolution, in dots per inch.

      Method get_height

        `float get_height()`

      Description

        Obtains the height, in pixels.

      Method get_page_setup

        `GTK2.PageSetup get_page_setup()`

      Description

        Obtains the GTK2.PageSetup that determines the page dimensions.

      Method get_width

        `float get_width()`

      Description

        Obtains the width, in pixels.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.Progress

      Description

        Properties: int activity-mode int show-text float text-xalign float text-yalign

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

    CLASS GTK2.ProgressBar

      Description

        A simple progress bar. Useful when you are doing things that take a long time. Try to always have an 'abort' button whenever it makes sence. `GTK2.ProgressBar()->set_fraction(0.1)`

        `GTK2.ProgressBar()->set_property("show_text", 1)->set_fraction(0.3)`

        `GTK2.ProgressBar()->set_fraction(0.6)`

        `GTK2.ProgressBar()->set_fraction(1.0)`

        Properties: int discrete-blocks int ellipsize PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE and PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START float fraction int orientation PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP, PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS, PROGRESS_DISCRETE, PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT, PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT and PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM float pulse-step string text

      Method create

        `GTK2.ProgressBar GTK2.ProgressBar(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new progress bar. The default values are: Min 0.0, max 1.0, current 0.0

      Method get_ellipsize

        `int get_ellipsize()`

      Description

        Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar.

      Method get_fraction

        `float get_fraction()`

      Description

        Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current progress bar orientation.

      Method get_pulse_step

        `float get_pulse_step()`

      Description

        Retrieves the pulse step.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text()`

      Description

        Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar, if any.

      Inherit Progress

        inherit GTK2.Progress : Progress

      Method pulse

        `GTK2.ProgressBar pulse()`

      Description

        Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much. Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode", where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by set_pulse_step()).

      Method set_ellipsize

        `GTK2.ProgressBar set_ellipsize(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the text if there is not enough space to render the entire string. One of PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_END, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_MIDDLE, PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE and PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_START.

      Method set_fraction

        `GTK2.ProgressBar set_fraction(float fraction)`

      Description

        Causes the progress bar to "fill in" the given fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK2.ProgressBar set_orientation(int style)`

      Description

        Causes the progress bar to switch to a different orientation (left-to-right, right-to-left, top-to-bottom, or bottom-to-top). One of PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP, PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS, PROGRESS_DISCRETE, PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT, PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT and PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM.

      Method set_pulse_step

        `GTK2.ProgressBar set_pulse_step(float fraction)`

      Description

        Sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the bouncing block for each call to pulse().

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.ProgressBar set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Causes the given text to appear superimposed on the progress bar.

    CLASS GTK2.RadioAction

      Description

        Properties int current-value GTK2.RadioAction group int value

        Signals: changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.RadioAction GTK2.RadioAction(string|mapping name_or_props, string|void label, string|void tooltip, string|void stock_id, int|void value)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.ToggleAction object.

      Method get_current_value

        `int get_current_value()`

      Description

        Obtains the value property of the currently active member.

      Method get_group

        `array get_group()`

      Description

        Returns the list representing the radio group.

      Inherit ToggleAction

        inherit GTK2.ToggleAction : ToggleAction

      Method set_current_value

        `GTK2.RadioAction set_current_value(int value)`

      Description

        Sets the currently active group member to the member with value property value.

      Method set_group

        `GTK2.RadioAction set_group(GTK2.RadioAction member)`

      Description

        Sets the radio group.

    CLASS GTK2.RadioButton

      Description

        Radio buttons are similar to check buttons except they are grouped so that only one may be selected/depressed at a time. This is good for places in your application where you need to select from a short list of options. To connect the buttons, use another button in the desired group as the second argument to GTK2.RadioButton().

        `GTK2.RadioButton("Button");`

        Properties: GTK2.RadioButton group

        Signals: group_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.RadioButton GTK2.RadioButton(string|mapping title, GTK2.RadioButton groupmember, int|void mnemonic)`

      Description

        Normal creation: object GTK2.RadioButton(string title) - First button (with label) object GTK2.RadioButton()->add(widget) - First button (with widget) object GTK2.RadioButton(title, another_radio_button) - Second to n:th button (with title) object GTK2.RadioButton(0,another_radio_button)->add(widget) - Second to n:th button (with widget)

      Method get_group

        `array get_group()`

      Description

        Returns an array of members in this group.

      Inherit CheckButton

        inherit GTK2.CheckButton : CheckButton

      Method set_group

        `GTK2.RadioButton set_group(GTK2.RadioButton groupmember)`

      Description

        the argument is another radio button to whose group this button should be added to. It is prefereable to use the second argument to the constructor instead, but if you for some reason want to move the button to another group, use this function.

    CLASS GTK2.RadioMenuItem

      Description

        Exactly like W(RadioButton), but it is an menu item. `GTK2.RadioMenuItem("Menu item")`

        Properties:

        GTK2.RadioMenuItem group

        Signals: group_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.RadioMenuItem GTK2.RadioMenuItem(string|mapping title, GTK2.RadioMenuItem groupmember)`

      Description

        object GTK2.RadioMenuItem(string title) - First button (with label) object GTK2.RadioMenuItem()->add(widget) - First button (with widget) object GTK2.RadioMenuItem(title, another_radio_button) - Second to n:th button (with title) object GTK2.RadioMenuItem(0,another_radio_button)->add(widget) - Second to n:th button (with widget)

      Method get_group

        `array get_group()`

      Description

        Returns the group to which the radio menu item belongs.

      Inherit CheckMenuItem

        inherit GTK2.CheckMenuItem : CheckMenuItem

      Method set_group

        `GTK2.RadioMenuItem set_group(GTK2.RadioMenuItem groupmember)`

      Description

        The argument is another radio menu item to whose group this button should be added to. It is prefereable to use the second argument to the constructor instead, but if you for some reason want to move the button to another group, use this function.

    CLASS GTK2.RadioToolButton

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.RadioToolButton group

      Method create

        `GTK2.RadioToolButton GTK2.RadioToolButton(GTK2.RadioToolButton groupmember)`

      Description

        Create a GTK2.RadioToolButton. Use without a parameter for a new group. Use with another GTK2.RadioToolButton to add another button to the same group as a previous button.

      Method get_group

        `array get_group()`

      Description

        Get the group this button belongs to.

      Inherit ToggleToolButton

        inherit GTK2.ToggleToolButton : ToggleToolButton

    CLASS GTK2.Range

      Description

        The category of range widgets includes the ubiquitous scrollbar widget and the less common "scale" widget. Though these two types of widgets are generally used for different purposes, they are quite similar in function and implementation. All range widgets share a set of common graphic elements, each of which has its own X window and receives events. They all contain a "trough" and a "slider" (what is sometimes called a "thumbwheel" in other GUI environments). Dragging the slider with the pointer moves it back and forth within the trough, while clicking in the trough advances the slider towards the location of the click, either completely, or by a designated amount, depending on which mouse button is used.

        As mentioned in the W(Adjustment) page, all range widgets are associated with an adjustment object, from which they calculate the length of the slider and its position within the trough. When the user manipulates the slider, the range widget will change the value of the adjustment.

        All of the GTK range widgets react to mouse clicks in more or less the same way. Clicking button-1 in the trough will cause its adjustment's page_increment to be added or subtracted from its value, and the slider to be moved accordingly. Clicking mouse button-2 in the trough will jump the slider to the point at which the button was clicked. Clicking any button on a scrollbar's arrows will cause its adjustment's value to change step_increment at a time.

        It may take a little while to get used to, but by default, scrollbars as well as scale widgets can take the keyboard focus in GTK. If you think your users will find this too confusing, you can always disable this by unsetting the GTK2.CanFocus flag on the scrollbar, like this:

        `scrollbar->unset_flag(GTK2.CanFocus);`

        The key bindings (which are, of course, only active when the widget has focus) are slightly different between horizontal and vertical range widgets, for obvious reasons. They are also not quite the same for scale widgets as they are for scrollbars, for somewhat less obvious reasons (possibly to avoid confusion between the keys for horizontal and vertical scrollbars in scrolled windows, where both operate on the same area).

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment adjustment float fill-level int inverted int restrict-to-fill-level int show-fill-level int update-policy

        Style properties: int arrow-displacement-x int arrow-displacement-y int slider-width int stepper-size int stepper-spacing int trough-border int trough-side-details int trough-under-steppers

        Signals: adjust_bounds

        change_value

        move_slider

        value_changed

      Method get_adjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_adjustment()`

      Description

        Gets the W(Adjustment) which is the "model" object for W(Range).

      Method get_fill_level

        `float get_fill_level()`

      Description

        Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.

      Method get_inverted

        `int get_inverted()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_inverted().

      Method get_lower_stepper_sensitivity

        `GTK2.Range get_lower_stepper_sensitivity()`

      Description

        Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'lower' end of the GTK2.Range's adjustment.

      Method get_restrict_to_fill_level

        `int get_restrict_to_fill_level()`

      Description

        Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.

      Method get_show_fill_level

        `int get_show_fill_level()`

      Description

        Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.

      Method get_update_policy

        `int get_update_policy()`

      Description

        Gets the update policy.

      Method get_upper_stepper_sensitivity

        `GTK2.Range get_upper_stepper_sensitivity()`

      Description

        Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'upper' end of the GTK2.Range's adjustment.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Gets the current value.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK2.Range set_adjustment(GTK2.Adjustment pos)`

      Description

        set_adjustment() does absolutely nothing if you pass it the adjustment that range is already using, regardless of whether you changed any of its fields or not. If you pass it a new Adjustment, it will unreference the old one if it exists (possibly destroying it), connect the appropriate signals to the new one, and call the private function gtk_range_adjustment_changed(), which will (or at least, is supposed to...) recalculate the size and/or position of the slider and redraw if necessary.

      Method set_fill_level

        `GTK2.Range set_fill_level(float fill)`

      Description

        Set the new position of the fill level indicator.

      Method set_increments

        `GTK2.Range set_increments(float step, float page)`

      Description

        Sets the step and page sizes. The step size is used when the user clicks the W(Scrollbar) arrows or moves W(Scale) via arrow keys. The page size is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.

      Method set_inverted

        `GTK2.Range set_inverted(int setting)`

      Description

        Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than on the bottom or left.

      Method set_lower_stepper_sensitivity

        `GTK2.Range set_lower_stepper_sensitivity(int sensitivity)`

      Description

        Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'lower' end of the GTK2.Range's adjustment.

      Method set_range

        `GTK2.Range set_range(float min, float max)`

      Description

        Sets the allowable values, and clamps the range value to be between min and max.

      Method set_restrict_to_fill_level

        `GTK2.Range set_restrict_to_fill_level(int rest)`

      Description

        Sets whether the slider is restricted to the fill level

      Method set_show_fill_level

        `GTK2.Range set_show_fill_level(int show)`

      Description

        Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough.

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK2.Range set_update_policy(int when)`

      Description

        The "update policy" of a range widget defines at what points during user interaction it will change the value field of its Adjustment and emit the "value_changed" signal on this Adjustment. The update policies are:

        GTK2.UpdatePolicyContinuous

          This is the default. The "value_changed" signal is emitted continuously, i.e., whenever the slider is moved by even the tiniest amount.

        GTK2.UpdatePolicyDiscontinuous

          The "value_changed" signal is only emitted once the slider has stopped moving and the user has released the mouse button.

        GTK2.UpdatePolicyDelayed

          The "value_changed" signal is emitted when the user releases the mouse button, or if the slider stops moving for a short period of time.

      Method set_upper_stepper_sensitivity

        `GTK2.Range set_upper_stepper_sensitivity(int sensitivity)`

      Description

        Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'upper' end of the GTK2.Range's adjustment.

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.Range set_value(float value)`

      Description

        Sets the current value; if the value is outside the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside them. The range emits the "value-changed" signal if the value changes.

    CLASS GTK2.RcStyle

      Description

        RC settings.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.RcStyle copy()`

      Description

        Makes a copy.

      Method create

        `GTK2.RcStyle GTK2.RcStyle()`

      Description

        Creates a new W(Rc).

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_base

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_base(array colors)`

      Description

        Set base.

      Method set_bg

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_bg(array colors)`

      Description

        Set bg.

      Method set_bg_pixmap_name

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_bg_pixmap_name(array names)`

      Description

        Set bg_pixmap_name.

      Method set_color_flags

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_color_flags(array flags)`

      Description

        Set color_flags.

      Method set_fg

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_fg(array colors)`

      Description

        Set fg.

      Method set_name

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_name(string name)`

      Description

        Set the name.

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_text(array colors)`

      Description

        Set text.

      Method set_xthickness

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_xthickness(int value)`

      Description

        Set xthickness.

      Method set_ythickness

        `GTK2.RcStyle set_ythickness(int value)`

      Description

        Set ythickness.

    CLASS GTK2.RecentChooser

      Method add_filter

        `GTK2.RecentChooser add_filter(GTK2.RecentFilter filter)`

      Description

        Adds filter to the list of GTK2.RecentFilter objects held by chooser.

      Method get_current_item

        `GTK2.RecentInfo get_current_item()`

      Description

        Gets the GTK2.RecentInfo currently selected.

      Method get_current_uri

        `string get_current_uri()`

      Description

        Gets the URI currently selected.

      Method get_filter

        `GTK2.RecentFilter get_filter()`

      Description

        Gets the filter currently used.

      Method get_items

        `array get_items()`

      Description

        Gets the list of recently used resources in form of GTK2.RecentInfo objects.

        The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and "limit" properties of chooser

      Method get_limit

        `int get_limit()`

      Description

        Gets the number of items returned by get_items() and get_uris().

      Method get_local_only

        `int get_local_only()`

      Description

        Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used resources selector.

      Method get_select_multiple

        `int get_select_multiple()`

      Description

        Gets whether chooser can select multiple items.

      Method get_show_icons

        `int get_show_icons()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether chooser should show an icon near the resource.

      Method get_show_not_found

        `int get_show_not_found()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether chooser should show the recently used resources that were not found.

      Method get_show_numbers

        `int get_show_numbers()`

      Description

        Returns whether chooser should display recently used resources prepended by a unique number.

      Method get_show_private

        `int get_show_private()`

      Description

        Returns whether chooser should display recently used resources registered as private.

      Method get_show_tips

        `int get_show_tips()`

      Description

        Gets whether chooser should display tooltips.

      Method get_sort_type

        `int get_sort_type()`

      Description

        Gets the sorting order.

      Method get_uris

        `array get_uris()`

      Description

        Gets the URI of the recently used resources.

        The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and "limit" properties.

      Method list_filters

        `array list_filters()`

      Description

        Gets a list of filters.

      Method remove_filter

        `GTK2.RecentChooser remove_filter(GTK2.RecentFilter filter)`

      Description

        Removes filter.

      Method select_all

        `GTK2.RecentChooser select_all()`

      Description

        Selects all the items inside chooser, if the chooser supports multiple selection.

      Method select_uri

        `int select_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Selects uri.

      Method set_current_uri

        `int set_current_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Sets uri as the current URI.

      Method set_filter

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_filter(GTK2.RecentFilter filter)`

      Description

        Sets filter as the current GTK2.RecentFilter object to affect the displayed recently used resources.

      Method set_limit

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_limit(int limit)`

      Description

        Sets the number of items that should be returned by get_items() and get_uris().

      Method set_local_only

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_local_only(int local_only)`

      Description

        Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector. If local_only is TRUE (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed to be accessible through the operating system native file system.

      Method set_select_multiple

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_select_multiple(int select_multiple)`

      Description

        Sets whether chooser can select multiple items.

      Method set_show_icons

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_show_icons(int show_icons)`

      Description

        Sets whether chooser should show an icon near the resource when displaying it.

      Method set_show_not_found

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_show_not_found(int show_not_found)`

      Description

        Sets whether chooser should display the recently used resources that it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.

      Method set_show_numbers

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_show_numbers(int show_numbers)`

      Description

        Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.

      Method set_show_private

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_show_private(int show_private)`

      Description

        Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.

      Method set_show_tips

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_show_tips(int show_tips)`

      Description

        Sets whether to show a tooltips on the widget.

      Method set_sort_type

        `GTK2.RecentChooser set_sort_type(int sort_type)`

      Description

        Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by chooser.

      Method unselect_all

        `GTK2.RecentChooser unselect_all()`

      Description

        Unselects all the items.

      Method unselect_uri

        `GTK2.RecentChooser unselect_uri(string uri)`

      Description

        Unselects uri.

    CLASS GTK2.RecentChooserDialog

      Method create

        `GTK2.RecentChooserDialog GTK2.RecentChooserDialog(mapping|string title, GTK2.Window parent, array buttons, GTK2.RecentManager manager)`

      Description

        Creates a new RecentChooserDialog. Analogous to GTK2.Dialog->create().

      Inherit Dialog

        inherit GTK2.Dialog : Dialog

      Inherit RecentChooser

        inherit GTK2.RecentChooser : RecentChooser

    CLASS GTK2.RecentChooserMenu

      Method create

        `GTK2.RecentChooserMenu GTK2.RecentChooserMenu(mapping|RecentManager props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.RecentChooserMenu.

      Method get_show_numbers

        `int get_show_numbers()`

      Description

        Returns true if numbers should be shown.

      Inherit Activatable

        inherit GTK2.Activatable : Activatable

      Inherit Menu

        inherit GTK2.Menu : Menu

      Inherit RecentChooser

        inherit GTK2.RecentChooser : RecentChooser

      Method set_show_numbers

        `GTK2.RecentChooserMenu set_show_numbers(int show_numbers)`

      Description

        Sets whether a number should be added to the items of menu. The numbers are shown to provide a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's label. Only the first items get a number to avoid clashes.

    CLASS GTK2.RecentChooserWidget

      Method create

        `GTK2.RecentChooserWidget GTK2.RecentChooserWidget(mapping|RecentManager props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.RecentChooserWidget.

      Inherit RecentChooser

        inherit GTK2.RecentChooser : RecentChooser

      Inherit Vbox

        inherit GTK2.Vbox : Vbox

    CLASS GTK2.RecentFilter

      Description

        A filter for selecting a subset of recently used files.

      Method add_age

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_age(int days)`

      Description

        Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number of days elapsed since they were last modified.

      Method add_application

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_application(string application)`

      Description

        Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the application that has registered them.

      Method add_group

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_group(string group)`

      Description

        Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the group to which they belong.

      Method add_mime_type

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_mime_type(string mime_type)`

      Description

        Adds a rule that allows resources based on their registered MIME type.

      Method add_pattern

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_pattern(string pattern)`

      Description

        Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their display name.

      Method add_pixbuf_formats

        `GTK2.RecentFilter add_pixbuf_formats()`

      Description

        Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported by GdkPixbuf.

      Method create

        `GTK2.RecentFilter GTK2.RecentFilter(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.RecentFilter.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Gets the human-readable name for the filter.

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK2.Object : Object

      Method set_name

        `GTK2.RecentFilter set_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.

    CLASS GTK2.RecentInfo

      Method destroy

        `GTK2.RecentInfo destroy()`

      Description

        Destructor.

      Method exists

        `int exists()`

      Description

        Checks whether the resource pointed by info still exists. At the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.

      Method get_added

        `int get_added()`

      Description

        Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource was added to the recently used resources list.

      Method get_age

        `int get_age()`

      Description

        Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource pointed by info.

      Method get_description

        `string get_description()`

      Description

        Gets the (short) description of the resource. Gets the (short) description of the resource.

      Method get_display_name

        `string get_display_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename of the resource is obtained.

      Method get_groups

        `array get_groups()`

      Description

        Returns all groups registered for the recently used item.

      Method get_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_icon(int size)`

      Description

        Retrieves the icon of size size associated to the resource MIME type.

      Method get_mime_type

        `string get_mime_type()`

      Description

        Gets the MIME type of the resource.

      Method get_modified

        `int get_modified()`

      Description

        Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource was last modified.

      Method get_private_hint

        `int get_private_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the value of the "private" flag. Resources in the recently used list that have this flag set to TRUE should only be displayed by the applications that have registered them.

      Method get_short_name

        `string get_short_name()`

      Description

        Computes a string that can be used as the name of the item in a menu or list. For example, calling this function on an item that refers to "file:///foo/bar.txt" will yield "bar.txt".

      Method get_uri

        `string get_uri()`

      Description

        Gets the URI of the resource.

      Method get_uri_display

        `string get_uri_display()`

      Description

        Gets a displayable version of the resource's URI.

      Method get_visited

        `int get_visited()`

      Description

        Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource was last visited.

      Method has_application

        `int has_application()`

      Description

        Checks whether an application registered this resource using app_name.

      Method has_group

        `int has_group(string group_name)`

      Description

        Checks whether group_name appears inside the groups registered for the recently used item info.

      Method is_local

        `int is_local()`

      Description

        Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the scheme of its URI.

      Method last_application

        `string last_application()`

      Description

        Gets the name of the last application that have registered the recently used resource represented by info.

      Method match

        `int match(GTK2.RecentInfo b)`

      Description

        Checks whether two GTK2.RecentInfo structures point to the same resource.

    CLASS GTK2.RecentManager

      Method add_item

        `int add_item(string uri)`

      Description

        Adds a new resource, pointed by uri, into the recently used resources list.

      Method create

        `GTK2.RecentManager GTK2.RecentManager(mapping|int|GdkScreen props_or_def)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.RecentManager.

      Method get_items

        `array get_items()`

      Description

        Gets the list of recently used resources.

      Method get_limit

        `int get_limit()`

      Description

        Gets the maximum number of items that the get_items() function should return.

      Method has_item

        `int has_item(string uri)`

      Description

        Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered with uri inside the recent manager.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method lookup_item

        `mapping lookup_item(string uri)`

      Description

        Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and returns a structure containing information about the resource like its MIME type, or its display name.

      Method move_item

        `int move_item(string uri, string new_uri)`

      Description

        Changes the location of a recently used resource from uri to new_uri.

      Method purge_items

        `int purge_items()`

      Description

        Purges every item from the recently used resources list.

      Method remove_item

        `int remove_item(string uri)`

      Description

        Removes a resource pointed by uri from the recently used resources list handled by a recent manager.

      Method set_limit

        `GTK2.RecentManager set_limit(int limit)`

      Description

        Sets the maximum number of item that the get_items() function should return. If limit is set to -1, then return all the items.

      Method set_screen

        `GTK2.RecentManager set_screen(GTK2.GdkScreen screen)`

      Description

        Sets the screen for a recent manager; the screen is used to track the user's currently configured recently used documents storage.

    CLASS GTK2.Scale

      Description

        The GTK2.Scale widget is an abstract class, used only for deriving the subclasses GTK2.Hscale and GTK2.Vscale.

        See W(Range) for generic range documentation

        Properties: int digits int draw-value int value-pos

        Style properties: int slider-length int value-spacing

        Signals: format_value

      Method clear_marks

        `GTK2.Scale clear_marks()`

      Description

        Removes any marks that have been added with add_mark().

      Method get_digits

        `int get_digits()`

      Description

        Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed.

      Method get_draw_value

        `int get_draw_value()`

      Description

        Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string next to the slider.

      Method get_layout

        `GTK2.Pango.Layout get_layout()`

      Description

        Gets the Pango.Layout used to display the scale.

      Method get_layout_offsets

        `mapping get_layout_offsets()`

      Description

        Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the Pango.Layout representing the text in the scale. Remember when using the Pango.Layout function you need to convert to and from pixels using PANGO_SCALE.

      Method get_value_pos

        `int get_value_pos()`

      Description

        Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.

      Inherit Range

        inherit GTK2.Range : Range

      Method set_digits

        `GTK2.Scale set_digits(int precision)`

      Description

        Sets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.

      Method set_draw_value

        `GTK2.Scale set_draw_value(int drawp)`

      Description

        Specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next to the slider.

      Method set_value_pos

        `GTK2.Scale set_value_pos(int where)`

      Description

        Sets the position in which the current value is displayed. One of POS_BOTTOM, POS_LEFT, POS_RIGHT and POS_TOP

    CLASS GTK2.ScaleButton

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment adjustment string icons int size float value

        Signals: popdown

        popup

        value_changed Scale button

      Method create

        `GTK2.ScaleButton GTK2.ScaleButton(int|void size_or_props, float|void min, float|void max, float|void step, array|void icons)`

      Description

        Create a new W(ScaleButton).

      Method get_adjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_adjustment()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.Adjustment associated with this scale.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Gets the current value.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK2.ScaleButton set_adjustment(GTK2.Adjustment adj)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.Adjustment to be used as a model.

      Method set_icons

        `GTK2.ScaleButton set_icons(array icons)`

      Description

        Sets the icons to be used.

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.ScaleButton set_value(float val)`

      Description

        Sets the current value of the scale; if the scale is outside the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside them. The button emits the "value-changed" signal if the value changes.

    CLASS GTK2.Scrollbar

      Description

        These are your standard, run-of-the-mill scrollbars. These should be used only for scrolling some other widget, such as a list, a text box, or a viewport (and it's generally easier to use the scrolled window widget in most cases). For other purposes, you should use scale widgets, as they are friendlier and more featureful. Style properties: int fixed-slider-length int has-backward-stepper int has-forward-stepper int has-secondary-backward-stepper int has-secondary-forward-stepper int min-slider-length

      Inherit Range

        inherit GTK2.Range : Range

    CLASS GTK2.ScrolledWindow

      Description

        Scrolled windows are used to create a scrollable area with another widget inside it. You may insert any type of widget into a scrolled window, and it will be accessible regardless of its size by using the scrollbars.

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->add(GTK2.Label("A small label"))->set_policy(GTK2.POLICY_AUTOMATIC,GTK2.POLICY_AUTOMATIC)`

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->add(GTK2.Label("A small label"))->set_policy(GTK2.POLICY_AUTOMATIC,GTK2.POLICY_AUTOMATIC)`

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->add(GTK2.Label("A small label"))`

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->add(GTK2.Label("a very huge label"))`

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment int hscrollbar-policy int shadow-type GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment int vscrollbar-policy int window-placement

        Style properties: int scrollbar-spacing int scrollbars-within-bevel

        Signals: move_focus_out

        scroll_child

      Method add

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow add(GTK2.Widget victim)`

      Description

        Add a widget to this container. This is equivalent to the C-GTK function gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport or gtk_container_add, depending on whether or not the child supports the set_scroll_adjustments signal.

        What this means in practice is that you do not have to care about this at all, it's all handled automatically.

      Method create

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow GTK2.ScrolledWindow(GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment_or_props, GTK2.Adjustment vadjustments)`

      Description

        The two adjustments are most commonly set to 0.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Get the horizontal adjustment.

      Method get_hscrollbar

        `GTK2.HScrollbar get_hscrollbar()`

      Description

        Returns the horizontal scrollbar.

      Method get_placement

        `int get_placement()`

      Description

        Gets the placement of the scrollbars.

      Method get_policy

        `mapping get_policy()`

      Description

        Returns the current policy values for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars. ([ "h-policy": horizontal policy, "v-policy": vertical policy ]);

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Gets the shadow type.

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Get the vertical adjustment.

      Method get_vscrollbar

        `GTK2.VScrollbar get_vscrollbar()`

      Description

        Returns the vertical scrollbar.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow set_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment)`

      Description

        Set the horizontal adjustment object.

      Method set_placement

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow set_placement(int window_placement)`

      Description

        The location of the window relative to the scrollbars. One of CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT, CORNER_TOP_LEFT and CORNER_TOP_RIGHT

      Method set_policy

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow set_policy(int xpolicy, int ypolicy)`

      Description

        Vertical and horizontal policy. Both are one of POLICY_ALWAYS, POLICY_AUTOMATIC and POLICY_NEVER

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow set_shadow_type(int type)`

      Description

        Changes the type of shadow drawn around the contents. One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK2.ScrolledWindow set_vadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment)`

      Description

        Set the vertical adjustment object.

    CLASS GTK2.SelectionData

      Description

        Placeholder class for GtkSelectionData.

    CLASS GTK2.Separator

      Description

        A generic separator. Basicaly a line, like &lt;hr&gt; in HTML.

      Inherit Widget

        inherit GTK2.Widget : Widget

    CLASS GTK2.SeparatorMenuItem

      Description

        A separator menu item.

      Method create

        `GTK2.SeparatorMenuItem GTK2.SeparatorMenuItem(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.SeparatorMenuItem.

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK2.MenuItem : MenuItem

    CLASS GTK2.SeparatorToolItem

      Description

        Properties: int draw

      Method create

        `GTK2.SeparatorToolItem GTK2.SeparatorToolItem(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.SeparatorToolItem.

      Method get_draw

        `int get_draw()`

      Description

        Returns whether SeparatorToolItem is drawn as a line, or just a blank

      Inherit ToolItem

        inherit GTK2.ToolItem : ToolItem

      Method set_draw

        `GTK2.SeparatorToolItem set_draw(int draw)`

      Description

        When a SeparatorToolItem is drawn as a line, or just a blank.

    CLASS GTK2.Settings

      Description

        Properties: int gtk-alternative-button-order int gtk-button-images int gtk-can-change-accels string gtk-color-palette string gtk-color-scheme int gtk-cursor-blink int gtk-cursor-blink-time string gtk-cursor-theme-name int gtk-cursor-theme-size int gtk-dnd-drag-threshold int gtk-double-click-distance int gtk-double-click-time int gtk-enable-animations int gtk-entry-password-hint-timeout int gtk-entry-select-on-focus string gtk-font-name string gtk-icon-sizes string gtk-icon-theme-name string gtk-key-theme-name string gtk-menu-bar-accel gint gtk-menu-bar-popup-delay int gtk-menu-images int gtk-menu-popdown-delay int gtk-menu-popup-delay string gtk-modules int gtk-split-cursor string gtk-theme-name int gtk-toolbar-icon-size int gtk-toolbar-style int gtk-touchscreen-mode int gtk-xft-antialias int gtk-xft-dpi int gtk-xft-hinting string gtk-xft-hintstyle string gtk-xft-rgba

      Method create

        `GTK2.Settings GTK2.Settings()`

      Description

        Get the default GTK2.Settings object

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.SizeGroup

      Description

        Provides a mechanism for grouping a number of widgets together so they all request the same amount of space. This is typically usefull when you want a column of widgets to have the same size, but you can't use a W(Table) widget.

        In detail, the size requiest for each widget in a GTK2.SizeGroup is the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode of the size group (see set_mode() determines whether this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.

        Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in a GTK2.SizeGroup to actually be the same size, you need to pack them in such a way that they get the size they request and not more. For example, if you are packing your widgets into a table, you would not include the GTK2.FILL flag.

        GTK2.SizeGroup objects are referenced by each widget in the size group, so one you have added all widgets to a GTK2.SizeGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the size group. If the widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the size group; when allow idgets have been removed, the size group will be freed.

        Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK+ will compute the horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL or GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_BOTH, and the vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL or GTK2.SIZE_GROUP_BOTH. Properties: int mode The directions in which the size group effects the requested sizes of its componenent widgets.

      Method add_widget

        `GTK2.SizeGroup add_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Adds a widget to the group. In the future, the requisition of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group. Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions depends on the mode.

      Method create

        `GTK2.SizeGroup GTK2.SizeGroup(int|mapping mode_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new group.

      Method get_ignore_hidden

        `int get_ignore_hidden()`

      Description

        Returns if invisible widgets are ignored when calculating the size.

      Method get_mode

        `int get_mode()`

      Description

        Gets the current mode.

      Method get_widgets

        `array get_widgets()`

      Description

        Returns the list of widgets associated with this size group.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method remove_widget

        `GTK2.SizeGroup remove_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Removes a widget.

      Method set_ignore_hidden

        `GTK2.SizeGroup set_ignore_hidden(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether invisible widgets should be ignored when calculating the size.

      Method set_mode

        `GTK2.SizeGroup set_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets the mode of the size group. One of SIZE_GROUP_BOTH, SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL, SIZE_GROUP_NONE and SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL. The mode of the size group determines whether the widgets in the size group should all have the same horizontal requisition, all have the same vertical requisition, or should all have the same requisition in both directions.

    CLASS GTK2.Socket

      Description

        Together with W(Plug), GTK2.Socket provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a GTK2.Socket widget and, passes the XID of that widget's window to the other process, which then creates a W(Plug) window with that XID. Any widgets contained in the W(Plug) then will appear inside the first applications window.

        Note that if you pass the XID of the socket to another process that will create a plug in the socket, you must make sure that the socket widget is not destroyed until that plug is created. Violating this rule will cause unpredictable consequences, the most likely consequence being that the plug will appear as a separate toplevel window.

        A socket can also be used to swallow arbitrary pre-existing top-level windows using steal(), though the integration when this is done will not be as close as between a W(Plug) and a GTK2.Socket.

        Signals: plug_added

        plug_removed

      Method add_id

        `GTK2.Socket add_id(int wid)`

      Description

        Adds an XEMBED client, such as a W(Plug), to the W(Socket).

      Method create

        `GTK2.Socket GTK2.Socket(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.Socket.

      Method get_id

        `int get_id()`

      Description

        Gets the window id of a W(Socket) widget, which can then be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for instance with GTK2.Plug->create().

      Method id

        `int id()`

      Description

        Returns the window id, to be sent to the application providing the plug. You must realize this widget before calling this function.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

    CLASS GTK2.SourceBuffer

      Description

        Text buffer object for GTK2.SourceView

        Properties: int check-brackets int escape-char int highlight GTK2.SourceLanguage language int max-undo-levels

        Signals: can_redo

        can_undo

        highlight_updated

        marker_updated

      Method begin_not_undoable_action

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer begin_not_undoable_action()`

      Description

        Marks the beginning of a not undoable action on the buffer, disabling the undo manager. Typically you would call this function before initially setting the contents of the buffer (e.g. when loading a file in a text editor).

        You may nest begin_no_undoable_action()/end_not_undoable_action() blocks.

      Method can_redo

        `int can_redo()`

      Description

        Determines whether a source buffer can redo the last action.

      Method can_undo

        `int can_undo()`

      Description

        Determines whether a source buffer can undo the last action.

      Method create

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer GTK2.SourceBuffer(GTK2.TextTagTable table_or_lang)`

      Description

        Create a new SourceBuffer.

      Method end_not_undoable_action

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer end_not_undoable_action()`

      Description

        Marks the end of a not undoable action on the buffer. When the last not undoable block is closed through a call to this function, the list of undo actions is cleared and the undo manager is re-enabled.

      Method get_language

        `GTK2.SourceLanguage get_language()`

      Description

        Determines the GTK2.SourceLanguage used by the buffer.

      Method get_max_undo_levels

        `int get_max_undo_levels()`

      Description

        Determines the number of undo levels the buffer will track for buffer edits.

      Inherit TextBuffer

        inherit GTK2.TextBuffer : TextBuffer

      Method redo

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer redo()`

      Description

        Redoes the last undo operation. Use can_redo() to check whether a call to this function will have any effect.

      Method set_language

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer set_language(GTK2.SourceLanguage lang)`

      Description

        Sets the source language the source buffer will use, adding GTK2.SourceTag tags with the language's patterns and setting the escape character with set_escape_char(). Note that this will remove any GTK2.SourceTag tags currently in the buffer's tag table.

      Method set_max_undo_levels

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer set_max_undo_levels(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the number of undo levels for user actions the buffer will track. If the number of user actions exceeds the limit set by this funcction, older actions will be discarded.

        A new action is started whenever the function begin_user_action() is called. In general, this happens whenever the user presses any key which modifies the buffer, but the undo manager will try to merge similar consecutive actions, such as multiple character insertions into one action. But, inserting a newline does start a new action.

      Method undo

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer undo()`

      Description

        Undoes the last user action which modified the buffer. Use can_undo() to check whether a call to this function will have any effect.

        Actions are defined as groups of operations between a call to GTK2.TextBuffer->begin_user_action() and GTK2.TextBuffer->end_user_action(), or sequences of similar edits (inserts or deletes) on the same line.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceIter

      Method backward_search

        `array backward_search(string str, int flags, GTK2.TextIter limit)`

      Description

        Same as GTK2.TextIter->backward_search(), but supports case insensitive searching.

      Method forward_search

        `array forward_search(string str, int flags, GTK2.TextIter limit)`

      Description

        Same as GTK2.TextIter->backward_search(), but supports case insensitive searching.

      Inherit TextIter

        inherit GTK2.TextIter : TextIter

    CLASS GTK2.SourceLanguage

      Description

        Signals: tag_style_changed

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Returns the localized name of the language.

      Method get_section

        `string get_section()`

      Description

        Returns the localized section of the language. Each language belongs to a section (ex. HTML belongs to the Markup section).

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.SourceLanguagesManager

      Method create

        `GTK2.SourceLanguagesManager GTK2.SourceLanguagesManager()`

      Description

        Create a new language manager.

      Method get_available_languages

        `array get_available_languages()`

      Description

        Gets a list of available languages.

      Method get_lang_files_dirs

        `array get_lang_files_dirs()`

      Description

        Gets a list of language files directories.

      Method get_language_from_mime_type

        `GTK2.SourceLanguage get_language_from_mime_type(string type)`

      Description

        Gets the GTK2.SourceLanguage which is associated with the given type in the language manager.

      Method get_language_from_name

        `GTK2.SourceLanguage get_language_from_name(string name)`

      Description

        Gets the GTK2.SourceLanguage which has this name.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.SourceMark

      Method get_category

        `string get_category()`

      Description

        Gets the category type of this marker.

      Inherit TextMark

        inherit GTK2.TextMark : TextMark

      Method next

        `GTK2.SourceMark next(string category)`

      Description

        Gets the next marker of the specified category after this.

      Method prev

        `GTK2.SourceMark prev(string category)`

      Description

        Gets the previous marker of the specified category before this.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceMarker

      Method get_marker_type

        `string get_marker_type()`

      Description

        Gets the marker type of this marker.

      Inherit SourceMark

        inherit GTK2.SourceMark : SourceMark

    CLASS GTK2.SourcePrintJob

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.SourceBuffer buffer Gnome.PrintConfig config string font Pango.FontDescription font-desc string header-footer-font Pango.FontDescription header-footer-font-desc int highlight string numbers-font Pango.FontDescript numbers-font-desc int print-footer int print-header int print-numbers int tabs-width int wrap-mode

        Signals: begin_page

        finished

      Method cancel

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob cancel()`

      Description

        Cancels an asynchronous printing operation. This will remove any pending print idle handler.

      Method create

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob GTK2.SourcePrintJob(GTK2.SourceBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Creates a new print job object.

      Method get_buffer

        `GTK2.SourceBuffer get_buffer()`

      Description

        Gets the GTK2.SourceBuffer the print job would print.

      Method get_highlight

        `int get_highlight()`

      Description

        Determines if the job is configured to print the text highlighted with colors and font styles. Note that highlighting will happen only if the buffer to print has highlighting activated.

      Method get_page

        `int get_page()`

      Description

        Determines the currently printing page number.

      Method get_page_count

        `int get_page_count()`

      Description

        Determines the total number of pages the job will print. The returned value is only meaningful after pagination has finished. In practice, for synchronous printing this means when "begin_page" is emitted, or after print_range_async() has returned.

      Method get_print_footer

        `int get_print_footer()`

      Description

        Determines if a footer is set to be printed for each page. A footer will be printed if this function returns true and some format strings have been specified with set_footer_format().

      Method get_print_header

        `int get_print_header()`

      Description

        Determines if a header is set to be printed for each page. A header will be printed if this function returns true and some format strings have been specified with set_header_format().

      Method get_print_numbers

        `int get_print_numbers()`

      Description

        Determines the interval used for line number printing. If the value is 0, no line numbers will be printed. The default value is 1 (i.e. numbers printed in all lines).

      Method get_tabs_width

        `int get_tabs_width()`

      Description

        Determines the configured width (in equivalent spaces) of tabulations. The default value is 8.

      Method get_text_margins

        `mapping get_text_margins()`

      Description

        Determines the user set margins for the job. The default for all four margins is 0.0.

      Method get_wrap_mode

        `int get_wrap_mode()`

      Description

        Determines the wrapping style for text lines wider than the printable width. The default is no wrapping.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method print

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob print()`

      Description

        Print the document.

      Method print_range

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob print_range(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Similar to print(), except you can specify a range of text to print. start and end can be in any order.

      Method print_range_async

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob print_range_async(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Starts to print job asynchronously. This function will ready the job for printing and install an idle handler that will render one page at a time.

        This function will not return immediately, as only page rendering is done asynchronously. Text retrieval and paginating happens within this function. Also, if highlighting is enabled, the whole buffer needs to be highlighted first.

        To get notification when the job has finished, you must connect to the "finished" signal.

      Method set_buffer

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_buffer(GTK2.SourceBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.SourceBuffer the print job will print. You need to specify a buffer to print, either by the use of this function or by creating the print job with create().

      Method set_footer_format

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_footer_format(string|void left, string|void center, string|void right, int separator)`

      Description

        Like set_header_format(), but for the footer.

      Method set_header_format

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_header_format(string|void left, string|void center, string|void right, int separator)`

      Description

        Sets strftime like header format strings, to be printed on the left, center and right of the top of each page. The strings may include strftime(3) codes which will be expanded at print time. All strftime() codes are accepted, with the addition of N for the page number and Q for the page count.

        separator specifies if a solid line should be drawn to separate the header from the document text.

        If 0 is given for any of the three arguments, that particular string will not be printed. For the header to be printed, in addition to specifying format strings, you need to enable header printing with set_print_header().

      Method set_highlight

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_highlight(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the printed text will be highlighted according to the buffer rules. Both color and font style are applied.

      Method set_print_footer

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_print_footer(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether you want to print a footer in each page. The default footer consists of three pieces of text and an optional line separator, configurable with set_footer_format().

        Note that be default the footer format is unspecified, and if it's empty it will not be printed, regardless of this setting.

      Method set_print_header

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_print_header(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether you want to print a header in each page. The default header consists of three pieces of text and an optional line separator, configurable with set_header_format().

        Note that by default the header format is unspecified, and if it's empty it will not be printed, regardless of this setting.

      Method set_print_numbers

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_print_numbers(int interval)`

      Description

        Sets the interval for printed line numbers. If interval is 0 no numbers will be printed. If greater than 0, a number will be printed every interval lines (i.e. 1 will print all line numbers).

      Method set_tabs_width

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_tabs_width(int tabs_width)`

      Description

        Sets the width (equivalent spaces) of tabulations for the printed text. The width in printing units will be calculated as the width of a string containing tabs_width spaces of the default font. Tabulation stops are set for the full width of printed text.

      Method set_text_margins

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_text_margins(float top, float bottom, float left, float right)`

      Description

        Sets the four user margins for the print job. These margins are in addition to the document margins provided in the GnomePrintConfig and will not be used for headers, footers, or line numbers (those are calculated separately). You can print in the space allocate by these margins by connecting to the "begin-page" signal. The space is around the printed text, and inside the margins specified in the GnomePrintConfig.

        The margin numbers are given in device units. If any of the given values is less than 0, that particular margin is not altered by this function.

      Method set_wrap_mode

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob set_wrap_mode(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the wrap mode for lines of text larger than the printable width.

      Method setup_from_view

        `GTK2.SourcePrintJob setup_from_view(GTK2.SourceView view)`

      Description

        Convenience function to set several configuration options at once, so that the printed output matches view. The options set are buffer (if not set already), tabs width, highlighting, wrap mode and default font.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceStyleScheme

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of this scheme.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceTag

      Description

        Properties: string id GTK2.SourceTagStyle tag-style

      Method get_style

        `mapping get_style()`

      Description

        Gets the style associated with this tag.

      Inherit TextTag

        inherit GTK2.TextTag : TextTag

      Method set_style

        `GTK2.SourceTag set_style(mapping style)`

      Description

        Associates a style with this tag. See GTK2.SourceBuffer->set_bracket_match_style() for format.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceTagTable

      Description

        Derived from GTK2.TextTagTable

        Signals: changed

      Method add_tags

        `GTK2.SourceTagTable add_tags(array tags)`

      Description

        Adds a list of tags to the table. The added tags are assigned the highest priority in the table.

        If a tag is already present in the table or has the same name as an already added tag, then it is not added to the table.

      Method create

        `GTK2.SourceTagTable GTK2.SourceTagTable()`

      Description

        Creates a new table. The table contains no tags be default.

      Inherit TextTagTable

        inherit GTK2.TextTagTable : TextTagTable

      Method remove_source_tags

        `GTK2.SourceTagTable remove_source_tags()`

      Description

        Removes all source tags from the table. This will remove the table's reference to the tags, so be careful - tags will end up destroyed if you don't have a reference to them.

    CLASS GTK2.SourceView

      Description

        Properties: int auto-indent int highlight-current-line int insert-spaces-instead-of-tabs int margin int show-line-markers int show-line-numbers int show-margin int smart-home-end int tabs-width

        Signals: redo

        undo

      Method create

        `GTK2.SourceView GTK2.SourceView(GTK2.SourceBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Create a new W(SourceView). If a buffer isn't specified, an empty default buffer will be created.

      Method get_auto_indent

        `int get_auto_indent()`

      Description

        Returns whether auto indentation of text is enabled.

      Method get_insert_spaces_instead_of_tabs

        `int get_insert_spaces_instead_of_tabs()`

      Description

        Returns whether when inserting a tabulator character it should be replaced by a group of space characters.

      Method get_show_line_numbers

        `int get_show_line_numbers()`

      Description

        Returns whether line markers are displayed beside the text.

      Method get_smart_home_end

        `int get_smart_home_end()`

      Description

        Returns whether HOME and END keys will move to the first/last non-space character of the line before moving to the start/end.

      Inherit TextView

        inherit GTK2.TextView : TextView

      Method set_auto_indent

        `GTK2.SourceView set_auto_indent(int setting)`

      Description

        If true, auto indentation of text is enabled.

      Method set_insert_spaces_instead_of_tabs

        `GTK2.SourceView set_insert_spaces_instead_of_tabs(int setting)`

      Description

        If true, any tabulator character inserted is replaced by a group of space characters.

      Method set_show_line_numbers

        `GTK2.SourceView set_show_line_numbers(int setting)`

      Description

        If true, line numbers will be displayed beside the text.

      Method set_smart_home_end

        `GTK2.SourceView set_smart_home_end(int setting)`

      Description

        If true, HOME and END keys will move to the first/last non-space character of the line before moving to the start/end.

    CLASS GTK2.SpinButton

      Description

        The Spin Button widget is generally used to allow the user to select a value from a range of numeric values. It consists of a text entry box with up and down arrow buttons attached to the side. Selecting one of the buttons causes the value to "spin" up and down the range of possible values. The entry box may also be edited directly to enter a specific value.

        The Spin Button allows the value to have zero or a number of decimal places and to be incremented/decremented in configurable steps. The action of holding down one of the buttons optionally results in an acceleration of change in the value according to how long it is depressed.

        The Spin Button uses an W(Adjustment) object to hold information about the range of values that the spin button can take.

        The attributes of an W(Adjustment) are used by the Spin Button in the following way: <ul><li>value: initial value for the Spin Button</li> <li>lower: lower range value</li> <li>upper: upper range value</li> <li>step_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 1 on a button</li> <li>page_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 2 on a button</li> <li>page_size: unused</li> </ul>

        The argument order for the W(Adjustment) constructor is: value, lower, upper, step_increment, page_increment, page_size

        `GTK2.SpinButton(GTK2.Adjustment(),0.1, 1 )->set_size_request(60,20)`

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment adjustment float climb-rate int digits int numeric int snap-to-ticks int update-policy float value int wrap

        Style properties: int shadow-type

        Signals: change_value

        input

        output

        value_changed

      Method configure

        `GTK2.SpinButton configure(GTK2.Adjustment range, float climb_rate, int precision)`

      Description

        Adjustment (with the lower/upper/increse values), climb_rate and digits

      Method create

        `GTK2.SpinButton GTK2.SpinButton(GTK2.Adjustment range_or_min_or_props, float climb_rate_or_max, int|float precision_or_step)`

      Description

        The climb_rate argument take a value between 0.0 and 1.0 and indicates the amount of acceleration that the Spin Button has. The digits argument specifies the number of decimal places to which the value will be displayed.

      Method get_adjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_adjustment()`

      Description

        Get the adjustment associated with this spinbutton.

      Method get_digits

        `int get_digits()`

      Description

        Fetches the precision.

      Method get_entry

        `int get_entry()`

      Description

        Returns W(Entry) of this widget.

      Method get_increments

        `mapping get_increments()`

      Description

        Gets the current step and page increments.

      Method get_numeric

        `int get_numeric()`

      Description

        Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed in.

      Method get_range

        `mapping get_range()`

      Description

        Gets the range allowed.

      Method get_snap_to_ticks

        `int get_snap_to_ticks()`

      Description

        Returns whether the value are corrected to the nearest step.

      Method get_update_policy

        `int get_update_policy()`

      Description

        Gets the update behavior.

      Method get_value

        `float get_value()`

      Description

        Get the value.

      Method get_value_as_int

        `int get_value_as_int()`

      Description

        The current value of a Spin Button can be retrieved as a int.

      Method get_wrap

        `int get_wrap()`

      Description

        Returns whether the value wraps around to the opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is exceeded.

      Inherit CellEditable

        inherit GTK2.CellEditable : CellEditable

      Inherit Editable

        inherit GTK2.Editable : Editable

      Inherit Entry

        inherit GTK2.Entry : Entry

      Method set_adjustment

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_adjustment(GTK2.Adjustment range)`

      Description

        Set a new adjustment.

      Method set_digits

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_digits(int precision)`

      Description

        Set the number of digits to show to the user.

      Method set_increments

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_increments(float step, float page)`

      Description

        Sets the step and page increments. This affects how quickly the value changes when the arrows are activated.

      Method set_numeric

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_numeric(int numericp)`

      Description

        If true, it is a numeric value. This prevents a user from typing anything other than numeric values into the text box of a Spin Button

      Method set_range

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_range(float min, float max)`

      Description

        Sets the minimum and maximum allowable values.

      Method set_snap_to_ticks

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_snap_to_ticks(int snapp)`

      Description

        Set the Spin Button to round the value to the nearest step_increment, which is set within the Adjustment object used with the Spin Button

      Method set_update_policy

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_update_policy(int policy)`

      Description

        The possible values of policy are either GTK2.UpdateAlways or GTK2.UpdateIfValid.

        These policies affect the behavior of a Spin Button when parsing inserted text and syncing its value with the values of the Adjustment.

        In the case of GTK2.UpdateIfValid the Spin Button value only gets changed if the text input is a numeric value that is within the range specified by the Adjustment. Otherwise the text is reset to the current value.

        In case of GTK2.UpdateAlways errors are ignored while converting text into a numeric value.

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_value(float to)`

      Description

        Set the value.

      Method set_wrap

        `GTK2.SpinButton set_wrap(int wrapp)`

      Description

        If true, the spin button will wrap from the lowest to the highest value, and the highest to the lowest.

      Method spin

        `GTK2.SpinButton spin(int direction, float increment)`

      Description

        If you want to alter the value of a Spin Value relative to its current value, then this function can be used.

        The direction paramenter is one of SPIN_END, SPIN_HOME, SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD, SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD, SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD, SPIN_STEP_FORWARD and SPIN_USER_DEFINED

        GTK2.SpinStepForward and GTK2.SpinStepBackward change the value of the Spin Button by the amount specified by increment, unless increment is equal to 0, in which case the value is changed by the value of step_increment in theAdjustment.

        GTK2.SpinPageForward and GTK2.SpinPageBackward simply alter the value of the Spin Button by increment.

        GTK2.SpinHome sets the value of the Spin Button to the bottom of the Adjustments range.

        GTK2.SpinEnd sets the value of the Spin Button to the top of the Adjustments range.

        GTK2.SpinUserDefined simply alters the value of the Spin Button by the specified amount.

      Method update

        `GTK2.SpinButton update()`

      Description

        Explicitly request that the Spin Button updates itself

    CLASS GTK2.Spinner

      Description

        A @[Spinner] widget displays an icon-size spinning animation. It is often used as an alternative to a GtkProgressBar for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.

        To start the animation, use @[start], to stop it use @[stop] Properties: int active

      Method create

        `GTK2.Spinner GTK2.Spinner()`

      Inherit DrawingArea

        inherit GTK2.DrawingArea : DrawingArea

      Method start

        `GTK2.Spinner start()`

      Description

        Start the spinner

      Method stop

        `GTK2.Spinner stop()`

      Description

        Stop the spinner

    CLASS GTK2.StatusIcon

      Description

        The "system tray" or notification area is normally used for transient icons that indicate some special state. For example, a system tray icon might appear to tell the user that they have new mail, or have an incoming instant message, or something along those lines. The basic idea is that creating an icon in the notification area is less annoying than popping up a dialog.

        A GTK2.StatusIcon object can be used to display an icon in a "system tray". The icon can have a tooltip, and the user can interact with it by activating it or popping up a context menu. Critical information should/ not solely be displayed in a GTK2.StatusIcon, since it may not be visible (e.g. when the user doesn't have a notification area on his panel). This can be checked with is_embedded().

        On X11, the implementation follows the freedesktop.org "System Tray" specification. Implementations of the "tray" side of this specification can be found e.g. in the GNOME and KDE panel applications.

        Note that a GTK2.StatusIcon is not a widget, but just a G.Object. Making it a widget would be impractical, since the system tray on Win32 doesn't allow to embed arbitrary widgets. Properties: int blinking string file string icon-name GDK2.Pixbuf pixbuf int size string stock int storage-type int visible

        Signals: activate

        popup_menu

        size_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.StatusIcon GTK2.StatusIcon(mapping|GdkPixbuf|string arg)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.StatusIcon.

      Method get_blinking

        `int get_blinking()`

      Description

        Returns whether the icon is blinking.

      Method get_icon_name

        `string get_icon_name()`

      Description

        Gets the name of the icon.

      Method get_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_pixbuf()`

      Description

        Get the pixbuf.

      Method get_size

        `int get_size()`

      Description

        Gets the size in pixels.

      Method get_stock

        `string get_stock()`

      Description

        Gets the id of the stock icon.

      Method get_storage_type

        `int get_storage_type()`

      Description

        Gets the type of icon, e.g. GTK2.IMAGE_PIXMAP, GTK2.IMAGE_PIXBUF, etc.

      Method get_visible

        `int get_visible()`

      Description

        Returns whether the icon is visible or not.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method is_embedded

        `int is_embedded()`

      Description

        Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification area.

      Method set_blinking

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_blinking(int blinking)`

      Description

        Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.

      Method set_from_file

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_from_file(string filename)`

      Description

        Set the icon from a file.

      Method set_from_icon_name

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_from_icon_name(string icon_name)`

      Description

        Set the icon from the icon called icon_name from the current theme.

      Method set_from_pixbuf

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_from_pixbuf(GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Set the icon from pixbuf.

      Method set_from_stock

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_from_stock(string stock_id)`

      Description

        Set the icon from a stock icon.

      Method set_tooltip

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_tooltip(string tooltip_text)`

      Description

        Sets the tooltip.

      Method set_visible

        `GTK2.StatusIcon set_visible(int visible)`

      Description

        Shows or hides a status icon.

    CLASS GTK2.Statusbar

      Description

        Statusbars are simple widgets used to display a text message. They keep a stack of the messages pushed onto them, so that popping the current message will re-display the previous text message.

        In order to allow different parts of an application to use the same statusbar to display messages, the statusbar widget issues Context Identifiers which are used to identify different 'users'. The message on top of the stack is the one displayed, no matter what context it is in. Messages are stacked in last-in-first-out order, not context identifier order.

        `lambda() {object sb = GTK2.Statusbar();int id = sb->get_context_id("test");sb->push(id,"A message");sb->push(id,"Another message");return sb;}()`

        `lambda() {object sb = GTK2.Statusbar();int id = sb->get_context_id("test");sb->push(id,"A message");sb->push(id,"Another message");sb->pop(id);return sb;}()`

        Properties: int has-resize-grip

        Style properties: int shadow-type

        Signals: text_popped

        text_pushed

      Method create

        `GTK2.Statusbar GTK2.Statusbar(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new statusbar widget

      Method get_context_id

        `int get_context_id(string context)`

      Description

        Create a new context id (or get the id of an old one). The argument is any string. The return value can be used for -&gt;push() -&gt;pop() and -&gt;remove later on.

      Method get_has_resize_grip

        `int get_has_resize_grip()`

      Description

        Returns whether the statusbar has a resize grip.

      Inherit Hbox

        inherit GTK2.Hbox : Hbox

      Method pop

        `GTK2.Statusbar pop(int context)`

      Description

        Remove the topmost message.

      Method push

        `int push(int context, string data)`

      Description

        Push a message onto the statusbar. The return value is an id that can be passed to remove later on.

      Method remove

        `GTK2.Statusbar remove(int context, int id)`

      Description

        Remove the specified message (the message id is the second argument).

      Method set_has_resize_grip

        `GTK2.Statusbar set_has_resize_grip(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the statusbar has a resize grip. TRUE by default.

    CLASS GTK2.StringTag

      Method create

        `GTK2.StringTag GTK2.StringTag(string id, string name, string pattern_start, string pattern_end, int end_at_line_end)`

      Description

        Creates a new string tag object with the provided arguments.

      Inherit SourceTag

        inherit GTK2.SourceTag : SourceTag

    CLASS GTK2.Style

      Description

        Style settings.

        Signals: realize

        unrealize

      Method attach

        `GTK2.Style attach(GTK2.Widget window)`

      Description

        Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may involve the creation of a new style if the style has already been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.Style copy()`

      Description

        Copy a style.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Style GTK2.Style()`

      Description

        Creates a new style.

      Method detach

        `GTK2.Style detach()`

      Description

        Detach a style.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method lookup_icon_set

        `GTK2.IconSet lookup_icon_set(string stock_id)`

      Description

        Lookup the icon set.

      Method paint_arrow

        `GTK2.Style paint_arrow(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int arrow, int fill, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on window using the given parameters. arrow determines the direction of the arrow.

      Method paint_box

        `GTK2.Style paint_box(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a box on window with the given parameters.

      Method paint_box_gap

        `GTK2.Style paint_box_gap(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, int gap_side, int gap_x, int gap_width)`

      Description

        Draws a box in window using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a gap in one side.

      Method paint_check

        `GTK2.Style paint_check(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on window.

      Method paint_diamond

        `GTK2.Style paint_diamond(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on window.

      Method paint_expander

        `GTK2.Style paint_expander(GTK2.Widget window, int state, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int style)`

      Description

        Draws an expander as used in GTK2.TreeView. x and y specify the center of the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the "expander-size" style property of widget. (If widget is 0 or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't have sufficient information to position the expander, this is likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the expanded position.

      Method paint_extension

        `GTK2.Style paint_extension(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, int gap_side)`

      Description

        Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.

      Method paint_flat_box

        `GTK2.Style paint_flat_box(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a flat box on window.

      Method paint_focus

        `GTK2.Style paint_focus(GTK2.Widget window, int state, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle.

      Method paint_handle

        `GTK2.Style paint_handle(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, int orientation)`

      Description

        Draws a handle as used in GTK2.HandleBox and GTK2.Paned.

      Method paint_hline

        `GTK2.Style paint_hline(GTK2.Widget window, int state, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x1, int x2, int y)`

      Description

        Draws a horizontal line from (x1,y) to (x2,y).

      Method paint_layout

        `GTK2.Style paint_layout(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int use_text, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, GTK2.Pango.Layout layout)`

      Description

        Draw a pango layout. Use widget->create_pango_layout() to get a Pango.Layout.

      Method paint_option

        `GTK2.Style paint_option(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle.

      Method paint_resize_grip

        `GTK2.Style paint_resize_grip(GTK2.Widget window, int state, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int edge, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle.

      Method paint_shadow

        `GTK2.Style paint_shadow(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws a shadow around the given rectangle.

      Method paint_shadow_gap

        `GTK2.Style paint_shadow_gap(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, int gap_side, int gap_x, int gap_width)`

      Description

        Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in window, leaving a gap in one side.

      Method paint_slider

        `GTK2.Style paint_slider(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, int orientation)`

      Description

        Paint a slider.

      Method paint_tab

        `GTK2.Style paint_tab(GTK2.Widget window, int state, int shadow, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows).

      Method paint_vline

        `GTK2.Style paint_vline(GTK2.Widget window, int state, GTK2.GdkRectangle rect, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail, int y1, int y2, int x)`

      Description

        Draws a vertical line from (x,y1) to (x,y2).

      Method render_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf render_icon(GTK2.IconSource source, int direction, int state, int size, GTK2.Widget widget, string detail)`

      Description

        Renders the icon specified by source at the given size according to the given parameters and returns the result in a pixbuf.

      Method set_background

        `GTK2.Style set_background(GTK2.Widget window, int state)`

      Description

        Sets the background of window to the background color or pixmap specified by style for the given state.

    CLASS GTK2.SyntaxTag

      Method create

        `GTK2.SyntaxTag GTK2.SyntaxTag(string id, string name, string pattern_start, string pattern_end)`

      Description

        Creates a new syntax tag object with the provided arguments.

      Inherit SourceTag

        inherit GTK2.SourceTag : SourceTag

    CLASS GTK2.Table

      Description

        The GTK2.Table allows the programmer to arrange widgets in rows and columns, making it easy to align many widgets next to each other, horizontally and vertically.

        `GTK2.Table(2,2,0)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("0,0"), 0, 1, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("0,1"), 0, 1, 1, 2)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("1,0"), 1, 2, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("1,1"), 1, 2, 1, 2)->set_col_spacings(10)->set_row_spacings(10)`

        `GTK2.Table(2,2,0)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("0,0-1,0"), 0, 2, 0, 1)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("0,1"), 0, 1, 1, 2)->attach_defaults( GTK2.Label("1,1"), 1, 2, 1, 2)->set_col_spacings(10)->set_row_spacings(10)`

        Properties: int column-spacing int homogeneous int n-columns int n-rows int row-spacing

        Child properties: int bottom-attach int left-attach int right-attach int top-attach int x-options int x-padding int y-options int y-padding

      Method attach

        `GTK2.Table attach(GTK2.Widget subwidget, int left, int right, int top, int bottom, int xoptions, int yoptions, int xpad, int ypad)`

      Description

        The left and right attach arguments specify where to place the widget, and how many boxes to use. If you want a button in the lower right table entry of our 2x2 table, and want it to fill that entry ONLY. left_attach would be = 1, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 1, bottom_attach = 2.

        Now, if you wanted a widget to take up the whole top row of our 2x2 table, you'd use left_attach = 0, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 0, bottom_attach = 1.

        The xoptions and yoptions are used to specify packing options and may be OR'ed together to allow multiple options.

        These options are: <ul> <li> GTK2.Fill - If the table box is larger than the widget, and GTK_FILL is specified, the widget will expand to use all the room available.</li> <li> GTK2.Shrink - If the table widget was allocated less space then was requested (usually by the user resizing the window), then the widgets would normally just be pushed off the bottom of the window and disappear. If GTK_SHRINK is specified, the widgets will shrink with the table.</li> <li> GTK2.Expand - This will cause the table cell to expand to use up any remaining space in the window.</li> </ul>

        Padding is just like in boxes, creating a clear area around the widget specified in pixels

      Method attach_defaults

        `GTK2.Table attach_defaults(GTK2.Widget subwidget, int left, int right, int top, int bottom)`

      Description

        As there are many options associated with attach(), this convenience function provides the programmer with a means to add children to a table with identical padding and expansion options.

        xoptions, yoptions, xpadding and ypadding are all set the their default values. For the options that is GTK2.Fill|GTK2.Expand. For the padding it is 0.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Table GTK2.Table(int|mapping width_or_props, int|void height, int|void homogeneousp)`

      Description

        Used to create a new table widget. An initial size must be given by specifying how many rows and columns the table should have, although this can be changed later with resize().

        There can never be more than 65535 colums nor more than 65535 rows.

        setting homogeneousp to 1 forces the all tablecells to be exactly the same size.

      Method get_col_spacing

        `int get_col_spacing(int col)`

      Description

        Gets the amound of space between col and col+1.

      Method get_default_col_spacing

        `int get_default_col_spacing()`

      Description

        Gets the default column spacing for the table.

      Method get_default_row_spacing

        `int get_default_row_spacing()`

      Description

        Gets the default row spacing for the table.

      Method get_homogeneous

        `int get_homogeneous()`

      Description

        Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same width and height.

      Method get_row_spacing

        `int get_row_spacing(int row)`

      Description

        Gets the amount of space between row and row+1.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method resize

        `GTK2.Table resize(int rows, int columns)`

      Description

        If you need to change a table's size after it has been created, this function allows you to do so.

      Method set_col_spacing

        `GTK2.Table set_col_spacing(int x, int spacing)`

      Description

        alters the amount of space between a given table column and the adjacent columns.

      Method set_col_spacings

        `GTK2.Table set_col_spacings(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the space between every column in the table equal to spacing.

      Method set_homogeneous

        `GTK2.Table set_homogeneous(int homogeneousp)`

      Description

        Set the homogeneous flag.

      Method set_row_spacing

        `GTK2.Table set_row_spacing(int y, int spacing)`

      Description

        alters the amount of space between a given table row and the adjacent rows.

      Method set_row_spacings

        `GTK2.Table set_row_spacings(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the space between every row in the table equal to spacing.

    CLASS GTK2.TearoffMenuItem

      Description

        A GTK2.TearoffMenuItem is a special W(MenuItem) which is used to tear off and reattach its menu.

        When its menu is shown normally, the GTK2.TearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line indicating that the menu can be torn off. Activating it causes its menu to be torn off and displayed in its own window as a tearoff menu.

        When its menu is shown as a tearoff menu, the GTK2.TearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line which has a left pointing arrow graphic indicating that the tearoff menu can be reattached. Activating it will erase the tearoff menu window. `GTK2.TearoffMenuItem()->set_size_request(100,0)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.TearoffMenuItem GTK2.TearoffMenuItem(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new tearoff menu item

      Inherit Activatable

        inherit GTK2.Activatable : Activatable

      Inherit MenuItem

        inherit GTK2.MenuItem : MenuItem

    CLASS GTK2.TextAttributes

      Description

        Holds text attributes.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.TextAttributes copy()`

      Description

        Copies src and returns it.

      Method copy_values

        `GTK2.TextAttributes copy_values(GTK2.TextAttributes dest)`

      Description

        Copies src onto dest

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextAttributes GTK2.TextAttributes()`

      Description

        Create a W(TextAttributes) widget.

    CLASS GTK2.TextBuffer

      Description

        Properties: int cursor-position int has-selection GTK2.TextTagTable tag_table string text

        Signals: apply_tag

        begin_user_action

        changed

        delete_range

        end_user_action

        insert_child_anchor

        insert_pixbuf

        insert_text

        mark_deleted

        mark_set

        modified_changed

        remove_tag

      Method add_selection_clipboard

        `GTK2.TextBuffer add_selection_clipboard(GTK2.Clipboard clipboard)`

      Description

        Adds clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection contents of the buffer are available. In most cases, clipboard will be the GTK2.Clipboard of GDK2.SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of this buffer.

      Method apply_tag

        `GTK2.TextBuffer apply_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Emits the "apply-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal applies tag to the given range, start and end do not have to be in order.

      Method apply_tag_by_name

        `GTK2.TextBuffer apply_tag_by_name(string name, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Calls GTK2.TextTagTable->lookup() on the buffers tag table to get a GTK2.TextTag, then calls apply_tag().

      Method backspace

        `int backspace(GTK2.TextIter iter, int interactive, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Performs the appropriate action as if the user hit the delete key with the cursor at the position specified by iter. In the normal case a single character will be deleted, but when combining accents are involved, more than one character can be deleted, and when precomposed character and accent combinations are involved, less than one character will be deleted.

        Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after calling this function; however, iter will be re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.

      Method begin_user_action

        `GTK2.TextBuffer begin_user_action()`

      Description

        Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and call end_user_action() are part of a single user-visible operation. The operations between begin_user_action() and end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating an undo stack. W(TextBuffer) maintains a count of calls to begin_user_action() that have not been closed with a call to end_user_action(), and emits the "begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions from other user actions.

        The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's no need to add extra calls if your user action consists solely of a single call to one of those functions.

      Method copy_clipboard

        `GTK2.TextBuffer copy_clipboard(GTK2.Clipboard clipboard)`

      Description

        Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextBuffer GTK2.TextBuffer(GTK2.TextTagTable table_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new text buffer.

      Method create_child_anchor

        `GTK2.TextChildAnchor create_child_anchor(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        This is a convenience function which simply creates a child anchor with GTK2.TextChildAnchor->create() and inserts it into the buffer with insert_child_anchor(). The new anchor is owned by the buffer; no reference count is returned.

      Method create_mark

        `GTK2.TextMark create_mark(GTK2.TextIter where, int left_gravity, string|void mark_name)`

      Description

        Creates a mark at position where. If mark_name is omitted, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieve by name using get_mark(). If a mark has left gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity, the mark will end up on the right of the newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right side of the text you're typing). Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial placement.

      Method create_tag

        `GTK2.TextTag create_tag(string tag_name, mapping props)`

      Description

        Creates a tag and adds it to the tag table. Equivalent to calling GTK2.TextTag->create() and then adding the tag to the tag table. The returned tag is owned by the tag table.

      Method cut_clipboard

        `GTK2.TextBuffer cut_clipboard(GTK2.Clipboard clipboard, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard, then deletes said text if it's editable.

      Method delete

        `GTK2.TextBuffer delete(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Deletes text between start and end. The order of start and end is not actually relevant; delete() will reorder them. This function actually emits the "delete-range" signal, and the default handler of that signal deletes the text. Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after calling this function; however, start and end will be re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.

      Method delete_interactive

        `int delete_interactive(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Deletes all editable text in the given range. Calls delete() for each editable sub-range of [start,end). start and end are revalidated to point to the location of the last deleted range, or left untouched if no text was deleted.

      Method delete_mark

        `GTK2.TextBuffer delete_mark(GTK2.TextMark mark)`

      Description

        Deletes mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the buffer. Removes the reference the buffer holds to the mark. There is no way to undelete a mark. The "mark-deleted" signal will be emitted as notification after the mark is deleted.

      Method delete_mark_by_name

        `GTK2.TextBuffer delete_mark_by_name(string name)`

      Description

        Deletes the mark named name; the mark must exist.

      Method delete_selection

        `int delete_selection(int interactive, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Deletes the range between the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks, that is, the currently-selected text. If interactive is true, the editability of the selection will be considered (users can't delete uneditable text).

      Method end_user_action

        `GTK2.TextBuffer end_user_action()`

      Description

        Should be paired with begin_user_action();

      Method get_bounds

        `array get_bounds()`

      Description

        Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the entire buffer lies within the range [start,end).

      Method get_char_count

        `int get_char_count()`

      Description

        Gets the number of characters in the buffer; note that characters and bytes are not the same, you can't e.g. expect the contents of the buffer in string form to be this many bytes long.

      Method get_end_iter

        `GTK2.TextIter get_end_iter()`

      Description

        Returns the "end iterator", one past the last valid character in the buffer. If dereferenced with W(TextIter)->get_char(), the end iterator has a character value of 0. The entire buffer lies in the range from the first position in the buffer to the end iterator.

      Method get_has_selection

        `int get_has_selection()`

      Description

        Indicates whether some text is currently selected.

      Method get_insert

        `GTK2.TextMark get_insert()`

      Description

        Returns the mark that represents the cursor (insertion point). Equivalent to calling get_mark() to get the mark named "insert", but very slightly more efficient, and involves less typing.

      Method get_iter_at_child_anchor

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_child_anchor(GTK2.TextChildAnchor anchor)`

      Description

        Returns the location of anchor.

      Method get_iter_at_line

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_line(int line)`

      Description

        Returns a W(TextIter) to the start of the given line.

      Method get_iter_at_line_index

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_line_index(int line, int byte_index)`

      Description

        Obtains an iterator point to byte_index with the given line. byte_index must be the start of a UTF-8 character, and must not be beyond the end of the line. Note bytes, not characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.

      Method get_iter_at_line_offset

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_line_offset(int line_number, int char_offset)`

      Description

        Obtains an iterator pointing to char_offset within the given line. The char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line are not allowed. Note characters, not bytes; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.

      Method get_iter_at_mark

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_mark(GTK2.TextMark mark)`

      Description

        Returns an iterator with the current position of mark.

      Method get_iter_at_offset

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_offset(int offset)`

      Description

        Returns an iterator at position offset chars from the start of the entire buffer. If offset is -1 or greater than the number of characters in the buffer, returns the end iterator, the iterator one past the last valid character in the buffer.

      Method get_line_count

        `int get_line_count()`

      Description

        Obtains the number of lines in the buffer.

      Method get_mark

        `GTK2.TextMark get_mark(string name)`

      Description

        Returns the mark named name.

      Method get_modified

        `int get_modified()`

      Description

        Indicates whether the buffer has been modified since the last call to set_modified() set the modification flag to false. Used for example to enable a "save" function in a text editor.

      Method get_selection_bound

        `GTK2.TextMark get_selection_bound()`

      Description

        Returns the mark that represents the selection bound. Equivalent to calling get_mark() to get the mark named "selection_bound", but very slightly more efficient, and involves less typing.

        The currently-selected text in the buffer is the region between the "selection_bound" and "insert" marks. If "selection_bound" and "insert" are in the same place, then there is no current selection. get_selection_bounds() is another convenient function for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there's a selection and what its bounds are.

      Method get_selection_bounds

        `array get_selection_bounds()`

      Description

        Returns either an array with start and end W(TextIter) if some text is selected, or 0 if there's no active selection.

      Method get_slice

        `string get_slice(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end, int include_hidden_chars)`

      Description

        Returns the text in the range [start,end). Excludes undisplayed text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if include_hidden_chars is false. The returned string includes a 0xFFFC character whenever the buffer contains embedded images, so byte and character indexes into the returned string do correspond to byte and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with get_text(). Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or widget is in the buffer.

      Method get_start_iter

        `GTK2.TextIter get_start_iter()`

      Description

        Returns an iterator with the first position in the text buffer. This is the same as using get_iter_at_offset() to get the iter at character offset 0.

      Method get_tag_table

        `GTK2.TextTagTable get_tag_table()`

      Description

        Get the W(TextTagTable) associated with this buffer.

      Method get_text

        `string get_text(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end, int include_hidden_chars)`

      Description

        Returns the text int the range [start,end). Excludes undisplayed text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if include_hidden_chars is false. Does not include characters representing embedded images, so byte and character indexes into the returned string do not correspond to byte and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with get_slice().

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method insert

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert(GTK2.TextIter iter, string text, int len)`

      Description

        Insert len bytes of text at position iter. If len is -1, string will be inserted in its entirely. Emits the 'insert-text' signal. iter is invalidated after insertion, but the default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the inserted text.

      Method insert_at_cursor

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_at_cursor(string text, int len)`

      Description

        Simply calls insert(), using the current cursor position as the insertion point.

      Method insert_child_anchor

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_child_anchor(GTK2.TextIter iter, GTK2.TextChildAnchor anchor)`

      Description

        Inserts a child widget anchor into the buffer at iter. The anchor will be counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode "object replacement character" oxFFFC. Note that the "slice" variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include this character for child anchors, but the "text" variants do not. e.g. see get_slice() and get_text(). Consider create_child_anchor() as a more convenient alternative to this function. The buffer will add a reference to the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.

      Method insert_interactive

        `int insert_interactive(GTK2.TextIter iter, string text, int len, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Like insert(), but the insertion will not occur if iter is at a non- editable location in the buffer. Usually you want to prevent insertions at ineditable locations if the insertion results from a user action (is interactive).

        default_edtibale indicates the editability of text that doesn't have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the result of get_editable() is appropriate here.

      Method insert_interactive_at_cursor

        `int insert_interactive_at_cursor(string text, int len, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Calls insert_interactive() at the cursor position.

      Method insert_pixbuf

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_pixbuf(GTK2.TextIter iter, GTK2.GdkPixbuf pixbuf)`

      Description

        Inserts an image into the text buffer at iter. The image will be counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining the contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode "object replacement character" 0xFFFC. Note that the "slice" variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include this character for pixbufs, but the "text" variants do not. e.g. see get_slice() and get_text().

      Method insert_range

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_range(GTK2.TextIter iter, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Copies text, tags, and pixbufs between start and end (the order of start and end doesn't matter) and inserts the copy at iter. Used instead of simply getting/inserting text because it preserves images and tags. If start and end are in a different buffer from this buffer, the two buffers must share the same tag table.

        Implemented via emissions of the insert-text and apply-tag signals, so expect those.

      Method insert_range_interactive

        `int insert_range_interactive(GTK2.TextIter iter, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end, int default_editable)`

      Description

        Same as insert_range(), but does nothing if the insertion point isn't editable. The default_editable parameter indicates whether the text is editable at iter if no tags enclosing iter affect editability.

      Method insert_with_tags

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_with_tags(GTK2.TextIter iter, string text, int len, array tags)`

      Description

        Inserts text into the buffer at iter, applying the list of tags to the newly-inserted text. Equivalent to calling insert(), then apply_tag() on the insert text; insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.

      Method insert_with_tags_by_name

        `GTK2.TextBuffer insert_with_tags_by_name(GTK2.TextIter iter, string text, int len, array tag_names)`

      Description

        Same as insert_with_tags(), but allows you to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.

      Method move_mark

        `GTK2.TextBuffer move_mark(GTK2.TextMark mark, GTK2.TextIter where)`

      Description

        Moves mark to the new location where. Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the move.

      Method move_mark_by_name

        `GTK2.TextBuffer move_mark_by_name(string name, GTK2.TextIter where)`

      Description

        Moves the mark named name (which must exist) to location where.

      Method paste_clipboard

        `GTK2.TextBuffer paste_clipboard(GTK2.Clipboard clipboard, int|void default_editable, GTK2.TextIter location)`

      Description

        Pastes the contents of a clipboard at the insertion point, or at override_location.

      Method place_cursor

        `GTK2.TextBuffer place_cursor(GTK2.TextIter where)`

      Description

        This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks simultaneously. If you move them to the same place in two steps with move_mark(), you will temporarily select a region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can be optimized.

      Method remove_all_tags

        `GTK2.TextBuffer remove_all_tags(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Removes all tags in the range between start and end. Be careful with this function; it could remove tags added in code unrelated to the code you're currently writing. That is, using this function is probably a bad idea if you have two or more unrelated code sections that add tags.

      Method remove_selection_clipboard

        `GTK2.TextBuffer remove_selection_clipboard(GTK2.Clipboard clipboard)`

      Description

        Removes a clipboard that was added with add_selection_clipboard().

      Method remove_tag

        `GTK2.TextBuffer remove_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal removes all occurrences of tag from the given range. start and end do not have to be in order.

      Method remove_tag_by_name

        `GTK2.TextBuffer remove_tag_by_name(string name, GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Removes a tag. See apply_tag_by_name().

      Method select_range

        `GTK2.TextBuffer select_range(GTK2.TextIter ins, GTK2.TextIter bound)`

      Description

        This function removes the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks simultaneously. If you move them in two steps with move_mark(), you will temporarily select a region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can be optimized.

      Method set_modified

        `GTK2.TextBuffer set_modified(int setting)`

      Description

        Used to keep track of whether the buffer has been modified since the last time it was saved. Whenever the buffer is saved to disk, call set_modified(0). When the buffer is modified, it will automatically toggle on the modified bit again. When the modifed bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified-changed" signal.

      Method set_text

        `GTK2.TextBuffer set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

      Description

        Deletes current contents of this buffer, and inserts text instead. If multiple arguments are supplied, sprintf() is called implicitly.

    CLASS GTK2.TextChildAnchor

      Description

        Anchors for embedding widgets in a TextBuffer.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextChildAnchor GTK2.TextChildAnchor()`

      Description

        Creates a new W(TextChildAnchor). Usually you would then insert it into W(TextBuffer) with W(TextBuffer)->insert_child_anchor(). To perform the creation and insertion in one step, use the convenience function W(TextBuffer)->create_child_anchor().

      Method get_deleted

        `int get_deleted()`

      Description

        Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from the buffer.

      Method get_widgets

        `array get_widgets()`

      Description

        Gets a list of all widgets anchored at this child anchor.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

    CLASS GTK2.TextIter

      Description

        A TextIter.

      Method backward_char

        `int backward_char()`

      Description

        Moves backward by one character offset. Returns true if the movement was possible; if it was the first in the buffer (character offset 0), backward_char() returns false for convenience when writing loops.

      Method backward_chars

        `int backward_chars(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count characters backward, if possible (if count would mmove past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if it didn't move, or moved onto the end iterator, then false is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns false.

      Method backward_cursor_position

        `int backward_cursor_position()`

      Description

        Like forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.

      Method backward_cursor_positions

        `int backward_cursor_positions(int count)`

      Description

        Moves up to count cursor positions.

      Method backward_line

        `int backward_line()`

      Description

        Moves to the start of the previous line. Returns true if this iter could be moved; i.e. if iter was at character offset 0, this function returns false. Therefore if it was already on line 0, but not at the start of the line, it is snapped to the start of the line and the function returns true. (Note that this implies that in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)

      Method backward_lines

        `int backward_lines(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count lines backward.

      Method backward_search

        `array backward_search(string str, int flags, GTK2.TextIter limit)`

      Description

        Same as forward_search(), but searches backward.

      Method backward_sentence_start

        `int backward_sentence_start()`

      Description

        Moves backward to the previous sentence start.

      Method backward_sentence_starts

        `int backward_sentence_starts(int count)`

      Description

        Call backward_sentence_start() count times.

      Method backward_to_tag_toggle

        `int backward_to_tag_toggle(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Moves backward to the next toggle. See forward_to_tag_toggle().

      Method backward_visible_cursor_position

        `int backward_visible_cursor_position()`

      Description

        Moves backward to the previous visible cursor position.

      Method backward_visible_cursor_positions

        `int backward_visible_cursor_positions(int count)`

      Description

        Moves up to count visible cursor positions.

      Method backward_visible_line

        `int backward_visible_line()`

      Description

        Moves to the start of the previous visible line. Returns TRUE if iter could be moved; i.e. if iter was at character offset 0, this function returns FALSE. Therefore if iter was alreayd on line 0, but not at the start of the line, iter is snapped to the start of the line and the function returns TRUE. (Note that this implies that in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0).

      Method backward_visible_lines

        `int backward_visible_lines(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count visible lines backward, if possible (if count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves forward by 0 - count lines.

      Method backward_visible_word_start

        `int backward_visible_word_start()`

      Description

        Moves backward to the previous visible word start.

      Method backward_visible_word_starts

        `int backward_visible_word_starts(int count)`

      Description

        Call backward_visible_word_start() count times

      Method backward_word_start

        `int backward_word_start()`

      Description

        Moves backward to the previous word start.

      Method backward_word_starts

        `int backward_word_starts(int count)`

      Description

        Calls backward_word_start() up to count times.

      Method begins_tag

        `int begins_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Returns true if tag is toggled on at exactly this point. If tag is omitted, returns true if any tag is toggled on at this point. Note that begins_tag() returns true if this iter is the start of the tagged range; has_tag() tells you whether an iterator is within a tagged range.

      Method can_insert

        `int can_insert(int default_editability)`

      Description

        Considering the default editability of the buffer, and tags that affect editability, determines whether text inserted here would be editabled. If text inserted here would be editabled then the user should be allowed to insert text here. insert_interactive() uses this function to decide whether insertions are allowed at a given position.

      Method compare

        `int compare(GTK2.TextIter rhs)`

      Description

        Returns -1 if this iterator is less than rhs, 1 if greater than, and 0 if they're equal. Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer is less than the second character in the buffer.

      Method editable

        `int editable(int default_setting)`

      Description

        Returns whether the character at this location is within an editable region of text. Non-editable text is "locked" and can't be changed by the user via W(TextView). This function is simply a convenience wrapper around get_attributes(). If no tags applied to this text editability, default_setting will be returned.

        You don't want to use this function to decide whether text can be inserted here, because for insertion you don't want to know whether the char at iter is inside an editable range, you want to know whether a new characer inserted here would be inside an editable range. Use can_insert() to handle this case.

      Method ends_line

        `int ends_line()`

      Description

        Returns true if iter points to the start of the paragraph delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no paragraph delimiter chars there.

      Method ends_sentence

        `int ends_sentence()`

      Description

        Determines whether this iter ends a sentence.

      Method ends_tag

        `int ends_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Returns true if tag is toggled off at exactly this point. If tag is omitted, returns true if any tag is toggled off at this point. Not that ends_tag() returns true if this iter it at the end of the tagged range; has_tag() tells you whether an iterator is within a tagged range.

      Method ends_word

        `int ends_word()`

      Description

        Determines whether this iter ends a natural-language word. Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).

      Method equal

        `int equal(GTK2.TextIter rhs)`

      Description

        Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and comparing offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than compare().

      Method forward_char

        `int forward_char()`

      Description

        Moves this iterator forward by one character offset. Note that images embedded in the buffer occopy 1 character slot, to forward_char() may actually move onto an image instead of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If this iterator is the end iterator or one character before it, it will now point at the end iterator, and forward_char() returns false for convenience when writing loops.

      Method forward_chars

        `int forward_chars(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count characters if possible (if count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer). The return value indicates whether the new position is different from its original position, and dereferenceable (the last iterator in the buffer is not). If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns false.

      Method forward_cursor_position

        `int forward_cursor_position()`

      Description

        Moves this iterator forward by a single cursor position. Cursor positions are (unsurprisingly) positions where the cursor can appear. Perhaps surprisingly, there may not be a cursor position between all characters. The most common example for European languages would be a carriage return/newline sequence. For some Unicode characters, the equivalent of say the letter "a" with an accent mark will be represented as two characters, first the letter then a "combining mark" that causes the accent to be rendered; so the cursor can't go between those two characters. See also Pango.LogAttr and pango_break().

      Method forward_cursor_positions

        `int forward_cursor_positions(int count)`

      Description

        Moves up to count cursor positions.

      Method forward_line

        `int forward_line()`

      Description

        Moves to the start of the next line. Returns true if there was a next line to move to, and false if this iter was simply moved to the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if it was already at the end of the buffer.

      Method forward_lines

        `int forward_lines(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count lines forward, if possible (if count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or moved onto the end iterator, then false is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns false. If count is negative, moves backward by 0 - count lines.

      Method forward_search

        `array forward_search(string str, int flags, GTK2.TextIter limit)`

      Description

        Searches forward for str. Returns two GTK2.TextIter objects, one pointing to the first character of the match, and the second pointing to the first character after the match. The search will not continue past limit. Note that a search is a linear or O(n) operation, so you may wish to use limit to avoid locking up your UI on large buffers.

        If the GTK2.TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY flag is present, the match may have invisible text interspersed in str, i.e. str will be a possibly non-contiguous subsequence of the matched range. Similarly, if you specify GTK2.TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY, the match may have pixbufs or child widgets mixed inside the matched range. If these flags are not given, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC character in str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.

      Method forward_sentence_end

        `int forward_sentence_end()`

      Description

        Moves forward to the next sentence end.

      Method forward_sentence_ends

        `int forward_sentence_ends(int count)`

      Description

        Call forward_sentence_ends() count times.

      Method forward_to_end

        `GTK2.TextIter forward_to_end()`

      Description

        Moves forward to the "end iterator", which points one past the last valid character in the buffer. get_char() called on the end iterator returns 0, which is convenient for writing loops.

      Method forward_to_line_end

        `int forward_to_line_end()`

      Description

        Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters, which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage return/newline sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the next line. If iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of the last line), and returns false.

      Method forward_to_tag_toggle

        `int forward_to_tag_toggle(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if tag is omitted. If no matching tag toggles are found, returns false, otherwise true. Does not return toggles located at this iter, only toggles after. Sets this iter to the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer if no toggle is found.

      Method forward_visible_cursor_position

        `int forward_visible_cursor_position()`

      Description

        Moves forward to the next visible cursor position.

      Method forward_visible_cursor_positions

        `int forward_visible_cursor_positions(int count)`

      Description

        Moves up to count visible cursor positions.

      Method forward_visible_line

        `int forward_visible_line()`

      Description

        Moves to the start of the next visible line. Returns TRUE if there was a next line to move to, and FALSE if iter was simply moved to the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if iter was already at the end of the buffer.

      Method forward_visible_lines

        `int forward_visible_lines(int count)`

      Description

        Moves count visible lines forward, if possible (if count would move past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or moved onto the end iterator, then FALSE is returned. If count is 0, the function does nothing and returns FALSE. If count is negative, moves backward by 0 - count lines.

      Method forward_visible_word_end

        `int forward_visible_word_end()`

      Description

        Moves forward to the next visible word end.

      Method forward_visible_word_ends

        `int forward_visible_word_ends(int count)`

      Description

        Call forward_visible_word_end() count times.

      Method forward_word_end

        `int forward_word_end()`

      Description

        Moves forward to the next word end.

      Method forward_word_ends

        `int forward_word_ends(int count)`

      Description

        Calls forward_word_end() up to count times.

      Method get_buffer

        `GTK2.TextBuffer get_buffer()`

      Description

        Returns the W(TextBuffer) this iterator is associated with.

      Method get_bytes_in_line

        `int get_bytes_in_line()`

      Description

        Returns the number of bytes in the line, including the paragraph delimiters.

      Method get_char

        `int get_char()`

      Description

        Returns the Unicode character at this iterator. If the element at this iterator is a non-character element, such as an image embedded in the buffer, the Unicode "unknown" character 0xFFFc is returned.

      Method get_chars_in_line

        `int get_chars_in_line()`

      Description

        Returns the number of characters in the line, including the paragraph delimiters.

      Method get_child_anchor

        `GTK2.TextChildAnchor get_child_anchor()`

      Description

        If this location contains a child anchor, the anchor is returned.

      Method get_line

        `int get_line()`

      Description

        Returns the line number containing this iterator.

      Method get_line_index

        `int get_line_index()`

      Description

        Returns the byte index of the iterator, counting from the start of a newline-terminated line. Rember that W(TextBuffer) encodes text in UTF-8, and that characters can require a variable number of bytes to represent.

      Method get_line_offset

        `int get_line_offset()`

      Description

        Returns the character offset of the iterator, counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.

      Method get_marks

        `array get_marks()`

      Description

        Returns a list of W(TextMark) at this location. Because marks are not iterable (they don't take up any "space" in the buffer, they are just marks in between iterable locations), multiple marks can exist in the same place. The returned list is not in any meaningful order.

      Method get_offset

        `int get_offset()`

      Description

        Returns the character offset of an iterator.

      Method get_pixbuf

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_pixbuf()`

      Description

        If the element at iter is a pixbuf, it is returned.

      Method get_slice

        `string get_slice(GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Returns the text in the given range. A "slice" is an array of characters including the Unicode "unknown" character 0xFFFC for iterable non-character elements in the buffer, such as images. Because images are encoded in the slice, byte and character offsets in the returned array will correspond to bytes offsets in the text buffer. Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or widget is in the buffer.

      Method get_tags

        `array get_tags()`

      Description

        Returns a list of tags that apply to iter, in ascending order of priority (highest-priority tags are last).

      Method get_text

        `string get_text(GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Returns text in the given range. If the range contains non-text elements such as images, the character and byte offsets in the returned string will not correspond to character and bytes offsets in the buffer.

      Method get_toggled_tags

        `array get_toggled_tags(int toggled_on)`

      Description

        Returns a list of W(TextTag) that are toggled on or off at this point. (If toggled_on is true, the list contains tags that are toggled on). If a tag is toggled on at this iterator, then some non-empty range of characters following this iter has that tag applied to it. If a tag is toggled off, then some non-empty range following this iter does not have the tag applied to it.

      Method get_visible_line_index

        `int get_visible_line_index()`

      Description

        Returns the number of bytes from the start of the line to this iter, not counting bytes that are invisible due to tags with the invisible flag toggled on.

      Method get_visible_line_offset

        `int get_visible_line_offset()`

      Description

        Returns the offset in characters from the start of the line, not not counting characters that are invisible due to tags with the invisible tag toggled on.

      Method get_visible_slice

        `string get_visible_slice(GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Like get_slice(), but invisible text is not included.

      Method get_visible_text

        `string get_visible_text(GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Like get_text(), but invisible text is not include.

      Method has_tag

        `int has_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Returns true if this iterator is within a range tagged with tag.

      Method in_range

        `int in_range(GTK2.TextIter start, GTK2.TextIter end)`

      Description

        Checks whether this iterator falls in the range [start,end). start and end must be in ascending order.

      Method inside_sentence

        `int inside_sentence()`

      Description

        Determines whether this is inside a sentence (as opposed to int between two sentences, e.g. after a period and before the first letter of the next sentence). Sentence boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).

      Method inside_word

        `int inside_word()`

      Description

        Determines whether this iter is inside a natural-language word ass opposed to say inside some whitespace).

      Method is_cursor_position

        `int is_cursor_position()`

      Description

        See forward_cursor_position() or Pango.LangAttr or pango_break() for details on what a cursor position is.

      Method is_end

        `int is_end()`

      Description

        Returns true if this location is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last dereferenceable iterator in the buffer. is_end() is the most efficient way to check whether an iterator is the end iterator.

      Method is_start

        `int is_start()`

      Description

        Returns true if this is the first iterator in the buffer, that is if it has a character offset of 0.

      Method order

        `GTK2.TextIter order(GTK2.TextIter second)`

      Description

        Swaps this iter for second if second comes first in the buffer. That is, ensures that this iterator and second are in sequence. Most text buffer functions that take a range call this automatically on your behalf, so there's no real reason to call it yourself in those cases. There are some exceptions, such as in_range(), that expect a pre-sorted range.

      Method set_line

        `GTK2.TextIter set_line(int line_number)`

      Description

        Moves the iterator to the start of the line line_number. If line_number is negative or larger than the number of lines in the buffer, moves to the start of the last line in the buffer.

      Method set_line_index

        `GTK2.TextIter set_line_index(int index)`

      Description

        Same as set_line_offset(), but works with a byte index. The given byte index must be at the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8 encoded character.

      Method set_line_offset

        `GTK2.TextIter set_line_offset(int offset)`

      Description

        Moves iterator within a line, to a new character (not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, iterator moves to the start of the next line. See set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than a character offset.

      Method set_offset

        `GTK2.TextIter set_offset(int char_offset)`

      Description

        Sets to point to char_offset. char_offset counts from the start of the entire text buffer, starting with 0.

      Method set_visible_line_index

        `GTK2.TextIter set_visible_line_index(int index)`

      Description

        Same as set_line_index(), but works with visible byte index. The given byte index must be at the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8 encoded character.

      Method set_visible_line_offset

        `GTK2.TextIter set_visible_line_offset(int offset)`

      Description

        Like set_line_offset(), but the offset is in visible characters, i.e. text with a tag making it invisible is not counted in the offset.

      Method starts_line

        `int starts_line()`

      Description

        Returns true if this iter begins a paragraph, i.e. if get_line_offset() would return 0. However this function is potentially more efficient than get_line_offset() because it doesn't have to computer the offset, it just has to see whether it's 0.

      Method starts_sentence

        `int starts_sentence()`

      Description

        Determines whether this iter begins a sentence.

      Method starts_word

        `int starts_word()`

      Description

        Determines whether this iter begins a natural-language word. Word breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).

      Method toggles_tag

        `int toggles_tag(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        This is equivalent to begins_tag()||ends_tag(), i.e it tells you whether a range with tag applied to it beings or ends here.

    CLASS GTK2.TextMark

      Description

        Marks for the text.

      Method get_buffer

        `GTK2.TextBuffer get_buffer()`

      Description

        Gets the buffer this mark is located inside, or empty if the mark is deleted.

      Method get_deleted

        `int get_deleted()`

      Description

        Returns true if the mark has been removed from its buffer with delete_mark(). Marks can't be used once deleted.

      Method get_left_gravity

        `int get_left_gravity()`

      Description

        Determines whether the mark has left gravity.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Returns the mark name; returns empty for anonymous marks.

      Method get_visible

        `int get_visible()`

      Description

        Returns true if the mark is visible.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_visible

        `GTK2.TextMark set_visible(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the visibility of the mark; the insertion point is normally visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also the text widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible. Marks are not visible by default.

    CLASS GTK2.TextTag

      Description

        Properties: string background int background-full-height int background-full-height-set GDK2.Color background-gdk int background-set GDK2.Pixmap background-stipple int background-stipple-set int direction One of TEXT_DIR_LTR, TEXT_DIR_NONE and TEXT_DIR_RTL int editable int editable-set string family int family-set string font Pango.FontDescription font-desc string foreground GDK2.Color foreground-gdk int foreground-set GDK2.Pixmap foreground-stipple int foreground-stipple-set int indent int indent-set int invisible int invisible_set int justification One of JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT int justification-set string language; int language-set; int left-margin; int left-margin-set; string name; int pixels-above-lines; int pixels-above-lines-set; int pixels-below-lines; int pixels-below-lines-set; int pixels-inside-wrap; int pixels-inside-wrap-set; int right-margin; int right-margin-set; int rise; int rise-set; float scale; int scale-set; int size; double size-points; int size-set; int stretch; One of PANGO_STRETCH_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_NORMAL, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_CONDENSED and PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_EXPANDED int stretch-set; int strikethrough; int strikethrough-set; int style; One of PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC, PANGO_STYLE_NORMAL and PANGO_STYLE_OBLIQUE int style-set; Pango.TabArray tabs int tabs-set; int underline; One of PANGO_UNDERLINE_DOUBLE, PANGO_UNDERLINE_ERROR, PANGO_UNDERLINE_LOW, PANGO_UNDERLINE_NONE and PANGO_UNDERLINE_SINGLE int underline-set; int variant; One of PANGO_VARIANT_NORMAL and PANGO_VARIANT_SMALL_CAPS int variant-set; int weight; int weight-set; int wrap-mode; One of WRAP_CHAR, WRAP_NONE, WRAP_WORD and WRAP_WORD_CHAR int wrap-mode-set;

        Signals: event

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextTag GTK2.TextTag(string|mapping name_or_props)`

      Description

        Creates a new text tag.

      Method event

        `int event(GTK2.G.Object event_object, GTK2.GdkEvent event, GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Emits the 'event' signal.

      Method get_priority

        `int get_priority()`

      Description

        Gets the tag priority.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method set_priority

        `GTK2.TextTag set_priority(int priority)`

      Description

        Sets the priority. Valid priorities start at 0 and go to 1 less than W(TextTagTable)->get_size().

    CLASS GTK2.TextTagTable

      Description

        Table of text tags.

        Signals: tag_added

        tag_changed

        tag_removed

      Method add

        `GTK2.TextTagTable add(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority in the table.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextTagTable GTK2.TextTagTable()`

      Description

        Creates a new W(TextTagTable).

      Method get_size

        `int get_size()`

      Description

        Returns the size of the table (number of tags).

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method lookup

        `GTK2.TextTag lookup(string name)`

      Description

        Look up a named tag.

      Method remove

        `GTK2.TextTagTable remove(GTK2.TextTag tag)`

      Description

        Remove a tag from the table.

    CLASS GTK2.TextView

      Description

        Properties: int accepts-tab GTK2.TextBuffer buffer int cursor-visible int editable int indent int justification int left-margin int overwrite int pixels-above-lines int pixels-below-lines int pixels-inside-wrap int right-margin Pango.TabArray tabs int wrap-mode

        Style properties: GDK2.Color error-underline-color

        Signals: backspace

        copy_clipboard

        cut_clipboard

        delete_from_cursor

        insert_at_cursor

        move_cursor

        move_focus

        move_viewpoert

        page_horizontally

        paste_clipboard

        populate_popup

        select_all

        set_anchor

        set_scroll_adjustments

        toggle_overwrite

      Method add_child_at_anchor

        `GTK2.TextView add_child_at_anchor(GTK2.Widget child, GTK2.TextChildAnchor anchor)`

      Description

        Adds a child widget in the text buffer, at the given anchor.

      Method add_child_in_window

        `GTK2.TextView add_child_in_window(GTK2.Widget child, int wintype, int xpos, int ypos)`

      Description

        Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's windows. The window must have nonzero size (see GTK2.TextView->set_border_window_size()). Note that the child coordinates are given relative to the GDK2.Window in question, and that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When placing a child in GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes occur, and then call GTK2.TextView->move_child() to update the child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments change or the text buffer changes.

      Method backward_display_line

        `int backward_display_line(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        See forward_display_line().

      Method backward_display_line_start

        `int backward_display_line_start(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Moves the iter backward to the next display line start.

      Method buffer_to_window_coords

        `array buffer_to_window_coords(int wintype, int buffer_x, int buffer_y)`

      Description

        Converts coordinate (buffer_x,buffer_y) to coordinates for the window win, and returns the results. wintype is one of TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM, TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT, TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE, TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT, TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, TEXT_WINDOW_TOP and TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TextView GTK2.TextView(GTK2.TextBuffer buffer_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(TextView).

      Method forward_display_line

        `int forward_display_line(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Moves iter forward by one display (wrapped) line. A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters. Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all view, since they depend on the contents of the W(TextBuffer).

      Method forward_display_line_end

        `int forward_display_line_end(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Moves the iter forward to the next display line end.

      Method get_accepts_tab

        `int get_accepts_tab()`

      Description

        Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character.

      Method get_border_window_size

        `int get_border_window_size(int wintype)`

      Description

        Gets the width of the specified border window.

      Method get_buffer

        `GTK2.TextBuffer get_buffer()`

      Description

        Returns the buffer displayed by this view.

      Method get_cursor_visible

        `int get_cursor_visible()`

      Description

        Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.

      Method get_default_attributes

        `GTK2.TextAttributes get_default_attributes()`

      Description

        Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.

      Method get_editable

        `int get_editable()`

      Description

        Gets the default editability.

      Method get_indent

        `int get_indent()`

      Description

        Gets the default indentation for paragraphs.

      Method get_iter_at_location

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_location(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Retrieves the iterator at buffer coordinates x and y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portions. If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert those to buffer coordinates with window_to_buffer_coords().

      Method get_iter_at_position

        `GTK2.TextIter get_iter_at_position(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer coordinates x and y.

      Method get_iter_location

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_iter_location(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at iter. The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use buffer_to_window_coords() to convert these coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.

      Method get_justification

        `int get_justification()`

      Description

        Gets the default justification.

      Method get_left_margin

        `int get_left_margin()`

      Description

        Gets the default left margin size of paragraphs.

      Method get_line_at_y

        `GTK2.TextIter get_line_at_y(int y)`

      Description

        Returns a W(TextIter) for the start of the line containing the coordinate y. y is in buffer coordinates, convert from window coordinates with window_to_buffer_coords().

      Method get_line_yrange

        `mapping get_line_yrange(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Gets the y coordinate of the top of the line containing iter, and the height of the line. The coordinate is a buffer coordinate; convert to window coordinates with buffer_to_window_coords().

      Method get_overwrite

        `int get_overwrite()`

      Description

        Returns whether the view is in overwrite mode or not.

      Method get_pixels_above_lines

        `int get_pixels_above_lines()`

      Description

        Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.

      Method get_pixels_below_lines

        `int get_pixels_below_lines()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_pixels_below_lines().

      Method get_pixels_inside_wrap

        `int get_pixels_inside_wrap()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_pixels_inside_wrap().

      Method get_right_margin

        `int get_right_margin()`

      Description

        Gets the default right margin size of paragraphs.

      Method get_tabs

        `GTK2.Pango.TabArray get_tabs()`

      Description

        Gets the default tabs. Tags in the buffer may override the defaults. The return value will be 0 if "standard" (8-space) tabs are used.

      Method get_visible_rect

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_visible_rect()`

      Description

        Returns a rectangle with the currently-visible region of the buffer, in buffer coordinates. Convert to window coordinates with buffer_to_window_coords().

      Method get_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_window(int wintype)`

      Description

        Retrieves the GDK2.Window corresponding to an area of the text view; possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the text buffer. Windows are 0 and nonexistent if their width or height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been realized.

      Method get_window_type

        `int get_window_type(GTK2.GdkWindow window)`

      Description

        Usually used to find out which window an event corresponds to. If you connect to an event signal, this function should be called on event->window to see which window it was. One of TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM, TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT, TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE, TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT, TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, TEXT_WINDOW_TOP and TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET.

      Method get_wrap_mode

        `int get_wrap_mode()`

      Description

        Gets the line wrapping mode.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method move_child

        `GTK2.TextView move_child(GTK2.Widget child, int x, int y)`

      Description

        Updates the position of a child.

      Method move_mark_onscreen

        `int move_mark_onscreen(GTK2.TextMark mark)`

      Description

        Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's located within the currently visible text-area.

      Method move_visually

        `int move_visually(GTK2.TextIter iter, int count)`

      Description

        Move the iterator a given number of characters visually, treating it as the strong cursor position. If count is positive, then the new strong cursor position will be count positions to the right of the old cursor position. If count is negative then the new strong cursor position will be count positions to the left of the old cursor position.

        In the presence of bidirection text, the correspondence between logical and visual order will depend on the direction of the current run, and there may be jumps when the cursor is moved off the end of a run.

      Method place_cursor_onscreen

        `int place_cursor_onscreen()`

      Description

        Moves the cursor to the currently visible region of the buffer, if it isn't there already.

      Method scroll_mark_onscreen

        `GTK2.TextView scroll_mark_onscreen(GTK2.TextMark mark)`

      Description

        Scrolls the view the minimum distance such that mark is contained within the visible area.

      Method scroll_to_iter

        `GTK2.TextView scroll_to_iter(GTK2.TextIter iter, float within_margin, int use_align, float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Scrolls the view so that iter is on the screen as with scroll_to_mark().

      Method scroll_to_mark

        `GTK2.TextView scroll_to_mark(GTK2.TextMark mark, float within_margin, int use_align, float xalign, float yalign)`

      Description

        Scrolls the view so that mark is on the screen in the position indicated by xalign and yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center. If use_align is false, the text scrolls the minimal distance to get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective screen for purposes of this function is reduced by the margin of size within_margin.

      Method set_accepts_tab

        `GTK2.TextView set_accepts_tab(int accepts_tab)`

      Description

        Sets the behavior of the text widget when the Tab key is pressed. If accepts_tab is true a tab character is inserted. If accepts_tab is false the keyboard focus is moved to the next widget in the focus chain.

      Method set_border_window_size

        `GTK2.TextView set_border_window_size(int wintype, int size)`

      Description

        Sets the width of GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT or GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT, or the height of GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_TOP or GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM. Automatically destroys the corresponding window if the size is set to 0, and creates the window if the size is set to non-zero. This function can only be used for the "border windows", it doesn't work with GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, or GTK2.TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE.

      Method set_buffer

        `GTK2.TextView set_buffer(GTK2.TextBuffer buffer)`

      Description

        Sets buffer as the buffer being displayed.

      Method set_cursor_visible

        `GTK2.TextView set_cursor_visible(int setting)`

      Description

        Toggles whether the insertion point is displayed. A buffer with no editable text probably shouldn't have a visible cursor, so you may want to turn the cursor off.

      Method set_editable

        `GTK2.TextView set_editable(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the default editability. You can override this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable" attribute of tags.

      Method set_indent

        `GTK2.TextView set_indent(int indent)`

      Description

        Sets the default indentation for paragraphs. May be overridden by tags.

      Method set_justification

        `GTK2.TextView set_justification(int just)`

      Description

        Sets the default justification of text. One of JUSTIFY_CENTER, JUSTIFY_FILL, JUSTIFY_LEFT and JUSTIFY_RIGHT.

      Method set_left_margin

        `GTK2.TextView set_left_margin(int margin)`

      Description

        Sets the default left margin. May be overridden by tags.

      Method set_overwrite

        `GTK2.TextView set_overwrite(int overwrite)`

      Description

        Changes the overwrite mode, true for on, false for off.

      Method set_pixels_above_lines

        `GTK2.TextView set_pixels_above_lines(int pixels)`

      Description

        Sets the default number of blank pixels above paragraphs. Tags in the buffer may override the defaults.

      Method set_pixels_below_lines

        `GTK2.TextView set_pixels_below_lines(int pixels)`

      Description

        Sets the default number of blank pixels to put below paragraphs. May be overridden by tags applied to the buffer.

      Method set_pixels_inside_wrap

        `GTK2.TextView set_pixels_inside_wrap(int pixels)`

      Description

        Sets the default number of pixels of blank space to leave between displayed/wrapped lines within a paragraph. May be overridden by tags.

      Method set_right_margin

        `GTK2.TextView set_right_margin(int margin)`

      Description

        Sets the default right margin. May be overridden by tags.

      Method set_tabs

        `GTK2.TextView set_tabs(GTK2.Pango.TabArray tabs)`

      Description

        Sets the default tab stops for paragraphs. Tags in the buffer may override the default.

      Method set_wrap_mode

        `GTK2.TextView set_wrap_mode(int wrap_mode)`

      Description

        Sets the line wrapping. One of WRAP_CHAR, WRAP_NONE, WRAP_WORD and WRAP_WORD_CHAR.

      Method starts_display_line

        `int starts_display_line(GTK2.TextIter iter)`

      Description

        Determines whether iter is at the start of a display line.

      Method window_to_buffer_coords

        `array window_to_buffer_coords(int wintype, int window_x, int window_y)`

      Description

        Converts coordinates on the window identified by wintype to buffer coordinates, returning the result.

    CLASS GTK2.ToggleAction

      Description

        Properties int active int draw-as-radio

        Signals: toggled

      Method create

        `GTK2.ToggleAction GTK2.ToggleAction(string|mapping name_or_props, string|void label, string|void tooltip, string|void stock_id)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.ToggleAction object.

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Returns the checked state.

      Method get_draw_as_radio

        `int get_draw_as_radio()`

      Description

        Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.

      Inherit Action

        inherit GTK2.Action : Action

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.ToggleAction set_active(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the checked state.

      Method set_draw_as_radio

        `GTK2.ToggleAction set_draw_as_radio(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.

      Method toggled

        `GTK2.ToggleAction toggled()`

      Description

        Emits the "toggled" signal.

    CLASS GTK2.ToggleButton

      Description

        Toggle buttons are derived from normal buttons and are very similar, except they will always be in one of two states, alternated by a click. They may be depressed, and when you click again, they will pop back up. Click again, and they will pop back down.

        `GTK2.ToggleButton("Toggle button")`

        `GTK2.ToggleButton("Toggle button")->set_active( 1 )`

        Properties: int active int draw-indicator int inconsistent

        Signals: toggled

      Method create

        `GTK2.ToggleButton GTK2.ToggleButton(string|mapping label_or_props, int|void mnemonic)`

      Description

        If you supply a string, a label will be created and inserted in the button. Otherwise, use -&gt;add(widget) to create the contents of the button.

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Returns true if button is pressed, and false if it is raised.

      Method get_inconsistent

        `int get_inconsistent()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_inconsistent().

      Method get_mode

        `int get_mode()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether the button is displayed as a separator indicator and label.

      Inherit Button

        inherit GTK2.Button : Button

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.ToggleButton set_active(int activep)`

      Description

        If activep is true, the toggle button will be activated.

      Method set_inconsistent

        `GTK2.ToggleButton set_inconsistent(int setting)`

      Description

        If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a toggle button, and the current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to display the toggle in an "in between" state. This function turns on "in between" display.

      Method set_mode

        `GTK2.ToggleButton set_mode(int mode)`

      Description

        If true, draw indicator

      Method toggled

        `GTK2.ToggleButton toggled()`

      Description

        emulate a 'toggle' of the button. This will emit a 'toggled' signal.

    CLASS GTK2.ToggleToolButton

      Description

        A ToolItem containing a toggle button.

        Signals: toggled

      Method create

        `GTK2.ToggleToolButton GTK2.ToggleToolButton(string|mapping stock_id)`

      Description

        Creates a new toggle tool button, with or without a stock id.

      Method get_active

        `int get_active()`

      Description

        Returns the status of the toggle tool button, true if it is pressed in and false if it isn't.

      Inherit ToolButton

        inherit GTK2.ToolButton : ToolButton

      Method set_active

        `GTK2.ToggleToolButton set_active(int is_active)`

      Description

        Sets the status of the toggle tool button. Set to true if you want the button to be pressed in, and false to raise it. This causes the toggled signal to be emitted.

    CLASS GTK2.ToolButton

      Description

        Properties that can be notified: icon-widget label label-widget stock-id use-underline

        Signals: clicked

      Method create

        `GTK2.ToolButton GTK2.ToolButton(GTK2.Widget icon, string|void label)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.ToolButton. If icon is a string, label should be omitted. If it isn't, it will be ignored. The result will be a button from a stock item, one of STOCK_ABOUT, STOCK_ADD, STOCK_APPLY, STOCK_BOLD, STOCK_CANCEL, STOCK_CDROM, STOCK_CLEAR, STOCK_CLOSE, STOCK_COLOR_PICKER, STOCK_CONNECT, STOCK_CONVERT, STOCK_COPY, STOCK_CUT, STOCK_DELETE, STOCK_DIALOG_AUTHENTICATION, STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR, STOCK_DIALOG_INFO, STOCK_DIALOG_QUESTION, STOCK_DIALOG_WARNING, STOCK_DIRECTORY, STOCK_DISCONNECT, STOCK_DND, STOCK_DND_MULTIPLE, STOCK_EDIT, STOCK_EXECUTE, STOCK_FILE, STOCK_FIND, STOCK_FIND_AND_REPLACE, STOCK_FLOPPY, STOCK_FULLSCREEN, STOCK_GOTO_BOTTOM, STOCK_GOTO_FIRST, STOCK_GOTO_LAST, STOCK_GOTO_TOP, STOCK_GO_BACK, STOCK_GO_DOWN, STOCK_GO_FORWARD, STOCK_GO_UP, STOCK_HARDDISK, STOCK_HELP, STOCK_HOME, STOCK_INDENT, STOCK_INDEX, STOCK_INFO, STOCK_ITALIC, STOCK_JUMP_TO, STOCK_JUSTIFY_CENTER, STOCK_JUSTIFY_FILL, STOCK_JUSTIFY_LEFT, STOCK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT, STOCK_LEAVE_FULLSCREEN, STOCK_MEDIA_FORWARD, STOCK_MEDIA_NEXT, STOCK_MEDIA_PAUSE, STOCK_MEDIA_PLAY, STOCK_MEDIA_PREVIOUS, STOCK_MEDIA_RECORD, STOCK_MEDIA_REWIND, STOCK_MEDIA_STOP, STOCK_MISSING_IMAGE, STOCK_NETWORK, STOCK_NEW, STOCK_NO, STOCK_OK, STOCK_OPEN, STOCK_PASTE, STOCK_PREFERENCES, STOCK_PRINT, STOCK_PRINT_PREVIEW, STOCK_PROPERTIES, STOCK_QUIT, STOCK_REDO, STOCK_REFRESH, STOCK_REMOVE, STOCK_REVERT_TO_SAVED, STOCK_SAVE, STOCK_SAVE_AS, STOCK_SELECT_COLOR, STOCK_SELECT_FONT, STOCK_SORT_ASCENDING, STOCK_SORT_DESCENDING, STOCK_SPELL_CHECK, STOCK_STOP, STOCK_STRIKETHROUGH, STOCK_UNDELETE, STOCK_UNDERLINE, STOCK_UNDO, STOCK_UNINDENT, STOCK_YES, STOCK_ZOOM_100, STOCK_ZOOM_FIT, STOCK_ZOOM_IN and STOCK_ZOOM_OUT. If icon is a GTK2.Widget, it will be used as the icon, and label will be the label. The label must exists if that is the case.

      Method get_icon_name

        `string get_icon_name()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the themed icon for the tool button.

      Method get_icon_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_icon_widget()`

      Description

        Returns the widget used as the icon widget.

      Method get_label

        `string get_label()`

      Description

        Returns the label used by the tool button, or empty if the tool button doesn't have a label.

      Method get_label_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_label_widget()`

      Description

        Returns the widget used as the label.

      Method get_stock_id

        `string get_stock_id()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the stock item.

      Method get_use_underline

        `int get_use_underline()`

      Description

        Returns whether underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.

      Inherit ToolItem

        inherit GTK2.ToolItem : ToolItem

      Method set_icon_name

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the icon for the tool button from a named themed icon. The "icon-name" property only has an effect if not overridden by non-NULL "label", "icon-widget", and "stock-id" properties.

      Method set_icon_widget

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_icon_widget(GTK2.Widget icon_widget)`

      Description

        Sets icon_widget as the widget used as the icon on the button.

      Method set_label

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_label(string label)`

      Description

        Sets label as the label used for the tool button.

      Method set_label_widget

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_label_widget(GTK2.Widget label_widget)`

      Description

        Sets label_widget as the widget used as the label.

      Method set_stock_id

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_stock_id(string stock_id)`

      Description

        Sets the name of the stock item.

      Method set_use_underline

        `GTK2.ToolButton set_use_underline(int use_underline)`

      Description

        If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu.

    CLASS GTK2.ToolItem

      Description

        Properties: int is-important int visible-horizontal int visible-vertical

        Signals: create_menu_proxy

        set_tooltip

        toolbar_reconfigured

      Method create

        `GTK2.ToolItem GTK2.ToolItem(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.ToolItem.

      Method get_expand

        `int get_expand()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item is allocated extra space.

      Method get_homogeneous

        `int get_homogeneous()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item is the same size as the other homogeneous items.

      Method get_icon_size

        `int get_icon_size()`

      Description

        Returns the icon size used for this item. One of ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, ICON_SIZE_DIALOG, ICON_SIZE_DND, ICON_SIZE_INVALID, ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR, ICON_SIZE_MENU and ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR

      Method get_is_important

        `int get_is_important()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item is considered important.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        Returns the orientation used for this item. One of ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and ORIENTATION_VERTICAL

      Method get_proxy_menu_item

        `GTK2.Widget get_proxy_menu_item(string menu_item_id)`

      Description

        If menu_item_id matches the string passed to set_proxy_menu_item(), then return the corresponding GTK2.MenuItem.

      Method get_relief_style

        `int get_relief_style()`

      Description

        Returns the relief style of this item. One of RELIEF_HALF, RELIEF_NONE and RELIEF_NORMAL

      Method get_toolbar_style

        `int get_toolbar_style()`

      Description

        Returns the toolbar style use for this item. One of TOOLBAR_BOTH, TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ, TOOLBAR_ICONS, TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY, TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE and TOOLBAR_TEXT

      Method get_use_drag_window

        `int get_use_drag_window()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item has a drag window.

      Method get_visible_horizontal

        `int get_visible_horizontal()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item is visible on toolbars that are docked horizontally.

      Method get_visible_vertical

        `int get_visible_vertical()`

      Description

        Returns whether this item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.

      Inherit Activatable

        inherit GTK2.Activatable : Activatable

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method rebuild_menu

        `GTK2.ToolItem rebuild_menu()`

      Description

        Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the overflow menu item for this item has changed. If the overflow menu is visible when this function is called, the menu will be rebuilt.

      Method retrieve_proxy_menu_item

        `GTK2.Widget retrieve_proxy_menu_item()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.MenuItem that was last set by set_proxy_menu_item().

      Method set_expand

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_expand(int expand)`

      Description

        Sets whether this item is allocated extra space when there is more room on the toolbar than needed for the items. The effect is that the item gets bigger when the toolbar gets bigger and smaller when the toolbar gets smaller.

      Method set_homogeneous

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_homogeneous(int homogeneous)`

      Description

        Sets whether this item is to be allocated the same size as other homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have the same width as the widest of the items.

      Method set_is_important

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_is_important(int is_important)`

      Description

        Sets whether this item should be considered important.

      Method set_proxy_menu_item

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_proxy_menu_item(string menu_item_id, GTK2.Widget menu_item)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.MenuItem used in the toolbar overflow menu. The menu_item_id is used to identify the caller of this function and should also be used with get_proxy_menu_item().

      Method set_tooltip

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_tooltip(GTK2.Tooltips tooltips, string tip_text, string tip_private)`

      Description

        Sets the GTK2.Tooltips object to be used for this item, the text to be displayed as tool tip on the item and the private text to be used.

      Method set_use_drag_window

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_use_drag_window(int use_drag_window)`

      Description

        Sets whether this item has a drag window. When true the toolitem can be used as a drag source. When this item has a drag window it will intercept all events, even those that would otherwise be sent to a child.

      Method set_visible_horizontal

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_visible_horizontal(int visible_horizontal)`

      Description

        Sets whether toolitem is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.

      Method set_visible_vertical

        `GTK2.ToolItem set_visible_vertical(int visible_vertical)`

      Description

        Sets whether this item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically. Some tool items, such as text entries, are too wide to be useful on a vertically docked toolbar. If visible_vertical is false then this item will not appear on toolbars that are docked vertically.

    CLASS GTK2.Toolbar

      Description

        Toolbars are usually used to group some number of widgets in order to simplify customization of their look and layout. Typically a toolbar consists of buttons with icons, labels and tooltips, but any other widget can also be put inside a toolbar. Finally, items can be arranged horizontally or vertically and buttons can be displayed with icons, labels, or both.

        Examples: `GTK2.Toolbar()->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 1")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Label(" ")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 2")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 3")),-1)`

        `GTK2.Toolbar((["orientation":GTK2.ORIENTATION_VERTICAL]))->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 1")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Label(" ")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 2")),-1)->insert(GTK2.ToolItem()->add(GTK2.Button("Button 3")),-1)`

        Properties: int icon-size int icon-size-set int orientation int show-arrow int toolbar-style int tooltips

        Child properties: int expand int homogeneous

        Style properties: int button-relief int internal-padding int shadow-type int space-size int space-style

        Signals: orientation_changed

        popup_context_menu

        style_changed

      Method create

        `GTK2.Toolbar GTK2.Toolbar(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new toolbar.

      Method get_drop_index

        `int get_drop_index(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Returns the position corresponding to the indicated point on the toolbar. This is useful when dragging items to the toolbar: this function returns the position a new item should be inserted.

        x and y are in toolbar coordinates.

      Method get_icon_size

        `int get_icon_size()`

      Description

        Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. One of ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, ICON_SIZE_DIALOG, ICON_SIZE_DND, ICON_SIZE_INVALID, ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR, ICON_SIZE_MENU and ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR.

      Method get_item_index

        `int get_item_index(GTK2.ToolItem item)`

      Description

        Returns the position of item on the toolbar, starting from 0.

      Method get_n_items

        `int get_n_items()`

      Description

        Returns the number of items on the toolbar.

      Method get_nth_item

        `GTK2.ToolItem get_nth_item(int n)`

      Description

        Returns the n's item on the toolbar, or empty if the toolbar does not contain an n'th item.

      Method get_orientation

        `int get_orientation()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar.

      Method get_relief_style

        `int get_relief_style()`

      Description

        Returns the relief style of buttons.

      Method get_show_arrow

        `int get_show_arrow()`

      Description

        Returns whether the toolbar has an overflow menu.

      Method get_style

        `int get_style()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both. One of TOOLBAR_BOTH, TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ, TOOLBAR_ICONS, TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY, TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE and TOOLBAR_TEXT;

      Method get_tooltips

        `int get_tooltips()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether tooltips are enabled.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method insert

        `GTK2.Toolbar insert(GTK2.ToolItem item, int pos)`

      Description

        Insert a W(ToolItem) into the toolbar at position pos. If pos is 0 the item is prepended to the start of the toolbar. If pos is negative, the item is appended to the end of the toolbar.

      Method set_drop_highlight_item

        `GTK2.Toolbar set_drop_highlight_item(GTK2.ToolItem item, int index)`

      Description

        Highlights the toolbar to give an ide aof what it would like if item was added at the position indicated by index.

        The item passed to this function must not be part of any widget hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not be added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another toolbar.

      Method set_orientation

        `GTK2.Toolbar set_orientation(int orientation)`

      Description

        Sets whether a toolbar should appear horizontally or vertically. One of ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL and ORIENTATION_VERTICAL.

      Method set_show_arrow

        `GTK2.Toolbar set_show_arrow(int show_arrow)`

      Description

        Sets whether to show an overflow menu when the toolbar doesn't have room for all items on it. If true, items for which there are not room are are available through an overflow menu.

      Method set_style

        `GTK2.Toolbar set_style(int style)`

      Description

        Set the style, one of TOOLBAR_BOTH, TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ, TOOLBAR_ICONS, TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY, TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE and TOOLBAR_TEXT

      Method set_tooltips

        `GTK2.Toolbar set_tooltips(int enable)`

      Description

        Sets if the tooltips should be active or not.

      Method unset_style

        `GTK2.Toolbar unset_style()`

      Description

        Unsets a toolbar style, so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.

    CLASS GTK2.Tooltips

      Description

        Tooltips are the messages that appear next to a widget when the mouse pointer is held over it for a short amount of time. They are especially helpful for adding more verbose descriptions of things such as buttons in a toolbar.

        An individual tooltip belongs to a group of tooltips. A group is created with a call to GTK2.Tooltips(). Every tooltip in the group can then be turned off with a call to disable() and enabled with enable().

        The length of time the user must keep the mouse over a widget before the tip is shown, can be altered with set_delay(). This is set on a 'per group of tooltips' basis.

        To assign a tip to a particular W(Widget), set_tip() is used.

        The default appearance of all tooltips in a program is determined by the current gtk theme that the user has selected. To change the tooltip appearance manually, use set_colors(). Again, this is per group of tooltips.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Tooltips GTK2.Tooltips()`

      Description

        Creates an empty group of tooltips. This function initialises a GTK2.Tooltips structure. Without at least one such structure, you can not add tips to your application.

      Method disable

        `GTK2.Tooltips disable()`

      Description

        Disable this tooltip collection.

      Method enable

        `GTK2.Tooltips enable()`

      Description

        Enable this tooltip collection.

      Method force_window

        `GTK2.Tooltips force_window()`

      Description

        Realize the tooltip window (as returned from get_gdkwindow())

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK2.Data : Data

      Method set_tip

        `GTK2.Tooltips set_tip(GTK2.Widget in, string to)`

      Description

        Adds a tooltip containing the message tip_text to the specified W(Widget).

    CLASS GTK2.TreeDragDest

      Method drag_data_received

        `int drag_data_received(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.SelectionData sel)`

      Description

        Asks to insert a row before the path dest, deriving the contents of the row from the sel. If this dest is outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, false will be returned. Also, false may be returned if the new row is not created for some model-specific reason.

      Method row_drop_possible

        `int row_drop_possible(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.SelectionData sel)`

      Description

        Determines whether a drop is possible before past, at the same depth as path. i.e., can we drop the data in sel at that location. path does not have to exist; the return value will almost certainly be false if the parent of path doesn't exist, though.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeDragSource

      Method drag_data_delete

        `int drag_data_delete(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Asks to delete the row at path, because it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns false if the deletion fails because path no longer exists, or for some model-specific reason.

      Method drag_data_get

        `GTK2.SelectionData drag_data_get(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Asks to return a representation of the row at path.

      Method row_draggable

        `int row_draggable(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Asks the source whether a particular row can be used as the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement this interface, the row is assumed draggable.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeIter

      Description

        TreeIter.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.TreeIter copy()`

      Description

        Creates a copy of this tree iter.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeModel

      Description

        The tree interface used by TreeView.

        Signals: row_changed

        row_deleted

        row_has_child_toggled

        row_inserted

        rows_reordered

      Method get_column_type

        `int get_column_type(int index)`

      Description

        Returns the type of the column.

      Method get_flags

        `int get_flags()`

      Description

        Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.

      Method get_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter get_iter(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Returns a valid iterator pointer to path

      Method get_iter_first

        `GTK2.TreeIter get_iter_first()`

      Description

        Get GTK2.TreeIter with the first iterator in the tree ("0").

      Method get_iter_from_string

        `GTK2.TreeIter get_iter_from_string(string path)`

      Description

        Returns a valid iterator from a path string.

      Method get_n_columns

        `int get_n_columns()`

      Description

        Returns the number of columns suppported by this model.

      Method get_path

        `GTK2.TreePath get_path(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Returns a GTK2.TreePath from iter.

      Method get_row

        `array get_row(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Get the row at this iter.

      Method get_string_from_iter

        `string get_string_from_iter(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Get string representation of iter.

      Method get_value

        `mixed get_value(GTK2.TreeIter iter, int column)`

      Description

        Get value at column of iter.

      Method iter_children

        `GTK2.TreeIter iter_children(GTK2.TreeIter parent)`

      Description

        Get first child of parent.

      Method iter_has_child

        `int iter_has_child(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Check if iter has children.

      Method iter_n_children

        `int iter_n_children(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Returns the number of children this iter has.

      Method iter_next

        `int iter_next(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Go to next node.

      Method iter_nth_child

        `GTK2.TreeIter iter_nth_child(GTK2.TreeIter parent, int index)`

      Description

        Get the child of parent using the given index. Returns valid GTK2.TreeIter if it exists, or 0. If the index is too big, or parent is invalid, then it returns the index from the root node.

      Method iter_parent

        `GTK2.TreeIter iter_parent(GTK2.TreeIter child)`

      Description

        Get parent of child, or 0 if none.

      Method row_changed

        `GTK2.TreeModel row_changed(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Emit "row-changed" signal.

      Method row_deleted

        `GTK2.TreeModel row_deleted(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Emit "row-deleted" signal.

      Method row_has_child_toggled

        `GTK2.TreeModel row_has_child_toggled(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Emit "row-has-child-toggled" signal.

      Method row_inserted

        `GTK2.TreeModel row_inserted(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Emit "row-inserted" signal.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeModelFilter

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.TreeModel child-model GTK2.TreePath virtual-root

      Method convert_child_iter_to_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter convert_child_iter_to_iter(GTK2.TreeIter child_iter)`

      Description

        Returns an iter pointing to the row in this model that corresponds to the row pointed at by child_iter.

      Method convert_child_path_to_path

        `GTK2.TreePath convert_child_path_to_path(GTK2.TreePath child_path)`

      Description

        Converts child_path to a path relative to this model. That is, child_path points to a path in the child mode. The returned path will point to the same row in the sorted model.

      Method convert_iter_to_child_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter convert_iter_to_child_iter(GTK2.TreeIter sorted_iter)`

      Description

        Returns an iter pointing to the row in this model that corresponds to the row pointed at by sorted_iter.

      Method convert_path_to_child_path

        `GTK2.TreePath convert_path_to_child_path(GTK2.TreePath sorted_path)`

      Description

        Converts sorted_path to a path on the child model.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeModelFilter GTK2.TreeModelFilter(GTK2.TreeModel model, GTK2.TreePath root)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.TreeModel, with model as the child model.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Inherit TreeDragSource

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragSource : TreeDragSource

      Inherit TreeModel

        inherit GTK2.TreeModel : TreeModel

      Method refilter

        `GTK2.TreeModelFilter refilter()`

      Description

        Emits "row-changed" for each row in the child model, which causes the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not.

      Method set_visible_func

        `GTK2.TreeModelFilter set_visible_func(function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be f. If the current sort column id of this sortable is the same as column, then the model will sort using this function.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeModelSort

      Description

        Properties: GTK2.TreeModel model

      Method convert_child_iter_to_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter convert_child_iter_to_iter(GTK2.TreeIter child_iter)`

      Description

        Returns an iter pointing to the row in this model that corresponds to the row pointed at by child_iter.

      Method convert_child_path_to_path

        `GTK2.TreePath convert_child_path_to_path(GTK2.TreePath child_path)`

      Description

        Converts child_path to a path relative to this model. That is, child_path points to a path in the child mode. The returned path will point to the same row in the sorted model.

      Method convert_iter_to_child_iter

        `GTK2.TreeIter convert_iter_to_child_iter(GTK2.TreeIter sorted_iter)`

      Description

        Returns an iter pointing to the row in this model that corresponds to the row pointed at by sorted_iter.

      Method convert_path_to_child_path

        `GTK2.TreePath convert_path_to_child_path(GTK2.TreePath sorted_path)`

      Description

        Converts sorted_path to a path on the child model.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeModelSort GTK2.TreeModelSort(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Create a new GTK2.TreeModel, with model as the child model.

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Return the model this ModelSort is sorting.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Inherit TreeDragSource

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragSource : TreeDragSource

      Inherit TreeModel

        inherit GTK2.TreeModel : TreeModel

      Inherit TreeSortable

        inherit GTK2.TreeSortable : TreeSortable

      Method reset_default_sort_func

        `GTK2.TreeModelSort reset_default_sort_func()`

      Description

        This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model to be in the same order as the child model only if this model is in 'unsorted' state.

    CLASS GTK2.TreePath

      Description

        TreePath.

      Method append_index

        `GTK2.TreePath append_index(int index)`

      Description

        Appends a new index to path. As a result, the depth of the path is increased.

      Method compare

        `int compare(GTK2.TreePath b)`

      Description

        Compares two paths. If this path appears before b, -1 is returned. If b before this path, 1 is return. If they are equal, 0 is returned.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.TreePath copy()`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.TreePath as a copy.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreePath GTK2.TreePath(string|void path)`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.TreePath.

      Method down

        `GTK2.TreePath down()`

      Description

        Moves path to point to the first child of the current path.

      Method get_depth

        `int get_depth()`

      Description

        Returns the current depth of path.

      Method get_indices

        `array get_indices()`

      Description

        Returns the current indices of path as an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.

      Method is_ancestor

        `int is_ancestor(GTK2.TreePath descendant)`

      Description

        Returns TRUE if descendant is a descendant of this path.

      Method is_descendant

        `int is_descendant(GTK2.TreePath ancestor)`

      Description

        Returns TRUE if this path is a descendant of ancestor.

      Method next

        `GTK2.TreePath next()`

      Description

        Moves the path to point to the next node at the current depth.

      Method prepend_index

        `GTK2.TreePath prepend_index(int index)`

      Description

        Prepends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is increased.

      Method prev

        `GTK2.TreePath prev()`

      Description

        Moves the path to point to the previous node at the current depth, if it exists. Returns TRUE if the move was made.

      Method to_string

        `string to_string()`

      Description

        Generates a string representation of the path. This string is a ':' separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an acceptable return value for this string.

      Method up

        `GTK2.TreePath up()`

      Description

        Moves the path to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeRowReference

      Description

        A TreeRowReference.

      Method copy

        `GTK2.TreeRowReference copy()`

      Description

        Copies a GTK2.TreeRowReference.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeRowReference GTK2.TreeRowReference(GTK2.TreeModel model, GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Creates a row reference based on path. This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by path, so long as it exists.

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Returns the model which this references is monitoring.

      Method get_path

        `GTK2.TreePath get_path()`

      Description

        Returns a path that the row reference currently points to.

      Method valid

        `int valid()`

      Description

        Return TRUE if the reference referes to a current valid path.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeSelection

      Description

        Selections on a treestore.

        Signals: changed

      Method count_selected_rows

        `int count_selected_rows()`

      Description

        Returns the number of rows that have been selected.

      Method get_mode

        `int get_mode()`

      Description

        Gets the selectiom mode.

      Method get_selected

        `array get_selected()`

      Description

        Returns a W(TreeITer) with the currently selected node if this selection is set to GTK2.SELECTION_SINGLE or GTK2.SELECTION_BROWSE. Also returns W(TreeModel) as a convenience. This function will not work if you this selection is set to GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE.

      Method get_selected_rows

        `array get_selected_rows(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Creates a list of W(TreePath)'s for all selected rows. Additionally, if you are planning on modified the model after calling this function, you may want to convert the returned list into a list of W(TreeRowReference)s. To do this, you can use GTK2.TreeRowReference->create().

      Method get_tree_view

        `GTK2.TreeView get_tree_view()`

      Description

        Returns the tree view associated with this selection.

      Method get_user_data

        `object get_user_data()`

      Description

        Returns the user data for the selection function.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method iter_is_selected

        `int iter_is_selected(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Returns true if the row at iter is currently selected.

      Method path_is_selected

        `int path_is_selected(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Returns true if the row pointed to by path is currently selected. If path does not point to a valid location, false is returned.

      Method select_all

        `GTK2.TreeSelection select_all()`

      Description

        Selects all the nodes. This selection must be set to GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE mode.

      Method select_iter

        `GTK2.TreeSelection select_iter(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Selects the specified iterator.

      Method select_path

        `GTK2.TreeSelection select_path(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Select the row at path.

      Method select_range

        `GTK2.TreeSelection select_range(GTK2.TreePath start, GTK2.TreePath end)`

      Description

        Selects a range of nodes, determined by start and end inclusive. This selection must be set to GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE mode.

      Method set_mode

        `GTK2.TreeSelection set_mode(int type)`

      Description

        Sets the selection mode. If the previous type was GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE, then the anchor is kept selected, if it was previously selected. One of SELECTION_BROWSE, SELECTION_MULTIPLE, SELECTION_NONE and SELECTION_SINGLE.

      Method unselect_all

        `GTK2.TreeSelection unselect_all()`

      Description

        Unselects all the nodes.

      Method unselect_iter

        `GTK2.TreeSelection unselect_iter(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Unselects the specified iterator.

      Method unselect_path

        `GTK2.TreeSelection unselect_path(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Unselects the row at path.

      Method unselect_range

        `GTK2.TreeSelection unselect_range(GTK2.TreePath start, GTK2.TreePath end)`

      Description

        Unselects a range of nodes, determined by start and end inclusive.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeSortable

      Description

        The interface for sortable models used by TreeView.

        Signals: sort_column_changed

      Method get_sort_column_id

        `mapping get_sort_column_id()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "column": int, "order": int ])

      Method has_default_sort_func

        `int has_default_sort_func()`

      Description

        Returns true if the model has a default sort function.

      Method set_default_sort_func

        `GTK2.TreeSortable set_default_sort_func(function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be f. If the current sort column id of this sortable is GTK2.TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using this function.

        if f is 0, then there will be no default comparison function. This means once the model has been sorted, it can't go back to the default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of this sortable is GTK2.TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.

      Method set_sort_column_id

        `GTK2.TreeSortable set_sort_column_id(int column, int order)`

      Description

        Sets the current sort column to be column. The widget will resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a "sort-column-changed" signal. If column is GTK2.TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the default sort function will be used, if it is set.

      Method set_sort_func

        `GTK2.TreeSortable set_sort_func(int column, function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be f. If the current sort column id of this sortable is the same as column, then the model will sort using this function.

      Method sort_column_changed

        `GTK2.TreeSortable sort_column_changed()`

      Description

        Emits a "sort-column-changed" signal

    CLASS GTK2.TreeStore

      Description

        A tree-like data structure that can be used with W(TreeView).

      Method append

        `GTK2.TreeIter append(GTK2.TreeIter parent)`

      Description

        Append a new row. If parent is valid, then it will append the new row after the last child, otherwise it will append a row to the toplevel.

      Method clear

        `GTK2.TreeStore clear()`

      Description

        Removes all rows.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeStore GTK2.TreeStore(array types)`

      Description

        Create a new tree store with as many columns as there are items in the array. A type is either a string representing a type name, such as "int" or "float", or an actual widget. If it is a widget, the column in question should be a widget of the same type that you would like this column to represent.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Inherit TreeDragDest

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragDest : TreeDragDest

      Inherit TreeDragSource

        inherit GTK2.TreeDragSource : TreeDragSource

      Inherit TreeModel

        inherit GTK2.TreeModel : TreeModel

      Inherit TreeSortable

        inherit GTK2.TreeSortable : TreeSortable

      Method insert

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert(GTK2.TreeIter parent, int position)`

      Description

        Insert a row at position. If parent is valid, will create as child, otherwise at top level. If position is larger than then number of rows at that level, it will be added to the end of the list. iter will be changed to point to the new row.

      Method insert_after

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert_after(GTK2.TreeIter parent, GTK2.TreeIter sibling)`

      Description

        Insert a new row after sibling. If sibling is 0, then the row will be prepended to parent's children. If parent and sibling are both 0, then the row will be prepended to the toplevel.

      Method insert_before

        `GTK2.TreeIter insert_before(GTK2.TreeIter parent, GTK2.TreeIter sibling)`

      Description

        Insert a row before sibling. If sibling is 0, then the row will be appended to parent's children. If parent and sibling are 0, then the row will be appended to the toplevel.

      Method is_ancestor

        `int is_ancestor(GTK2.TreeIter iter, GTK2.TreeIter descendant)`

      Description

        Returns true if iter is an ancestor of descendant.

      Method iter_depth

        `int iter_depth(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Get the depth of iter. This will be 0 for anything on the root level, 1 for anything down a level, and so on.

      Method move_after

        `GTK2.TreeStore move_after(GTK2.TreeIter iter, GTK2.TreeIter position)`

      Description

        Moves iter to after position. These should be at the same level. This only works if the store is unsorted. If position is omitted, iter will be moved to the start of the level.

      Method move_before

        `GTK2.TreeStore move_before(GTK2.TreeIter iter, GTK2.TreeIter position)`

      Description

        Moves iter to before position. These should be at the same level. This only works if the store is unsorted. If position is omitted, iter will be moved to the end of the level.

      Method prepend

        `GTK2.TreeIter prepend(GTK2.TreeIter parent)`

      Description

        Prepend a new row. If parent is valid, then it will prepend the new row before the first child of parent, otherwise it will prepend a new row to the toplevel.

      Method remove

        `GTK2.TreeStore remove(GTK2.TreeIter iter)`

      Description

        Remove iter. iter is set to the next valid row at that level, or invalidated if it was the last one.

      Method set_row

        `GTK2.TreeStore set_row(GTK2.TreeIter iter, array values)`

      Description

        Set the data in an entire row.

      Method set_value

        `GTK2.TreeStore set_value(GTK2.TreeIter iter, int column, mixed value)`

      Description

        Set the data in the cell specified by iter and column.

      Method swap

        `GTK2.TreeStore swap(GTK2.TreeIter a, GTK2.TreeIter b)`

      Description

        Swap 2 rows. Only works if this store is unsorted.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeView

      Description

        Properties: int enable-search GTK2.TreeViewColumn expander-column int fixed-height-mode GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment int headers-clickable int headers-visible int hover-expand int hover-selection int level-indentation GTK2.TreeModel model int reorderable int rules-hint int search-column int show-expanders GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment

        Style properties: int allow-rules GDK2.Color even-row-color int expander-size int horizontal-separator int indent-expanders GDK2.Color odd-row-color int vertical-separator

        Signals: columns_changed

        cursor_changed

        expand_collapse_cursor_row

        move_cursor

        row_activated

        row_collapsed

        row_expanded

        select_all

        select_cursor_parent

        select_cursor_row

        set_scroll_adjustments

        start_interactive_search

        test_collapse_row

        test_expand_row

        toggle_cursor_row

        unselect_all

      Method append_column

        `GTK2.TreeView append_column(GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Appends column to the list of columns. If this tree view has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then column must have its "sizing" property set to be GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

      Method collapse_all

        `GTK2.TreeView collapse_all()`

      Description

        Recursively collapses all visible, expanded nodes.

      Method collapse_row

        `int collapse_row(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Collapses a row (hides its child rows, if they exist).

      Method columns_autosize

        `GTK2.TreeView columns_autosize()`

      Description

        Resizes all columns to their optimal width. Only works after the treeview has been realized.

      Method convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords

        `mapping convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords(int bx, int by)`

      Description

        Convert bin_window coordinates to tree coordinates.

      Method convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords

        `mapping convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords(int bx, int by)`

      Description

        Convert bin_window coordinates to widget coordinates.

      Method convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords

        `mapping convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords(int tx, int ty)`

      Description

        Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree) to bin_window coordinates.

      Method convert_tree_to_widget_coords

        `mapping convert_tree_to_widget_coords(int tx, int ty)`

      Description

        Convert tree coordinates to widget coordinates.

      Method convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords

        `mapping convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords(int wx, int wy)`

      Description

        Convert widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.

      Method convert_widget_to_tree_coords

        `mapping convert_widget_to_tree_coords(int wx, int wy)`

      Description

        Convert widget coordinates to tree coordinates.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeView GTK2.TreeView(GTK2.TreeModel model_or_props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(TreeView), with or without a default model.

      Method expand_all

        `GTK2.TreeView expand_all()`

      Description

        Recursively expands all nodes.

      Method expand_row

        `int expand_row(GTK2.TreePath path, int open_all)`

      Description

        Opens the row so its children are visible.

      Method expand_to_path

        `GTK2.TreeView expand_to_path(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Expands the row at path. This will also expand all parent rows of path as necessary.

      Method get_background_area

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_background_area(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Similar to get_cell_area(). The returned rectangle is equivalent to the background_area passed to GTK2.CellRenderer->render(). These background area tiles to cover the entire tree window (except for the area used for header buttons). Contrast with get_cell_area(), which returns only the cell itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.

      Method get_bin_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_bin_window()`

      Description

        Returns the window that this view renders to. This is used primarily to compare to event->window to confirm that the event on this view is on the right window.

      Method get_cell_area

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_cell_area(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Fills the bounding rectangle in tree window coordinates for the cell at the row specified by path and the column specified by column. If path is omitted or 0, or points to a path not currently displayed, the y and height fields of the rectangle will be 0. If column is omitted, the x and width fields will be o. The sum of all cell rects does not cover the entire tree; there are extra pixels in between rows, for example. The returned rectangle is equivalent to the cell_area passed to GTK2.CellRenderer->render(). This function is only valid if the view is realized.

      Method get_column

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn get_column(int n)`

      Description

        Gets the W(TreeViewColumn) at the given position.

      Method get_columns

        `array get_columns()`

      Description

        Returns an array of all the W(TreeViewColumn)'s current in the view.

      Method get_cursor

        `mapping get_cursor()`

      Description

        Returns the current path and focus column. If the cursor isn't currently set, then "path" will be 0. If no column currently has focus, then "focus_column" will be 0. Returns ([ "path": GTK2.TreePath, "column": GTK2.TreeViewColumn ]);

      Method get_enable_search

        `int get_enable_search()`

      Description

        Returns whether or not the tree allows to start interactive searching by typing in text.

      Method get_enable_tree_lines

        `int get_enable_tree_lines()`

      Description

        Returns whether or not tree lines are drawn.

      Method get_expander_column

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn get_expander_column()`

      Description

        Returns the column that is the current expander column. This column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.

      Method get_fixed_height_mode

        `int get_fixed_height_mode()`

      Description

        Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on.

      Method get_grid_lines

        `int get_grid_lines()`

      Description

        Returns which grid lines are enabled.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Gets the W(Adjustment) currently being used for the horizontal aspect.

      Method get_headers_clickable

        `int get_headers_clickable()`

      Description

        Returns whether all header columns are clickable.

      Method get_headers_visible

        `int get_headers_visible()`

      Description

        Returns true if the headers are visible.

      Method get_hover_expand

        `int get_hover_expand()`

      Description

        Returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on.

      Method get_hover_selection

        `int get_hover_selection()`

      Description

        Returns whether hover selection mode is turned on.

      Method get_level_indentation

        `int get_level_indentation()`

      Description

        Returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels

      Method get_model

        `GTK2.TreeModel get_model()`

      Description

        Returns the model this TreeView is based on.

      Method get_path_at_pos

        `mapping get_path_at_pos(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Finds the path at the point (x,y) relative to widget coordinates. That is, x and y are relative to an events coordinates. x and y must come from an event on the view only where event->window==get_bin(). It is primarily for things like popup menus. Returns GTK2.TreePath, GTK2.TreeViewColumn, and cell_x and cell_y, which are the coordinates relative to the cell background (i.e. the background_area passed to GTK2.CellRenderer->render()). This function is only meaningful if the widget is realized.

      Method get_reorderable

        `int get_reorderable()`

      Description

        Retrieves whether the user can reorder the tree via drag-and-drop.

      Method get_rubber_banding

        `int get_rubber_banding()`

      Description

        Returns whether rubber banding is turned on. If the selection mode is GTK2.SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.

      Method get_rules_hint

        `int get_rules_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the setting set by set_rules_hint().

      Method get_search_column

        `int get_search_column()`

      Description

        Gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.

      Method get_search_entry

        `GTK2.Entry get_search_entry()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.Entry which is currently in use as interactive search entry. In case the built-in entry is being used, 0 will be returned.

      Method get_selected

        `array get_selected()`

      Description

        Shortcut to GTK2.TreeView->get_selection() and GTK2.TreeSelection()->get_selected().

      Method get_selection

        `GTK2.TreeSelection get_selection()`

      Description

        Gets the W(TreeSelection) associated with this TreeView.

      Method get_show_expanders

        `int get_show_expanders()`

      Description

        Returns whether or not expanders are drawn

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Gets the W(Adjustment) currently being used for the vertical aspect.

      Method get_visible_range

        `array get_visible_range()`

      Description

        Returns the first and last visible path. Note that there may be invisible paths in between.

      Method get_visible_rect

        `GTK2.GdkRectangle get_visible_rect()`

      Description

        Returns a GDK2.Rectangle with the currently-visible region of the buffer, in tree coordinates. Conver to widget coordinates with tree_to_widget_coords(). Tree coordinates start at 0,0 for row 0 of the tree, and cover the entire scrollable area of the tree.

      Inherit Container

        inherit GTK2.Container : Container

      Method insert_column

        `int insert_column(GTK2.TreeViewColumn column, int position)`

      Description

        This inserts the column at position. If position is -1, then the column is inserted at the end. If this tree view has "fixed_height" mode enabled, then column must have its "sizing property set to GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

      Method move_column_after

        `GTK2.TreeView move_column_after(GTK2.TreeViewColumn column, GTK2.TreeViewColumn base)`

      Description

        Moves column to be after base. If base is omitted, then column is placed in the first position.

      Method remove_column

        `int remove_column(GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Removes column.

      Method row_activated

        `GTK2.TreeView row_activated(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Activates the cell determined by path and column.

      Method row_expanded

        `int row_expanded(GTK2.TreePath path)`

      Description

        Returns true if the node pointed to by path is expanded.

      Method scroll_to_cell

        `GTK2.TreeView scroll_to_cell(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn column, float|void row_align, float|void col_align)`

      Description

        Moves the alignments of the view to the position specified by column and path. If column is 0, then no horizontal scrolling occurs. Likewise, if path is 0, no vertical scrolling occurs. At a minimum, one of column or path needs to be non-zero. row_align determines where the row is placed, and col_align determines where column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0. 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means center.

        If row_align exists, then col_align must exist, otherwise neither will be used. If neither are used, the tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the cell onto the screen. This means that the cell will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current position. If the cell is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.

        This function only works if the model is set, and path is a valid row on the model. If the model changes before the view is realized, the centered path will be modifed to reflect this change.

      Method scroll_to_point

        `GTK2.TreeView scroll_to_point(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible area is x,y, where x and y are specified in tree window coordinates. The view must be realized before this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be using scroll_to_cell().

        If either x or y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.

      Method set_cursor

        `GTK2.TreeView set_cursor(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn focus_column, int|void start_editing)`

      Description

        Sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If focus_column is present, then focus is given to the column specified by it. Additionally, if focus_column is specified, and start_editing is true, then editing should be started in the specified cell. This function is often followed by grab_focus() in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.

      Method set_cursor_on_cell

        `GTK2.TreeView set_cursor_on_cell(GTK2.TreePath path, GTK2.TreeViewColumn focus_column, int|void start_editing, GTK2.CellRenderer focus_cell)`

      Description

        Sets the current keyboard focus to be at path, and selects it. This is useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If focus_column is present, then focus is given to the column specified by it. If focus_column and focus_cell are present, and focus_column contains 2 or more editable or activatable cells, then focus is given to the cell specified by focus_cell. Additionally, if focus_column is specified, and start_editing is true, then editing should be started in the specified cell. This function is often followed by grab_focus() in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.

      Method set_enable_search

        `GTK2.TreeView set_enable_search(int enable_search)`

      Description

        If enable_search is set, then the user can type in text to search through the tree interactively (this is sometimes called "typeahead find").

        Note that even if this is false, the user can still initiate a search using the "start-interactive-search" key binding.

      Method set_enable_tree_lines

        `GTK2.TreeView set_enable_tree_lines(int enabled)`

      Description

        Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders. This does not have any visible effects for lists.

      Method set_expander_column

        `GTK2.TreeView set_expander_column(GTK2.TreeViewColumn column)`

      Description

        Sets the column to draw the expander arrow at. It must be in the view. If column is omitted, then the expander arrow is always at the first visible column.

      Method set_fixed_height_mode

        `GTK2.TreeView set_fixed_height_mode(int enable)`

      Description

        Enables or disables the fixed height mode. Fixed height mode speeds up W(TreeView) by assuming that all rows have the same height. Only enable this option if all rows are the same height and all columns are of type GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.

      Method set_grid_lines

        `GTK2.TreeView set_grid_lines(int grid_lines)`

      Description

        Sets which grid lines to draw.

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK2.TreeView set_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment hadj)`

      Description

        Sets the W(Adjustment) for the current horizontal aspect.

      Method set_headers_clickable

        `GTK2.TreeView set_headers_clickable(int setting)`

      Description

        Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.

      Method set_headers_visible

        `GTK2.TreeView set_headers_visible(int headers_visible)`

      Description

        Sets the visibility state of the headers.

      Method set_hover_expand

        `GTK2.TreeView set_hover_expand(int expand)`

      Description

        Enables or disables the hover expansion mode. Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer moves over them.

      Method set_hover_selection

        `GTK2.TreeView set_hover_selection(int hover)`

      Description

        Enables or disables the hover selection mode. Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer. Currently, this works only for the selection modes GTK2.SELECTION_SINGLE and GTK2.SELECTION_BROWSE.

      Method set_model

        `GTK2.TreeView set_model(GTK2.TreeModel model)`

      Description

        Sets the model. If this TreeView already has a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model.

      Method set_reorderable

        `GTK2.TreeView set_reorderable(int reorderable)`

      Description

        This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models. If reorderable is true, then the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's "row-inserted" and "row-deleted" signals.

        This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably handle drag and drop manually.

      Method set_row_separator_func

        `GTK2.TreeView set_row_separator_func(function(:void) f, mixed user_data)`

      Description

        Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator function is 0 no separators are drawn. This is the default value.

      Method set_rubber_banding

        `GTK2.TreeView set_rubber_banding(int enable)`

      Description

        Enables or disables rubber banding.

      Method set_rules_hint

        `GTK2.TreeView set_rules_hint(int setting)`

      Description

        This function tells GTK2+ that the user interface for your application requires users to read across tree rows and associate cells with one another. By default, GTK2+ will then render the tree with alternating row colors. Do not use it just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You should call this function only as a semantic hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors usefull from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns, generally).

      Method set_search_column

        `GTK2.TreeView set_search_column(int column)`

      Description

        Sets column as the column where the interactive search code should search in.

        If the sort column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search" key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.

        Note that column refers to a column of the model.

      Method set_search_entry

        `GTK2.TreeView set_search_entry(GTK2.Entry entry)`

      Description

        Sets the entry which the interactive search code will use. This is useful when you want to provide a search entry in your interface at all times at a fixed position. Passing 0 will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup entry again.

      Method set_show_expanders

        `GTK2.TreeView set_show_expanders(int show)`

      Description

        Sets whether to draw and enable expanders and indent child rows.

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK2.TreeView set_vadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment vadj)`

      Description

        Sets the W(Adjustment) for the current vertical aspect.

    CLASS GTK2.TreeViewColumn

      Description

        Properties: float alignment int clickable int expand int fixed-width int max-width int min-width int reorderable int resizable int sizing TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED and TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY int sort-indicator int sort-order SORT_ASCENDING and SORT_DESCENDING int spacing string title int visible GTK2.Widget widget int width

        Signals: clicked

      Method add_attribute

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn add_attribute(GTK2.CellRenderer cell_renderer, string attribute, int column)`

      Description

        Adds an attribute mapping to the list. The column is the column of the model to get a value from, and the attribute is the parameter on cell_rendere to be set from the value. So for example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the "text" attribute of a W(CellRendererText) get its values from column 2.

      Method cell_get_position

        `mapping cell_get_position(GTK2.CellRenderer cell_renderer)`

      Description

        Obtains the horizontal position and size of a cell in a column. If the cell is not found in the column, returns -1 for start_pos and width.

      Method cell_get_size

        `mapping cell_get_size(GTK2.GdkRectangle cell_area)`

      Description

        Obtains the width and height needed to render the column.

      Method cell_is_visible

        `int cell_is_visible()`

      Description

        Returns true if any of the cells packed into the colum are visible. For this to be meaningful, you must first initialize the cells with cell_set_cell_data().

      Method cell_set_cell_data

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn cell_set_cell_data(GTK2.TreeModel model, GTK2.TreeIter iter, int is_expander, int is_expanded)`

      Description

        Sets the cell renderer based on the model and iter. That is, for every attribute mapping in this column, it will get a value from the set column on the iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell renderer. This is used primarily by the W(TreeView).

      Method clear

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn clear()`

      Description

        Unsets all the mappings on all renderers.

      Method clear_attributes

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn clear_attributes(GTK2.CellRenderer cell_renderer)`

      Description

        Clears all existing attributes previously set.

      Method clicked

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn clicked()`

      Description

        Emits the "clicked" signal on the column. This function will only work if this column is clickable.

      Method create

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn GTK2.TreeViewColumn(string|mapping title_or_props, GTK2.CellRenderer renderer, string|void property, int|void col)`

      Description

        Creates a new W(TreeViewColumn).

      Method focus_cell

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn focus_cell(GTK2.CellRenderer cell)`

      Description

        Sets the current keyboard focus to be at cell, if the column contains 2 or more editable and activatable cells.

      Method get_alignment

        `float get_alignment()`

      Description

        Returns the current x alignment. This value can range between 0.0 and 1.0.

      Method get_cell_renderers

        `array get_cell_renderers()`

      Description

        Returns an array of all the cell renderers in the column, in no partciular order.

      Method get_clickable

        `int get_clickable()`

      Description

        Returns true if the user can click on the header for the column.

      Method get_expand

        `int get_expand()`

      Description

        Return true if the column expands to take any available space.

      Method get_fixed_width

        `int get_fixed_width()`

      Description

        Gets the fixed width of the column.

      Method get_max_width

        `int get_max_width()`

      Description

        Returns the maximum width in pixels, or -1 if no maximum width is set.

      Method get_min_width

        `int get_min_width()`

      Description

        Returns the minimum width in pixels, or -1 if no minimum width is set.

      Method get_reorderable

        `int get_reorderable()`

      Description

        Returns true if the column can be reordered by the user.

      Method get_resizable

        `int get_resizable()`

      Description

        Returns true if the column can be resized by the end user.

      Method get_sizing

        `int get_sizing()`

      Description

        Returns the current type.

      Method get_sort_column_id

        `int get_sort_column_id()`

      Description

        Gets the logical column_id that the model sorts on when this column is selected for sorting.

      Method get_sort_indicator

        `int get_sort_indicator()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_sort_indicator();

      Method get_sort_order

        `int get_sort_order()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_sort_order().

      Method get_spacing

        `int get_spacing()`

      Description

        Returns the spacing.

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Returns the title of the widget.

      Method get_tree_view

        `GTK2.Widget get_tree_view()`

      Description

        Returns the W(TreeView) that this TreeViewColumn has been inserted into.

      Method get_visible

        `int get_visible()`

      Description

        Returns true if the column is visible.

      Method get_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_widget()`

      Description

        Returns the W(Widget) in the button on the column header. If a custom widget has not been set then 0 is returned.

      Method get_width

        `int get_width()`

      Description

        Returns the current size in pixels.

      Inherit CellLayout

        inherit GTK2.CellLayout : CellLayout

      Inherit Data

        inherit GTK2.Data : Data

      Method pack_end

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn pack_end(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int expand)`

      Description

        Packs the cell to the end of the column.

      Method pack_start

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn pack_start(GTK2.CellRenderer cell, int expand)`

      Description

        Packs the cell into the beginning of the column. If expand is false, then the cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divied evenly between cels for which expand is true.

      Method queue_resize

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn queue_resize()`

      Description

        Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have their sizes renegotiated.

      Method set_alignment

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_alignment(float xalign)`

      Description

        Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header. The alignment determines its location inside the button - 0.0 for left, 0.5 for center, 1.0 for right.

      Method set_clickable

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_clickable(int clickable)`

      Description

        Sets the header to be active if clickable is true. When the header is active, then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.

      Method set_expand

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_expand(int expand)`

      Description

        Sets the column to take available extra space. This space is shared equally amongst all columns that have the expand set to true. If no column has this option set, then the last column gets all extra space. By default, every column is created with this false.

      Method set_fixed_width

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_fixed_width(int fixed_width)`

      Description

        Sets the size of the column in pixels. The is meaningful only if the sizing type is GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the column doesn't actually affect the "fixed-width" property of the widget, just the actual size when displayed.

      Method set_max_width

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_max_width(int max_width)`

      Description

        Sets the maximum width. If max_width is -1, then the maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to fill any extra space.

      Method set_min_width

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_min_width(int min_width)`

      Description

        Sets the minimum width. If min_width is -1, then the minimum width is unset.

      Method set_reorderable

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_reorderable(int reorderable)`

      Description

        If reorderable is true, then the column can be reorderd by the end user dragging the header.

      Method set_resizable

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_resizable(int resizable)`

      Description

        If resizable is true, then the user can explicitly resize the column by grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is ture and the sizing mode of the column is GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing mode is changed to GTK2.TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.

      Method set_sizing

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_sizing(int type)`

      Description

        Sets the growth behavior of this columnt to type. One of TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED and TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.

      Method set_sort_column_id

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_sort_column_id(int column_id)`

      Description

        Sets the logical column_id that this column sorts on when this column is selected for sorting. Doing so makes the column header clickable.

      Method set_sort_indicator

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_sort_indicator(int setting)`

      Description

        Call this function with a setting of true to display an arrow in the header button indicating the column is sorted. Call set_sort_order() to change the direction of the arrow.

      Method set_sort_order

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_sort_order(int order)`

      Description

        Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.

        This does not actually sort the model. Use set_sort_column_id() if you wnat automatic sorting support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should be used in conjunction with GTK2.TreeSortable->set_sort_column() to do that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.

        The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort. Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when calling this function. One of SORT_ASCENDING and SORT_DESCENDING.

      Method set_spacing

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_spacing(int spacing)`

      Description

        Sets the spacing field, which is the number of pixels to place between cell renderers packed into it.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Sets the title. If a custom widget has been set, then this value is ignored.

      Method set_visible

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_visible(int visible)`

      Description

        Sets the visibility.

      Method set_widget

        `GTK2.TreeViewColumn set_widget(GTK2.Widget widget)`

      Description

        Sets the widget in the header to be widget. If widget is omitted, then the header button is set with a W(Label) set to the title.

    CLASS GTK2.UiManager

      Description

        Constructing menus and toolbars from an XML description. Properties: int add-tearoffs string ui

        Signals: actions_changed Emitted whenever the actions changes.

        add_widget Emitted for each generated menubar and toolbar, but not for generated popup menus.

        connect_proxy Emitted after connecting a proxy to an action.

        disconnect_proxy Emitted after disconnecting a proxy from an action.

        post_activate Emitted just after the action is activated.

        pre_activate Emitted just before the action is activated. A UI definition: &lt;ui&gt; &lt;menubar&gt; &lt;menu name="FileMenu" action="FileMenuAction"&gt; &lt;menuitem name="New" action="New2Action" /&gt; &lt;placeholder name="FileMenuAdditions" /&gt; &lt;/menu> &lt;menu name="JustifyMenu" action="JustifyMenuAction"&gt; &lt;menuitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/&gt; &lt;menuitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/&gt; &lt;menuitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/&gt; &lt;menuitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/&gt; &lt;/menu&gt; &lt;/menubar&gt; &lt;toolbar action="toolbar1"&gt; &lt;placeholder name="JustifyToolItems"&gt; &lt;separator/&gt; &lt;toolitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/&gt; &lt;toolitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/&gt; &lt;toolitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/&gt; &lt;toolitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/&gt; &lt;separator/&gt; &lt;/placeholder&gt; &lt;/toolbar&gt; &lt;/ui&gt;

      Method add_ui

        `GTK2.UiManager add_ui(int merge_id, string path, string name, string action, int type, int top)`

      Description

        Adds a ui element to the current contents.

        If type is GTK2.UI_MANAGER_AUTO, GTK2+ inserts a menuitem, toolitem or separator if such an element can be inserted at the place determined by path. Otherwise type must indicate an element that can be inserted at the place determined by path.

      Method add_ui_from_file

        `int add_ui_from_file(string filename)`

      Description

        Parses a file containing a ui definition.

      Method add_ui_from_string

        `int add_ui_from_string(string buffer)`

      Description

        Parses a string containing a ui definition and merges it with the current contents. An enclosing &gt;ui&lt; element is added if it is missing.

      Method create

        `GTK2.UiManager GTK2.UiManager(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Creates a new ui manager object.

      Method ensure_update

        `GTK2.UiManager ensure_update()`

      Description

        Makes sure that all pending updates to the ui have been completed.

      Method get_accel_group

        `GTK2.AccelGroup get_accel_group()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.AccelGroup associated with this.

      Method get_action

        `GTK2.Action get_action(string path)`

      Description

        Looks up an action by following a path.

      Method get_action_groups

        `array get_action_groups()`

      Description

        Returns the list of action groups.

      Method get_add_tearoffs

        `int get_add_tearoffs()`

      Description

        Returns whether menus generated by this manager will have tearoff menu items.

      Method get_toplevels

        `array get_toplevels(int types)`

      Description

        Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Bitwise or of UI_MANAGER_ACCELERATOR, UI_MANAGER_AUTO, UI_MANAGER_MENU, UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, UI_MANAGER_MENUITEM, UI_MANAGER_PLACEHOLDER, UI_MANAGER_POPUP, UI_MANAGER_SEPARATOR, UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and UI_MANAGER_TOOLITEM.

      Method get_ui

        `string get_ui()`

      Description

        Creates a ui definition of the merged ui.

      Method get_widget

        `GTK2.Widget get_widget(string path)`

      Description

        Looks up a widget by following a path. The path consists of the names specified in the xml description of the ui, separated by '/'. Elements which don't have a name or action attribute in the xml (e.g. &gt;popup&lt;) can be addressed by their xml element name (e.g. "popup"). The root element ("/ui") can be omitted in the path.

        Note that the widget found be following a path that ends in a &gt;menu&lt; element is the menuitem to which the menu is attached, not the menu itself.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method insert_action_group

        `GTK2.UiManager insert_action_group(GTK2.ActionGroup group, int pos)`

      Description

        Inserts an action group into the list of action groups. Actions in earlier groups hide actions with the same name in later groups.

      Method new_merge_id

        `int new_merge_id()`

      Description

        Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with add_ui().

      Method remove_action_group

        `GTK2.UiManager remove_action_group(GTK2.ActionGroup group)`

      Description

        Removes an action group from the list of action groups.

      Method remove_ui

        `GTK2.UiManager remove_ui(int merge_id)`

      Description

        Unmerges the part of the content identified by merge_id.

      Method set_add_tearoffs

        `GTK2.UiManager set_add_tearoffs(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets the "add-tearoffs" property, which controls whether menus generated by this manager will have tearoff menu items.

        Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup menus never have tearoff menu items.

    CLASS GTK2.VScrollbar

      Description

        General documentation: See W(Scrollbar) `GTK2.VScrollbar(GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(15,60)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.VScrollbar GTK2.VScrollbar(GTK2.Adjustment pos_or_props)`

      Description

        Used to create a new vscrollbar widget.

      Inherit Scrollbar

        inherit GTK2.Scrollbar : Scrollbar

    CLASS GTK2.Vbox

      Description

        Most packing is done by creating boxes. These are invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into which come in two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box. This is the vertical one. When packing widgets into a vertical box, the objects are inserted horizontally from top to bottom or bottom to top depending on the call used.

        `GTK2.Vbox(0,0)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK2.Vbox(1,0)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

        `GTK2.Vbox(1,40)->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->pack_end_defaults(GTK2.Button("From right"))->pack_start_defaults(GTK2.Button("From left"))`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Vbox GTK2.Vbox(int|mapping uniformp_or_props, int|void padding)`

      Description

        Create a new vertical box widget. If all_same_size is true, all widgets will have exactly the same size. padding is added to the top and bottom of the children.

      Inherit Box

        inherit GTK2.Box : Box

    CLASS GTK2.VbuttonBox

      Description

        A Vbutton_box is very similar to a Vbox. The major diffference is that the button box is made to pack buttons in, and has a few convenience function for normal button layouts.

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_size_request(100,300)`

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)->set_size_request(100,300)`

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_EDGE)->set_size_request(100,300)`

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_START)->set_size_request(100,300)`

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox()->add(GTK2.Button("Hello"))->add(GTK2.Button("World"))->set_layout(GTK2.BUTTONBOX_END)->set_size_request(100,300)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.VbuttonBox GTK2.VbuttonBox(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new vertical button box

      Inherit ButtonBox

        inherit GTK2.ButtonBox : ButtonBox

    CLASS GTK2.Viewport

      Description

        This is a container that can be scrolled around, but it has no scrollbars. You can connect scrollbars to it using the adjustment objects. `GTK2.Viewport(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(100,100)`

        `GTK2.Viewport(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(100,100)->set_shadow_type(GTK2.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN)`

        `GTK2.Viewport(GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(100,100)->add(GTK2.Label("A label with a very long text on it, it will not fit"))->set_shadow_type(GTK2.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN)`

        `lambda(){ object a1;object v = GTK2.Viewport(a1=GTK2.Adjustment(),GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(100,100)->add(GTK2.Label("A label with a very long text on it, it will not fit"))->set_shadow_type(GTK2.SHADOW_ETCHED_IN);call_out(a1->set_value,0,100.0);return v;}()`

        Properties: GTK2.Adjustment hadjustment int shadow-type GTK2.Adjustment vadjustment

        Signals: set_scroll_adjustments

      Method create

        `GTK2.Viewport GTK2.Viewport(GTK2.Adjustment xscroll_or_props, GTK2.Adjustment yscroll)`

      Description

        Create a new viewport. The adjustments are used to select what part of the viewport to view to the user. They are normally connected to a scrollbar or something similar.

      Method get_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_hadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the current horizontal adjustment object

      Method get_shadow_type

        `int get_shadow_type()`

      Description

        Get the shadow type. One Of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method get_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Adjustment get_vadjustment()`

      Description

        Return the current vertical adjustment object

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method set_hadjustment

        `GTK2.Viewport set_hadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment xscroll)`

      Description

        Set a new horizontal adjustment object.

      Method set_shadow_type

        `GTK2.Viewport set_shadow_type(int type)`

      Description

        Set the shadow style. One of SHADOW_ETCHED_IN, SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT, SHADOW_IN, SHADOW_NONE and SHADOW_OUT

      Method set_vadjustment

        `GTK2.Viewport set_vadjustment(GTK2.Adjustment yscroll)`

      Description

        Set a new vertical adjustment object.

    CLASS GTK2.VolumeButton

      Description

        Volume Button

      Method create

        `GTK2.VolumeButton GTK2.VolumeButton(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(VolumeButton).

      Inherit ScaleButton

        inherit GTK2.ScaleButton : ScaleButton

    CLASS GTK2.Vpaned

      Description

        The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle that the user can drag to change the ratio. This widgets makes a vertical division

        `GTK2.Vpaned()->add1(GTK2.Label("Top Side Of Pane"))->add2(GTK2.Label("Bottom"))->set_size_request(100,100)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Vpaned GTK2.Vpaned(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Create a new W(Vpaned) widget.

      Inherit Paned

        inherit GTK2.Paned : Paned

    CLASS GTK2.Vscale

      Description

        The GTK2.HScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a horizontal slider. A GTK2.Adjustment is used to set the initial value, the lower and upper bounds, and the step and page increments.

        See W(Scale) for details

        The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent W(Scale) class's functions.

        `GTK2.Vscale(GTK2.Adjustment())->set_size_request(300,30)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Vscale GTK2.Vscale(GTK2.Adjustment settings_or_min_props, float|void max, float|void step)`

      Description

        Used to create a new hscale widget. Either pass an W(Adjustment), or three floats representing min, max, and step values.

      Inherit Scale

        inherit GTK2.Scale : Scale

    CLASS GTK2.Vseparator

      Description

        Simply creates a vertical separator. No bells or whistles. `GTK2.Vseparator()->set_size_request(3,50)`

      Method create

        `GTK2.Vseparator GTK2.Vseparator(mapping|void props)`

      Description

        Used to create a new vseparator widget.

      Inherit Separator

        inherit GTK2.Separator : Separator

    CLASS GTK2.Widget

      Description

        The basic widget, inherited (directly or indirectly) by all widgets. Thus, all functions and signals defined in this widget work on all widgets.

        One of the most important functions in this class is 'show', it lets GTK2 know that we are done setting the attributes of the widget, and it is ready to be displayed. You may also use hide to make it disappear again. The order in which you show the widgets is not important, but I suggest showing the toplevel window last so the whole window pops up at once rather than seeing the individual widgets come up on the screen as they're formed. The children of a widget (a window is a widget too) will not be displayed until the window itself is shown using the show() function.

        Properties: int app-paintable int can-default int can-focus int composite-child int events (GDK2.EventMask) int extension-events (GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR and GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE) int has-default int has-focus int has-tooltip int height-request int is-focus string name int no-show-all GTK2.Container parent int receives-default int sensitive GTK2.Style style string tooltip-markup string tooltip-text int visible int width-request

        Style properties: float cursor-aspect-ratio GDK2.Color cursor-color int draw-border string focus-line-pattern int focus-line-width int focus-padding int interior-focus GDK2.Color link-color int scroll-arrow-hlength int scroll-arrow-vlength int separator-height int separator-width GDK2.Color visited-link-color int wide-separators

        Signals: accel_closures_changed

        button_press_event Called when a mouse button is pressed

        button_release_event Called when a mouse button is released

        can_activate_accel

        child_notify

        client_event An event sent by another client application

        composited_changed

        configure_event The size, position or stacking order of the widget has changed

        delete_event Called when the user has requested that the widget should be closed

        destroy_event Called when the widget is destroyed

        direction_changed

        drag_begin Called when the drag is initiated, on the sending side

        drag_data_delete Called when the data can be safely deleted (there is no need to use this function in pigtk, it's all handled automatically)

        drag_data_get Called on the sending side when the drop is initiated

        drag_data_received Called on the receiving side when the drop is finished

        drag_drop Called on the receiving side when the drop is initiated

        drag_end Called when the drag is finished, on the sending side

        drag_failed

        drag_leave Called when the mouse leaves the widget while the user is dragging something

        drag_motion Called on the receiving side when the cursor is moved over the widget while dragging something

        enter_notify_event Calls when the mouse enters the widget

        event Called for all events

        event_after

        expose_event Called when the widget, or a part of the widget, gets an expose event

        focus

        focus_in_event The keyboard focus has entered the widget

        focus_out_event The keyboard focus has left the widget

        grab_broken_event

        grab_focus

        grab_notify

        hide Called when the widget is hidden

        hierarchy_changed

        key_press_event Called when a keyboard key is pressed

        key_release_event Called when a keyboard key is released

        keynav_failed

        leave_notify_event Called when the mouse leaves the widget

        map Called when the window associated with the widget is mapped

        map_event Called just before the 'map' signal

        mnemonic_activate

        motion_notify_event Called when the mouse is moved inside the widget

        no_expose_event

        parent_set Called when the parent widget is changed

        popup_menu

        property_notify_event Called when a property of the GDK window associated with the widget is changed

        proximity_in_event

        proximity_out_event

        query_tooltip

        realize Called when the widget is realized. Some methods cannot be used until the widget has been realized; if you get assertion errors related to 'w->window' or similar, this is probably the cause.

        screen_changed

        scroll_event

        selection_clear_event

        selection_get

        selection_notify_event

        selection_received

        selection_request_event

        show Called when the widget is shown

        show_help

        size_allocate Called when the widget gets the size it should be

        size_request Called when the widget should calculate how big it wants to be

        state_changed

        style_set Called when the style is changed

        unmap Called when the window associated with the widget is unmapped

        unmap_event Called just before the 'unmap' signal

        unrealize Called when the widget is unrealized;

        visibility_notify_event The widget has been mapped, unmapped, hidden, or otherwise had it's visibility modified

        window_state_event

      Method APP_PAINTABLE

        `GTK2.Widget APP_PAINTABLE()`

      Description

        Returns if the GTK2.APP_PAINTABLE flag has been set on this widget.

      Method CAN_DEFAULT

        `GTK2.Widget CAN_DEFAULT()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is allowed to receive the default action.

      Method CAN_FOCUS

        `GTK2.Widget CAN_FOCUS()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is able to handle focus grabs.

      Method COMPOSITE_CHILD

        `GTK2.Widget COMPOSITE_CHILD()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is a composite child of its parent.

      Method DOUBLE_BUFFERED

        `GTK2.Widget DOUBLE_BUFFERED()`

      Description

        Returns if the GTK2.DOUBLE_BUFFERED flag has been set on this widget.

      Method DRAWABLE

        `GTK2.Widget DRAWABLE()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is mapped and visible.

      Method FLAGS

        `GTK2.Widget FLAGS()`

      Description

        Returns flags.

      Method HAS_DEFAULT

        `GTK2.Widget HAS_DEFAULT()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is currently receiving the default action.

      Method HAS_FOCUS

        `GTK2.Widget HAS_FOCUS()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget has grabbed the focus and no other widget has done so more recently.

      Method HAS_GRAB

        `GTK2.Widget HAS_GRAB()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is in the grab_widgets stack, and will be the preferred one for receiving events other than ones of cosmetic value.

      Method IS_SENSITIVE

        `GTK2.Widget IS_SENSITIVE()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is effectively sensitive.

      Method MAPPED

        `GTK2.Widget MAPPED()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is mapped.

      Method NO_WINDOW

        `GTK2.Widget NO_WINDOW()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget doesn't have its own GDK2.Window.

      Method PARENT_SENSITIVE

        `GTK2.Widget PARENT_SENSITIVE()`

      Description

        Returns if the GTK2.PARENT_SENSITIVE flag is set.

      Method RC_STYLE

        `GTK2.Widget RC_STYLE()`

      Description

        Returns if the widget's style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.

      Method REALIZED

        `GTK2.Widget REALIZED()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is realized.

      Method RECEIVES_DEFAULT

        `GTK2.Widget RECEIVES_DEFAULT()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget when focused will receive the default action even if there is a different widget set as default.

      Method SAVED_STATE

        `GTK2.Widget SAVED_STATE()`

      Description

        Get the saved state.

      Method SENSITIVE

        `GTK2.Widget SENSITIVE()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is sensitive.

      Method STATE

        `GTK2.Widget STATE()`

      Description

        Get the state.

      Method TOPLEVEL

        `GTK2.Widget TOPLEVEL()`

      Description

        Returns if this is a toplevel widget.

      Method VISIBLE

        `GTK2.Widget VISIBLE()`

      Description

        Returns if this widget is visible.

      Method activate

        `int activate()`

      Description

        For widgets that can be "activated" (buttons, menu items, etc.) this functions activates them. Activation is what happens when you press Enter on a widget during key navigation.

      Method add_accelerator

        `GTK2.Widget add_accelerator(string accel_signal, GTK2.AccelGroup accel_group, int accel_key, int accel_mods, int accel_flags)`

      Description

        Installs an accelerator in accel_group that causes accel_signal to be emitted if the accelerator is activated. The signal must be of type G_RUN_ACTION.

      Method add_events

        `GTK2.Widget add_events(int events)`

      Description

        Adds the events in the bitfield events to the event mask.

      Method add_mnemonic_label

        `GTK2.Widget add_mnemonic_label(GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic lables for this widget. Note the list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update it's internal state at this point as well, by using a connection to the destroy signal.

      Method allocation

        `mapping allocation()`

      Description

        Returns ([ "x": xoffset, "y":yoffset, "width":xsize, "height":ysize ])

      Method can_activate_accel

        `int can_activate_accel(int signal_id)`

      Description

        Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal signal_id can currently be activated.

      Method child_notify

        `GTK2.Widget child_notify(string prop)`

      Description

        Emits a "child-notify" signal for the child property prop.

      Method class_path

        `string class_path()`

      Description

        Same as path() but uses type rather than name.

      Method create_pango_context

        `GTK2.Pango.Context create_pango_context()`

      Description

        Creates a new Pango.Context with the appropriate colormap, font description, and base direction for drawing text for this widget.

      Method create_pango_layout

        `GTK2.Pango.Layout create_pango_layout(string text)`

      Description

        Creates a new Pango.Layout with the appropriate colormap, font description, and base direction for drawing text.

      Method error_bell

        `GTK2.Widget error_bell()`

      Description

        Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget. If the "gtk-error-bell" setting is TRUE, it calls gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing

      Method freeze_child_notify

        `GTK2.Widget freeze_child_notify()`

      Description

        Stops emission of "child-notify" signals. The signals are queued until thaw_child_notify() is called on the widget.

      Method get_action

        `GTK2.Action get_action()`

      Description

        Returns the GTK2.Action that this widget is a proxy for.

      Method get_clipboard

        `GTK2.Clipboard get_clipboard(GDK2.Atom selection)`

      Description

        Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.

      Method get_composite_name

        `string get_composite_name()`

      Description

        Get the composite name.

      Method get_direction

        `int get_direction()`

      Description

        Gets the reading direction.

      Method get_display

        `GTK2.GdkDisplay get_display()`

      Description

        Get the GDK2.Display for the toplevel window associated with this widget. This function can only be called after the widget has been added to a widget hierarchy with a GTK2.Window at the top.

      Method get_events

        `int get_events()`

      Description

        Returns the event mask for the widget.

      Method get_extension_events

        `int get_extension_events()`

      Description

        Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive.

      Method get_modifier_style

        `GTK2.RcStyle get_modifier_style()`

      Description

        Returns the current modifier style.

      Method get_name

        `string get_name()`

      Description

        Retrieves the name.

      Method get_no_show_all

        `int get_no_show_all()`

      Description

        Returns the current value of the "no-show-all" property.

      Method get_pango_context

        `GTK2.Pango.Context get_pango_context()`

      Description

        Gets a Pango.Context with the appropriate colormap, font description, and base direction for this widget.

      Method get_parent

        `GTK2.Widget get_parent()`

      Description

        Returns the parent container.

      Method get_parent_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_parent_window()`

      Description

        Get the parent window.

      Method get_pointer

        `mapping get_pointer()`

      Description

        Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.

      Method get_root_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_root_window()`

      Description

        Get the root window.

      Method get_screen

        `GTK2.GdkScreen get_screen()`

      Description

        Get the GDK2.Screen from the toplevel window associated with this widget.

      Method get_settings

        `GTK2.Settings get_settings()`

      Description

        Gets the settings object holding the settings (global property settings, RC file information, etc) used for this widget.

      Method get_size_request

        `mapping get_size_request()`

      Description

        Gets the size request that was explicityly set for the widget using set_size_request(). A value of -1 for width or height indices that that dimension has not been set explicityly and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. To get the size a widget will actually use, call size_request() instead.

      Method get_snapshot

        `GTK2.GdkPixmap get_snapshot(GTK2.GdkRectangle clip_rect)`

      Description

        Create a GDK2.Pixmap of the contents of the widget and its children

        Works even if the widget is obscured. The depth and visual of the resulting pixmap is dependent on the widget being snapshot and likely differs from those of a target widget displaying the pixmap. The function GDK2.Pixbuf->get_from_drawable() can be used to convert the pixmap to a visual independent representation.

        The snapshot are used by this function is the widget's allocation plus any extra space occupied by additional windows belonging to this widget (such as the arrows of a spin button). Thus, the resulting snapshot pixmap is possibly larger than the allocation.

        If clip_rect is non-null, the resulting pixmap is shrunken to match the specified clip_rect. The (x,y) coordinates of clip_rect are interpreted widget relative. If width or height of clip_rect are 0 or negative, the width or height of the resulting pixmap will be shurnken by the respective amount. For instance, a clip_rect (+5,+5,-10,-10) will chop off 5 pixels at each side of the snapshot pixmap. If non-null, clip_rect will contain the exact widget-relative snapshot coordinates upon return. A clip_rect of (-1,-1,0,0) can be used to preserve the auto-grown snapshot area and use clip_rect as a pure output parameter.

        The return pixmap can be 0, if the resulting clip_area was empty.

      Method get_style

        `GTK2.Style get_style()`

      Description

        Returns the style.

      Method get_tooltip_markup

        `string get_tooltip_markup()`

      Description

        Gets the contents of the tooltip

      Method get_tooltip_text

        `string get_tooltip_text()`

      Description

        Gets the contents of the tooltip

      Method get_tooltip_window

        `GTK2.Window get_tooltip_window()`

      Description

        Returns the GtkWindow of the current tooltip

      Method get_toplevel

        `GTK2.Widget get_toplevel()`

      Description

        This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy this widget is a part of. If this widget has no parent widgets, it will be returned as the topmost widget.

      Method get_window

        `GTK2.GdkWindow get_window()`

      Description

        Returns the widget's window if it is realized, other NULL.

      Method grab_default

        `GTK2.Widget grab_default()`

      Description

        Causes this widget to become the default widget.

      Method grab_focus

        `GTK2.Widget grab_focus()`

      Description

        Causes this widget to have the keyboard focus. This widget must be a focusable widget, such as a GTK2.Entry; something like GTK2.Frame won't work.

      Method has_screen

        `int has_screen()`

      Description

        Checks whether there is a GDK2.Screen associated with this widget.

      Method hide

        `GTK2.Widget hide()`

      Description

        Hide the widget.

      Method hide_all

        `GTK2.Widget hide_all()`

      Description

        Hide this widget, and all child widgets.

      Method hide_on_delete

        `int hide_on_delete()`

      Description

        Utility function

      Inherit Object

        inherit GTK2.Object : Object

      Method input_shape_combine_mask

        `GTK2.Widget input_shape_combine_mask(GTK2.GdkBitmap shape_mask, int offset_x, int offset_y)`

      Description

        Sets an input shape for this widget's GDK2.Window.

      Method is_ancestor

        `int is_ancestor(GTK2.Widget ancestor)`

      Description

        Determines whether this widget is somewhere inside ancestor.

      Method is_composited

        `int is_composited()`

      Description

        Whether this widget can rely on having its alpha channel drawn correctly.

      Method is_focus

        `int is_focus()`

      Description

        Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its toplevel. (This does not mean that the HAS_FOCUS flag is necessarily set; HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the toplevel widget additionally has the input focus.

      Method keynav_failed

        `int keynav_failed(int direction)`

      Description

        This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the "keynav-changed" signal on the widget and its return value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of widget->child_focus():

        When TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard navigation is Ok and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the focus to.

        When FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling widget->child_focus() on the widget's toplevel.

        The default ::keynav-failed handler returns TRUE for GTK_DIR.TAB_FORWARD and GTK_DIR.TAB_BACKWARD. For the other values of GtkDirectionType, it looks at the "gtk-keynav-cursor-only"" setting and returns FALSE if the setting is TRUE. This way the entire user interface becomes cursor-navigatable on input devices such as mobile phones which only have cursor keys but no tab key.

        Whenever the default handler returns TRUE, it also calls widget->error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard navigation.

      Method list_mnemonic_lables

        `array list_mnemonic_lables()`

      Description

        Returns a list of the widgets, normally labels, for which this widget is the target of a mnemonic.

      Method map

        `GTK2.Widget map()`

      Description

        Causes this widget to be mapped.

      Method mnemonic_activate

        `int mnemonic_activate(int group_cycling)`

      Description

        Not documented.

      Method modify_base

        `GTK2.Widget modify_base(int state, GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the base color of the widget in a particular state. See modify_fg().

      Method modify_bg

        `GTK2.Widget modify_bg(int state, GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the background color of the widget in a particular state. See modify_fg().

      Method modify_cursor

        `GTK2.Widget modify_cursor(GTK2.GdkColor primary, GTK2.GdkColor secondary)`

      Description

        Sets the cursor color to use in a widget.

      Method modify_fg

        `GTK2.Widget modify_fg(int state, GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the foreground color of the widget in a particular state. state is one of STATE_ACTIVE, STATE_INSENSITIVE, STATE_NORMAL, STATE_PRELIGHT and STATE_SELECTED. color can be omitted to undo the effect of a previous call.

      Method modify_font

        `GTK2.Widget modify_font(GTK2.Pango.FontDescription font)`

      Description

        Sets the font.

      Method modify_style

        `GTK2.Widget modify_style(GTK2.RcStyle style)`

      Description

        Modifies style values.

      Method modify_text

        `GTK2.Widget modify_text(int state, GTK2.GdkColor color)`

      Description

        Sets the text color of the widget in a particular state. See modify_fg().

      Method path

        `string path()`

      Description

        Obtains the full path. The path is simply the name of a widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by periods.

      Method queue_draw

        `GTK2.Widget queue_draw()`

      Description

        Equivalent to calling queue_draw_area() for the entire area of the widget.

      Method queue_draw_area

        `GTK2.Widget queue_draw_area(int x, int y, int width, int height)`

      Description

        Invalidates the rectangular area defined by x,y,width,height by calling GDK2.Window->invalidate_rect() on the widget's window and all its child windows. Once the main loop becomse idle (after the current batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been invalidated.

      Method queue_resize

        `GTK2.Widget queue_resize()`

      Description

        This function is only for use in widget implementations. Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request. For example, when you change the text in a W(Label), GTK2.Label queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.

      Method queue_resize_no_redraw

        `GTK2.Widget queue_resize_no_redraw()`

      Description

        This function works like queue_resize(), except that the widget is not invalidated.

      Method remove_accelerator

        `int remove_accelerator(GTK2.AccelGroup accel_group, int accel_key, int accel_mods)`

      Description

        Removes an accelerator.

      Method remove_mnemonic_label

        `GTK2.Widget remove_mnemonic_label(GTK2.Widget label)`

      Description

        Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for this widget.

      Method render_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf render_icon(string stock_id, int size, string detail)`

      Description

        A convenience function that uses the theme engine and rc file settings to look up stock_id and render it to a pixbuf. stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as GTK2.STOCK_OPEN or GTK2.STOCK_OK. size should be a size such as GTK2.ICON_SIZE_MENU. detail should be a string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.

        The pixels in the returned GDK2.Pixbuf are shared with the rest of the application and should not be modified.

      Method reparent

        `GTK2.Widget reparent(GTK2.Widget new_parent)`

      Description

        Moves a widget from one W(Container) to another.

      Method reset_shapes

        `GTK2.Widget reset_shapes()`

      Description

        Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.

      Method set_accel_path

        `GTK2.Widget set_accel_path(string accel_path, GTK2.AccelGroup accel_group)`

      Description

        Sets up an accelerator in accel_group so whenever the key binding that is defined for accel_path is pressed, this widget will be activated.

      Method set_composite_name

        `GTK2.Widget set_composite_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets a widget's composite name.

      Method set_direction

        `GTK2.Widget set_direction(int dir)`

      Description

        Sets the reading direction. This direction controls the primary direction for widgets containing text, and also the direction in which the children of the container are packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will let the default reading direction present, except for containers where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).

      Method set_events

        `GTK2.Widget set_events(int events)`

      Description

        Sets the event mask for a widget. The event mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality, so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is unrealized. Consider add_events() for widgets that are already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event mask. This function can't be used with GTK2.NO_WINDOW widgets; to get events on those widgets, place them inside a GTK2.EventBox and receive events on the event box.

      Method set_extension_events

        `GTK2.Widget set_extension_events(int mode)`

      Description

        Sets the extension events mask to mode. One of GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR and GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

      Method set_flags

        `GTK2.Widget set_flags(int flags)`

      Description

        Set certain flags, such as GTK2.CAN_DEFAULT.

      Method set_name

        `GTK2.Widget set_name(string name)`

      Description

        Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a gtkrc file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name in the gtkrc file.

      Method set_no_show_all

        `GTK2.Widget set_no_show_all(int no_show_all)`

      Description

        Sets the "no-show-all" property, which determines whether calls to show_all() and hide_all() will affect this widget.

      Method set_parent

        `GTK2.Widget set_parent(GTK2.Widget parent)`

      Description

        Sets the container as the parent of this widget.

      Method set_parent_window

        `GTK2.Widget set_parent_window(GTK2.GdkWindow parent)`

      Description

        Sets a non default parent window for this widget.

      Method set_scroll_adjustments

        `GTK2.Widget set_scroll_adjustments(GTK2.Adjustment hadj, GTK2.Adjustment vadj)`

      Description

        For widgets that support scrolling, sets the scroll adjustments. For widgets that don't support scrolling, does nothing. Widgets that don't support scrolling can be scrolled by placing them in a W(Viewport), which does support scrolling.

      Method set_sensitive

        `GTK2.Widget set_sensitive(int sensitive)`

      Description

        Sets the sensitivity. A widget is sensitive is the user can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are "grayed out" and the user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as "inactive", "disabled", or "ghosted" in some other toolkits.

      Method set_size_request

        `GTK2.Widget set_size_request(int width, int height)`

      Description

        Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size request will be width by height. You can use this function to force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it normally would be.

        In most cases, set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size request. When dealing with window sizes, set_geometry_hints() can be a useful function as well.

        Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes, translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be correct.

        The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly. However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more space than it request.

        If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then the "natural" size request of the widget will be used instead.

        Widgets can't actually be allocated a size less than 1x1, but you can pass 0,0 to this function to mean "as small as possible".

      Method set_style

        `GTK2.Widget set_style(GTK2.Style style)`

      Description

        Sets the style.

      Method set_tooltip_markup

        `GTK2.Widget set_tooltip_markup(string markup)`

      Description

        Sets markup as the contents of the tooltip

      Method set_tooltip_text

        `GTK2.Widget set_tooltip_text(string text)`

      Description

        Sets text as the contents of the tooltip.

      Method set_tooltip_window

        `GTK2.Widget set_tooltip_window(GTK2.Window window)`

      Description

        Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying tooltips.

      Method shape_combine_mask

        `GTK2.Widget shape_combine_mask(GTK2.GdkBitmap shape_mask, int offset_x, int offset_y)`

      Description

        Sets a shape for a widget's GDK2.Window. This allows for transparent window, etc.

      Method show

        `GTK2.Widget show()`

      Description

        Show the widget. Most (almost all) widgets must be shown to be visible on the screen.

      Method show_all

        `GTK2.Widget show_all()`

      Description

        Show this widget, and all child widgets.

      Method show_now

        `GTK2.Widget show_now()`

      Description

        Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget (i.e. a GTK2.Window that has not yet been shown), enter the main loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful; because the main loop is running, anything can happen during this function.

      Method size_request

        `mapping size_request()`

      Description

        Get the size allocated to a widget.

      Method style_get_property

        `mixed style_get_property(string name)`

      Description

        Gets the value of the style property called name.

      Method thaw_child_notify

        `GTK2.Widget thaw_child_notify()`

      Description

        Reverts the effect of a previous call to freeze_child_notify().

      Method trigger_tooltip_query

        `GTK2.Widget trigger_tooltip_query()`

      Description

        Triggers a tooltip query

      Method unmap

        `GTK2.Widget unmap()`

      Description

        Causes this widget to be unmapped.

      Method unset_flags

        `GTK2.Widget unset_flags(int flags)`

      Description

        Unset flags.

    CLASS GTK2.Window

      Description

        The basic window. Nothing much to say about it. It can only contain one child widget. Show the main window last to avoid annoying flashes when the subwidget (and it's subwidgets) are added to it, this is done automatically by calling 'window->show_all' when you are done with your widget packing. Properties: int accept-focus int allow-grow int allow-shrink int decorated int default-height int default-width int deletable int destroy-with-parent int focus-on-map int gravity GDK_GRAVITY_CENTER, GDK_GRAVITY_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_WEST, GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC and GDK_GRAVITY_WEST int has-toplevel-focus GDK2.Pixbuf icon string icon-name int is-active int modal float opacity int resizable string role GDK2.Screen screen int skip-pager-hint int skip-taskbar-hint string startup-id string title GTK2.Window transient-for int type WINDOW_POPUP and WINDOW_TOPLEVEL int type-hint GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DESKTOP, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DIALOG, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DOCK, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_MENU, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_SPLASHSCREEN, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_TOOLBAR and GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_UTILITY int urgency-hint int window-position WIN_POS_CENTER, WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS, WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, WIN_POS_MOUSE and WIN_POS_NONE

        Signals: activate_default

        activate_focus

        frame_event

        keys_changed

        move_focus

        set_focus

      Method activate_default

        `int activate_default()`

      Description

        Activates the default widget, unless the current focused widget has been configured to receive the default action, in which case the focuses widget is activated.

      Method activate_focus

        `int activate_focus()`

      Description

        Activates the current focused widget.

      Method add_accel_group

        `GTK2.Window add_accel_group(GTK2.AccelGroup group)`

      Description

        This function adds an accelerator group to the window. The shortcuts in the table will work in the window, it's child, and all children of it's child that do not select keyboard input.

      Method add_mnemonic

        `GTK2.Window add_mnemonic(int keyval, GTK2.Widget target)`

      Description

        Adds a mnemonic to this window.

      Method begin_move_drag

        `GTK2.Window begin_move_drag(int button, int root_x, int root_y, int timestamp)`

      Description

        Starts moving a window. This function is used if an application has window movement grips.

      Method begin_resize_drag

        `GTK2.Window begin_resize_drag(int edge, int button, int root_x, int root_y, int timestamp)`

      Description

        Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize will be done using the standard mechanism for the window manager or windowing system.

      Method create

        `GTK2.Window GTK2.Window(int|mapping props)`

      Description

        Argument is one of WINDOW_POPUP and WINDOW_TOPLEVEL, or a mapping of allowed properties.

      Method deiconify

        `GTK2.Window deiconify()`

      Description

        Opposite of iconify().

      Method fullscreen

        `GTK2.Window fullscreen()`

      Description

        Asks to place this window in the fullscreen state. Same caveats iconify().

      Method get_accept_focus

        `int get_accept_focus()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_accept_focus().

      Method get_decorated

        `int get_decorated()`

      Description

        Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations such as a title bar.

      Method get_default_size

        `mapping get_default_size()`

      Description

        Gets the default size of the window. A value of -1 for the width or height indicates that a default size has not been explicitly set for that dimeension, so the "natural" size of the window will be used.

      Method get_deletable

        `int get_deletable()`

      Description

        Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button.

      Method get_destroy_with_parent

        `int get_destroy_with_parent()`

      Description

        Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.

      Method get_focus

        `GTK2.Widget get_focus()`

      Description

        Retrieves the current focused widget within the window. Note that this is the widget that would have the focus if the toplevel window focused; if the toplevel window is not focused then has_focus() will not be true for the widget.

      Method get_focus_on_map

        `int get_focus_on_map()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_focus_on_map().

      Method get_gravity

        `GTK2.Window get_gravity()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_gravity().

      Method get_group

        `GTK2.WindowGroup get_group()`

      Description

        Returns the group for this widget or the default group.

      Method get_icon

        `GTK2.GdkPixbuf get_icon()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_icon().

      Method get_icon_list

        `array get_icon_list()`

      Description

        Retrieves the list of icons set by set_icon_list().

      Method get_icon_name

        `string get_icon_name()`

      Description

        Returns the name of the themed icon for the window.

      Method get_mnemonic_modifier

        `int get_mnemonic_modifier()`

      Description

        Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window.

      Method get_modal

        `int get_modal()`

      Description

        Returns whether the window is modal.

      Method get_opacity

        `float get_opacity()`

      Description

        Fetches the requested opacity.

      Method get_position

        `mapping get_position()`

      Description

        This function returns the position you need to pass to move() to keep this window in its current position. This means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window gravity.

        If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be GDK2.GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that get_position() gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager frame for the window. move() sets the position of this same top-left corner.

        get_position() is not 100% reliable because X does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the decorations placed on a window by the window manager. Thus GTK+ is using a "best guess" that works with most window managers.

        Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to its current position as returned by get_position() tends to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are slowly getting better over time.

        If a window has gravity GDK2.GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager frame is not relevant, and thus get_position() will always produc accurate results. However you can't use static gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen, because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.

        If you are saving and restoring your application's window positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state.

      Method get_resizable

        `GTK2.Window get_resizable()`

      Description

        Gets the whether this window is resizable.

      Method get_size

        `mapping get_size()`

      Description

        Obtains the current size of window.

      Method get_skip_pager_hint

        `int get_skip_pager_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_skip_pager_hint().

      Method get_skip_taskbar_hint

        `int get_skip_taskbar_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_skip_taskbar_hint().

      Method get_title

        `string get_title()`

      Description

        Retrieves the title of the window.

      Method get_transient_for

        `GTK2.Window get_transient_for()`

      Description

        Fetches the transient parent for this window.

      Method get_type_hint

        `int get_type_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the type hint.

      Method get_urgency_hint

        `int get_urgency_hint()`

      Description

        Gets the value set by set_urgency_hint().

      Method has_toplevel_focus

        `int has_toplevel_focus()`

      Description

        Returns whether the input focus is within this window. For real toplevel windows, this is identical to is_active(), but for embedded windows, like W(Plug), the results will differ.

      Method iconify

        `GTK2.Window iconify()`

      Description

        Asks to iconify (minimize) this window. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could deiconify it again, or there may not be a window manager in which case iconification isn't possible, etc.

      Inherit Bin

        inherit GTK2.Bin : Bin

      Method is_active

        `int is_active()`

      Description

        Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel. (That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.) The return value is true if the window is active toplevel itself, but also if it is, say, a W(Plug) embedded in the active toplevel. You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window().

      Method lower

        `GTK2.Window lower()`

      Description

        Lower this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method maximize

        `GTK2.Window maximize()`

      Description

        Maximize a window. Same caveats as iconify().

      Method mnemonic_activate

        `int mnemonic_activate(int keyval, int modifier)`

      Description

        Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic. modifier is one of GDK2.SHIFT_MASK, GDK2.LOCK_MASK, GDK2.CONTROL_MASK, GDK2.MOD1_MASK, GDK2.MOD2_MASK, GDK2.MOD3_MASK, GDK2.MOD4_MASK, GDK2.MOD5_MASK, GDK2.BUTTON1_MASK, GDK2.BUTTON2_MASK, GDK2.BUTTON3_MASK, GDK2.BUTTON4_MASK GDK2.BUTTON5_MASK, GDK2.RELEASE_MASK, GDK2.MODIFIER_MASK

      Method move

        `GTK2.Window move(int x, int y)`

      Description

        Asks the window manage to move the window to the given position. Window managers are free to ignore this; most window managers ignore request for initial window positions (instead using a user-defined placement algorithm) and honor requests after the window has already been shown.

        Note: the position is the position of the gravity-determined reference point for the window. The gravity determines two things: first, the location of the reference point in root window coordinates; and second, which point on the window is position at the reference point.

        By default the gravity is GDK2.GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, so the reference point is simply the x,y supplied to move(). The top-left corner of the window decorations (aka window frame or border) will be place at x,y. Therefore, to position a window at the top left of the screen, you want to use the default gravity (which is GDK2.GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST) and move the window to 0,0.

        To position a window at the bottom right corner of the screen, you would set GDK2.GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST, which means that the reference point is at x + the window width and y + the window height, and the bottom-right corner of the window border will be placed at that reference point.

      Method parse_geometry

        `int parse_geometry(string geometry)`

      Description

        Parses a standard X geometry string.

      Method present

        `GTK2.Window present()`

      Description

        Presents this window to the user. This may mean raising the window in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.

        If hidden, it calls show() as well.

      Method present_with_time

        `GTK2.Window present_with_time(int timestamp)`

      Description

        Presents a window to the user with a timestamp. See present().

      Method raise

        `GTK2.Window raise()`

      Description

        Raise this window if the window manager allows that.

      Method remove_accel_group

        `GTK2.Window remove_accel_group(GTK2.AccelGroup group)`

      Description

        Reverses the effects of add_accel_group().

      Method remove_mnemonic

        `GTK2.Window remove_mnemonic(int keyval, GTK2.Widget target)`

      Description

        Removes a mnemonic from this window.

      Method reshow_with_initial_size

        `GTK2.Window reshow_with_initial_size()`

      Description

        Hides the window, then reshows it, resetting the default size and position of the window.

      Method resize

        `GTK2.Window resize(int width, int height)`

      Description

        Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry constraints.

      Method set_accept_focus

        `GTK2.Window set_accept_focus(int setting)`

      Description

        Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive the input focus.

      Method set_decorated

        `GTK2.Window set_decorated(int setting)`

      Description

        Add title bar, resize controls, etc. Default is true, so you may only need to use this function if you want to remove decorations. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling show().

      Method set_default

        `GTK2.Window set_default(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or unsets the default widget. When setting (rather than unsetting) the default widget it's generally easier to call GTK2.Widget->grab_focus() on the widget.

      Method set_default_size

        `GTK2.Window set_default_size(int width, int height)`

      Description

        Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size (its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be ignored. more generally, if the default size does not obey the geometry hints for the window (set_geometry_hints() can be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped to the nearest permitted size.

        Unlike set_size_request(), which sets a size request for a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).

        For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works, investigate set_geometry_hints().

        For some uses, resize() is a more appropriate function. resize() changes the current size of the window, rather than the size to be used on initial display. resize() always affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.

        The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.

        Window scan't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but passing 0 for width and height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.

      Method set_deletable

        `GTK2.Window set_deletable(int setting)`

      Description

        By default, windows have a close button in the window frame. Some window managers allow GTK+ to disable this button. If you set the deletable property to FALSE using this function, GTK+ will do its best to convince the window manager not to show a close button. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling show().

        On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager policy involved.

      Method set_destroy_with_parent

        `GTK2.Window set_destroy_with_parent(int setting)`

      Description

        If setting is true, then destroying the transient parent of this window will also destroy the window itself. This is useful for dialogs that shouldn't persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they're associated with, for example.

      Method set_focus

        `GTK2.Window set_focus(GTK2.Widget child)`

      Description

        If child is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets it as the focus widget for the window. If child is 0, unsets the focus widget for this window. To set the focus to a particular widget in the toplevel, it is usually more convenient to use GTK2.Widget->grab_focus() instead of this function.

      Method set_focus_on_map

        `GTK2.Window set_focus_on_map(int setting)`

      Description

        Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive the input focus when the window is mapped.

      Method set_geometry_hints

        `GTK2.Window set_geometry_hints(GTK2.Widget widget, mapping geometry)`

      Description

        This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resized increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a character); aspect ratios; and more. geometry is a mapping with the following fields. Any field which is omitted is left as the default: ([ "min_width": int, "min_height": int, "max_width": int, "max_height": int, "base_width": int, "base_height": int, "width_inc": int, "height_inc": int, "min_aspect": float, "max_aspect": float, "win_gravity": int, GDK_GRAVITY_CENTER, GDK_GRAVITY_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST, GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_WEST, GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC and GDK_GRAVITY_WEST ]); min_width/min_height/max_width/max_height may be set to -1, and it will substitute the size request of the window or geometry widget. If the minimum size hint is not provided, it will use its requisition as the minimum size. If the minimum size is provided and a geometry widget is set, it will take the minimum size as the minimum size of the geometry widget rather than the entire window. The base size is treat similarly. min_width: minimum width of the window (-1 to use requisition) min_height: minimum height of window (-1 to use requisition) max_width: maximum width of window (-1 to use requisition) max_height: maximum height of window (-1 to use requisition) base_width: allow window widths are base_width+width_inc*N (-1 allowed) base_height: allowed window widths are base_height+height_inc*N (-1 allowed) width_inc: width resize increment height_inc: height resize increment min_aspect: minimum width/height ratio max_aspect: maximum width/height ratio win_gravity: window gravity

      Method set_gravity

        `GTK2.Window set_gravity(int gravity)`

      Description

        Window gravity defines the meaning of coordinates passed to move().

        The default window gravity is GDK2.GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, which will typically "do what you mean."

      Method set_icon

        `GTK2.Window set_icon(GTK2.GdkPixbuf icon)`

      Description

        Sets up the icon representing this window. This icon is used when the window is minimized (also know as iconified). Some window managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window frame, or display it in other contexts.

        The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.

        If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.

      Method set_icon_from_file

        `int set_icon_from_file(string filename)`

      Description

        Sets the icon from a file.

      Method set_icon_list

        `GTK2.Window set_icon_list(array list)`

      Description

        Set up the icons for minimizing.

        set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes your icon is avilable in; that is, don't scale the image before passing it. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.

        By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.

        Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.

      Method set_icon_name

        `GTK2.Window set_icon_name(string name)`

      Description

        Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon.

      Method set_keep_above

        `GTK2.Window set_keep_above(int setting)`

      Description

        Keep window above.

      Method set_keep_below

        `GTK2.Window set_keep_below(int setting)`

      Description

        Keep window below.

      Method set_mnemonic_modifier

        `GTK2.Window set_mnemonic_modifier(int modifier)`

      Description

        Sets the mnemonic modifer for this window.

      Method set_modal

        `GTK2.Window set_modal(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets a window modal or non-modal. Modal windows prevent interaction with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs on top of main application windows, use set_transient_for() to make the dialog transient for the parent; most window managers will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.

      Method set_opacity

        `GTK2.Window set_opacity(float opacity)`

      Description

        Request the windowing system to make this window partially transparent, with opacity 0 being full transparent and 1 fully opaque.

      Method set_position

        `GTK2.Window set_position(int pos)`

      Description

        Sets a position contraint for this window. If the old or new constraint is GTK2.WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS, this will also cause the window to be repositioned to satisfy the new constraint.

      Method set_resizable

        `GTK2.Window set_resizable(int setting)`

      Description

        Sets whether the user can resize a window. Windows are user resizable by default.

      Method set_skip_pager_hint

        `GTK2.Window set_skip_pager_hint(int setting)`

      Description

        Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display the window in the pager.

      Method set_skip_taskbar_hint

        `GTK2.Window set_skip_taskbar_hint(int setting)`

      Description

        Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint.

      Method set_startup_id

        `GTK2.Window set_startup_id(string id)`

      Description

        Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to track application startup, to provide user feedback and other features. This function changes the corresponding property on the underlying GDK2.Window. Normally, startup identifier is managed automatically and you should only use this function in special cases like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this function before calling window->present() or any equivalent function generating a window map event.

      Method set_title

        `GTK2.Window set_title(string title)`

      Description

        Set the window title. The default title is the value sent to setup_gtk, or if none is sent, Pike GTK.

      Method set_transient_for

        `GTK2.Window set_transient_for(GTK2.Window parent)`

      Description

        Dialog window should be set transient for the main application window they were spawned from. This allows window managers to e.g. keep the dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the main window. W(Dialog) and other convenience objects in GTK+ will sometimes call set_transient_for on your behalf.

      Method set_type_hint

        `GTK2.Window set_type_hint(int hint)`

      Description

        Set type of window. Values are GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DESKTOP, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DIALOG, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_DOCK, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_MENU, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_SPLASHSCREEN, GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_TOOLBAR and GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_UTILITY

      Method set_urgency_hint

        `GTK2.Window set_urgency_hint(int setting)`

      Description

        Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint.

      Method set_wmclass

        `GTK2.Window set_wmclass(string name, string class)`

      Description

        Set the window manager application name and class.

      Method stick

        `GTK2.Window stick()`

      Description

        Makes this window sticky. Same caveats as iconify().

      Method unfullscreen

        `GTK2.Window unfullscreen()`

      Description

        Opposite of fullscreen().

      Method unmaximize

        `GTK2.Window unmaximize()`

      Description

        Opposite of maximize().

      Method unstick

        `GTK2.Window unstick()`

      Description

        Opposite of stick().

    CLASS GTK2.WindowGroup

      Description

        Limit the effect of grabs.

      Method add_window

        `GTK2.WindowGroup add_window(GTK2.Window window)`

      Description

        Add a window.

      Method create

        `GTK2.WindowGroup GTK2.WindowGroup()`

      Description

        Creates a new GTK2.WindowGroup object. Grabs added with GTK2.grab_add() only affect windows with the same GTK2.WindowGroup.

      Inherit Object

        inherit G.Object : Object

      Method remove_window

        `GTK2.WindowGroup remove_window(GTK2.Window window)`

      Description

        Remove a window.

    Module GTK2.G

      CLASS GTK2.G.InitiallyUnowned

        Description

          Abstract class - do not instantiate

        Inherit Object

          inherit G.Object : Object

      CLASS GTK2.G.Object

        Description

          The base object. All GDK and GTK classes inherit from this. The Pango classes also inherit from this class.

          Signals: notify

        Method accel_groups_activate

          `G.Object accel_groups_activate(int accel_key, int accel_mods)`

        Description

          Finds the first accelerator in an GTK.AccelGroup attached to this object that matches accel_key and accel_mods, and activates that accelerator.

        Method destroy

          `G.Object destroy()`

        Description

          Destroy this object. This is the normal way to (eg) close a window.

        Method get_data

          `object get_data(string name)`

        Description

          Gets a named field from the object.

        Method get_docs

          `string get_docs()`

        Description

          Get documentation on object

        Method get_property

          `mixed get_property(string property)`

        Description

          Get a property.

        Method is_floating

          `int is_floating()`

        Description

          Checks whether this object has a floating reference.

        Method new_signal

          `int new_signal(string name, array types, string return_type)`

        Description

          Create a new signal.

        Method notify

          `G.Object notify(string property)`

        Description

          Emits a "notify" signal for the named property on the object.

        Method set_data

          `object set_data(string name, mixed arg)`

        Description

          Each object carries around a table of associations from strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.

          If the object already had an association with that name, the old association will be destroyed.

        Method set_property

          `G.Object set_property(string property, mixed value)`

        Description

          Set a property on a G.Object (and any derived types) to value.

        Method signal_block

          `G.Object signal_block(int signal_id)`

        Description

          Temporarily block a signal handler. No signals will be received while the handler is blocked. See signal_connect() for more info.

        Method signal_connect

          `int signal_connect(string signal, function(:void) callback, mixed|void callback_arg, string|void detail, int|void connect_before)`

        Description

          Connect a signal to a pike function. The function will be called with the last argument to this function as its last argument (defaults to 0); the first argument is always the widget, and any other arguments are the ones supplied by GTK. If connect_before is nonzero, the callback will be called prior to the normal handling of the signal (and can return true to suppress that handling), otherwise it will be called after.

          The return value of this function can be used to remove a signal with signal_disconnect(), and block and unblock the signal with signal_block() and signal_unblock().

        Method signal_disconnect

          `G.Object signal_disconnect(int signal_id)`

        Description

          Remove a signal formerly added by signal_connect. The argument is the return value of signal_connect(). See signal_connect() for more info.

        Method signal_emit

          `G.Object signal_emit(string signal_name, string|void detail)`

        Description

          Send the current named signal.

        Method signal_stop

          `G.Object signal_stop(string signal_name)`

        Description

          Stop the emission of a signal.

        Method signal_unblock

          `G.Object signal_unblock(int signal_id)`

        Description

          Unblock a formerly blocked signal handler. See signal_block() and signal_connect() for more info.

    Module GTK2.Pango

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.AttrList

        Description

          A PangoAttrList.

        Method copy

          `GTK2.Pango.AttrList copy()`

        Description

          Copy the list.

        Method create

          `GTK2.Pango.AttrList GTK2.Pango.AttrList()`

        Description

          Create a new empty attribute list.

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.Context

        Description

          PangoContext.

        Inherit Object

          inherit G.Object : Object

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.FontDescription

        Description

          Pango Font Description.

        Method better_match

          `int better_match(GTK2.Pango.FontDescription new, GTK2.Pango.FontDescription old)`

        Description

          Determines if the style attributes of new are a closer match than old, or if old is omitted, determines if new is a match at all. Approximate matching is done for weight and style; other attributes must match exactly.

        Method copy

          `GTK2.Pango.FontDescription copy()`

        Description

          Copy a font description.

        Method create

          `GTK2.Pango.FontDescription GTK2.Pango.FontDescription(string|void desc)`

        Description

          Create a new font description. If desc is present, creates a new font description from a string representation in the form "[FAMILY-LIST] [STYLE-OPTIONS] [SIZE]", where FAMILY-LIST is a comma separated list of families optionally terminated by a comma, STYLE-OPTIONS is a whitespace separated list of words where each word describes one of style, variant, weight, or stretch, and size is a decimal number (size in points). Any one of the options may be absent. If FAMILY-LIST is absent, then the family name will be blank. If STYLE-OPTIONS is missing, then all style options will be set to the default values. If SIZE is missing, the size in the resulting font description will be set to 0.

        Method equal

          `int equal(GTK2.Pango.FontDescription desc)`

        Description

          Compares two font descriptions for equality.

        Method get_family

          `string get_family()`

        Description

          Gets the family name.

        Method get_size

          `int get_size()`

        Description

          Gets the size.

        Method get_stretch

          `int get_stretch()`

        Description

          Get the stretch.

        Method get_style

          `int get_style()`

        Description

          Gets the style.

        Method get_variant

          `int get_variant()`

        Description

          Gets the variant.

        Method get_weight

          `int get_weight()`

        Description

          Gets the weight.

        Method merge

          `Pango.FontDescription merge(GTK2.Pango.FontDescription desc, int replace)`

        Description

          Merges the fields that are set int desc to the fields in this description. If replace is false, only fields in this description that are not already set are affected. If true, then fields that are already set will be replaced as well.

        Method set_family

          `Pango.FontDescription set_family(string family)`

        Description

          Sets the family name. The family name represents a family of related fonts styles, and will resolve to a particular PangoFontFamily.

        Method set_size

          `Pango.FontDescription set_size(int size)`

        Description

          Sets the size in fractional points. This is the size of the font in points, scaled by PANGO_SCALE. (That is, a size value of 10*PANGO_SCALE) is a 10 point font. The conversion factor between points and device units depends on system configuration and the output device. For screen display, a logical DPI of 96 is common, in which case a 10 point font corresponds to a 1o*(96.72) = 13.3 pixel font. Use set_absolute_size() if you need a particular size in device units.

        Method set_stretch

          `Pango.FontDescription set_stretch(int stretch)`

        Description

          Sets the stretch. This specifies how narrow or wide the font should be. One of PANGO_STRETCH_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_EXTRA_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_NORMAL, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_CONDENSED, PANGO_STRETCH_SEMI_EXPANDED, PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_CONDENSED and PANGO_STRETCH_ULTRA_EXPANDED.

        Method set_style

          `Pango.FontDescription set_style(int style)`

        Description

          Sets the style. This describes whether the font is slanted and the manner in which is is slanted. One of PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC, PANGO_STYLE_NORMAL and PANGO_STYLE_OBLIQUE. Most fonts will either have an italic style or an oblique style, but not both, and font matching in Pango will match italic specifications with oblique fonts and vice-versa if an exact match is not found.

        Method set_variant

          `Pango.FontDescription set_variant(int variant)`

        Description

          Sets the variant. One of PANGO_VARIANT_NORMAL and PANGO_VARIANT_SMALL_CAPS.

        Method set_weight

          `Pango.FontDescription set_weight(int weight)`

        Description

          Sets the weight. The weight specifies how bold or light the font should be. In addition to the values of PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD, PANGO_WEIGHT_HEAVY, PANGO_WEIGHT_LIGHT, PANGO_WEIGHT_NORMAL, PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRABOLD and PANGO_WEIGHT_ULTRALIGHT, other intermediate numeric values are possible.

        Method to_filename

          `string to_filename()`

        Description

          Creates a filename representation. The filename is identical to the result from calling to_string(), but with underscores instead of characters that are untypical in filenames, and in lower case only.

        Method to_string

          `string to_string()`

        Description

          Creates a string representation. The family list in the string description will only have a terminating comm if the last word of the list is a valid style option.

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.Layout

        Description

          Pango Layout.

        Method context_changed

          `Pango.Layout context_changed()`

        Description

          Forces recomputation of any state in the layout that might depend on the layout's context. This function should be called if you make changes to the context subsequent to creating the layout.

        Method copy

          `GTK2.Pango.Layout copy(GTK2.Pango.Layout src)`

        Description

          Does a copy of the src.

        Method create

          `GTK2.Pango.Layout GTK2.Pango.Layout(GTK2.Pango.Context context)`

        Description

          Create a new layout with attributes initialized to default values for a particular Pango.Context

        Method get_alignment

          `int get_alignment()`

        Description

          Gets the alignment.

        Method get_auto_dir

          `int get_auto_dir()`

        Description

          Gets whether to calculate the bidirectional base direction for the layout according to the contents of the layout.

        Method get_context

          `GTK2.Pango.Context get_context()`

        Description

          Returns the Pango.Context.

        Method get_cursor_pos

          `array get_cursor_pos(int index)`

        Description

          Given an index within a layout, determines the positions of the strong and weak cursors if the insertion point is at that index. The position of each cursor is stored as a zero-width rectangle. The strong cursor is the location where characters of the directionality equal to the base direction of the layout are inserted. The weak cursor location is the location where characters of the directionality opposite to the base direction of the layout are inserted. Returns: array of mappings, each mapping is the same as index_to_pos().

        Method get_indent

          `int get_indent()`

        Description

          Gets the paragraph indent in pango units. A negative value indicates a hanging indent.

        Method get_justify

          `int get_justify()`

        Description

          Gets whether or not each complete line should be stretched to fill the entire width of the layout.

        Method get_line

          `GTK2.Pango.LayoutLine get_line(int line)`

        Description

          Retrieves a specific line.

        Method get_line_count

          `int get_line_count()`

        Description

          Retrieves the count of lines.

        Method get_single_paragraph_mode

          `int get_single_paragraph_mode()`

        Description

          Gets the value set by set_single_paragraph_mode().

        Method get_size

          `mapping get_size()`

        Description

          Determines the logical width and height in Pango units.

        Method get_spacing

          `int get_spacing()`

        Description

          Gets the amount of spacing between the lines.

        Method get_tabs

          `GTK2.Pango.TabArray get_tabs()`

        Description

          Gets the current W(TabArray) used by this layout. If no W(TabArray) has been set, then the default tabs are in use and 0 is returned. Default tabs are every 8 spaces.

        Method get_text

          `string get_text()`

        Description

          Gets the text.

        Method get_width

          `int get_width()`

        Description

          Gets the line wrap width.

        Method get_wrap

          `int get_wrap()`

        Description

          Gets the wrap mode for the layout.

        Method index_to_pos

          `mapping index_to_pos(int index)`

        Description

          Converts from an index to the onscreen position corresponding to the grapheme at that index, which is represented as a rectangle. Note that x is always the leading edge of the grapheme and x+width the trailing edge of the grapheme. If the direction of the grapheme is right-to-left, then width will be negative.

          Returns: ([ "x": x coordinate, "y": y coordinate, "width": width of the rectangle, "height": height of the rectangle ])

        Inherit Object

          inherit G.Object : Object

        Method move_cursor_visually

          `mapping move_cursor_visually(int strong, int old_index, int old_trailing, int dir)`

        Description

          Computes a new cursor position from an old position and a count of positions to move visually. If count is positive, then the new strong cursor position will be one position to the right of the old cursor position. If count is negative, then the new strong cursor position will be one position to the left of the old cursor position.

          In the presence of bidirectional text, the correspondence between logical and visual order will depend on the direction of the current run, and there may be jumps when the cursor is moved off the end of a run.

          Motion here is in cursor positions, not in characters, so a single call to move_cursor_visually() may move the cursor over multiple characters when multiple characters combine to form a single grapheme.

        Method set_alignment

          `Pango.Layout set_alignment(int alignment)`

        Description

          Sets the alignment for the layout (how partial lines are positioned within the horizontal space available.) One of PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER, PANGO_ALIGN_LEFT and PANGO_ALIGN_RIGHT.

        Method set_auto_dir

          `Pango.Layout set_auto_dir(int auto_dir)`

        Description

          Sets whether to calculate the bidirectional base direction for the layout according to the contents of the layout; when this flag is on (the default), then paragraphs that begin with strong right-to-left characters (Arabic and Hebrew principally), will have right-left-layout, paragraphs with letters from other scripts will have left-to-right layout. Paragraphs with only neutral characters get their direction from the surrounding paragraphs.

          When false, the choice between left-to-right and right-to-left layout is done by according to the base direction of the Pango.Context.

        Method set_font_description

          `Pango.Layout set_font_description(GTK2.Pango.FontDescription desc)`

        Description

          Sets the default font description for the layout. If no font description is set on the layout, the font descriptions from the layout's context is used.

        Method set_indent

          `Pango.Layout set_indent(int indent)`

        Description

          Sets the width in pango units to indent each paragraph. A negative value of indent will produce a hanging indent. That is, the first line will have the full width, and subsequent lines will be indented by the absolute value of indent.

        Method set_justify

          `Pango.Layout set_justify(int justify)`

        Description

          Sets whether or not each complete line should be stretched to fill the entire width of the layout. This stretching is typically done by adding whitespace, but for some scripts (such as Arabic), the justification is done by extending the characters.

        Method set_markup

          `Pango.Layout set_markup(string markup, int length)`

        Description

          Same as set_markup_with_accel(), but the markup text isn't scanned for accelerators.

        Method set_markup_with_accel

          `Pango.Layout set_markup_with_accel(string markup, int length, int|void accel_marker)`

        Description

          Sets the layout text and attribute from marked-up text. Replaces the current text and attribute list.

          If accel_marker is nonzero, the given character will mark the character following it as an accelerator. For example, the accel marker might be an ampersand or underscore. All characters marked as an acclerator will receive a GTK2.PANGO_UNDERLINE_LOW attribute, and the first character so marked will be returned. Two accel_marker characters following each other produce a single literal accel_marker character.

        Method set_single_paragraph_mode

          `Pango.Layout set_single_paragraph_mode(int setting)`

        Description

          If setting is true, do not treat newlines and similar characters as paragraph separators; instead, keep all text in a single paragraph, and display a glyph for paragraph separator characters. Used when you want to allow editing of newlines on a single text line.

        Method set_spacing

          `Pango.Layout set_spacing(int spacing)`

        Description

          Sets the amount of spacing between the lines.

        Method set_tabs

          `Pango.Layout set_tabs(GTK2.Pango.TabArray tabs)`

        Description

          Sets the tabs to use, overriding the default tabs (by default, tabs are every 8 spaces). If tabs is omitted, the default tabs are reinstated.

        Method set_text

          `Pango.Layout set_text(sprintf_format text, sprintf_args ... fmt)`

        Description

          Sets the text of the layout.

        Method set_width

          `Pango.Layout set_width(int width)`

        Description

          Sets the width to which the lines should be wrapped.

        Method set_wrap

          `Pango.Layout set_wrap(int wrap)`

        Description

          Sets the wrap mode; the wrap mode only has an effect if a width is set on the layout with set_width(). To turn off wrapping, set the width to -1. One of PANGO_WRAP_CHAR, PANGO_WRAP_WORD and PANGO_WRAP_WORD_CHAR.

        Method xy_to_index

          `mapping xy_to_index(int x, int y)`

        Description

          Converts from x and y position within a layout to the byte index to the character at that logical position. If the y position is not inside the layout, the closest position is chosen (the position will be clamped inside the layout). If the X position is not within the layout, then the start or the end of the line is chosen as describe for x_to_index(). If either the x or y positions were not inside the layout, then returns 0.

          Returns: ([ "index": byte index, "trailing": where in grapheme user clicked ]).

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.LayoutIter

        Description

          PangoLayoutIter.

        Method at_last_line

          `int at_last_line()`

        Description

          Determines whether this iter is on the last line of the layout.

        Method get_baseline

          `int get_baseline()`

        Description

          Gets the y position of the current line's baseline, in layout coordinates (origin at top left of the entire layout).

        Method get_char_extents

          `mapping get_char_extents()`

        Description

          Gets the extents of the current character, in layout coordinates (origin is the top left of the entire layout).

        Method get_cluster_extents

          `array get_cluster_extents()`

        Description

          Gets the extents of the current cluster, in layout coordinates.

        Method get_index

          `int get_index()`

        Description

          Gets the current byte index. Note that iterating forward by char moves in visual order, not logical order, so indexes may not be sequential. Also, the index may be equal to the length of the text in the layout.

        Method get_layout_extents

          `array get_layout_extents()`

        Description

          Obtains the extents of the layout.

        Method get_line

          `GTK2.Pango.LayoutLine get_line()`

        Description

          Gets the current line.

        Method get_line_extents

          `array get_line_extents()`

        Description

          Obtains the extents of the current line.

        Method get_line_yrange

          `array get_line_yrange()`

        Description

          Divides the vertical space being iterated over between the lines in the layout, and returns the space belonging to the current line. A line's range includes the line's logical extents, plus half of the spacing above and below the line, if Pango.Layout->set_spacing() has been called to set layout spacing. The y positions are in layout coordinates.

        Method get_run_extents

          `array get_run_extents()`

        Description

          Gets the extents of the current run in layout coordinates.

        Method next_char

          `int next_char()`

        Description

          Moves forward to the next character in visual order. If it was already at the end of the layout, returns false.

        Method next_cluster

          `int next_cluster()`

        Description

          Moves forward to the next cluster in visual order. If it was already at the end of the layout, returns false.

        Method next_line

          `int next_line()`

        Description

          Moves forward to the start of the next line. If it is already on the last line, returns false.

        Method next_run

          `int next_run()`

        Description

          Moves forward to the next run in visual order. If it was already at the end of the layout, returns false.

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.LayoutLine

        Description

          PangoLayoutLine.

        Method get_extents

          `array get_extents()`

        Description

          Computes the logical and ink extents of a layout line.

        Method get_pixel_extents

          `array get_pixel_extents()`

        Description

          Computes the logical and ink extents of a layout line, in device units.

        Method index_to_x

          `int index_to_x(int index, int trailing)`

        Description

          Converts an index within a line to an x position.

        Method x_to_index

          `mapping x_to_index(int x_pos)`

        Description

          Converts from x offset to the byte index of the corresponding character within the text of the layout. If x_pos is outside the line, index and trailing will point to the very first or very last position in the line. This determination is based on the resolved direction of the paragraph; for example, if the resolved direction is right-to-left, then an X position to the right of the line (after it) results in 0 being stored in index and trailing. An X position to the left of the line results in index pointing to the (logical) last grapheme in the line and trailing set to the number of characters in that grapheme. The reverse is true for a left-to-right line.

      CLASS GTK2.Pango.TabArray

        Description

          A set of tab stops for laying out text that includes tab characters.

        Method copy

          `GTK2.Pango.TabArray copy()`

        Description

          Returns a copy.

        Method create

          `GTK2.Pango.TabArray GTK2.Pango.TabArray(int initial_size, int position_in_pixels)`

        Description

          Creates an array of initial_size tab stops. Tab stops are specified in pixel units if positions_in_pixels is true, otherwise in Pango units. All stops are initially at position 0.

        Method get_positions_in_pixels

          `int get_positions_in_pixels()`

        Description

          Returns true if the tab positions are in pixels, false if they are in Pango units.

        Method get_size

          `int get_size()`

        Description

          Gets the number of tab stops.

        Method get_tab

          `mapping get_tab(int tab_index)`

        Description

          Gets the alignment and position of a tab stop.

        Method get_tabs

          `array get_tabs()`

        Description

          Gets alignments and locations of all tab stops.

        Inherit Object

          inherit G.Object : Object

        Method resize

          `Pango.TabArray resize(int new_size)`

        Description

          Resizes the array. You must subsequently initialize any tabs that were added as a result of growing the array.

        Method set_tab

          `Pango.TabArray set_tab(int tab_index, int alignment, int location)`

        Description

          Sets the alignment and location of a tab stop. Alignment must always be PANGO_TAB_LEFT.